PATENT DOCUMENT

Publication Number: US-11283916-B2
Application Number: US-202016807604-A
Country: US
Kind Code: B2

Title: Methods and interfaces for configuring a device in accordance with an audio tone signal

Abstract:
The present disclosure generally relates to interfaces and techniques for media playback on one or more devices. In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display, one or more processors, and memory. The electronic device receives user input and, in response to receiving the user input, displays, on the display, a multi-device interface that includes: one or more indicators associated with a plurality of available playback devices that are connected to the device and available to initiate playback of media from the device, and a media playback status of the plurality of available playback devices.

Claims:
What is claimed is: 
     
       1. An electronic device, comprising:
 a display; 
 one or more processors; and 
 memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for:
 detecting an audio tone signal indicative of a pairing handshake with a second device,
 wherein the electronic device is connected to the second device via a communication link, and 
 wherein the audio tone signal is out-of-band to the communication link; 
 
 in response to detecting the audio tone signal, initiating, on the electronic device, an initial configuration process for configuring the second device, the initial configuration process including a sequential display of a plurality of different user interfaces corresponding to a plurality of different operations in the initial configuration process, the order of the display of the display of the interfaces being predefined by the electronic device, wherein at least one of the different user interfaces requests user input to share network settings from a user account with the second device and/or requests user confirmation that a connection should be made to the second device; 
 during the initial configuration process that was initiated in response to detecting the audio tone signal and before providing an indication that the initial configuration process is complete, displaying, on the display, a configuration user interface that includes a prompt to select a location, the prompt indicating that the selected location will be assigned to the second device, wherein the configuration user interface is one of the plurality of different user interfaces in the initial configuration process; 
 receiving user input indicating selection of a respective location; and 
 in response to receiving the user input indicating selection of the respective location, configuring the second device to be assigned to the respective location. 
 
 
     
     
       2. The electronic device of  claim 1 , wherein the one or more programs further include instructions for:
 in response to receiving the user input selection of the respective location:
 in accordance with a determination that a third device is currently associated with the respective location, displaying, on the display, a configuration user interface that includes a prompt to select whether to create a device group that includes the second device and the third device; and 
 in accordance with a determination that a third device is not currently associated with the respective location, forgoing displaying, on the display, the configuration user interface that includes the prompt to select whether to create the device group. 
 
 
     
     
       3. The electronic device of  claim 2 , wherein the one or more programs further include instructions for:
 receiving user input representing an affirmative request to create the device group; 
 in response to the user input representing the affirmative request to create the device group, displaying, on the display, a configuration user interface that includes a prompt to select an audio output channel to associate with the second device; 
 receiving user input representing selection of a respective audio output channel; and 
 in response to receiving the user input representing selection of the respective audio output channel, associating the second device with the respective audio output channel. 
 
     
     
       4. The electronic device of  claim 1 , wherein the one or more programs further include instructions for, during the initial configuration process:
 displaying, on the display, a configuration user interface that includes a prompt requesting permission to transmit first user account information to the second device; 
 receiving user input providing permission to transmit the first user account information to the second device; and 
 in response to receiving the user input providing permission, transmitting the first user account information to the second device. 
 
     
     
       5. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device with a display, the one or more programs including instructions for:
 detecting an audio tone signal indicative of a pairing handshake with a second device,
 wherein the electronic device is connected to the second device via a communication link, and 
 wherein the audio tone signal is out-of-band to the communication link; 
 
 in response to detecting the audio tone signal, initiating, on the electronic device, an initial configuration process for configuring the second device, the initial configuration process including a sequential display of a plurality of different user interfaces corresponding to a plurality of different operations in the initial configuration process, the order of the display of the user interfaces being predefined by the electronic device, wherein at least one of the different interfaces requests user input to share network settings from a user account with the second device and/or requests user confirmation that a connection should be made to the second device; 
 during the initial configuration process that was initiated in response to detecting the audio tone signal and before providing an indication that the initial configuration process is complete, displaying, on the display, a configuration user interface that includes a prompt to select a location, the prompt indicating that the selected location will be assigned to the second device, wherein the configuration user interface is one of the plurality of different user interfaces in the initial configuration process; 
 receiving user input indicating selection of a respective location; and 
 in response to receiving the user input indicating selection of the respective location, configuring the second device to be assigned to the respective location. 
 
     
     
       6. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of  claim 5 , the one or more programs further including instructions for:
 in response to receiving the user input selection of the respective location:
 in accordance with a determination that a third device is currently associated with the respective location, displaying, on the display, a configuration user interface that includes a prompt to select whether to create a device group that includes the second device and the third device; and 
 in accordance with a determination that a third device is not currently associated with the respective location, forgoing displaying, on the display, the configuration user interface that includes the prompt to select whether to create the device group. 
 
 
     
     
       7. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of  claim 6 , the one or more programs further including instructions for:
 receiving user input representing an affirmative request to create the device group; 
 in response to the user input representing the affirmative request to create the device group, displaying, on the display, a configuration user interface that includes a prompt to select an audio output channel to associate with the second device; 
 receiving user input representing selection of a respective audio output channel; and 
 in response to receiving the user input representing selection of the respective audio output channel, associating the second device with the respective audio output channel. 
 
     
     
       8. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of  claim 5 , the one or more programs further including instructions for, during the initial configuration process:
 displaying, on the display, a configuration user interface that includes a prompt requesting permission to transmit first user account information to the second device; 
 receiving user input providing permission to transmit the first user account information to the second device; and 
 in response to receiving the user input providing permission, transmitting the first user account information to the second device. 
 
     
     
       9. A computer-implemented method for configuring an electronic device with a display to be associated with a location, comprising:
 detecting an audio tone signal indicative of a pairing handshake with a second device,
 wherein the electronic device is connected to the second device via a communication link, and 
 wherein the audio tone signal is out-of-band to the communication link; 
 
 in response to detecting the audio tone signal, initiating, on the electronic device, an initial configuration process for configuring the second device, the initial configuration process including a sequential display of a plurality of different user interfaces corresponding to a plurality of different operations in the initial configuration process, the order of the display of the user interfaces being predefined by the electronic device, wherein at least one of the different interfaces requests user input to share network settings from a user account with the second device and/or requests user confirmation that a connection should be made to the second device; 
 during the initial configuration process that was initiated in response to detecting the audio tone signal and before providing an indication that the initial configuration process is complete, displaying, on the display, a configuration user interface that includes a prompt to select a location, the prompt indicating that the selected location will be assigned to the second device, wherein the configuration user interface is one of the plurality of different user interfaces in the initial configuration process; 
 receiving user input indicating selection of a respective location; and 
 in response to receiving the user input indicating selection of the respective location, configuring the second device to be assigned to the respective location. 
 
     
     
       10. The method of  claim 9 , the method further comprising:
 in response to receiving the user input selection of the respective location:
 in accordance with a determination that a third device is currently associated with the respective location, displaying, on the display, a configuration user interface that includes a prompt to select whether to create a device group that includes the second device and the third device; and 
 in accordance with a determination that a third device is not currently associated with the respective location, forgoing displaying, on the display, the initial configuration user interface that includes the prompt to select whether to create the device group. 
 
 
     
     
       11. The method of  claim 10 , the method further comprising:
 receiving user input representing an affirmative request to create the device group; 
 in response to the user input representing the affirmative request to create the device group, displaying, on the display, a configuration user interface that includes a prompt to select an audio output channel to associate with the second device; 
 receiving user input representing selection of a respective audio output channel; and 
 in response to receiving the user input representing selection of the respective audio output channel, associating the second device with the respective audio output channel. 
 
     
     
       12. The method of  claim 9 , the method further comprising, during the initial configuration process:
 displaying, on the display, a configuration user interface that includes a prompt requesting permission to transmit first user account information to the second device; 
 receiving user input providing permission to transmit the first user account information to the second device; and 
 in response to receiving the user input providing permission, transmitting the first user account information to the second device. 
 
     
     
       13. An electronic device, comprising:
 a display; 
 one or more processors; and 
 memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for:
 establishing a communication link with a second device; 
 subsequent to establishing the communication link with the second device, initiating an initial configuration process for configuring the second device, the initial configuration process including a sequential display of a plurality of different user interfaces corresponding to a plurality of different operations in the initial configuration process, the order of the display of the display of the interfaces being predefined by the electronic device, wherein at least one of the different user interfaces requests user input to share network settings from a user account with the second device and/or requests user confirmation that a connection should be made to the second device; and 
 during the initial configuration process and before providing an indication that the initial configuration process is complete:
 displaying, on the display, a configuration user interface that is included in the plurality of different user interfaces and that includes a prompt to select a location, the prompt indicating that the selected location will be assigned to the second device; 
 receiving user input indicating selection of a respective location; 
 in response to receiving the user input indicating selection of the respective location, configuring the second device to be assigned to the respective location; 
 detecting an audio tone signal indicative of a pairing handshake with the second device, wherein the audio tone is out-of-band to the communication link; and 
 in response to detecting the audio tone signal, proceeding to a next step in the initial configuration process for configuring the second device. 
 
 
 
     
     
       14. The electronic device of  claim 13 , the one or more programs further including instructions for:
 detecting an indication that a physical proximity between the first device and the second device satisfies a proximity condition; and 
 in response to detecting the indication that the physical proximity between the first device and the second device satisfies the proximity condition, establishing the communication link with the second device. 
 
     
     
       15. The electronic device of  claim 14 , wherein the audio tone signal is a first audio tone signal, the one or more programs further including instructions for:
 in response to detecting the indication that the physical proximity between the first device and the second device satisfies the proximity condition, outputting a second audio tone signal. 
 
     
     
       16. The electronic device of  claim 13 , wherein proceeding to the next step of the configuration process includes completing the configuration process. 
     
     
       17. The electronic device of  claim 13 , wherein the audio tone signal is generated by the second device. 
     
     
       18. The electronic device of  claim 13 , wherein the audio tone signal includes an audio passcode. 
     
     
       19. The electronic device of  claim 13 , wherein the audio tone signal is received while the first device is physically positioned within a threshold physical proximity to the second device. 
     
     
       20. The electronic device of  claim 13 , wherein the audio tone signal is a first audio tone signal, the one or more programs further including instructions for, during the configuration process:
 detecting a third audio tone signal comprising encoded data; and 
 in response to detecting the third audio tone signal:
 transmitting an acknowledgement to the second device; and 
 proceeding to a next step in the configuration process. 
 
 
     
     
       21. The electronic device of  claim 13 , the one or more programs further including instructions for:
 in response to receiving the user input selection of the location: 
 in accordance with a determination that a third device is currently associated with the location, displaying, on the display, a configuration user interface that includes a prompt to select whether to create a device group that includes the second device and the third device; and
 in accordance with a determination that a third device is not currently associated with the location, forgoing displaying, on the display, the configuration user interface that includes the prompt to select whether to create the device group. 
 
 
     
     
       22. The electronic device of  claim 21 , the one or more programs further including instructions for:
 receiving user input representing an affirmative request to create the device group; 
 in response to the user input representing an affirmative request to create the device group, displaying, on the display, a configuration user interface that includes a prompt to select an audio output channel to associate with the second device; 
 receiving user input representing selection of an audio output channel; and 
 in response to receiving the user input representing selection of a selected audio output channel, associating the second device with the selected audio channel. 
 
     
     
       23. The electronic device of  claim 13 , wherein the prompt to select a location includes a plurality of predetermined location identifiers. 
     
     
       24. The electronic device of  claim 23 , wherein the plurality of predetermined location identifiers includes a user-defined location identifier. 
     
     
       25. The electronic device of  claim 13 , wherein the prompt to select a location includes a field for creating a new location identifier, the one or more programs further including instructions for:
 receiving user input associated with the field for creating a new location identifier, wherein the user input includes a location identifier; 
 creating a new location identifier based on the received user input associated with the field for creating the new location identifier; and 
 associating the second device with the new location identifier. 
 
     
     
       26. The electronic device of  claim 13 , the one or more programs further including instructions for, during the configuration process:
 displaying, on the display, a configuration user interface that includes a prompt requesting permission to transmit user account information to the second device; 
 receiving user input providing permission to transmit the user account information to the second device; and 
 in response to receiving the user input providing permission, transmitting the user account information to the second device. 
 
     
     
       27. The electronic device of  claim 26 , the one or more programs further including instructions for:
 subsequent to transmitting the user account information to the second device, displaying a configuration user interface associated with a voice assistant, wherein the configuration user interface associated with a voice assistant includes a prompt to provide user voice input invoking one or more functions of the voice assistant. 
 
     
     
       28. The electronic device of  claim 27 , the one or more programs further including instructions for:
 in accordance with a determination that user voice input invoking one or more of the features of the voice assistant has been received by either the first device or the second device, maintaining display of the configuration user interface associated with the voice assistant; and 
 in response to receiving user input selection of an affordance included in the configuration user interface associated with the voice assistant, ceasing display of the configuration user interface associated with the voice assistant. 
 
     
     
       29. The electronic device of  claim 13 , the one or more programs further including instructions for, prior to transmitting the user account information to the second device:
 in accordance with a determination that the first device is not currently logged into a user account associated with the user account information:
 displaying, on the display, a prompt to log in to the user account; and 
 forgoing transmitting the user account information to the second device; and 
 
 in accordance with a determination that the first device is currently logged into the user account associated with the user account information, transmitting the user account information to the second device. 
 
     
     
       30. The electronic device of  claim 13 , the one or more programs further including instructions for:
 in response to progressing from a first step in the configuration process to a second step in the configuration process, outputting a fourth audio tone signal, 
 wherein the fourth audio tone signal is outputted concurrently with the output of a fifth audio tone signal outputted by the second device, and 
 wherein the fourth audio tone signal and the fifth audio tone signal are harmonics. 
 
     
     
       31. The electronic device of  claim 30 , the one or more programs further including instructions for:
 in response to progressing from the second step in the configuration process to a third step in the configuration process, outputting a sixth audio tone signal, 
 wherein the sixth audio tone signal is outputted concurrently with the output of a seventh audio tone signal outputted by the second device, 
 wherein the sixth audio tone signal and the seventh audio tone signal are harmonics, and 
 wherein the sixth audio tone signal is a higher frequency tone than the fourth audio tone signal. 
 
     
     
       32. The electronic device of  claim 13 , the one or more programs further including instructions for:
 subsequent to initiating the configuration process, receiving data regarding an output of an operation being performed by the second device; and 
 in response to receiving the data regarding the output of the operation being performed by the second device, display a user interface that includes a representation of the output of the operation being performed by the second device. 
 
     
     
       33. The electronic device of  claim 32 , wherein the operation being performed by the second device includes audibly outputting information,
 wherein receiving the data regarding the output of the operation being performed includes receiving data representing the information, and 
 wherein displaying the user interface, that includes the representation of the output of the operation being performed by the second device, includes displaying at least a portion of the data representing the information. 
 
     
     
       34. The electronic device of  claim 33 , wherein the information includes a media item,
 wherein the operation being performed by the second device includes audibly outputting the media item, and 
 wherein displaying the data representing the information includes displaying one or more of: an artist, a media item name, an album name, album art, and a media playback progress indicator. 
 
     
     
       35. The electronic device of  claim 33 , wherein displaying the user interface that includes the representation of the output of the operation being performed by the second device includes displaying one or more of news information or weather information. 
     
     
       36. The electronic device of  claim 13 , the one or more programs further including instructions for:
 during the configuration process:
 in accordance with a first configuration setting of the first device being compatible with the second device, configuring the second device to include the first configuration setting; and 
 in accordance with the first configuration setting of the first device not being compatible with the second device, displaying an indication that the first configuration setting is not compatible with the second device. 
 
 
     
     
       37. The electronic device of  claim 36 , the one or more programs further including instructions for:
 further in accordance with the first configuration setting of the first device being compatible with the second device, displaying a configuration user interface that includes a prompt requesting acceptance of the first configuration setting for the second device; and 
 in response to receiving user input accepting the first configuration setting for the second device, configuring the second device to include the first configuration setting. 
 
     
     
       38. The electronic device of  claim 36 , wherein the first configuration setting is a setting disabling a device feature, and wherein a second configuration setting is a setting enabling the device feature, the one or more programs further including instructions for:
 in accordance with a determination that the configuration process requires enabling the device feature on the second device:
 displaying an indication that the device feature will be enabled on the second device; and 
 configuring the second device to include the second configuration setting. 
 
 
     
     
       39. The electronic device of  claim 38 , wherein displaying the indication that the device feature will be enabled on the second device includes displaying an indication that the device feature will remain disabled on the first device. 
     
     
       40. The electronic device of  claim 36 , the one or more programs further including instructions for:
 further in accordance with the first configuration setting of the first device not being compatible with the second device, displaying a configuration user interface that includes a prompt requesting selection of a third configuration setting compatible with the second device; and 
 in response to receiving user input selection of the third configuration setting, configuring the second device to include the third configuration setting. 
 
     
     
       41. The electronic device of  claim 13 , the one or more programs further including instructions for:
 prior to establishing the communication link connecting the first device and the second device, detecting an indication that a physical proximity between the first device and the second device satisfies a proximity condition; and 
 in response to detecting the indication that the physical proximity between the first device and the second device satisfies the proximity condition, outputting an audio tone signal. 
 
     
     
       42. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device with a display, the one or more programs including instructions for:
 establishing a communication link with a second device; 
 subsequent to establishing the communication link with the second device, initiating an initial configuration process for configuring the second device, the initial configuration process including a sequential display of a plurality of different user interfaces corresponding to a plurality of different operations in the initial configuration process, the order of the display of the display of the interfaces being predefined by the electronic device, wherein at least one of the different user interfaces requests user input to share network settings from a user account with the second device and/or requests user confirmation that a connection should be made to the second device; and 
 during the initial configuration process and before providing an indication that the initial configuration process is complete:
 displaying, on the display, a configuration user interface that is included in the plurality of different user interfaces and that includes a prompt to select a location, the prompt indicating the selected location will be assigned to the second device; 
 receiving user input indicating selection of a respective location; 
 in response to receiving the user input indicating selection of the respective location, configuring the second device to be assigned to the respective location; 
 detecting an audio tone signal indicative of a pairing handshake with the second device, wherein the audio tone is out-of-band to the communication link; and 
 in response to detecting the audio tone signal, proceeding to a next step in the initial configuration process for configuring the second device. 
 
 
     
     
       43. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of  claim 42 , the one or more programs further including instructions for:
 detecting an indication that a physical proximity between the first device and the second device satisfies a proximity condition; and 
 in response to detecting the indication that the physical proximity between the first device and the second device satisfies the proximity condition, establishing the communication link with the second device. 
 
     
     
       44. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of  claim 43 , wherein the audio tone signal is a first audio tone signal, the one or more programs further including instructions for:
 in response to detecting the indication that the physical proximity between the first device and the second device satisfies the proximity condition, outputting a second audio tone signal. 
 
     
     
       45. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of  claim 42 , wherein proceeding to the next step of the configuration process includes completing the configuration process. 
     
     
       46. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of  claim 42 , wherein the audio tone signal is generated by the second device. 
     
     
       47. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of  claim 42 , wherein the audio tone signal includes an audio passcode. 
     
     
       48. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of  claim 42 , wherein the audio tone signal is received while the first device is physically positioned within a threshold physical proximity to the second device. 
     
     
       49. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of  claim 42 , wherein the audio tone signal is a first audio tone signal, the one or more programs further including instructions for, during the configuration process:
 detecting a third audio tone signal comprising encoded data; and 
 in response to detecting the third audio tone signal:
 transmitting an acknowledgement to the second device; and 
 proceeding to a next step in the configuration process. 
 
 
     
     
       50. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of  claim 42 , the one or more programs further including instructions for:
 in response to receiving the user input selection of the location:
 in accordance with a determination that a third device is currently associated with the location, displaying, on the display, a configuration user interface that includes a prompt to select whether to create a device group that includes the second device and the third device; and 
 in accordance with a determination that a third device is not currently associated with the location, forgoing displaying, on the display, the configuration user interface that includes the prompt to select whether to create the device group. 
 
 
     
     
       51. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of  claim 50 , the one or more programs further including instructions for:
 receiving user input representing an affirmative request to create the device group; 
 in response to the user input representing an affirmative request to create the device group, displaying, on the display, a configuration user interface that includes a prompt to select an audio output channel to associate with the second device; 
 receiving user input representing selection of an audio output channel; and 
 in response to receiving the user input representing selection of a selected audio output channel, associating the second device with the selected audio channel. 
 
     
     
       52. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of  claim 42 , wherein the prompt to select a location includes a plurality of predetermined location identifiers. 
     
     
       53. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of  claim 52 , wherein the plurality of predetermined location identifiers includes a user-defined location identifier. 
     
     
       54. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of  claim 42 , wherein the prompt to select a location includes a field for creating a new location identifier, the one or more programs further including instructions for:
 receiving user input associated with the field for creating a new location identifier, wherein the user input includes a location identifier; 
 creating a new location identifier based on the received user input associated with the field for creating the new location identifier; and 
 associating the second device with the new location identifier. 
 
     
     
       55. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of  claim 42 , the one or more programs further including instructions for, during the configuration process:
 displaying, on the display, a configuration user interface that includes a prompt requesting permission to transmit user account information to the second device; 
 receiving user input providing permission to transmit the user account information to the second device; and 
 in response to receiving the user input providing permission, transmitting the user account information to the second device. 
 
     
     
       56. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of  claim 55 , the one or more programs further including instructions for:
 subsequent to transmitting the user account information to the second device, displaying a configuration user interface associated with a voice assistant, wherein the configuration user interface associated with a voice assistant includes a prompt to provide user voice input invoking one or more functions of the voice assistant. 
 
     
     
       57. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of  claim 56 , the one or more programs further including instructions for:
 in accordance with a determination that user voice input invoking one or more of the features of the voice assistant has been received by either the first device or the second device, maintaining display of the configuration user interface associated with the voice assistant; and 
 in response to receiving user input selection of an affordance included in the configuration user interface associated with the voice assistant, ceasing display of the configuration user interface associated with the voice assistant. 
 
     
     
       58. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of  claim 42 , the one or more programs further including instructions for, prior to transmitting the user account information to the second device:
 in accordance with a determination that the first device is not currently logged into a user account associated with the user account information:
 displaying, on the display, a prompt to log in to the user account; and 
 forgoing transmitting the user account information to the second device; and 
 
 in accordance with a determination that the first device is currently logged into the user account associated with the user account information, transmitting the user account information to the second device. 
 
     
     
       59. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of  claim 42 , the one or more programs further including instructions for:
 in response to progressing from a first step in the configuration process to a second step in the configuration process, outputting a fourth audio tone signal, 
 wherein the fourth audio tone signal is outputted concurrently with the output of a fifth audio tone signal outputted by the second device, and 
 wherein the fourth audio tone signal and the fifth audio tone signal are harmonics. 
 
     
     
       60. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of  claim 59 , the one or more programs further including instructions for:
 in response to progressing from the second step in the configuration process to a third step in the configuration process, outputting a sixth audio tone signal, 
 wherein the sixth audio tone signal is outputted concurrently with the output of a seventh audio tone signal outputted by the second device, 
 wherein the sixth audio tone signal and the seventh audio tone signal are harmonics, and 
 wherein the sixth audio tone signal is a higher frequency tone than the fourth audio tone signal. 
 
     
     
       61. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of  claim 42 , the one or more programs further including instructions for:
 subsequent to initiating the configuration process, receiving data regarding an output of an operation being performed by the second device; and 
 in response to receiving the data regarding the output of the operation being performed by the second device, display a user interface that includes a representation of the output of the operation being performed by the second device. 
 
     
     
       62. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of  claim 61 , wherein the operation being performed by the second device includes audibly outputting information,
 wherein receiving the data regarding the output of the operation being performed includes receiving data representing the information, and 
 wherein displaying the user interface, that includes the representation of the output of the operation being performed by the second device, includes displaying at least a portion of the data representing the information. 
 
     
     
       63. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of  claim 62 , wherein the information includes a media item,
 wherein the operation being performed by the second device includes audibly outputting the media item, and 
 wherein displaying the data representing the information includes displaying one or more of: an artist, a media item name, an album name, album art, and a media playback progress indicator. 
 
     
     
       64. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of  claim 62 , wherein displaying the user interface that includes the representation of the output of the operation being performed by the second device includes displaying one or more of news information or weather information. 
     
     
       65. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of  claim 42 , the one or more programs further including instructions for:
 during the configuration process:
 in accordance with a first configuration setting of the first device being compatible with the second device, configuring the second device to include the first configuration setting; and 
 in accordance with the first configuration setting of the first device not being compatible with the second device, displaying an indication that the first configuration setting is not compatible with the second device. 
 
 
     
     
       66. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of  claim 55 , the one or more programs further including instructions for:
 further in accordance with the first configuration setting of the first device being compatible with the second device, displaying a configuration user interface that includes a prompt requesting acceptance of the first configuration setting for the second device; and 
 in response to receiving user input accepting the first configuration setting for the second device, configuring the second device to include the first configuration setting. 
 
     
     
       67. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of  claim 55 , wherein the first configuration setting is a setting disabling a device feature, and wherein a second configuration setting is a setting enabling the device feature, the one or more programs further including instructions for:
 in accordance with a determination that the configuration process requires enabling the device feature on the second device:
 displaying an indication that the device feature will be enabled on the second device; and 
 configuring the second device to include the second configuration setting. 
 
 
     
     
       68. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of  claim 67 , wherein displaying the indication that the device feature will be enabled on the second device includes displaying an indication that the device feature will remain disabled on the first device. 
     
     
       69. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of  claim 65 , the one or more programs further including instructions for:
 further in accordance with the first configuration setting of the first device not being compatible with the second device, displaying a configuration user interface that includes a prompt requesting selection of a third configuration setting compatible with the second device; and 
 in response to receiving user input selection of the third configuration setting, configuring the second device to include the third configuration setting. 
 
     
     
       70. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of  claim 42 , the one or more programs further including instructions for:
 prior to establishing the communication link connecting the first device and the second device, detecting an indication that a physical proximity between the first device and the second device satisfies a proximity condition; and 
 in response to detecting the indication that the physical proximity between the first device and the second device satisfies the proximity condition, outputting an audio tone signal. 
 
     
     
       71. A computer-implemented method for configuring an electronic device with a display to be associated with a location, comprising:
 establishing a communication link with a second device; 
 subsequent to establishing the communication link with the second device, initiating an initial configuration process for configuring the second device, the initial configuration process including a sequential display of a plurality of different user interfaces corresponding to a plurality of different operations in the initial configuration process, the order of the display of the display of the interfaces being predefined by the electronic device, wherein at least one of the different user interfaces requests user input to share network settings from a user account with the second device and/or requests user confirmation that a connection should be made to the second device; and 
 during the initial configuration process and before providing an indication that the initial configuration process is complete:
 displaying, on the display, a configuration user interface that is included in the plurality of different user interfaces and that includes a prompt to select a location, the prompt indicating the selected location will be assigned to the second device; 
 receiving user input indicating selection of a respective location; 
 in response to receiving the user input indicating selection of the respective location, configuring the second device to be assigned to the respective location; 
 detecting an audio tone signal indicative of a pairing handshake with the second device, wherein the audio tone is out-of-band to the communication link; and 
 in response to detecting the audio tone signal, proceeding to a next step in the initial configuration process for configuring the second device. 
 
 
     
     
       72. The method of  claim 71 , further comprising:
 detecting an indication that a physical proximity between the first device and the second device satisfies a proximity condition; and 
 in response to detecting the indication that the physical proximity between the first device and the second device satisfies the proximity condition, establishing the communication link with the second device. 
 
     
     
       73. The method of  claim 72 , wherein the audio tone signal is a first audio tone signal, the method further comprising:
 in response to detecting the indication that the physical proximity between the first device and the second device satisfies the proximity condition, outputting a second audio tone signal. 
 
     
     
       74. The method of  claim 71 , wherein proceeding to the next step of the configuration process includes completing the configuration process. 
     
     
       75. The method of  claim 71 , wherein the audio tone signal is generated by the second device. 
     
     
       76. The method of  claim 71 , wherein the audio tone signal includes an audio passcode. 
     
     
       77. The method of  claim 71 , wherein the audio tone signal is received while the first device is physically positioned within a threshold physical proximity to the second device. 
     
     
       78. The method of  claim 71 , wherein the audio tone signal is a first audio tone signal, the method further comprising, during the configuration process:
 detecting a third audio tone signal comprising encoded data; and 
 in response to detecting the third audio tone signal:
 transmitting an acknowledgement to the second device; and 
 proceeding to a next step in the configuration process. 
 
 
     
     
       79. The method of  claim 71 , further comprising:
 in response to receiving the user input selection of the location:
 in accordance with a determination that a third device is currently associated with the location, displaying, on the display, a configuration user interface that includes a prompt to select whether to create a device group that includes the second device and the third device; and 
 in accordance with a determination that a third device is not currently associated with the location, forgoing displaying, on the display, the configuration user interface that includes the prompt to select whether to create the device group. 
 
 
     
     
       80. The method of  claim 79 , further comprising:
 receiving user input representing an affirmative request to create the device group; 
 in response to the user input representing an affirmative request to create the device group, displaying, on the display, a configuration user interface that includes a prompt to select an audio output channel to associate with the second device; 
 receiving user input representing selection of an audio output channel; and 
 in response to receiving the user input representing selection of a selected audio output channel, associating the second device with the selected audio channel. 
 
     
     
       81. The method of  claim 71 , wherein the prompt to select a location includes a plurality of predetermined location identifiers. 
     
     
       82. The method of  claim 81 , wherein the plurality of predetermined location identifiers includes a user-defined location identifier. 
     
     
       83. The method of  claim 71 , wherein the prompt to select a location includes a field for creating a new location identifier, the method further comprising:
 receiving user input associated with the field for creating a new location identifier, wherein the user input includes a location identifier; 
 creating a new location identifier based on the received user input associated with the field for creating the new location identifier; and 
 associating the second device with the new location identifier. 
 
     
     
       84. The method of  claim 71 , further comprising, during the configuration process:
 displaying, on the display, a configuration user interface that includes a prompt requesting permission to transmit user account information to the second device; 
 receiving user input providing permission to transmit the user account information to the second device; and 
 in response to receiving the user input providing permission, transmitting the user account information to the second device. 
 
     
     
       85. The method of  claim 84 , further comprising:
 subsequent to transmitting the user account information to the second device, displaying a configuration user interface associated with a voice assistant, wherein the configuration user interface associated with a voice assistant includes a prompt to provide user voice input invoking one or more functions of the voice assistant. 
 
     
     
       86. The method of  claim 85 , further comprising:
 in accordance with a determination that user voice input invoking one or more of the features of the voice assistant has been received by either the first device or the second device, maintaining display of the configuration user interface associated with the voice assistant; and 
 in response to receiving user input selection of an affordance included in the configuration user interface associated with the voice assistant, ceasing display of the configuration user interface associated with the voice assistant. 
 
     
     
       87. The method of  claim 71 , further comprising, prior to transmitting the user account information to the second device:
 in accordance with a determination that the first device is not currently logged into a user account associated with the user account information:
 displaying, on the display, a prompt to log in to the user account; and 
 forgoing transmitting the user account information to the second device; and 
 
 in accordance with a determination that the first device is currently logged into the user account associated with the user account information, transmitting the user account information to the second device. 
 
     
     
       88. The method of  claim 71 , further comprising:
 in response to progressing from a first step in the configuration process to a second step in the configuration process, outputting a fourth audio tone signal, 
 wherein the fourth audio tone signal is outputted concurrently with the output of a fifth audio tone signal outputted by the second device, and 
 wherein the fourth audio tone signal and the fifth audio tone signal are harmonics. 
 
     
     
       89. The method of  claim 88 , further comprising:
 in response to progressing from the second step in the configuration process to a third step in the configuration process, outputting a sixth audio tone signal, 
 wherein the sixth audio tone signal is outputted concurrently with the output of a seventh audio tone signal outputted by the second device, 
 wherein the sixth audio tone signal and the seventh audio tone signal are harmonics, and 
 wherein the sixth audio tone signal is a higher frequency tone than the fourth audio tone signal. 
 
     
     
       90. The method of  claim 71 , further comprising:
 subsequent to initiating the configuration process, receiving data regarding an output of an operation being performed by the second device; and 
 in response to receiving the data regarding the output of the operation being performed by the second device, display a user interface that includes a representation of the output of the operation being performed by the second device. 
 
     
     
       91. The method of  90 , wherein the operation being performed by the second device includes audibly outputting information,
 wherein receiving the data regarding the output of the operation being performed includes receiving data representing the information, and 
 wherein displaying the user interface, that includes the representation of the output of the operation being performed by the second device, includes displaying at least a portion of the data representing the information. 
 
     
     
       92. The method of  91 , wherein the information includes a media item,
 wherein the operation being performed by the second device includes audibly outputting the media item, and 
 wherein displaying the data representing the information includes displaying one or more of: an artist, a media item name, an album name, album art, and a media playback progress indicator. 
 
     
     
       93. The method of  91 , wherein displaying the user interface that includes the representation of the output of the operation being performed by the second device includes displaying one or more of news information or weather information. 
     
     
       94. The method of  claim 71 , further comprising:
 during the configuration process:
 in accordance with a first configuration setting of the first device being compatible with the second device, configuring the second device to include the first configuration setting; and 
 in accordance with the first configuration setting of the first device not being compatible with the second device, displaying an indication that the first configuration setting is not compatible with the second device. 
 
 
     
     
       95. The method of  claim 94 , further comprising:
 further in accordance with the first configuration setting of the first device being compatible with the second device, displaying a configuration user interface that includes a prompt requesting acceptance of the first configuration setting for the second device; and 
 in response to receiving user input accepting the first configuration setting for the second device, configuring the second device to include the first configuration setting. 
 
     
     
       96. The method of  claim 94 , wherein the first configuration setting is a setting disabling a device feature, and wherein a second configuration setting is a setting enabling the device feature, the method further comprising:
 in accordance with a determination that the configuration process requires enabling the device feature on the second device:
 displaying an indication that the device feature will be enabled on the second device; and 
 configuring the second device to include the second configuration setting. 
 
 
     
     
       97. The method of  claim 96 , wherein displaying the indication that the device feature will be enabled on the second device includes displaying an indication that the device feature will remain disabled on the first device. 
     
     
       98. The method of  claim 94 , further comprising:
 further in accordance with the first configuration setting of the first device not being compatible with the second device, displaying a configuration user interface that includes a prompt requesting selection of a third configuration setting compatible with the second device; and 
 in response to receiving user input selection of the third configuration setting, configuring the second device to include the third configuration setting. 
 
     
     
       99. The method of  claim 71 , further comprising:
 prior to establishing the communication link connecting the first device and the second device, detecting an indication that a physical proximity between the first device and the second device satisfies a proximity condition; and 
 in response to detecting the indication that the physical proximity between the first device and the second device satisfies the proximity condition, outputting an audio tone signal.

Description:
CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS 
     This application is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 16/702,968, entitled “METHODS AND INTERFACES FOR HOME MEDIA CONTROL”, filed on Dec. 4, 2019, which is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/910,263, entitled “METHODS AND INTERFACES FOR HOME MEDIA CONTROL”, filed on Mar. 2, 2018, which claims priority to U.S. provisional patent application 62/507,202, entitled “METHODS AND INTERFACES FOR HOME MEDIA CONTROL”, filed on May 16, 2017, U.S. provisional patent application 62/507,208, entitled “METHODS AND INTERFACES FOR HOME MEDIA CONTROL”, filed on May 16, 2017, U.S. provisional patent application 62/514,932, entitled “METHODS AND INTERFACES FOR HOME MEDIA CONTROL”, filed on Jun. 4, 2017, and U.S. provisional patent application 62/622,122, entitled “METHODS AND INTERFACES FOR HOME MEDIA CONTROL”, filed on Jan. 25, 2018. The contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety. 
     This application also relates to Denmark Patent Application No. PA 2017 70392, entitled “METHODS AND INTERFACES FOR HOME MEDIA CONTROL”, filed on May 29, 2017, Denmark Patent Application No. PA 2017 70401, entitled “METHODS AND INTERFACES FOR HOME MEDIA CONTROL”, filed on May 29, 2017, Denmark Patent Application No. PA 2017 70402, entitled “METHODS AND INTERFACES FOR HOME MEDIA CONTROL”, filed on May 29, 2017, Denmark Patent Application No. PA 2017 70403, entitled “METHODS AND INTERFACES FOR HOME MEDIA CONTROL”, filed on May 29, 2017, Denmark Patent Application No. PA 2017 70404, entitled “METHODS AND INTERFACES FOR HOME MEDIA CONTROL”, filed on May 29, 2017, Denmark Patent Application No. PA 2017 70406, entitled “METHODS AND INTERFACES FOR HOME MEDIA CONTROL”, filed on May 29, 2017, Denmark Patent Application No. PA 2017 70408, entitled “METHODS AND INTERFACES FOR HOME MEDIA CONTROL”, filed on May 29, 2017, Denmark Patent Application No. PA 2017 70409, entitled “METHODS AND INTERFACES FOR HOME MEDIA CONTROL”, filed on May 29, 2017, and Denmark Patent Application No. PA 2017 70410, entitled “METHODS AND INTERFACES FOR HOME MEDIA CONTROL”, filed on May 29, 2017, the contents of each of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety. 
     This application also relates to the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/300,120 entitled “MULTI-CHANNEL LOUDSPEAKER MATCHING VARIABLE DIRECTIVITY,” filed on Jun. 9, 2014, the content of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety, and included in the Appendix. This application also relates to the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/732,711 entitled “MULTI-MICROPHONE SPEECH RECOGNITION SYSTEMS AND RELATED TECHNIQUES,” filed on Jun. 6, 2015, the content of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety, and included in the Appendix. This application also relates to the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/732,715 entitled “MULTI-MICROPHONE SPEECH RECOGNITION TECHNIQUES AND RELATED SYSTEMS,” filed on Jun. 6, 2015. This application also relates to the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/869,760 entitled “MODAL BASED ARCHITECTURE FOR CONTROLLING THE DIRECTIVITY OF LOUDSPEAKER ARRAYS,” filed on Sep. 29, 2015, the content of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety, and included in the Appendix. This application also relates to the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/266,956 entitled “INTELLIGENT AUTOMATED ASSISTANT FOR MEDIA EXPLORATION,” filed on Sep. 15, 2016. This application also relates to the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/268,338 entitled “INTELLIGENT DEVICE ARBITRATION AND CONTROL,” filed on Sep. 16, 2016, the content of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety, and included in the Appendix. This application also relates to the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/272,214 entitled “INTELLIGENT LIST READING,” filed on Sep. 21, 2016. This application also relates to the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/275,077 entitled “PRESSURE GRADIENT MICROPHONE FOR MEASURING AN ACOUSTIC CHARACTERISTIC OF A LOUDSPEAKER,” filed on Sep. 23, 2016. This application also relates to the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,606 entitled “INTELLIGENT AUTOMATED ASSISTANT,” filed on Dec. 20, 2016, the content of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety, and included in the Appendix. This application also relates to the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/504,312 entitled “A ROTATIONALLY SYMMETRIC SPEAKER ARRAY,” filed on Aug. 18, 2014. This application also relates to the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/514,455 entitled “METHOD TO DETERMINE LOUDSPEAKER CHANGE OF PLACEMENT,” filed on Sep. 25, 2015. This application also relates to the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/583,949 entitled “A ROTATIONALLY SYMMETRIC SPEAKER ARRAY,” filed on May 1, 2017. This application also relates to the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/593,887 entitled “SPATIAL AUDIO RENDERING FOR BEAMFORMING LOUDSPEAKER ARRAY,” filed on May 12, 2017, the content of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety, and included in the Appendix. This application also relates to the U.S. Patent Application No. 62/004,111 entitled “MULTI-CHANNEL LOUDSPEAKER MATCHING USING VARIABLE DIRECTIVITY,” filed on May 28, 2014. This application also relates to the U.S. Patent Application No. 62/057,989 entitled “MODAL BASED ARCHITECTURE FOR CONTROLLING THE DIRECTIVITY OF LOUDSPEAKER ARRAYS,” filed on Sep. 30, 2014. This application also relates to the U.S. Patent Application No. 62/057,999 entitled “METHOD TO DETERMINE LOUDSPEAKER CHANGE OF PLACEMENT,” filed on Sep. 30, 2014. This application also relates to the U.S. Patent Application No. 62/346,236 entitled “IN IELLIGENT LIST READING,” filed on Jun. 6, 2016. This application also relates to the U.S. Patent Application No. 62/347,480 entitled “INTELLIGENT AUTOMATED ASSISTANT FOR MEDIA EXPLORATION,” filed on Jun. 8, 2016. This application also relates to the U.S. Patent Application No. 62/348,896 entitled “INTELLIGENT DEVICE ARBITRATION AND CONTROL,” filed on Jun. 11, 2016. This application also relates to the U.S. Patent Application No. 62/399,165 entitled “AUDIO DRIVER AND POWER SUPPLY UNIT ARCHITECTURE,” filed on Sep. 23, 2016. This application also relates to the U.S. Patent Application No. 62/399,229 entitled “MULTI-LOBE MAGNET FOR SUBWOOFER,” filed on Sep. 23, 2016. This application also relates to the U.S. Patent Application No. 62/399,232 entitled “INTELLIGENT AUTOMATED ASSISTANT,” filed on Sep. 23, 2016. This application also relates to the U.S. Patent Application No. 62/399,262 entitled “FORWARD BACK VOLUME OF AIR FOR AUDIO DRIVER,” filed on Sep. 23, 2016. This application also relates to the U.S. Patent Application No. 62/399,288 entitled “UPPER HOUSING COMPONENT ARCHITECTURE,” filed on Sep. 23, 2016. This application also relates to the U.S. Patent Application No. 62/399,293 entitled “AUDIO DRIVER EXIT GEOMETRY,” filed on Sep. 23, 2016. This application also relates to the U.S. Patent Application No. 62/402,836 entitled “SPATIAL AUDIO RENDERING STRATEGIES FOR BEAMFORMING LOUD SPEAKER ARRAY,” filed on Sep. 30, 2016. This application also relates to the U.S. Patent Application No. 62/506,912 entitled “MANAGING MEDIA COLLECTIONS USING DIRECTED ACYCLIC GRAPHS,” filed on May 16, 2017. This application also relates to the U.S. Patent Application No. 62/507,007 entitled “SPEAKER,” filed on May 16, 2017. This application also relates to the U.S. Patent Application No. 62/507,100 entitled “TRANSFERRING PLAYBACK QUEUES BETWEEN DEVICES,” filed on May 16, 2017. This application also relates to the U.S. Patent Application No. 62/507,151 entitled “FAR-FIELD EXTENSION FOR DIGITAL ASSISTANT SERVICES,” filed on May 16, 2017, the content of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety, and included in the Appendix. This application also relates to the U.S. Patent Application No. 62/507,056 entitled “PROVIDING AN AUDITORY-BASED INTERFACE OF A DIGITAL ASSISTANT,” filed on May 16, 2017. This application also relates to the U.S. Patent Application No. 62/506,871 entitled “METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR PHONETIC MATCHING IN DIGITAL ASSISTANT SERVICE,” filed on May 16, 2017. This application also relates to the U.S. Patent Application No. 62/507,042 entitled “DETECTING A TRIGGER OF A DIGITAL ASSISTANT,” filed on May 16, 2017. This application also relates to the U.S. Patent Application No. 62/506,981 entitled “INTELLIGENT AUTOMATED ASSISTANT FOR MEDIA EXPLORATION,” filed on May 16, 2017. This application also relates to the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/967,089 entitled “SPATIALLY DUCKING AUDIO PRODUCED THROUGH A BEAMFORMING LOUDSPEAKER ARRAY,” filed on Apr. 30, 2018. This application also relates to the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/613,127 entitled “MULTI-CHANNEL SPEECH SIGNAL ENHANCEMENT FOR ROBUST VOICE TRIGGER DETECTION AND AUTOMATIC SPEECH RECOGNITION,” filed on Jun. 2, 2017. This application also relates to the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/613,040 entitled “LOUDSPEAKER ORIENTATION SYSTEMS,” filed on Jun. 2, 2017. This application also relates to the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/619,058 entitled “AUDIO SYSTEMS WITH SMOOTH DIRECTIVITY TRANSITIONS,” filed on Jun. 9, 2017. This application also relates to the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/613,198 entitled “AUDIO SYSTEMS WITH ACTIVE FEEDBACK ACOUSTIC ECHO CANCELLATION,” filed on Jun. 3, 2017. This application also relates to the U.S. Patent Application No. 62/507,150 entitled “TECHNIQUES FOR VERIFYING USER INTENT AND SECURELY CONFIGURING COMPUTER DEVICES,” filed on May 16, 2017. This application also relates to the U.S. Patent Application No. 62/507,187 entitled “TECHNIQUES FOR REPAIRING AN INOPERABLE AUXILIARY DEVICE USING ANOTHER DEVICE,” filed on May 16, 2017. The content of each of the above-listed related applications are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety. 
    
    
     FIELD 
     The present disclosure relates generally to computer user interfaces, and more specifically to techniques for managing media playback devices. 
     BACKGROUND 
     The number of electronic devices, and particularly smart devices, in users&#39; homes continues to increase. These devices are increasingly being interconnected with each other, are increasingly more capable, and are performing more complex tasks. As such, these devices are increasingly expected to have thoughtfully-designed user interfaces. 
     BRIEF SUMMARY 
     Some techniques for managing media playback devices using electronic devices, however, are generally cumbersome and inefficient. For example, some existing techniques use a complex and time-consuming user interface, which may include multiple key presses or keystrokes. Existing techniques require more time than necessary, wasting user time and device energy. This latter consideration is particularly important in battery-operated devices. 
     Accordingly, the present technique provides electronic devices with faster, more efficient methods and interfaces for managing media playback devices. Such methods and interfaces optionally complement or replace other methods for managing media playback devices. Such methods and interfaces reduce the cognitive burden on a user and produce a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated computing devices, such methods and interfaces conserve power and increase the time between battery charges. Such methods and interfaces can reduce the number of unnecessary, extraneous, or repetitive user inputs. Further, such methods and interfaces can reduce the battery usage by a display or speaker of an electronic device. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at a device with a display. The method comprises: receiving a user input; and in response to receiving the user input, displaying, on the display, a multi-device interface that includes: one or more indicators associated with a plurality of available playback devices that are connected to the device and available to initiate playback of media from the device, and a media playback status of the plurality of available playback devices. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device with a display, the one or more programs including instructions for: receiving a user input; and in response to receiving the user input, displaying, on the display, a multi-device interface that includes: one or more indicators associated with a plurality of available playback devices that are connected to the device and available to initiate playback of media from the device, and a media playback status of the plurality of available playback devices. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic device comprises: a display; one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: receiving a user input; and in response to receiving the user input, displaying, on the display, a multi-device interface that includes: one or more indicators associated with a plurality of available playback devices that are connected to the device and available to initiate playback of media from the device, and a media playback status of the plurality of available playback devices. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic device comprises: a display; means for receiving a user input; and means for, responsive to receiving the user input, displaying, on the display, a multi-device interface that includes: one or more indicators associated with a plurality of available playback devices that are connected to the device and available to initiate playback of media from the device, and a media playback status of the plurality of available playback devices. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device with a display, the one or more programs including instructions for: receiving a user input; and in response to receiving the user input, displaying, on the display, a multi-device interface that includes: one or more indicators associated with a plurality of available playback devices that are connected to the device and available to initiate playback of media from the device, and a media playback status of the plurality of available playback devices. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at a device with a display. The method comprises: displaying, on the display, a first current media interface for the device, wherein the first current media interface includes: a representation of a first media item available for playback on the device, and a playback device selection affordance; receiving a first user input representing selection of the playback device selection affordance; in response to receiving the first user input, displaying, on the display, one or more affordances associated with a plurality of available playback devices connected to the device; receiving a second user input representing selection of the one or more affordances associated with the plurality of available playback devices; and in response to receiving the second user input, configuring the device to initiate playback on the plurality of available playback devices. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device with a display, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying, on the display, a first current media interface for the device, wherein the first current media interface includes: a representation of a first media item available for playback on the device, and a playback device selection affordance; receiving a first user input representing selection of the playback device selection affordance; in response to receiving the first user input, displaying, on the display, one or more affordances associated with a plurality of available playback devices connected to the device; receiving a second user input representing selection of the one or more affordances associated with the plurality of available playback devices; and in response to receiving the second user input, configuring the device to initiate playback on the plurality of available playback devices. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic device comprises: a display; one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying, on the display, a first current media interface for the device, wherein the first current media interface includes: a representation of a first media item available for playback on the device, and a playback device selection affordance; receiving a first user input representing selection of the playback device selection affordance; in response to receiving the first user input, displaying, on the display, one or more affordances associated with a plurality of available playback devices connected to the device; receiving a second user input representing selection of the one or more affordances associated with the plurality of available playback devices; and in response to receiving the second user input, configuring the device to initiate playback on the plurality of available playback devices. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic device comprises: a display; means for displaying, on the display, a first current media interface for the device, wherein the first current media interface includes: a representation of a first media item available for playback on the device, and a playback device selection affordance; means for receiving a first user input representing selection of the playback device selection affordance; means for, responsive to receiving the first user input, displaying, on the display, one or more affordances associated with a plurality of available playback devices connected to the device; means for receiving a second user input representing selection of the one or more affordances associated with the plurality of available playback devices; and means for, responsive to receiving the second user input, configuring the device to initiate playback on the plurality of available playback devices. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device with a display, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying, on the display, a first current media interface for the device, wherein the first current media interface includes: a representation of a first media item available for playback on the device, and a playback device selection affordance; receiving a first user input representing selection of the playback device selection affordance; in response to receiving the first user input, displaying, on the display, one or more affordances associated with a plurality of available playback devices connected to the device; receiving a second user input representing selection of the one or more affordances associated with the plurality of available playback devices; and in response to receiving the second user input, configuring the device to initiate playback on the plurality of available playback devices. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at a first device. The method comprises: detecting an indication that a physical proximity between the first device and a second device satisfies a proximity condition, wherein the first device is connected to the second device via a communication link; in accordance with detecting the indication, audibly outputting an audio tone signal, wherein the audio tone signal is out-of-band to the communication link; subsequent to outputting the audio tone signal, determining whether a response audio tone signal from the second device has been received; in accordance with a determination that the response audio tone signal from the second device has been received, proceeding to a next step in a configuration process; and in accordance with a determination that the response audio tone signal from the second device has not been received, forgoing proceeding to the next step in the configuration process. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting an indication that a physical proximity between the first device and a second device satisfies a proximity condition, wherein the first device is connected to the second device via a communication link; in accordance with detecting the indication, audibly outputting an audio tone signal, wherein the audio tone signal is out-of-band to the communication link; subsequent to outputting the audio tone signal, determining whether a response audio tone signal from the second device has been received; in accordance with a determination that the response audio tone signal from the second device has been received, proceeding to a next step in a configuration process; and in accordance with a determination that the response audio tone signal from the second device has not been received, forgoing proceeding to the next step in the configuration process. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic device comprises: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting an indication that a physical proximity between the first device and a second device satisfies a proximity condition, wherein the first device is connected to the second device via a communication link; in accordance with detecting the indication, audibly outputting an audio tone signal, wherein the audio tone signal is out-of-band to the communication link; subsequent to outputting the audio tone signal, determining whether a response audio tone signal from the second device has been received; in accordance with a determination that the response audio tone signal from the second device has been received, proceeding to a next step in a configuration process; and in accordance with a determination that the response audio tone signal from the second device has not been received, forgoing proceeding to the next step in the configuration process. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic device comprises: means for detecting an indication that a physical proximity between the first device and a second device satisfies a proximity condition, wherein the first device is connected to the second device via a communication link; means for, in accordance with detecting the indication, audibly outputting an audio tone signal, wherein the audio tone signal is out-of-band to the communication link; means for, subsequent to outputting the audio tone signal, determining whether a response audio tone signal from the second device has been received; means for, in accordance with a determination that the response audio tone signal from the second device has been received, proceeding to a next step in a configuration process; and means for, in accordance with a determination that the response audio tone signal from the second device has not been received, forgoing proceeding to the next step in the configuration process. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting an indication that a physical proximity between the first device and a second device satisfies a proximity condition, wherein the first device is connected to the second device via a communication link; in accordance with detecting the indication, audibly outputting an audio tone signal, wherein the audio tone signal is out-of-band to the communication link; subsequent to outputting the audio tone signal, determining whether a response audio tone signal from the second device has been received; in accordance with a determination that the response audio tone signal from the second device has been received, proceeding to a next step in a configuration process; and in accordance with a determination that the response audio tone signal from the second device has not been received, forgoing proceeding to the next step in the configuration process. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at a first device with a display. The method comprises: detecting, while connected to a second device, an indication that a physical proximity between the first device and the second device satisfies a proximity condition; and in accordance with detecting that the physical proximity satisfies the proximity condition, displaying, on the display, a media information interface. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device with a display, wherein the electronic device is a first device, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting, while connected to a second device, an indication that a physical proximity between the first device and the second device satisfies a proximity condition; and in accordance with detecting that the physical proximity satisfies the proximity condition, displaying, on the display, a media information interface. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic device comprises: a display; one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting, while connected to a second device, an indication that a physical proximity between the electronic device and the second device satisfies a proximity condition; and in accordance with detecting that the physical proximity satisfies the proximity condition, displaying, on the display, a media information interface. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic device comprises: a display; means for detecting, while connected to a second device, an indication that a physical proximity between the electronic device and the second device satisfies a proximity condition; and means for in accordance with detecting that the physical proximity satisfies the proximity condition, displaying, on the display, a media information interface. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device with a display, wherein the electronic device is a first device, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting, while connected to a second device, an indication that a physical proximity between the first device and the second device satisfies a proximity condition; and in accordance with detecting that the physical proximity satisfies the proximity condition, displaying, on the display, a media information interface. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at a device with a touch-sensitive surface. The method comprises: detecting a touch on the touch-sensitive surface; in response to detecting the touch on the touch-sensitive surface, determining whether the device is currently playing media; in accordance with a determination that the device is currently playing media: determining whether a location of the touch is within a first area of the touch-sensitive surface or within a second area of the touch-sensitive surface, wherein the first area and the second area are non-overlapping; in accordance with a determination that the location of the touch is within the first area of the touch-sensitive surface, ceasing playing media; and in accordance with a determination that the location of the touch is within the second area of the touch-sensitive surface, adjusting a volume of the currently playing media; and in accordance with a determination that the device is not currently playing media, initiating playback of media. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device with a touch-sensitive surface, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting a touch on the touch-sensitive surface; in response to detecting the touch on the touch-sensitive surface, determining whether the device is currently playing media; in accordance with a determination that the device is currently playing media: determining whether a location of the touch is within a first area of the touch-sensitive surface or within a second area of the touch-sensitive surface, wherein the first area and the second area are non-overlapping; in accordance with a determination that the location of the touch is within the first area of the touch-sensitive surface, ceasing playing media; and in accordance with a determination that the location of the touch is within the second area of the touch-sensitive surface, adjusting a volume of the currently playing media; and in accordance with a determination that the device is not currently playing media, initiating playback of media. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic device comprises: a touch-sensitive surface; one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting a touch on the touch-sensitive surface; in response to detecting the touch on the touch-sensitive surface, determining whether the device is currently playing media; in accordance with a determination that the device is currently playing media: determining whether a location of the touch is within a first area of the touch-sensitive surface or within a second area of the touch-sensitive surface, wherein the first area and the second area are non-overlapping; in accordance with a determination that the location of the touch is within the first area of the touch-sensitive surface, ceasing playing media; and in accordance with a determination that the location of the touch is within the second area of the touch-sensitive surface, adjusting a volume of the currently playing media; and in accordance with a determination that the device is not currently playing media, initiating playback of media. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic device comprises: a touch-sensitive surface; means for detecting a touch on the touch-sensitive surface; means for, responsive to detecting the touch on the touch-sensitive surface, determining whether the device is currently playing media; means for, in accordance with a determination that the device is currently playing media: determining whether a location of the touch is within a first area of the touch-sensitive surface or within a second area of the touch-sensitive surface, wherein the first area and the second area are non-overlapping; in accordance with a determination that the location of the touch is within the first area of the touch-sensitive surface, ceasing playing media; and in accordance with a determination that the location of the touch is within the second area of the touch-sensitive surface, adjusting a volume of the currently playing media; and means for, in accordance with a determination that the device is not currently playing media, initiating playback of media. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device with a touch-sensitive surface, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting a touch on the touch-sensitive surface; in response to detecting the touch on the touch-sensitive surface, determining whether the device is currently playing media; in accordance with a determination that the device is currently playing media: determining whether a location of the touch is within a first area of the touch-sensitive surface or within a second area of the touch-sensitive surface, wherein the first area and the second area are non-overlapping; in accordance with a determination that the location of the touch is within the first area of the touch-sensitive surface, ceasing playing media; and in accordance with a determination that the location of the touch is within the second area of the touch-sensitive surface, adjusting a volume of the currently playing media; and in accordance with a determination that the device is not currently playing media, initiating playback of media. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at a first device. The method comprises: receiving a first request to queue a first media item for playback on a set of devices, wherein the set of devices includes the first device; adding the first media item to a playback queue; receiving a second request to queue a second media item for playback on the set of devices; adding the second media item to the playback queue; accessing the first media item from a first media streaming service; initiating playback of the first media item on the set of devices; accessing the second media item from a second media streaming service different than the first media streaming service; and initiating playback of the second media item on the set of devices. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device, wherein the electronic device is a first device, the one or more programs including instructions for: receiving a first request to queue a first media item for playback on a set of devices, wherein the set of devices includes the first device; adding the first media item to a playback queue; receiving a second request to queue a second media item for playback on the set of devices; adding the second media item to the playback queue; accessing the first media item from a first media streaming service; initiating playback of the first media item on the set of devices; accessing the second media item from a second media streaming service different than the first media streaming service; and initiating playback of the second media item on the set of devices. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic device comprises: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: receiving a first request to queue a first media item for playback on a set of devices, wherein the set of devices includes the electronic device; adding the first media item to a playback queue; receiving a second request to queue a second media item for playback on the set of devices; adding the second media item to the playback queue; accessing the first media item from a first media streaming service; initiating playback of the first media item on the set of devices; accessing the second media item from a second media streaming service different than the first media streaming service; and initiating playback of the second media item on the set of devices. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic device comprises: means for receiving a first request to queue a first media item for playback on a set of devices, wherein the set of devices includes the electronic device; means for adding the first media item to a playback queue; means for receiving a second request to queue a second media item for playback on the set of devices; means for adding the second media item to the playback queue; means for accessing the first media item from a first media streaming service; means for initiating playback of the first media item on the set of devices; means for accessing the second media item from a second media streaming service different than the first media streaming service; and means for initiating playback of the second media item on the set of devices. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device, wherein the electronic device is a first device, the one or more programs including instructions for: receiving a first request to queue a first media item for playback on a set of devices, wherein the set of devices includes the first device; adding the first media item to a playback queue; receiving a second request to queue a second media item for playback on the set of devices; adding the second media item to the playback queue; accessing the first media item from a first media streaming service; initiating playback of the first media item on the set of devices; accessing the second media item from a second media streaming service different than the first media streaming service; and initiating playback of the second media item on the set of devices. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at a first device. The method comprises: receiving, from a second device associated with a first user, a first request to queue a first media item for playback on a set of devices, wherein the set of devices includes the first device; adding the first media item to a playback queue; receiving, from a third device associated with a second user, a second request to queue a second media item for playback on the set of devices, wherein the second user is different than the first; adding the second media item to the playback queue; initiating playback of the first media item on the set of devices; and initiating playback of the second media item on the set of devices. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device, wherein the electronic device is a first device, the one or more programs including instructions for: receiving, from a second device associated with a first user, a first request to queue a first media item for playback on a set of devices, wherein the set of devices includes the first device; adding the first media item to a playback queue; receiving, from a third device associated with a second user, a second request to queue a second media item for playback on the set of devices, wherein the second user is different than the first; adding the second media item to the playback queue; initiating playback of the first media item on the set of devices; and initiating playback of the second media item on the set of devices. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic device comprises: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: receiving, from a second device associated with a first user, a first request to queue a first media item for playback on a set of devices, wherein the set of devices includes the electronic device; adding the first media item to a playback queue; receiving, from a third device associated with a second user, a second request to queue a second media item for playback on the set of devices, wherein the second user is different than the first; adding the second media item to the playback queue; initiating playback of the first media item on the set of devices; and initiating playback of the second media item on the set of devices. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic device comprises: means for receiving, from a second device associated with a first user, a first request to queue a first media item for playback on a set of devices, wherein the set of devices includes the electronic device; means for adding the first media item to a playback queue; means for receiving, from a third device associated with a second user, a second request to queue a second media item for playback on the set of devices, wherein the second user is different than the first; means for adding the second media item to the playback queue; means for initiating playback of the first media item on the set of devices; and means for initiating playback of the second media item on the set of devices. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device, wherein the electronic device is a first device, the one or more programs including instructions for: receiving, from a second device associated with a first user, a first request to queue a first media item for playback on a set of devices, wherein the set of devices includes the first device; adding the first media item to a playback queue; receiving, from a third device associated with a second user, a second request to queue a second media item for playback on the set of devices, wherein the second user is different than the first; adding the second media item to the playback queue; initiating playback of the first media item on the set of devices; and initiating playback of the second media item on the set of devices. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at a first device with a display. The method comprises: detecting an audio tone signal indicative of a pairing handshake with a second device, wherein the first device is connected to the second device via a communication link, and wherein the audio tone signal is out-of-band to the communication link; in accordance with detecting the audio tone signal, initiating, on the first device, a configuration process for configuring the second device; during the configuration process, displaying, on the display, a configuration user interface that includes a prompt to select a location; receiving user input selection of a location; and in response to receiving the user input, configuring the second device to be associated with the location. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device with a display, wherein the electronic device is a first device, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting an audio tone signal indicative of a pairing handshake with a second device, wherein the first device is connected to the second device via a communication link, and wherein the audio tone signal is out-of-band to the communication link; in accordance with detecting the audio tone signal, initiating, on the first device, a configuration process for configuring the second device; during the configuration process, displaying, on the display, a configuration user interface that includes a prompt to select a location; receiving user input selection of a location; and in response to receiving the user input, configuring the second device to be associated with the location. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic device comprises: a display; one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting an audio tone signal indicative of a pairing handshake with a second device, wherein the electronic device is connected to the second device via a communication link, and wherein the audio tone signal is out-of-band to the communication link; in accordance with detecting the audio tone signal, initiating, on the electronic device, a configuration process for configuring the second device; during the configuration process, displaying, on the display, a configuration user interface that includes a prompt to select a location; receiving user input selection of a location; and in response to receiving the user input, configuring the second device to be associated with the location. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic device comprises: a display; means for detecting an audio tone signal indicative of a pairing handshake with a second device, wherein the electronic device is connected to the second device via a communication link, and wherein the audio tone signal is out-of-band to the communication link; means for, in accordance with detecting the audio tone signal, initiating, on the electronic device, a configuration process for configuring the second device; means for, during the configuration process, displaying, on the display, a configuration user interface that includes a prompt to select a location; means for receiving user input selection of a location; and means for, responsive to receiving the user input, configuring the second device to be associated with the location. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device with a display, wherein the electronic device is a first device, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting an audio tone signal indicative of a pairing handshake with a second device, wherein the first device is connected to the second device via a communication link, and wherein the audio tone signal is out-of-band to the communication link; in accordance with detecting the audio tone signal, initiating, on the first device, a configuration process for configuring the second device; during the configuration process, displaying, on the display, a configuration user interface that includes a prompt to select a location; receiving user input selection of a location; and in response to receiving the user input, configuring the second device to be associated with the location. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at a device. The method comprises: while outputting an audible signal from the device, detecting a user input voice command from a voice command source; in response to detecting the user input voice command, determining a spatial position of the voice command source relative to the device; and while continuing to output the audible signal, adjusting the output of the audible signal based on the spatial position of the voice command source. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device, the one or more programs including instructions for: while outputting an audible signal from the device, detecting a user input voice command from a voice command source; in response to detecting the user input voice command, determining a spatial position of the voice command source relative to the device; and while continuing to output the audible signal, adjusting the output of the audible signal based on the spatial position of the voice command source. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic device comprises: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: while outputting an audible signal from the device, detecting a user input voice command from a voice command source; in response to detecting the user input voice command, determining a spatial position of the voice command source relative to the device; and while continuing to output the audible signal, adjusting the output of the audible signal based on the spatial position of the voice command source. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic device comprises: means for, while outputting an audible signal from the device, detecting a user input voice command from a voice command source; means for, responsive to detecting the user input voice command, determining a spatial position of the voice command source relative to the device; and means for, while continuing to output the audible signal, adjusting the output of the audible signal based on the spatial position of the voice command source. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device, the one or more programs including instructions for: while outputting an audible signal from the device, detecting a user input voice command from a voice command source; in response to detecting the user input voice command, determining a spatial position of the voice command source relative to the device; and while continuing to output the audible signal, adjusting the output of the audible signal based on the spatial position of the voice command source. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at a first device associated with a first user account. The method comprises: detecting that a second device associated with a second user account is connected to the first device, wherein the first user account is associated with a first media preference profile; wherein the second user account is associated with a second media preference profile different than the first media preference profile; and initiating playback of media based on the first media preference profile and the second media preference profile. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device, wherein the electronic device is a first device associated with a first user account, wherein the first user account is associated with a first media preference profile, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting that a second device associated with a second user account is connected to the first device, wherein the second user account is associated with a second media preference profile different than the first media preference profile; and initiating playback of media based on the first media preference profile and the second media preference profile. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic device comprises: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting that a second device associated with a second user account is connected to the electronic device, wherein the electronic device is associated with a first user account, wherein the first user account is associated with a first media preference profile: wherein the second user account is associated with a second media preference profile different than the first media preference profile; and initiating playback of media based on the first media preference profile and the second media preference profile. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic device comprises: means for detecting that a second device associated with a second user account is connected to the electronic device, wherein the electronic device is associated with a first user account, wherein the first user account is associated with a first media preference profile: wherein the second user account is associated with a second media preference profile different than the first media preference profile; and means for initiating playback of media based on the first media preference profile and the second media preference profile. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device, wherein the electronic device is a first device associated with a first user account, wherein the first user account is associated with a first media preference profile, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting that a second device associated with a second user account is connected to the first device, wherein the second user account is associated with a second media preference profile different than the first media preference profile; and initiating playback of media based on the first media preference profile and the second media preference profile. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at a first device. The method comprises: receiving a request, from a third device, to initiate media playback on at least one device of a set of devices, wherein the set of devices comprises the first device and a second device, wherein the third device is not a member of the set of devices, and wherein the third device is connected to the first device; in response to receiving the request: in accordance with a determination that the third device has permission to initiate media playback on the at least one device of set of devices, initiating media playback on the set of devices; and in accordance with a determination that the third device does not have permission to initiate media playback on the at least one device of set of devices: transmitting a request for permission to the second device; and in response to receiving permission from the second device, initiating media playback on the at least one device of the set of devices. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device, wherein the electronic device is a first device, the one or more programs including instructions for: receiving a request, from a third device, to initiate media playback on at least one device of a set of devices, wherein the set of devices comprises the first device and a second device, wherein the third device is not a member of the set of devices, and wherein the third device is connected to the first device; in response to receiving the request: in accordance with a determination that the third device has permission to initiate media playback on the at least one device of set of devices, initiating media playback on the set of devices; and in accordance with a determination that the third device does not have permission to initiate media playback on the at least one device of set of devices: transmitting a request for permission to the second device; and in response to receiving permission from the second device, initiating media playback on the at least one device of the set of devices. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic device comprises: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: receiving a request, from a third device, to initiate media playback on at least one device of a set of devices, wherein the set of devices comprises the electronic device and a second device, wherein the third device is not a member of the set of devices, and wherein the third device is connected to the electronic device; in response to receiving the request: in accordance with a determination that the third device has permission to initiate media playback on the at least one device of set of devices, initiating media playback on the set of devices; and in accordance with a determination that the third device does not have permission to initiate media playback on the at least one device of set of devices: transmitting a request for permission to the second device; and in response to receiving permission from the second device, initiating media playback on the at least one device of the set of devices. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic device comprises: means for receiving a request, from a third device, to initiate media playback on at least one device of a set of devices, wherein the set of devices comprises the electronic device and a second device, wherein the third device is not a member of the set of devices, and wherein the third device is connected to the electronic device; means for, responsive to receiving the request: in accordance with a determination that the third device has permission to initiate media playback on the at least one device of set of devices, initiating media playback on the set of devices; and in accordance with a determination that the third device does not have permission to initiate media playback on the at least one device of set of devices: transmitting a request for permission to the second device; and in response to receiving permission from the second device, initiating media playback on the at least one device of the set of devices. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device, wherein the electronic device is a first device, the one or more programs including instructions for: receiving a request, from a third device, to initiate media playback on at least one device of a set of devices, wherein the set of devices comprises the first device and a second device, wherein the third device is not a member of the set of devices, and wherein the third device is connected to the first device; in response to receiving the request: in accordance with a determination that the third device has permission to initiate media playback on the at least one device of set of devices, initiating media playback on the set of devices; and in accordance with a determination that the third device does not have permission to initiate media playback on the at least one device of set of devices: transmitting a request for permission to the second device; and in response to receiving permission from the second device, initiating media playback on the at least one device of the set of devices. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at a first device associated with a user account. The method comprises: receiving user input representing a request to access data from the user account; in response to receiving the user input, determining whether a physical positioning of the first device and a second device associated with the user account satisfies a permissive condition; in accordance with a determination that the physical positioning satisfies the permissive condition, providing the data from the user account through the first device; and in accordance with a determination that the physical positioning does not satisfy the permissive condition, forgoing providing the data from the user account through the first device. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device, wherein the electronic device is a first electronic device associated with a user account, the one or more programs including instructions for: receiving user input representing a request to access data from the user account; in response to receiving the user input, determining whether a physical positioning of the electronic device and a second device associated with the user account satisfies a permissive condition; in accordance with a determination that the physical positioning satisfies the permissive condition, providing the data from the user account through the electronic device; and in accordance with a determination that the physical positioning does not satisfy the permissive condition, forgoing providing the data from the user account through the electronic device. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic device comprises: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: receiving user input representing a request to access data from a user account, wherein the electronic device is associated with the user account; in response to receiving the user input, determining whether a physical positioning of the electronic device and a second device associated with the user account satisfies a permissive condition; in accordance with a determination that the physical positioning satisfies the permissive condition, providing the data from the user account through the electronic device; and in accordance with a determination that the physical positioning does not satisfy the permissive condition, forgoing providing the data from the user account through the electronic device. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic device comprises: means for receiving user input representing a request to access data from a user account, wherein the electronic device is associated with the user account; means for, responsive to receiving the user input, determining whether a physical positioning of the electronic device and a second device associated with the user account satisfies a permissive condition; means for, in accordance with a determination that the physical positioning satisfies the permissive condition, providing the data from the user account through the electronic device; and means for, in accordance with a determination that the physical positioning does not satisfy the permissive condition, forgoing providing the data from the user account through the electronic device. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device, wherein the electronic device is a first electronic device associated with a user account, the one or more programs including instructions for: receiving user input representing a request to access data from the user account; in response to receiving the user input, determining whether a physical positioning of the electronic device and a second device associated with the user account satisfies a permissive condition; in accordance with a determination that the physical positioning satisfies the permissive condition, providing the data from the user account through the electronic device; and in accordance with a determination that the physical positioning does not satisfy the permissive condition, forgoing providing the data from the user account through the electronic device. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at a first device. The method comprises: receiving a command to initiate playback of media on a set of devices comprising the first device and a second device; in response to receiving the command, initiating synchronized playback of the media on the set of devices, wherein the second device is designated as a primary device configured to coordinate the playback of the media on the set of devices, and wherein the first device is configured to be a designated heir to the primary device. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device, wherein the electronic device is a first device, the one or more programs including instructions for: receiving a command to initiate playback of media on a set of devices comprising the first device and a second device; in response to receiving the command, initiating synchronized playback of the media on the set of devices, wherein the second device is designated as a primary device configured to coordinate the playback of the media on the set of devices, and wherein the first device is configured to be a designated heir to the primary device. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic device comprises: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: receiving a command to initiate playback of media on a set of devices comprising the electronic device and a second device; in response to receiving the command, initiating synchronized playback of the media on the set of devices, wherein the second device is designated as a primary device configured to coordinate the playback of the media on the set of devices, and wherein the electronic device is configured to be a designated heir to the primary device. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic device comprises: means for receiving a command to initiate playback of media on a set of devices comprising the electronic device and a second device; means for, responsive to receiving the command, initiating synchronized playback of the media on the set of devices, wherein the second device is designated as a primary device configured to coordinate the playback of the media on the set of devices, and wherein the electronic device is configured to be a designated heir to the primary device. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device, wherein the electronic device is a first device, the one or more programs including instructions for: receiving a command to initiate playback of media on a set of devices comprising the first device and a second device; in response to receiving the command, initiating synchronized playback of the media on the set of devices, wherein the second device is designated as a primary device configured to coordinate the playback of the media on the set of devices, and wherein the first device is configured to be a designated heir to the primary device. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at a first device of a set of devices associated with a first user account. The method comprises: receiving an audible output trigger event; determining that a first user, associated with the first user account, is located within an audible output range of a device of the set of devices; in accordance with a determination that the first user is within the audible output range of the first device, and in accordance with an occurrence of the audible output trigger event, outputting an audible output; and in accordance with a determination that the first user is within the audible output range of a second device, and in accordance with an occurrence of the audible output trigger event, forgoing outputting the audible output. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device, wherein the electronic device is a first device of a set of devices associated with a first user account, the one or more programs including instructions for: receiving an audible output trigger event; determining that a first user, associated with the first user account, is located within an audible output range of a device of the set of devices; in accordance with a determination that the first user is within the audible output range of the first device, and in accordance with an occurrence of the audible output trigger event, outputting an audible output; and in accordance with a determination that the first user is within the audible output range of a second device, and in accordance with an occurrence of the audible output trigger event, forgoing outputting the audible output. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic device comprises: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: receiving an audible output trigger event; determining that a first user, associated with a first user account, is located within an audible output range of a device of a set of devices associated with the first user account, wherein the electronic device is a first device of the set of devices; in accordance with a determination that the first user is within the audible output range of the first device, and in accordance with an occurrence of the audible output trigger event, outputting an audible output; and in accordance with a determination that the first user is within the audible output range of a second device, and in accordance with an occurrence of the audible output trigger event, forgoing outputting the audible output. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic device comprises: means for receiving an audible output trigger event; means for determining that a first user, associated with a first user account, is located within an audible output range of a device of a set of devices associated with the first user account, wherein the electronic device is a first device of the set of devices; means for, in accordance with a determination that the first user is within the audible output range of the first device, and in accordance with an occurrence of the audible output trigger event, outputting an audible output; and means for, in accordance with a determination that the first user is within the audible output range of a second device, and in accordance with an occurrence of the audible output trigger event, forgoing outputting the audible output. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device, wherein the electronic device is a first device of a set of devices associated with a first user account, the one or more programs including instructions for: receiving an audible output trigger event; determining that a first user, associated with the first user account, is located within an audible output range of a device of the set of devices; in accordance with a determination that the first user is within the audible output range of the first device, and in accordance with an occurrence of the audible output trigger event, outputting an audible output; and in accordance with a determination that the first user is within the audible output range of a second device, and in accordance with an occurrence of the audible output trigger event, forgoing outputting the audible output. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at a first device. The method comprises: receiving a user input voice command representing a request to output a signal representative of media currently being played back by a second device that is connected to the first device; in response to receiving the user input, transmitting a request for information regarding the media currently being played back by the second device; receiving the information regarding the media currently being played back by the second device; and in accordance with receiving the information regarding the media currently being played back by the second device, and while the second device continues playback of at least one component of the media, initiating output of at least one component of the signal representative of the media currently being played back by the second device. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device, wherein the electronic device is a first device, the one or more programs including instructions for: receiving a user input voice command representing a request to output a signal representative of media currently being played back by a second device that is connected to the first device; in response to receiving the user input, transmitting a request for information regarding the media currently being played back by the second device; receiving the information regarding the media currently being played back by the second device; and in accordance with receiving the information regarding the media currently being played back by the second device, and while the second device continues playback of at least one component of the media, initiating output of at least one component of the signal representative of the media currently being played back by the second device. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic device comprises: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: receiving a user input voice command representing a request to output a signal representative of media currently being played back by a second device that is connected to the electronic device; in response to receiving the user input, transmitting a request for information regarding the media currently being played back by the second device; receiving the information regarding the media currently being played back by the second device; and in accordance with receiving the information regarding the media currently being played back by the second device, and while the second device continues playback of at least one component of the media, initiating output of at least one component of the signal representative of the media currently being played back by the second device. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic device comprises: means for receiving a user input voice command representing a request to output a signal representative of media currently being played back by a second device that is connected to the electronic device; means for, responsive to receiving the user input, transmitting a request for information regarding the media currently being played back by the second device; means for receiving the information regarding the media currently being played back by the second device; and means for, in accordance with receiving the information regarding the media currently being played back by the second device, and while the second device continues playback of at least one component of the media, initiating output of at least one component of the signal representative of the media currently being played back by the second device. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device, wherein the electronic device is a first device, the one or more programs including instructions for: receiving a user input voice command representing a request to output a signal representative of media currently being played back by a second device that is connected to the first device; in response to receiving the user input, transmitting a request for information regarding the media currently being played back by the second device; receiving the information regarding the media currently being played back by the second device; and in accordance with receiving the information regarding the media currently being played back by the second device, and while the second device continues playback of at least one component of the media, initiating output of at least one component of the signal representative of the media currently being played back by the second device. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at a first device. The method comprises: receiving a request to initiate media playback on a set of devices that does not include the first device; in response to receiving the request, and while the first device is coordinating media playback, determining whether the set of devices includes a device configured to coordinate media playback; in accordance with a determination that the set of devices includes a device configured to coordinate media playback, transferring a media playback coordination task from the first device to the device configured to coordinate media playback; and in accordance with a determination that the set of devices does not include a device configured to coordinate media playback, forgoing transferring the media playback coordination task. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device, wherein the electronic device is a first device, the one or more programs including instructions for: receiving a request to initiate media playback on a set of devices that does not include the first device; in response to receiving the request, and while the first device is coordinating media playback, determining whether the set of devices includes a device configured to coordinate media playback; in accordance with a determination that the set of devices includes a device configured to coordinate media playback, transferring a media playback coordination task from the first device to the device configured to coordinate media playback; and in accordance with a determination that the set of devices does not include a device configured to coordinate media playback, forgoing transferring the media playback coordination task. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic device comprises: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: receiving a request to initiate media playback on a set of devices that does not include the electronic device; in response to receiving the request, and while the electronic device is coordinating media playback, determining whether the set of devices includes a device configured to coordinate media playback; in accordance with a determination that the set of devices includes a device configured to coordinate media playback, transferring a media playback coordination task from the electronic device to the device configured to coordinate media playback; and in accordance with a determination that the set of devices does not include a device configured to coordinate media playback, forgoing transferring the media playback coordination task. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic device comprises: means for receiving a request to initiate media playback on a set of devices that does not include the electronic device; means for, responsive to receiving the request, and while the electronic device is coordinating media playback, determining whether the set of devices includes a device configured to coordinate media playback; means for, in accordance with a determination that the set of devices includes a device configured to coordinate media playback, transferring a media playback coordination task from the electronic device to the device configured to coordinate media playback; and means for, in accordance with a determination that the set of devices does not include a device configured to coordinate media playback, forgoing transferring the media playback coordination task. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device, wherein the electronic device is a first device, the one or more programs including instructions for: receiving a request to initiate media playback on a set of devices that does not include the first device; in response to receiving the request, and while the first device is coordinating media playback, determining whether the set of devices includes a device configured to coordinate media playback; in accordance with a determination that the set of devices includes a device configured to coordinate media playback, transferring a media playback coordination task from the first device to the device configured to coordinate media playback; and in accordance with a determination that the set of devices does not include a device configured to coordinate media playback, forgoing transferring the media playback coordination task. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at a device. The method comprises: receiving a request to initiate media playback on a set of devices connected to the device; in response to receiving the request, and while the device is coordinating media playback, determining, for each device of a plurality of devices configured to coordinate media playback and connected to the set of devices, one or more device characteristics; selecting, based at least in part on the one or more characteristics of each device of the plurality of devices configured to coordinate media playback, a primary device from among the plurality of devices configured to coordinate media playback; and transferring a media playback coordination task from the device to the primary device configured to coordinate media playback. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device, the one or more programs including instructions for: receiving a request to initiate media playback on a set of devices connected to the device; in response to receiving the request, and while the device is coordinating media playback, determining, for each device of a plurality of devices configured to coordinate media playback and connected to the set of devices, one or more device characteristics; selecting, based at least in part on the one or more characteristics of each device of the plurality of devices configured to coordinate media playback, a primary device from among the plurality of devices configured to coordinate media playback; and transferring a media playback coordination task from the device to the primary device configured to coordinate media playback. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic device comprises: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: receiving a request to initiate media playback on a set of devices connected to the device; in response to receiving the request, and while the device is coordinating media playback, determining, for each device of a plurality of devices configured to coordinate media playback and connected to the set of devices, one or more device characteristics; selecting, based at least in part on the one or more characteristics of each device of the plurality of devices configured to coordinate media playback, a primary device from among the plurality of devices configured to coordinate media playback; and transferring a media playback coordination task from the device to the primary device configured to coordinate media playback. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic device comprises: means for receiving a request to initiate media playback on a set of devices connected to the device; means for, responsive to receiving the request, and while the device is coordinating media playback, determining, for each device of a plurality of devices configured to coordinate media playback and connected to the set of devices, one or more device characteristics; means for selecting, based at least in part on the one or more characteristics of each device of the plurality of devices configured to coordinate media playback, a primary device from among the plurality of devices configured to coordinate media playback; and means for transferring a media playback coordination task from the device to the primary device configured to coordinate media playback. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device, the one or more programs including instructions for: receiving a request to initiate media playback on a set of devices connected to the device; in response to receiving the request, and while the device is coordinating media playback, determining, for each device of a plurality of devices configured to coordinate media playback and connected to the set of devices, one or more device characteristics; selecting, based at least in part on the one or more characteristics of each device of the plurality of devices configured to coordinate media playback, a primary device from among the plurality of devices configured to coordinate media playback; and transferring a media playback coordination task from the device to the primary device configured to coordinate media playback. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at a first device with a display. The method comprises: establishing a communication link with a second device; subsequent to establishing the communication link with the second device, initiating a configuration process for configuring the second device; during the configuration process: displaying, on the display, a configuration user interface that includes a prompt to select a location; receiving user input selection of a location; and in response to receiving the user input, configuring the second device to be associated with the location; detecting an audio tone signal indicative of a pairing handshake with the second device, wherein the audio tone signal is out-of-band to the communication link; and in accordance with detecting the audio tone signal, proceeding to a next step in the configuration process for configuring the second device. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device with a display, wherein the electronic device is a first device, the one or more programs including instructions for: establishing a communication link with a second device; subsequent to establishing the communication link with the second device, initiating a configuration process for configuring the second device; during the configuration process: displaying, on the display, a configuration user interface that includes a prompt to select a location; receiving user input selection of a location; and in response to receiving the user input, configuring the second device to be associated with the location; detecting an audio tone signal indicative of a pairing handshake with the second device, wherein the audio tone signal is out-of-band to the communication link; and in accordance with detecting the audio tone signal, proceeding to a next step in the configuration process for configuring the second device. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic device comprises: a display; one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: establishing a communication link with a second device; subsequent to establishing the communication link with the second device, initiating a configuration process for configuring the second device; during the configuration process: displaying, on the display, a configuration user interface that includes a prompt to select a location; receiving user input selection of a location; and in response to receiving the user input, configuring the second device to be associated with the location; detecting an audio tone signal indicative of a pairing handshake with the second device, wherein the audio tone signal is out-of-band to the communication link; and in accordance with detecting the audio tone signal, proceeding to a next step in the configuration process for configuring the second device. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic device comprises: a display; means for establishing a communication link with a second device; subsequent to establishing the communication link with the second device, means for initiating a configuration process for configuring the second device; during the configuration process: means for displaying, on the display, a configuration user interface that includes a prompt to select a location; means for receiving user input selection of a location; and means for, responsive to receiving the user input, configuring the second device to be associated with the location; means for detecting an audio tone signal indicative of a pairing handshake with the second device, wherein the audio tone signal is out-of-band to the communication link; and in accordance with detecting the audio tone signal, means for proceeding to a next step in the configuration process for configuring the second device. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device with a display, the one or more programs including instructions for: establishing a communication link with a second device; subsequent to establishing the communication link with the second device, initiating a configuration process for configuring the second device; during the configuration process: displaying, on the display, a configuration user interface that includes a prompt to select a location; receiving user input selection of a location; and in response to receiving the user input, configuring the second device to be associated with the location; detecting an audio tone signal indicative of a pairing handshake with the second device, wherein the audio tone signal is out-of-band to the communication link; and in accordance with detecting the audio tone signal, proceeding to a next step in the configuration process for configuring the second device. 
     Executable instructions for performing these functions are, optionally, included in a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium or other computer program product configured for execution by one or more processors. Executable instructions for performing these functions are, optionally, included in a transitory computer-readable storage medium or other computer program product configured for execution by one or more processors. 
     Thus, devices are provided with faster, more efficient methods and interfaces for managing media playback devices, thereby increasing the effectiveness, efficiency, and user satisfaction with such devices. Such methods and interfaces may complement or replace other methods for managing media playback devices. 
    
    
     
       DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES 
       For a better understanding of the various described embodiments, reference should be made to the Description of Embodiments below, in conjunction with the following drawings in which like reference numerals refer to corresponding parts throughout the figures. 
         FIG. 1A  is a block diagram illustrating a portable multifunction device with a touch-sensitive display in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG. 1B  is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for event handling in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG. 2  illustrates a portable multifunction device having a touch screen in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG. 3  is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG. 4A  illustrates an exemplary user interface for a menu of applications on a portable multifunction device in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG. 4B  illustrates an exemplary user interface for a multifunction device with a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG. 5A  illustrates a personal electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG. 5B  is a block diagram illustrating a personal electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 5C-5D  illustrate exemplary components of a personal electronic device having a touch-sensitive display and intensity sensors in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 5E-5H  illustrate exemplary components and user interfaces of a personal electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG. 5I  illustrates an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG. 5J  is a block diagram illustrating an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 6A-6AR  illustrate exemplary techniques and user interfaces for playing back media in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 7A-7D  is a flow diagram illustrating a process for playing back media in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 8A-8P  illustrate exemplary techniques and user interfaces for playing back media in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 9A-9C  is a flow diagram illustrating a process for playing back media in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 10A-10O  illustrate exemplary techniques and user interfaces for in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 11A-11D  is a flow diagram illustrating a process for displaying content in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 12A-12AM  illustrate exemplary techniques and user interfaces for viewing media information in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 13A-13F  is a flow diagram illustrating a process for viewing media information in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 14A-14T  illustrate exemplary techniques and user interfaces for controlling an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 15A-15C  is a flow diagram illustrating a process for controlling an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 16A-16P  illustrate exemplary techniques and user interfaces for managing a playback queue in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 17A-17C  is a flow diagram illustrating a process for managing a playback queue in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 18A-18C  is a flow diagram illustrating a process for managing a playback queue in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 19A-19AL  illustrate exemplary techniques and user interfaces for configuring an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 20A-20C  is a flow diagram illustrating a process for configuring an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 21A-21I  illustrate exemplary techniques and user interfaces for adjusting an audible output of an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 22A-22B  is a flow diagram illustrating a process for adjusting an audible output of an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 23A-23K  illustrate exemplary techniques and user interfaces for managing a playback queue in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 24A-24B  is a flow diagram illustrating a process for managing a playback queue in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 25A-25I  illustrate exemplary techniques and user interfaces for playing back media in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 26A-26B  is a flow diagram illustrating a process for playing back media in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 27A-27E  illustrate exemplary techniques and user interfaces for providing access to an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 28A-28C  is a flow diagram illustrating a process for providing access to an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 29A-29I  illustrate exemplary techniques and user interfaces for managing media playback in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 30A-30C  is a flow diagram illustrating a process for managing media playback in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 31A-31N  illustrate exemplary techniques and user interfaces for providing output in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 32A-32C  is a flow diagram illustrating a process for providing output in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 33A-33G  illustrate exemplary techniques and user interfaces for controlling media playback in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 34A-34B  is a flow diagram illustrating a process for controlling media playback in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 35A-35J  illustrate exemplary techniques and user interfaces for managing media playback in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 36A-36C  is a flow diagram illustrating a process for managing media playback in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 37A-37D  illustrate exemplary techniques and user interfaces for controlling media playback in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 38A-38B  is a flow diagram illustrating a process for managing media playback in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 39A-39C  is a flow diagram illustrating a process for configuring an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. 
     
    
    
     DESCRIPTION OF EMBODIMENTS 
     The following description sets forth exemplary methods, parameters, and the like. It should be recognized, however, that such description is not intended as a limitation on the scope of the present disclosure but is instead provided as a description of exemplary embodiments. 
     There is a need for electronic devices that provide efficient methods and interfaces for managing media playback devices. For example, methods and techniques for transferring playback between devices are described below. Such techniques can reduce the cognitive burden on a user who accesses event notifications, thereby enhancing productivity. Further, such techniques can reduce processor and battery power otherwise wasted on redundant user inputs. 
     Below,  FIGS. 1A-1B, 2, 3, 4A-4B, and 5A-5H  provide a description of exemplary devices for performing the techniques for managing event notifications.  FIGS. 6A-6AR  illustrate exemplary techniques and user interfaces for playing back media in accordance with some embodiments.  FIGS. 7A-7D  is a flow diagram illustrating a process for playing back media in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in  FIGS. 6A-6AR  are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIGS. 7A-7D .  FIGS. 8A-8P  illustrate exemplary techniques and user interfaces for playing back media in accordance with some embodiments.  FIGS. 9A-9C  is a flow diagram illustrating a process for playing back media in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in  FIGS. 8A-8P  are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIGS. 9A-9C .  FIGS. 10A-10O  illustrate exemplary techniques and user interfaces for in accordance with some embodiments.  FIGS. 11A-11D  is a flow diagram illustrating a process for displaying content in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in  FIGS. 10A-10O  are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIGS. 11A-11D .  FIGS. 12A-12AM  illustrate exemplary techniques and user interfaces for viewing media information in accordance with some embodiments.  FIGS. 13A-13F  is a flow diagram illustrating a process for viewing media information in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in  FIGS. 12A-12AM  are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in FIGS.  13 A- 13 F.  FIGS. 14A-14T  illustrate exemplary techniques and user interfaces for controlling an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.  FIGS. 15A-15C  is a flow diagram illustrating a process for controlling an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in  FIGS. 14A-14T  are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIGS. 15A-15C .  FIGS. 16A-16P  illustrate exemplary techniques and user interfaces for managing a playback queue in accordance with some embodiments.  FIGS. 17A-17C  is a flow diagram illustrating a process for managing a playback queue in accordance with some embodiments.  FIGS. 18A-18C  is a flow diagram illustrating a process for managing a playback queue in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in  FIGS. 16A-16P  are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIGS. 17A-17C and 18A-18C .  FIGS. 19A-19AL  illustrate exemplary techniques and user interfaces for configuring an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.  FIGS. 20A-20C  is a flow diagram illustrating a process for configuring an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in  FIGS. 19A-19AL  are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIGS. 20A-20C .  FIGS. 21A-21I  illustrate exemplary techniques and user interfaces for adjusting an audible output of an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.  FIGS. 22A-22B  is a flow diagram illustrating a process for adjusting an audible output of an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in  FIGS. 21A-21I  are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIGS. 22A-22B .  FIGS. 23A-23K  illustrate exemplary techniques and user interfaces for managing a playback queue in accordance with some embodiments.  FIGS. 24A-24B  is a flow diagram illustrating a process for managing a playback queue in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in  FIGS. 23A-23K  are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  24 A- 24 B.  FIGS. 25A-25I  illustrate exemplary techniques and user interfaces for playing back media in accordance with some embodiments.  FIGS. 26A-26B  is a flow diagram illustrating a process for playing back media in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in  FIGS. 25A-25I  are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIGS. 26A-26B .  FIGS. 27A-27E  illustrate exemplary techniques and user interfaces for providing access to an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.  FIGS. 28A-28C  is a flow diagram illustrating a process for providing access to an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in  FIGS. 27A-27E  are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIGS. 28A-28C .  FIGS. 29A-29I  illustrate exemplary techniques and user interfaces for managing media playback in accordance with some embodiments.  FIGS. 30A-30C  is a flow diagram illustrating a process for managing media playback in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in  FIGS. 29A-29I  are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIGS. 30A-30C .  FIGS. 31A-31N  illustrate exemplary techniques and user interfaces for providing output in accordance with some embodiments.  FIGS. 32A-32C  is a flow diagram illustrating a process for providing output in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in  FIGS. 31A-31N  are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIGS. 32A-32C .  FIGS. 33A-33G  illustrate exemplary techniques and user interfaces for controlling media playback in accordance with some embodiments.  FIGS. 34A-34B  is a flow diagram illustrating a process for controlling media playback in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in  FIGS. 33A-33G  are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIGS. 34A-34B .  FIGS. 35A-35J  illustrate exemplary techniques and user interfaces for managing media playback in accordance with some embodiments.  FIGS. 36A-36C  is a flow diagram illustrating a process for managing media playback in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in  FIGS. 35A-35J  are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIGS. 36A-36C .  FIGS. 37A-37D  illustrate exemplary techniques and user interfaces for managing media playback in accordance with some embodiments.  FIGS. 38A-38B  is a flow diagram illustrating a process for managing media playback in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in  FIGS. 37A-37D  are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIGS. 38A-38B . 
     Although the following description uses terms “first,” “second,” etc. to describe various elements, these elements should not be limited by the terms. These terms are only used to distinguish one element from another. For example, a first touch could be termed a second touch, and, similarly, a second touch could be termed a first touch, without departing from the scope of the various described embodiments. The first touch and the second touch are both touches, but they are not the same touch. 
     The terminology used in the description of the various described embodiments herein is for the purpose of describing particular embodiments only and is not intended to be limiting. As used in the description of the various described embodiments and the appended claims, the singular forms “a,” “an,” and “the” are intended to include the plural forms as well, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise. It will also be understood that the term “and/or” as used herein refers to and encompasses any and all possible combinations of one or more of the associated listed items. It will be further understood that the terms “includes,” “including,” “comprises,” and/or “comprising,” when used in this specification, specify the presence of stated features, integers, steps, operations, elements, and/or components, but do not preclude the presence or addition of one or more other features, integers, steps, operations, elements, components, and/or groups thereof. 
     The term “if” is, optionally, construed to mean “when” or “upon” or “in response to determining” or “in response to detecting,” depending on the context. Similarly, the phrase “if it is determined” or “if [a stated condition or event] is detected” is, optionally, construed to mean “upon determining” or “in response to determining” or “upon detecting [the stated condition or event]” or “in response to detecting [the stated condition or event],” depending on the context. 
     Embodiments of electronic devices, user interfaces for such devices, and associated processes for using such devices are described. In some embodiments, the device is a portable communications device, such as a mobile telephone, that also contains other functions, such as PDA and/or music player functions. Exemplary embodiments of portable multifunction devices include, without limitation, the iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif. Other portable electronic devices, such as laptops or tablet computers with touch-sensitive surfaces (e.g., touch screen displays and/or touchpads), are, optionally, used. It should also be understood that, in some embodiments, the device is not a portable communications device, but is a desktop computer with a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touch screen display and/or a touchpad). 
     In the discussion that follows, an electronic device that includes a display and a touch-sensitive surface is described. It should be understood, however, that the electronic device optionally includes one or more other physical user-interface devices, such as a physical keyboard, a mouse, and/or a joystick. 
     The device typically supports a variety of applications, such as one or more of the following: a drawing application, a presentation application, a word processing application, a website creation application, a disk authoring application, a spreadsheet application, a gaming application, a telephone application, a video conferencing application, an e-mail application, an instant messaging application, a workout support application, a photo management application, a digital camera application, a digital video camera application, a web browsing application, a digital music player application, and/or a digital video player application. 
     The various applications that are executed on the device optionally use at least one common physical user-interface device, such as the touch-sensitive surface. One or more functions of the touch-sensitive surface as well as corresponding information displayed on the device are, optionally, adjusted and/or varied from one application to the next and/or within a respective application. In this way, a common physical architecture (such as the touch-sensitive surface) of the device optionally supports the variety of applications with user interfaces that are intuitive and transparent to the user. 
     Attention is now directed toward embodiments of portable devices with touch-sensitive displays.  FIG. 1A  is a block diagram illustrating portable multifunction device  100  with touch-sensitive display system  112  in accordance with some embodiments. Touch-sensitive display  112  is sometimes called a “touch screen” for convenience and is sometimes known as or called a “touch-sensitive display system.” Device  100  includes memory  102  (which optionally includes one or more computer-readable storage mediums), memory controller  122 , one or more processing units (CPUs)  120 , peripherals interface  118 , RF circuitry  108 , audio circuitry  110 , speaker  111 , microphone  113 , input/output (I/O) subsystem  106 , other input control devices  116 , and external port  124 . Device  100  optionally includes one or more optical sensors  164 . Device  100  optionally includes one or more contact intensity sensors  165  for detecting intensity of contacts on device  100  (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system  112  of device  100 ). Device  100  optionally includes one or more tactile output generators  167  for generating tactile outputs on device  100  (e.g., generating tactile outputs on a touch-sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system  112  of device  100  or touchpad  355  of device  300 ). These components optionally communicate over one or more communication buses or signal lines  103 . 
     As used in the specification and claims, the term “intensity” of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface refers to the force or pressure (force per unit area) of a contact (e.g., a finger contact) on the touch-sensitive surface, or to a substitute (proxy) for the force or pressure of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface. The intensity of a contact has a range of values that includes at least four distinct values and more typically includes hundreds of distinct values (e.g., at least 256). Intensity of a contact is, optionally, determined (or measured) using various approaches and various sensors or combinations of sensors. For example, one or more force sensors underneath or adjacent to the touch-sensitive surface are, optionally, used to measure force at various points on the touch-sensitive surface. In some implementations, force measurements from multiple force sensors are combined (e.g., a weighted average) to determine an estimated force of a contact. Similarly, a pressure-sensitive tip of a stylus is, optionally, used to determine a pressure of the stylus on the touch-sensitive surface. Alternatively, the size of the contact area detected on the touch-sensitive surface and/or changes thereto, the capacitance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to the contact and/or changes thereto, and/or the resistance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to the contact and/or changes thereto are, optionally, used as a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In some implementations, the substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are used directly to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is described in units corresponding to the substitute measurements). In some implementations, the substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are converted to an estimated force or pressure, and the estimated force or pressure is used to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is a pressure threshold measured in units of pressure). Using the intensity of a contact as an attribute of a user input allows for user access to additional device functionality that may otherwise not be accessible by the user on a reduced-size device with limited real estate for displaying affordances (e.g., on a touch-sensitive display) and/or receiving user input (e.g., via a touch-sensitive display, a touch-sensitive surface, or a physical/mechanical control such as a knob or a button). 
     As used in the specification and claims, the term “tactile output” refers to physical displacement of a device relative to a previous position of the device, physical displacement of a component (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface) of a device relative to another component (e.g., housing) of the device, or displacement of the component relative to a center of mass of the device that will be detected by a user with the user&#39;s sense of touch. For example, in situations where the device or the component of the device is in contact with a surface of a user that is sensitive to touch (e.g., a finger, palm, or other part of a user&#39;s hand), the tactile output generated by the physical displacement will be interpreted by the user as a tactile sensation corresponding to a perceived change in physical characteristics of the device or the component of the device. For example, movement of a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touch-sensitive display or trackpad) is, optionally, interpreted by the user as a “down click” or “up click” of a physical actuator button. In some cases, a user will feel a tactile sensation such as an “down click” or “up click” even when there is no movement of a physical actuator button associated with the touch-sensitive surface that is physically pressed (e.g., displaced) by the user&#39;s movements. As another example, movement of the touch-sensitive surface is, optionally, interpreted or sensed by the user as “roughness” of the touch-sensitive surface, even when there is no change in smoothness of the touch-sensitive surface. While such interpretations of touch by a user will be subject to the individualized sensory perceptions of the user, there are many sensory perceptions of touch that are common to a large majority of users. Thus, when a tactile output is described as corresponding to a particular sensory perception of a user (e.g., an “up click,” a “down click,” “roughness”), unless otherwise stated, the generated tactile output corresponds to physical displacement of the device or a component thereof that will generate the described sensory perception for a typical (or average) user. 
     It should be appreciated that device  100  is only one example of a portable multifunction device, and that device  100  optionally has more or fewer components than shown, optionally combines two or more components, or optionally has a different configuration or arrangement of the components. The various components shown in  FIG. 1A  are implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of both hardware and software, including one or more signal processing and/or application-specific integrated circuits. 
     Memory  102  optionally includes high-speed random access memory and optionally also includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state memory devices. Memory controller  122  optionally controls access to memory  102  by other components of device  100 . 
     Peripherals interface  118  can be used to couple input and output peripherals of the device to CPU  120  and memory  102 . The one or more processors  120  run or execute various software programs and/or sets of instructions stored in memory  102  to perform various functions for device  100  and to process data. In some embodiments, peripherals interface  118 , CPU  120 , and memory controller  122  are, optionally, implemented on a single chip, such as chip  104 . In some other embodiments, they are, optionally, implemented on separate chips. 
     RF (radio frequency) circuitry  108  receives and sends RF signals, also called electromagnetic signals. RF circuitry  108  converts electrical signals to/from electromagnetic signals and communicates with communications networks and other communications devices via the electromagnetic signals. RF circuitry  108  optionally includes well-known circuitry for performing these functions, including but not limited to an antenna system, an RF transceiver, one or more amplifiers, a tuner, one or more oscillators, a digital signal processor, a CODEC chipset, a subscriber identity module (SIM) card, memory, and so forth. RF circuitry  108  optionally communicates with networks, such as the Internet, also referred to as the World Wide Web (WWW), an intranet and/or a wireless network, such as a cellular telephone network, a wireless local area network (LAN) and/or a metropolitan area network (MAN), and other devices by wireless communication. The RF circuitry  108  optionally includes well-known circuitry for detecting near field communication (NFC) fields, such as by a short-range communication radio. The wireless communication optionally uses any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols, and technologies, including but not limited to Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM), Enhanced Data GSM Environment (EDGE), high-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA), high-speed unlink packet access (HSUPA), Evolution, Data-Only (EV-DO), HSPA, HSPA+, Dual-Cell HSPA (DC-HSPDA), long term evolution (LTE), near field communication (NFC), wideband code division multiple access (W-CDMA), code division multiple access (CDMA), time division multiple access (TDMA), Bluetooth, Bluetooth Low Energy (BTLE), Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) (e.g., IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n, and/or IEEE 802.11ac), voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP), Wi-MAX, a protocol for e-mail (e.g., Internet message access protocol (IMAP) and/or post office protocol (POP)), instant messaging (e.g., extensible messaging and presence protocol (XMPP), Session Initiation Protocol for Instant Messaging and Presence Leveraging Extensions (SIMPLE), Instant Messaging and Presence Service (IMPS)), and/or Short Message Service (SMS), or any other suitable communication protocol, including communication protocols not yet developed as of the filing date of this document. 
     Audio circuitry  110 , speaker  111 , and microphone  113  provide an audio interface between a user and device  100 . Audio circuitry  110  receives audio data from peripherals interface  118 , converts the audio data to an electrical signal, and transmits the electrical signal to speaker  111 . Speaker  111  converts the electrical signal to human-audible sound waves. Audio circuitry  110  also receives electrical signals converted by microphone  113  from sound waves. Audio circuitry  110  converts the electrical signal to audio data and transmits the audio data to peripherals interface  118  for processing. Audio data is, optionally, retrieved from and/or transmitted to memory  102  and/or RF circuitry  108  by peripherals interface  118 . In some embodiments, audio circuitry  110  also includes a headset jack (e.g.,  212 ,  FIG. 2 ). The headset jack provides an interface between audio circuitry  110  and removable audio input/output peripherals, such as output-only headphones or a headset with both output (e.g., a headphone for one or both ears) and input (e.g., a microphone). 
     I/O subsystem  106  couples input/output peripherals on device  100 , such as touch screen  112  and other input control devices  116 , to peripherals interface  118 . I/O subsystem  106  optionally includes display controller  156 , optical sensor controller  158 , intensity sensor controller  159 , haptic feedback controller  161 , and one or more input controllers  160  for other input or control devices. The one or more input controllers  160  receive/send electrical signals from/to other input control devices  116 . The other input control devices  116  optionally include physical buttons (e.g., push buttons, rocker buttons, etc.), dials, slider switches, joysticks, click wheels, and so forth. In some alternate embodiments, input controller(s)  160  are, optionally, coupled to any (or none) of the following: a keyboard, an infrared port, a USB port, and a pointer device such as a mouse. The one or more buttons (e.g.,  208 ,  FIG. 2 ) optionally include an up/down button for volume control of speaker  111  and/or microphone  113 . The one or more buttons optionally include a push button (e.g.,  206 ,  FIG. 2 ). 
     A quick press of the push button optionally disengages a lock of touch screen  112  or optionally begins a process that uses gestures on the touch screen to unlock the device, as described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/322,549, “Unlocking a Device by Performing Gestures on an Unlock Image,” filed Dec. 23, 2005, U.S. Pat. No. 7,657,849, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. A longer press of the push button (e.g.,  206 ) optionally turns power to device  100  on or off. The functionality of one or more of the buttons are, optionally, user-customizable. Touch screen  112  is used to implement virtual or soft buttons and one or more soft keyboards. 
     Touch-sensitive display  112  provides an input interface and an output interface between the device and a user. Display controller  156  receives and/or sends electrical signals from/to touch screen  112 . Touch screen  112  displays visual output to the user. The visual output optionally includes graphics, text, icons, video, and any combination thereof (collectively termed “graphics”). In some embodiments, some or all of the visual output optionally corresponds to user-interface objects. 
     Touch screen  112  has a touch-sensitive surface, sensor, or set of sensors that accepts input from the user based on haptic and/or tactile contact. Touch screen  112  and display controller  156  (along with any associated modules and/or sets of instructions in memory  102 ) detect contact (and any movement or breaking of the contact) on touch screen  112  and convert the detected contact into interaction with user-interface objects (e.g., one or more soft keys, icons, web pages, or images) that are displayed on touch screen  112 . In an exemplary embodiment, a point of contact between touch screen  112  and the user corresponds to a finger of the user. 
     Touch screen  112  optionally uses LCD (liquid crystal display) technology, LPD (light emitting polymer display) technology, or LED (light emitting diode) technology, although other display technologies are used in other embodiments. Touch screen  112  and display controller  156  optionally detect contact and any movement or breaking thereof using any of a plurality of touch sensing technologies now known or later developed, including but not limited to capacitive, resistive, infrared, and surface acoustic wave technologies, as well as other proximity sensor arrays or other elements for determining one or more points of contact with touch screen  112 . In an exemplary embodiment, projected mutual capacitance sensing technology is used, such as that found in the iPhone® and iPod Touch® from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif. 
     A touch-sensitive display in some embodiments of touch screen  112  is, optionally, analogous to the multi-touch sensitive touchpads described in the following U.S. Pat. No. 6,323,846 (Westerman et al.), U.S. Pat. No. 6,570,557 (Westerman et al.), and/or U.S. Pat. No. 6,677,932 (Westerman), and/or U.S. Patent Publication 2002/0015024A1, each of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. However, touch screen  112  displays visual output from device  100 , whereas touch-sensitive touchpads do not provide visual output. 
     A touch-sensitive display in some embodiments of touch screen  112  is described in the following applications: (1) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/381,313, “Multipoint Touch Surface Controller,” filed May 2, 2006; (2) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/840,862, “Multipoint Touchscreen,” filed May 6, 2004; (3) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/903,964, “Gestures For Touch Sensitive Input Devices,” filed Jul. 30, 2004; (4) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/048,264, “Gestures For Touch Sensitive Input Devices,” filed Jan. 31, 2005; (5) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/038,590, “Mode-Based Graphical User Interfaces For Touch Sensitive Input Devices,” filed Jan. 18, 2005; (6) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/228,758, “Virtual Input Device Placement On A Touch Screen User Interface,” filed Sep. 16, 2005; (7) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/228,700, “Operation Of A Computer With A Touch Screen Interface,” filed Sep. 16, 2005; (8) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/228,737, “Activating Virtual Keys Of A Touch-Screen Virtual Keyboard,” filed Sep. 16, 2005; and (9) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/367,749, “Multi-Functional Hand-Held Device,” filed Mar. 3, 2006. All of these applications are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety. 
     Touch screen  112  optionally has a video resolution in excess of 100 dpi. In some embodiments, the touch screen has a video resolution of approximately 160 dpi. The user optionally makes contact with touch screen  112  using any suitable object or appendage, such as a stylus, a finger, and so forth. In some embodiments, the user interface is designed to work primarily with finger-based contacts and gestures, which can be less precise than stylus-based input due to the larger area of contact of a finger on the touch screen. In some embodiments, the device translates the rough finger-based input into a precise pointer/cursor position or command for performing the actions desired by the user. 
     In some embodiments, in addition to the touch screen, device  100  optionally includes a touchpad (not shown) for activating or deactivating particular functions. In some embodiments, the touchpad is a touch-sensitive area of the device that, unlike the touch screen, does not display visual output. The touchpad is, optionally, a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from touch screen  112  or an extension of the touch-sensitive surface formed by the touch screen. 
     Device  100  also includes power system  162  for powering the various components. Power system  162  optionally includes a power management system, one or more power sources (e.g., battery, alternating current (AC)), a recharging system, a power failure detection circuit, a power converter or inverter, a power status indicator (e.g., a light-emitting diode (LED)) and any other components associated with the generation, management and distribution of power in portable devices. 
     Device  100  optionally also includes one or more optical sensors  164 .  FIG. 1A  shows an optical sensor coupled to optical sensor controller  158  in I/O subsystem  106 . Optical sensor  164  optionally includes charge-coupled device (CCD) or complementary metal-oxide semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistors. Optical sensor  164  receives light from the environment, projected through one or more lenses, and converts the light to data representing an image. In conjunction with imaging module  143  (also called a camera module), optical sensor  164  optionally captures still images or video. In some embodiments, an optical sensor is located on the back of device  100 , opposite touch screen display  112  on the front of the device so that the touch screen display is enabled for use as a viewfinder for still and/or video image acquisition. In some embodiments, an optical sensor is located on the front of the device so that the user&#39;s image is, optionally, obtained for video conferencing while the user views the other video conference participants on the touch screen display. In some embodiments, the position of optical sensor  164  can be changed by the user (e.g., by rotating the lens and the sensor in the device housing) so that a single optical sensor  164  is used along with the touch screen display for both video conferencing and still and/or video image acquisition. 
     Device  100  optionally also includes one or more contact intensity sensors  165 .  FIG. 1A  shows a contact intensity sensor coupled to intensity sensor controller  159  in I/O subsystem  106 . Contact intensity sensor  165  optionally includes one or more piezoresistive strain gauges, capacitive force sensors, electric force sensors, piezoelectric force sensors, optical force sensors, capacitive touch-sensitive surfaces, or other intensity sensors (e.g., sensors used to measure the force (or pressure) of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface). Contact intensity sensor  165  receives contact intensity information (e.g., pressure information or a proxy for pressure information) from the environment. In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensor is collocated with, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system  112 ). In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensor is located on the back of device  100 , opposite touch screen display  112 , which is located on the front of device  100 . 
     Device  100  optionally also includes one or more proximity sensors  166 .  FIG. 1A  shows proximity sensor  166  coupled to peripherals interface  118 . Alternately, proximity sensor  166  is, optionally, coupled to input controller  160  in I/O subsystem  106 . Proximity sensor  166  optionally performs as described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/241,839, “Proximity Detector In Handheld Device”; Ser. No. 11/240,788, “Proximity Detector In Handheld Device”; Ser. No. 11/620,702, “Using Ambient Light Sensor To Augment Proximity Sensor Output”; Ser. No. 11/586,862, “Automated Response To And Sensing Of User Activity In Portable Devices”; and Ser. No. 11/638,251, “Methods And Systems For Automatic Configuration Of Peripherals,” which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety. In some embodiments, the proximity sensor turns off and disables touch screen  112  when the multifunction device is placed near the user&#39;s ear (e.g., when the user is making a phone call). 
     Device  100  optionally also includes one or more tactile output generators  167 .  FIG. 1A  shows a tactile output generator coupled to haptic feedback controller  161  in I/O subsystem  106 . Tactile output generator  167  optionally includes one or more electroacoustic devices such as speakers or other audio components and/or electromechanical devices that convert energy into linear motion such as a motor, solenoid, electroactive polymer, piezoelectric actuator, electrostatic actuator, or other tactile output generating component (e.g., a component that converts electrical signals into tactile outputs on the device). Contact intensity sensor  165  receives tactile feedback generation instructions from haptic feedback module  133  and generates tactile outputs on device  100  that are capable of being sensed by a user of device  100 . In some embodiments, at least one tactile output generator is collocated with, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system  112 ) and, optionally, generates a tactile output by moving the touch-sensitive surface vertically (e.g., in/out of a surface of device  100 ) or laterally (e.g., back and forth in the same plane as a surface of device  100 ). In some embodiments, at least one tactile output generator sensor is located on the back of device  100 , opposite touch screen display  112 , which is located on the front of device  100 . 
     Device  100  optionally also includes one or more accelerometers  168 .  FIG. 1A  shows accelerometer  168  coupled to peripherals interface  118 . Alternately, accelerometer  168  is, optionally, coupled to an input controller  160  in I/O subsystem  106 . Accelerometer  168  optionally performs as described in U.S. Patent Publication No. 20050190059, “Acceleration-based Theft Detection System for Portable Electronic Devices,” and U.S. Patent Publication No. 20060017692, “Methods And Apparatuses For Operating A Portable Device Based On An Accelerometer,” both of which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety. In some embodiments, information is displayed on the touch screen display in a portrait view or a landscape view based on an analysis of data received from the one or more accelerometers. Device  100  optionally includes, in addition to accelerometer(s)  168 , a magnetometer (not shown) and a GPS (or GLONASS or other global navigation system) receiver (not shown) for obtaining information concerning the location and orientation (e.g., portrait or landscape) of device  100 . 
     In some embodiments, the software components stored in memory  102  include operating system  126 , communication module (or set of instructions)  128 , contact/motion module (or set of instructions)  130 , graphics module (or set of instructions)  132 , text input module (or set of instructions)  134 , Global Positioning System (GPS) module (or set of instructions)  135 , and applications (or sets of instructions)  136 . Furthermore, in some embodiments, memory  102  ( FIG. 1A ) or  370  ( FIG. 3 ) stores device/global internal state  157 , as shown in  FIGS. 1A and 3 . Device/global internal state  157  includes one or more of: active application state, indicating which applications, if any, are currently active; display state, indicating what applications, views or other information occupy various regions of touch screen display  112 ; sensor state, including information obtained from the device&#39;s various sensors and input control devices  116 ; and location information concerning the device&#39;s location and/or attitude. 
     Operating system  126  (e.g., Darwin, RTXC, LINUX, UNIX, OS X, iOS, WINDOWS, or an embedded operating system such as VxWorks) includes various software components and/or drivers for controlling and managing general system tasks (e.g., memory management, storage device control, power management, etc.) and facilitates communication between various hardware and software components. 
     Communication module  128  facilitates communication with other devices over one or more external ports  124  and also includes various software components for handling data received by RF circuitry  108  and/or external port  124 . External port  124  (e.g., Universal Serial Bus (USB), FIREWIRE, etc.) is adapted for coupling directly to other devices or indirectly over a network (e.g., the Internet, wireless LAN, etc.). In some embodiments, the external port is a multi-pin (e.g., 30-pin) connector that is the same as, or similar to and/or compatible with, the 30-pin connector used on iPod® (trademark of Apple Inc.) devices. 
     Contact/motion module  130  optionally detects contact with touch screen  112  (in conjunction with display controller  156 ) and other touch-sensitive devices (e.g., a touchpad or physical click wheel). Contact/motion module  130  includes various software components for performing various operations related to detection of contact, such as determining if contact has occurred (e.g., detecting a finger-down event), determining an intensity of the contact (e.g., the force or pressure of the contact or a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact), determining if there is movement of the contact and tracking the movement across the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., detecting one or more finger-dragging events), and determining if the contact has ceased (e.g., detecting a finger-up event or a break in contact). Contact/motion module  130  receives contact data from the touch-sensitive surface. Determining movement of the point of contact, which is represented by a series of contact data, optionally includes determining speed (magnitude), velocity (magnitude and direction), and/or an acceleration (a change in magnitude and/or direction) of the point of contact. These operations are, optionally, applied to single contacts (e.g., one finger contacts) or to multiple simultaneous contacts (e.g., “multitouch”/multiple finger contacts). In some embodiments, contact/motion module  130  and display controller  156  detect contact on a touchpad. 
     In some embodiments, contact/motion module  130  uses a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by a user (e.g., to determine whether a user has “clicked” on an icon). In some embodiments, at least a subset of the intensity thresholds are determined in accordance with software parameters (e.g., the intensity thresholds are not determined by the activation thresholds of particular physical actuators and can be adjusted without changing the physical hardware of device  100 ). For example, a mouse “click” threshold of a trackpad or touch screen display can be set to any of a large range of predefined threshold values without changing the trackpad or touch screen display hardware. Additionally, in some implementations, a user of the device is provided with software settings for adjusting one or more of the set of intensity thresholds (e.g., by adjusting individual intensity thresholds and/or by adjusting a plurality of intensity thresholds at once with a system-level click “intensity” parameter). 
     Contact/motion module  130  optionally detects a gesture input by a user. Different gestures on the touch-sensitive surface have different contact patterns (e.g., different motions, timings, and/or intensities of detected contacts). Thus, a gesture is, optionally, detected by detecting a particular contact pattern. For example, detecting a finger tap gesture includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting a finger-up (liftoff) event at the same position (or substantially the same position) as the finger-down event (e.g., at the position of an icon). As another example, detecting a finger swipe gesture on the touch-sensitive surface includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting one or more finger-dragging events, and subsequently followed by detecting a finger-up (liftoff) event. 
     Graphics module  132  includes various known software components for rendering and displaying graphics on touch screen  112  or other display, including components for changing the visual impact (e.g., brightness, transparency, saturation, contrast, or other visual property) of graphics that are displayed. As used herein, the term “graphics” includes any object that can be displayed to a user, including, without limitation, text, web pages, icons (such as user-interface objects including soft keys), digital images, videos, animations, and the like. 
     In some embodiments, graphics module  132  stores data representing graphics to be used. Each graphic is, optionally, assigned a corresponding code. Graphics module  132  receives, from applications etc., one or more codes specifying graphics to be displayed along with, if necessary, coordinate data and other graphic property data, and then generates screen image data to output to display controller  156 . 
     Haptic feedback module  133  includes various software components for generating instructions used by tactile output generator(s)  167  to produce tactile outputs at one or more locations on device  100  in response to user interactions with device  100 . 
     Text input module  134 , which is, optionally, a component of graphics module  132 , provides soft keyboards for entering text in various applications (e.g., contacts  137 , e-mail  140 , IM  141 , browser  147 , and any other application that needs text input). 
     GPS module  135  determines the location of the device and provides this information for use in various applications (e.g., to telephone  138  for use in location-based dialing; to camera  143  as picture/video metadata; and to applications that provide location-based services such as weather widgets, local yellow page widgets, and map/navigation widgets). 
     Applications  136  optionally include the following modules (or sets of instructions), or a subset or superset thereof:
         Contacts module  137  (sometimes called an address book or contact list);   Telephone module  138 ;   Video conference module  139 ;   E-mail client module  140 ;   Instant messaging (IM) module  141 ;   Workout support module  142 ;   Camera module  143  for still and/or video images;   Image management module  144 ;   Video player module;   Music player module;   Browser module  147 ;   Calendar module  148 ;   Widget modules  149 , which optionally include one or more of: weather widget  149 - 1 , stocks widget  149 - 2 , calculator widget  149 - 3 , alarm clock widget  149 - 4 , dictionary widget  149 - 5 , and other widgets obtained by the user, as well as user-created widgets  149 - 6 ;   Widget creator module  150  for making user-created widgets  149 - 6 ;   Search module  151 ;   Video and music player module  152 , which merges video player module and music player module;   Notes module  153 ;   Map module  154 ; and/or   Online video module  155 .       

     Examples of other applications  136  that are, optionally, stored in memory  102  include other word processing applications, other image editing applications, drawing applications, presentation applications, JAVA-enabled applications, encryption, digital rights management, voice recognition, and voice replication. 
     In conjunction with touch screen  112 , display controller  156 , contact/motion module  130 , graphics module  132 , and text input module  134 , contacts module  137  are, optionally, used to manage an address book or contact list (e.g., stored in application internal state  192  of contacts module  137  in memory  102  or memory  370 ), including: adding name(s) to the address book; deleting name(s) from the address book; associating telephone number(s), e-mail address(es), physical address(es) or other information with a name; associating an image with a name; categorizing and sorting names; providing telephone numbers or e-mail addresses to initiate and/or facilitate communications by telephone  138 , video conference module  139 , e-mail  140 , or IM  141 ; and so forth. 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , audio circuitry  110 , speaker  111 , microphone  113 , touch screen  112 , display controller  156 , contact/motion module  130 , graphics module  132 , and text input module  134 , telephone module  138  are optionally, used to enter a sequence of characters corresponding to a telephone number, access one or more telephone numbers in contacts module  137 , modify a telephone number that has been entered, dial a respective telephone number, conduct a conversation, and disconnect or hang up when the conversation is completed. As noted above, the wireless communication optionally uses any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols, and technologies. 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , audio circuitry  110 , speaker  111 , microphone  113 , touch screen  112 , display controller  156 , optical sensor  164 , optical sensor controller  158 , contact/motion module  130 , graphics module  132 , text input module  134 , contacts module  137 , and telephone module  138 , video conference module  139  includes executable instructions to initiate, conduct, and terminate a video conference between a user and one or more other participants in accordance with user instructions. 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , touch screen  112 , display controller  156 , contact/motion module  130 , graphics module  132 , and text input module  134 , e-mail client module  140  includes executable instructions to create, send, receive, and manage e-mail in response to user instructions. In conjunction with image management module  144 , e-mail client module  140  makes it very easy to create and send e-mails with still or video images taken with camera module  143 . 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , touch screen  112 , display controller  156 , contact/motion module  130 , graphics module  132 , and text input module  134 , the instant messaging module  141  includes executable instructions to enter a sequence of characters corresponding to an instant message, to modify previously entered characters, to transmit a respective instant message (for example, using a Short Message Service (SMS) or Multimedia Message Service (MMS) protocol for telephony-based instant messages or using XMPP, SIMPLE, or IMPS for Internet-based instant messages), to receive instant messages, and to view received instant messages. In some embodiments, transmitted and/or received instant messages optionally include graphics, photos, audio files, video files and/or other attachments as are supported in an MMS and/or an Enhanced Messaging Service (EMS). As used herein, “instant messaging” refers to both telephony-based messages (e.g., messages sent using SMS or MMS) and Internet-based messages (e.g., messages sent using XMPP, SIMPLE, or IMPS). 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , touch screen  112 , display controller  156 , contact/motion module  130 , graphics module  132 , text input module  134 , GPS module  135 , map module  154 , and music player module, workout support module  142  includes executable instructions to create workouts (e.g., with time, distance, and/or calorie burning goals); communicate with workout sensors (sports devices); receive workout sensor data; calibrate sensors used to monitor a workout; select and play music for a workout; and display, store, and transmit workout data. 
     In conjunction with touch screen  112 , display controller  156 , optical sensor(s)  164 , optical sensor controller  158 , contact/motion module  130 , graphics module  132 , and image management module  144 , camera module  143  includes executable instructions to capture still images or video (including a video stream) and store them into memory  102 , modify characteristics of a still image or video, or delete a still image or video from memory  102 . 
     In conjunction with touch screen  112 , display controller  156 , contact/motion module  130 , graphics module  132 , text input module  134 , and camera module  143 , image management module  144  includes executable instructions to arrange, modify (e.g., edit), or otherwise manipulate, label, delete, present (e.g., in a digital slide show or album), and store still and/or video images. 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , touch screen  112 , display controller  156 , contact/motion module  130 , graphics module  132 , and text input module  134 , browser module  147  includes executable instructions to browse the Internet in accordance with user instructions, including searching, linking to, receiving, and displaying web pages or portions thereof, as well as attachments and other files linked to web pages. 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , touch screen  112 , display controller  156 , contact/motion module  130 , graphics module  132 , text input module  134 , e-mail client module  140 , and browser module  147 , calendar module  148  includes executable instructions to create, display, modify, and store calendars and data associated with calendars (e.g., calendar entries, to-do lists, etc.) in accordance with user instructions. 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , touch screen  112 , display controller  156 , contact/motion module  130 , graphics module  132 , text input module  134 , and browser module  147 , widget modules  149  are mini-applications that are, optionally, downloaded and used by a user (e.g., weather widget  149 - 1 , stocks widget  149 - 2 , calculator widget  149 - 3 , alarm clock widget  149 - 4 , and dictionary widget  149 - 5 ) or created by the user (e.g., user-created widget  149 - 6 ). In some embodiments, a widget includes an HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) file, a CSS (Cascading Style Sheets) file, and a JavaScript file. In some embodiments, a widget includes an XML (Extensible Markup Language) file and a JavaScript file (e.g., Yahoo! Widgets). 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , touch screen  112 , display controller  156 , contact/motion module  130 , graphics module  132 , text input module  134 , and browser module  147 , the widget creator module  150  are, optionally, used by a user to create widgets (e.g., turning a user-specified portion of a web page into a widget). 
     In conjunction with touch screen  112 , display controller  156 , contact/motion module  130 , graphics module  132 , and text input module  134 , search module  151  includes executable instructions to search for text, music, sound, image, video, and/or other files in memory  102  that match one or more search criteria (e.g., one or more user-specified search terms) in accordance with user instructions. 
     In conjunction with touch screen  112 , display controller  156 , contact/motion module  130 , graphics module  132 , audio circuitry  110 , speaker  111 , RF circuitry  108 , and browser module  147 , video and music player module  152  includes executable instructions that allow the user to download and play back recorded music and other sound files stored in one or more file formats, such as MP3 or AAC files, and executable instructions to display, present, or otherwise play back videos (e.g., on touch screen  112  or on an external, connected display via external port  124 ). In some embodiments, device  100  optionally includes the functionality of an MP3 player, such as an iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.). 
     In conjunction with touch screen  112 , display controller  156 , contact/motion module  130 , graphics module  132 , and text input module  134 , notes module  153  includes executable instructions to create and manage notes, to-do lists, and the like in accordance with user instructions. 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , touch screen  112 , display controller  156 , contact/motion module  130 , graphics module  132 , text input module  134 , GPS module  135 , and browser module  147 , map module  154  are, optionally, used to receive, display, modify, and store maps and data associated with maps (e.g., driving directions, data on stores and other points of interest at or near a particular location, and other location-based data) in accordance with user instructions. 
     In conjunction with touch screen  112 , display controller  156 , contact/motion module  130 , graphics module  132 , audio circuitry  110 , speaker  111 , RF circuitry  108 , text input module  134 , e-mail client module  140 , and browser module  147 , online video module  155  includes instructions that allow the user to access, browse, receive (e.g., by streaming and/or download), play back (e.g., on the touch screen or on an external, connected display via external port  124 ), send an e-mail with a link to a particular online video, and otherwise manage online videos in one or more file formats, such as H.264. In some embodiments, instant messaging module  141 , rather than e-mail client module  140 , is used to send a link to a particular online video. Additional description of the online video application can be found in U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 60/936,562, “Portable Multifunction Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Playing Online Videos,” filed Jun. 20, 2007, and U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/968,067, “Portable Multifunction Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Playing Online Videos,” filed Dec. 31, 2007, the contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety. 
     Each of the above-identified modules and applications corresponds to a set of executable instructions for performing one or more functions described above and the methods described in this application (e.g., the computer-implemented methods and other information processing methods described herein). These modules (e.g., sets of instructions) need not be implemented as separate software programs, procedures, or modules, and thus various subsets of these modules are, optionally, combined or otherwise rearranged in various embodiments. For example, video player module is, optionally, combined with music player module into a single module (e.g., video and music player module  152 ,  FIG. 1A ). In some embodiments, memory  102  optionally stores a subset of the modules and data structures identified above. Furthermore, memory  102  optionally stores additional modules and data structures not described above. 
     In some embodiments, device  100  is a device where operation of a predefined set of functions on the device is performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or a touchpad. By using a touch screen and/or a touchpad as the primary input control device for operation of device  100 , the number of physical input control devices (such as push buttons, dials, and the like) on device  100  is, optionally, reduced. 
     The predefined set of functions that are performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or a touchpad optionally include navigation between user interfaces. In some embodiments, the touchpad, when touched by the user, navigates device  100  to a main, home, or root menu from any user interface that is displayed on device  100 . In such embodiments, a “menu button” is implemented using a touchpad. In some other embodiments, the menu button is a physical push button or other physical input control device instead of a touchpad. 
       FIG. 1B  is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for event handling in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, memory  102  ( FIG. 1A ) or  370  ( FIG. 3 ) includes event sorter  170  (e.g., in operating system  126 ) and a respective application  136 - 1  (e.g., any of the aforementioned applications  137 - 151 ,  155 ,  380 - 390 ). 
     Event sorter  170  receives event information and determines the application  136 - 1  and application view  191  of application  136 - 1  to which to deliver the event information. Event sorter  170  includes event monitor  171  and event dispatcher module  174 . In some embodiments, application  136 - 1  includes application internal state  192 , which indicates the current application view(s) displayed on touch-sensitive display  112  when the application is active or executing. In some embodiments, device/global internal state  157  is used by event sorter  170  to determine which application(s) is (are) currently active, and application internal state  192  is used by event sorter  170  to determine application views  191  to which to deliver event information. 
     In some embodiments, application internal state  192  includes additional information, such as one or more of: resume information to be used when application  136 - 1  resumes execution, user interface state information that indicates information being displayed or that is ready for display by application  136 - 1 , a state queue for enabling the user to go back to a prior state or view of application  136 - 1 , and a redo/undo queue of previous actions taken by the user. 
     Event monitor  171  receives event information from peripherals interface  118 . Event information includes information about a sub-event (e.g., a user touch on touch-sensitive display  112 , as part of a multi-touch gesture). Peripherals interface  118  transmits information it receives from I/O subsystem  106  or a sensor, such as proximity sensor  166 , accelerometer(s)  168 , and/or microphone  113  (through audio circuitry  110 ). Information that peripherals interface  118  receives from I/O subsystem  106  includes information from touch-sensitive display  112  or a touch-sensitive surface. 
     In some embodiments, event monitor  171  sends requests to the peripherals interface  118  at predetermined intervals. In response, peripherals interface  118  transmits event information. In other embodiments, peripherals interface  118  transmits event information only when there is a significant event (e.g., receiving an input above a predetermined noise threshold and/or for more than a predetermined duration). 
     In some embodiments, event sorter  170  also includes a hit view determination module  172  and/or an active event recognizer determination module  173 . 
     Hit view determination module  172  provides software procedures for determining where a sub-event has taken place within one or more views when touch-sensitive display  112  displays more than one view. Views are made up of controls and other elements that a user can see on the display. 
     Another aspect of the user interface associated with an application is a set of views, sometimes herein called application views or user interface windows, in which information is displayed and touch-based gestures occur. The application views (of a respective application) in which a touch is detected optionally correspond to programmatic levels within a programmatic or view hierarchy of the application. For example, the lowest level view in which a touch is detected is, optionally, called the hit view, and the set of events that are recognized as proper inputs are, optionally, determined based, at least in part, on the hit view of the initial touch that begins a touch-based gesture. 
     Hit view determination module  172  receives information related to sub-events of a touch-based gesture. When an application has multiple views organized in a hierarchy, hit view determination module  172  identifies a hit view as the lowest view in the hierarchy which should handle the sub-event. In most circumstances, the hit view is the lowest level view in which an initiating sub-event occurs (e.g., the first sub-event in the sequence of sub-events that form an event or potential event). Once the hit view is identified by the hit view determination module  172 , the hit view typically receives all sub-events related to the same touch or input source for which it was identified as the hit view. 
     Active event recognizer determination module  173  determines which view or views within a view hierarchy should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In some embodiments, active event recognizer determination module  173  determines that only the hit view should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, active event recognizer determination module  173  determines that all views that include the physical location of a sub-event are actively involved views, and therefore determines that all actively involved views should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, even if touch sub-events were entirely confined to the area associated with one particular view, views higher in the hierarchy would still remain as actively involved views. 
     Event dispatcher module  174  dispatches the event information to an event recognizer (e.g., event recognizer  180 ). In embodiments including active event recognizer determination module  173 , event dispatcher module  174  delivers the event information to an event recognizer determined by active event recognizer determination module  173 . In some embodiments, event dispatcher module  174  stores in an event queue the event information, which is retrieved by a respective event receiver  182 . 
     In some embodiments, operating system  126  includes event sorter  170 . Alternatively, application  136 - 1  includes event sorter  170 . In yet other embodiments, event sorter  170  is a stand-alone module, or a part of another module stored in memory  102 , such as contact/motion module  130 . 
     In some embodiments, application  136 - 1  includes a plurality of event handlers  190  and one or more application views  191 , each of which includes instructions for handling touch events that occur within a respective view of the application&#39;s user interface. Each application view  191  of the application  136 - 1  includes one or more event recognizers  180 . Typically, a respective application view  191  includes a plurality of event recognizers  180 . In other embodiments, one or more of event recognizers  180  are part of a separate module, such as a user interface kit (not shown) or a higher level object from which application  136 - 1  inherits methods and other properties. In some embodiments, a respective event handler  190  includes one or more of: data updater  176 , object updater  177 , GUI updater  178 , and/or event data  179  received from event sorter  170 . Event handler  190  optionally utilizes or calls data updater  176 , object updater  177 , or GUI updater  178  to update the application internal state  192 . Alternatively, one or more of the application views  191  include one or more respective event handlers  190 . Also, in some embodiments, one or more of data updater  176 , object updater  177 , and GUI updater  178  are included in a respective application view  191 . 
     A respective event recognizer  180  receives event information (e.g., event data  179 ) from event sorter  170  and identifies an event from the event information. Event recognizer  180  includes event receiver  182  and event comparator  184 . In some embodiments, event recognizer  180  also includes at least a subset of: metadata  183 , and event delivery instructions  188  (which optionally include sub-event delivery instructions). 
     Event receiver  182  receives event information from event sorter  170 . The event information includes information about a sub-event, for example, a touch or a touch movement. Depending on the sub-event, the event information also includes additional information, such as location of the sub-event. When the sub-event concerns motion of a touch, the event information optionally also includes speed and direction of the sub-event. In some embodiments, events include rotation of the device from one orientation to another (e.g., from a portrait orientation to a landscape orientation, or vice versa), and the event information includes corresponding information about the current orientation (also called device attitude) of the device. 
     Event comparator  184  compares the event information to predefined event or sub-event definitions and, based on the comparison, determines an event or sub-event, or determines or updates the state of an event or sub-event. In some embodiments, event comparator  184  includes event definitions  186 . Event definitions  186  contain definitions of events (e.g., predefined sequences of sub-events), for example, event  1  ( 187 - 1 ), event  2  ( 187 - 2 ), and others. In some embodiments, sub-events in an event ( 187 ) include, for example, touch begin, touch end, touch movement, touch cancellation, and multiple touching. In one example, the definition for event  1  ( 187 - 1 ) is a double tap on a displayed object. The double tap, for example, comprises a first touch (touch begin) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, a first liftoff (touch end) for a predetermined phase, a second touch (touch begin) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, and a second liftoff (touch end) for a predetermined phase. In another example, the definition for event  2  ( 187 - 2 ) is a dragging on a displayed object. The dragging, for example, comprises a touch (or contact) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, a movement of the touch across touch-sensitive display  112 , and liftoff of the touch (touch end). In some embodiments, the event also includes information for one or more associated event handlers  190 . 
     In some embodiments, event definition  187  includes a definition of an event for a respective user-interface object. In some embodiments, event comparator  184  performs a hit test to determine which user-interface object is associated with a sub-event. For example, in an application view in which three user-interface objects are displayed on touch-sensitive display  112 , when a touch is detected on touch-sensitive display  112 , event comparator  184  performs a hit test to determine which of the three user-interface objects is associated with the touch (sub-event). If each displayed object is associated with a respective event handler  190 , the event comparator uses the result of the hit test to determine which event handler  190  should be activated. For example, event comparator  184  selects an event handler associated with the sub-event and the object triggering the hit test. 
     In some embodiments, the definition for a respective event ( 187 ) also includes delayed actions that delay delivery of the event information until after it has been determined whether the sequence of sub-events does or does not correspond to the event recognizer&#39;s event type. 
     When a respective event recognizer  180  determines that the series of sub-events do not match any of the events in event definitions  186 , the respective event recognizer  180  enters an event impossible, event failed, or event ended state, after which it disregards subsequent sub-events of the touch-based gesture. In this situation, other event recognizers, if any, that remain active for the hit view continue to track and process sub-events of an ongoing touch-based gesture. 
     In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer  180  includes metadata  183  with configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how the event delivery system should perform sub-event delivery to actively involved event recognizers. In some embodiments, metadata  183  includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how event recognizers interact, or are enabled to interact, with one another. In some embodiments, metadata  183  includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate whether sub-events are delivered to varying levels in the view or programmatic hierarchy. 
     In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer  180  activates event handler  190  associated with an event when one or more particular sub-events of an event are recognized. In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer  180  delivers event information associated with the event to event handler  190 . Activating an event handler  190  is distinct from sending (and deferred sending) sub-events to a respective hit view. In some embodiments, event recognizer  180  throws a flag associated with the recognized event, and event handler  190  associated with the flag catches the flag and performs a predefined process. 
     In some embodiments, event delivery instructions  188  include sub-event delivery instructions that deliver event information about a sub-event without activating an event handler. Instead, the sub-event delivery instructions deliver event information to event handlers associated with the series of sub-events or to actively involved views. Event handlers associated with the series of sub-events or with actively involved views receive the event information and perform a predetermined process. 
     In some embodiments, data updater  176  creates and updates data used in application  136 - 1 . For example, data updater  176  updates the telephone number used in contacts module  137 , or stores a video file used in video player module. In some embodiments, object updater  177  creates and updates objects used in application  136 - 1 . For example, object updater  177  creates a new user-interface object or updates the position of a user-interface object. GUI updater  178  updates the GUI. For example, GUI updater  178  prepares display information and sends it to graphics module  132  for display on a touch-sensitive display. 
     In some embodiments, event handler(s)  190  includes or has access to data updater  176 , object updater  177 , and GUI updater  178 . In some embodiments, data updater  176 , object updater  177 , and GUI updater  178  are included in a single module of a respective application  136 - 1  or application view  191 . In other embodiments, they are included in two or more software modules. 
     It shall be understood that the foregoing discussion regarding event handling of user touches on touch-sensitive displays also applies to other forms of user inputs to operate multifunction devices  100  with input devices, not all of which are initiated on touch screens. For example, mouse movement and mouse button presses, optionally coordinated with single or multiple keyboard presses or holds; contact movements such as taps, drags, scrolls, etc. on touchpads; pen stylus inputs; movement of the device; oral instructions; detected eye movements; biometric inputs; and/or any combination thereof are optionally utilized as inputs corresponding to sub-events which define an event to be recognized. 
       FIG. 2  illustrates a portable multifunction device  100  having a touch screen  112  in accordance with some embodiments. The touch screen optionally displays one or more graphics within user interface (UI)  200 . In this embodiment, as well as others described below, a user is enabled to select one or more of the graphics by making a gesture on the graphics, for example, with one or more fingers  202  (not drawn to scale in the figure) or one or more styluses  203  (not drawn to scale in the figure). In some embodiments, selection of one or more graphics occurs when the user breaks contact with the one or more graphics. In some embodiments, the gesture optionally includes one or more taps, one or more swipes (from left to right, right to left, upward and/or downward), and/or a rolling of a finger (from right to left, left to right, upward and/or downward) that has made contact with device  100 . In some implementations or circumstances, inadvertent contact with a graphic does not select the graphic. For example, a swipe gesture that sweeps over an application icon optionally does not select the corresponding application when the gesture corresponding to selection is a tap. 
     Device  100  optionally also include one or more physical buttons, such as “home” or menu button  204 . As described previously, menu button  204  is, optionally, used to navigate to any application  136  in a set of applications that are, optionally, executed on device  100 . Alternatively, in some embodiments, the menu button is implemented as a soft key in a GUI displayed on touch screen  112 . 
     In some embodiments, device  100  includes touch screen  112 , menu button  204 , push button  206  for powering the device on/off and locking the device, volume adjustment button(s)  208 , subscriber identity module (SIM) card slot  210 , headset jack  212 , and docking/charging external port  124 . Push button  206  is, optionally, used to turn the power on/off on the device by depressing the button and holding the button in the depressed state for a predefined time interval; to lock the device by depressing the button and releasing the button before the predefined time interval has elapsed; and/or to unlock the device or initiate an unlock process. In an alternative embodiment, device  100  also accepts verbal input for activation or deactivation of some functions through microphone  113 . Device  100  also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors  165  for detecting intensity of contacts on touch screen  112  and/or one or more tactile output generators  167  for generating tactile outputs for a user of device  100 . 
       FIG. 3  is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface in accordance with some embodiments. Device  300  need not be portable. In some embodiments, device  300  is a laptop computer, a desktop computer, a tablet computer, a multimedia player device, a navigation device, an educational device (such as a child&#39;s learning toy), a gaming system, or a control device (e.g., a home or industrial controller). Device  300  typically includes one or more processing units (CPUs)  310 , one or more network or other communications interfaces  360 , memory  370 , and one or more communication buses  320  for interconnecting these components. Communication buses  320  optionally include circuitry (sometimes called a chipset) that interconnects and controls communications between system components. Device  300  includes input/output (I/O) interface  330  comprising display  340 , which is typically a touch screen display. I/O interface  330  also optionally includes a keyboard and/or mouse (or other pointing device)  350  and touchpad  355 , tactile output generator  357  for generating tactile outputs on device  300  (e.g., similar to tactile output generator(s)  167  described above with reference to  FIG. 1A ), sensors  359  (e.g., optical, acceleration, proximity, touch-sensitive, and/or contact intensity sensors similar to contact intensity sensor(s)  165  described above with reference to  FIG. 1A ). Memory  370  includes high-speed random access memory, such as DRAM, SRAM, DDR RAM, or other random access solid state memory devices; and optionally includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, optical disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid state storage devices. Memory  370  optionally includes one or more storage devices remotely located from CPU(s)  310 . In some embodiments, memory  370  stores programs, modules, and data structures analogous to the programs, modules, and data structures stored in memory  102  of portable multifunction device  100  ( FIG. 1A ), or a subset thereof. Furthermore, memory  370  optionally stores additional programs, modules, and data structures not present in memory  102  of portable multifunction device  100 . For example, memory  370  of device  300  optionally stores drawing module  380 , presentation module  382 , word processing module  384 , website creation module  386 , disk authoring module  388 , and/or spreadsheet module  390 , while memory  102  of portable multifunction device  100  ( FIG. 1A ) optionally does not store these modules. 
     Each of the above-identified elements in  FIG. 3  is, optionally, stored in one or more of the previously mentioned memory devices. Each of the above-identified modules corresponds to a set of instructions for performing a function described above. The above-identified modules or programs (e.g., sets of instructions) need not be implemented as separate software programs, procedures, or modules, and thus various subsets of these modules are, optionally, combined or otherwise rearranged in various embodiments. In some embodiments, memory  370  optionally stores a subset of the modules and data structures identified above. Furthermore, memory  370  optionally stores additional modules and data structures not described above. 
     Attention is now directed towards embodiments of user interfaces that are, optionally, implemented on, for example, portable multifunction device  100 . 
       FIG. 4A  illustrates an exemplary user interface for a menu of applications on portable multifunction device  100  in accordance with some embodiments. Similar user interfaces are, optionally, implemented on device  300 . In some embodiments, user interface  400  includes the following elements, or a subset or superset thereof:
         Signal strength indicator(s)  402  for wireless communication(s), such as cellular and Wi-Fi signals;   Time  404 ;   Bluetooth indicator  405 ;   Battery status indicator  406 ;   Tray  408  with icons for frequently used applications, such as:
           Icon  416  for telephone module  138 , labeled “Phone,” which optionally includes an indicator  414  of the number of missed calls or voicemail messages;   Icon  418  for e-mail client module  140 , labeled “Mail,” which optionally includes an indicator  410  of the number of unread e-mails;   Icon  420  for browser module  147 , labeled “Browser;” and   Icon  422  for video and music player module  152 , also referred to as iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.) module  152 , labeled “iPod;” and   
           Icons for other applications, such as:
           Icon  424  for IM module  141 , labeled “Messages;”   Icon  426  for calendar module  148 , labeled “Calendar;”   Icon  428  for image management module  144 , labeled “Photos;”   Icon  430  for camera module  143 , labeled “Camera;”   Icon  432  for online video module  155 , labeled “Online Video;”   Icon  434  for stocks widget  149 - 2 , labeled “Stocks;”   Icon  436  for map module  154 , labeled “Maps;”   Icon  438  for weather widget  149 - 1 , labeled “Weather;”   Icon  440  for alarm clock widget  149 - 4 , labeled “Clock;”   Icon  442  for workout support module  142 , labeled “Workout Support;”   Icon  444  for notes module  153 , labeled “Notes;” and   Icon  446  for a settings application or module, labeled “Settings,” which provides access to settings for device  100  and its various applications  136 .   
               

     It should be noted that the icon labels illustrated in  FIG. 4A  are merely exemplary. For example, icon  422  for video and music player module  152  is labeled “Music” or “Music Player.” Other labels are, optionally, used for various application icons. In some embodiments, a label for a respective application icon includes a name of an application corresponding to the respective application icon. In some embodiments, a label for a particular application icon is distinct from a name of an application corresponding to the particular application icon. 
       FIG. 4B  illustrates an exemplary user interface on a device (e.g., device  300 ,  FIG. 3 ) with a touch-sensitive surface  451  (e.g., a tablet or touchpad  355 ,  FIG. 3 ) that is separate from the display  450  (e.g., touch screen display  112 ). Device  300  also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors (e.g., one or more of sensors  359 ) for detecting intensity of contacts on touch-sensitive surface  451  and/or one or more tactile output generators  357  for generating tactile outputs for a user of device  300 . 
     Although some of the examples that follow will be given with reference to inputs on touch screen display  112  (where the touch-sensitive surface and the display are combined), in some embodiments, the device detects inputs on a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display, as shown in  FIG. 4B . In some embodiments, the touch-sensitive surface (e.g.,  451  in  FIG. 4B ) has a primary axis (e.g.,  452  in  FIG. 4B ) that corresponds to a primary axis (e.g.,  453  in  FIG. 4B ) on the display (e.g.,  450 ). In accordance with these embodiments, the device detects contacts (e.g.,  460  and  462  in  FIG. 4B ) with the touch-sensitive surface  451  at locations that correspond to respective locations on the display (e.g., in  FIG. 4B, 460  corresponds to  468  and  462  corresponds to  470 ). In this way, user inputs (e.g., contacts  460  and  462 , and movements thereof) detected by the device on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g.,  451  in  FIG. 4B ) are used by the device to manipulate the user interface on the display (e.g.,  450  in  FIG. 4B ) of the multifunction device when the touch-sensitive surface is separate from the display. It should be understood that similar methods are, optionally, used for other user interfaces described herein. 
     Additionally, while the following examples are given primarily with reference to finger inputs (e.g., finger contacts, finger tap gestures, finger swipe gestures), it should be understood that, in some embodiments, one or more of the finger inputs are replaced with input from another input device (e.g., a mouse-based input or stylus input). For example, a swipe gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click (e.g., instead of a contact) followed by movement of the cursor along the path of the swipe (e.g., instead of movement of the contact). As another example, a tap gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click while the cursor is located over the location of the tap gesture (e.g., instead of detection of the contact followed by ceasing to detect the contact). Similarly, when multiple user inputs are simultaneously detected, it should be understood that multiple computer mice are, optionally, used simultaneously, or a mouse and finger contacts are, optionally, used simultaneously. 
       FIG. 5A  illustrates exemplary personal electronic device  500 . Device  500  includes body  502 . In some embodiments, device  500  can include some or all of the features described with respect to devices  100  and  300  (e.g.,  FIGS. 1A-4B ). In some embodiments, device  500  has touch-sensitive display screen  504 , hereafter touch screen  504 . Alternatively, or in addition to touch screen  504 , device  500  has a display and a touch-sensitive surface. As with devices  100  and  300 , in some embodiments, touch screen  504  (or the touch-sensitive surface) optionally includes one or more intensity sensors for detecting intensity of contacts (e.g., touches) being applied. The one or more intensity sensors of touch screen  504  (or the touch-sensitive surface) can provide output data that represents the intensity of touches. The user interface of device  500  can respond to touches based on their intensity, meaning that touches of different intensities can invoke different user interface operations on device  500 . 
     Exemplary techniques for detecting and processing touch intensity are found, for example, in related applications: International Patent Application Serial No. PCT/US2013/040061, titled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Displaying User Interface Objects Corresponding to an Application,” filed May 8, 2013, published as WIPO Publication No. WO/2013/169849, and International Patent Application Serial No. PCT/US2013/069483, titled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Transitioning Between Touch Input to Display Output Relationships,” filed Nov. 11, 2013, published as WIPO Publication No. WO/2014/105276, each of which is hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety. 
     In some embodiments, device  500  has one or more input mechanisms  506  and  508 . Input mechanisms  506  and  508 , if included, can be physical. Examples of physical input mechanisms include push buttons and rotatable mechanisms. In some embodiments, device  500  has one or more attachment mechanisms. Such attachment mechanisms, if included, can permit attachment of device  500  with, for example, hats, eyewear, earrings, necklaces, shirts, jackets, bracelets, watch straps, chains, trousers, belts, shoes, purses, backpacks, and so forth. These attachment mechanisms permit device  500  to be worn by a user. 
       FIG. 5B  depicts exemplary personal electronic device  500 . In some embodiments, device  500  can include some or all of the components described with respect to  FIGS. 1A, 1B , and  3 . Device  500  has bus  512  that operatively couples I/O section  514  with one or more computer processors  516  and memory  518 . I/O section  514  can be connected to display  504 , which can have touch-sensitive component  522  and, optionally, intensity sensor  524  (e.g., contact intensity sensor). In addition, I/O section  514  can be connected with communication unit  530  for receiving application and operating system data, using Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, near field communication (NFC), cellular, and/or other wireless communication techniques. Device  500  can include input mechanisms  506  and/or  508 . Input mechanism  506  is, optionally, a rotatable input device or a depressible and rotatable input device, for example. Input mechanism  508  is, optionally, a button, in some examples. 
     Input mechanism  508  is, optionally, a microphone, in some examples. Personal electronic device  500  optionally includes various sensors, such as GPS sensor  532 , accelerometer  534 , directional sensor  540  (e.g., compass), gyroscope  536 , motion sensor  538 , and/or a combination thereof, all of which can be operatively connected to I/O section  514 . 
     Memory  518  of personal electronic device  500  can include one or more non-transitory computer-readable storage mediums, for storing computer-executable instructions, which, when executed by one or more computer processors  516 , for example, can cause the computer processors to perform the techniques described below, including processes  700 ,  900 ,  1100 ,  1300 ,  1500 ,  1700 ,  1800 ,  2000 ,  2200 ,  2400 ,  2600 ,  2800 ,  3000 ,  3200 ,  3400 ,  3600 , and  3800  ( FIGS. 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, 32, 34, 36, and 38 ). A computer-readable storage medium can be any medium that can tangibly contain or store computer-executable instructions for use by or in connection with the instruction execution system, apparatus, or device. In some examples, the storage medium is a transitory computer-readable storage medium. In some examples, the storage medium is a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium can include, but is not limited to, magnetic, optical, and/or semiconductor storages. Examples of such storage include magnetic disks, optical discs based on CD, DVD, or Blu-ray technologies, as well as persistent solid-state memory such as flash, solid-state drives, and the like. Personal electronic device  500  is not limited to the components and configuration of  FIG. 5B , but can include other or additional components in multiple configurations. 
     As used here, the term “affordance” refers to a user-interactive graphical user interface object that is, optionally, displayed on the display screen of devices  100 ,  300 , and/or  500  ( FIGS. 1A, 3, and 5A-5B ). For example, an image (e.g., icon), a button, and text (e.g., hyperlink) each optionally constitute an affordance. 
     As used herein, the term “focus selector” refers to an input element that indicates a current part of a user interface with which a user is interacting. In some implementations that include a cursor or other location marker, the cursor acts as a “focus selector” so that when an input (e.g., a press input) is detected on a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touchpad  355  in  FIG. 3  or touch-sensitive surface  451  in  FIG. 4B ) while the cursor is over a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider, or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detected input. In some implementations that include a touch screen display (e.g., touch-sensitive display system  112  in  FIG. 1A  or touch screen  112  in  FIG. 4A ) that enables direct interaction with user interface elements on the touch screen display, a detected contact on the touch screen acts as a “focus selector” so that when an input (e.g., a press input by the contact) is detected on the touch screen display at a location of a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider, or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detected input. In some implementations, focus is moved from one region of a user interface to another region of the user interface without corresponding movement of a cursor or movement of a contact on a touch screen display (e.g., by using a tab key or arrow keys to move focus from one button to another button); in these implementations, the focus selector moves in accordance with movement of focus between different regions of the user interface. Without regard to the specific form taken by the focus selector, the focus selector is generally the user interface element (or contact on a touch screen display) that is controlled by the user so as to communicate the user&#39;s intended interaction with the user interface (e.g., by indicating, to the device, the element of the user interface with which the user is intending to interact). For example, the location of a focus selector (e.g., a cursor, a contact, or a selection box) over a respective button while a press input is detected on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touchpad or touch screen) will indicate that the user is intending to activate the respective button (as opposed to other user interface elements shown on a display of the device). 
     As used in the specification and claims, the term “characteristic intensity” of a contact refers to a characteristic of the contact based on one or more intensities of the contact. In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is based on multiple intensity samples. The characteristic intensity is, optionally, based on a predefined number of intensity samples, or a set of intensity samples collected during a predetermined time period (e.g., 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10 seconds) relative to a predefined event (e.g., after detecting the contact, prior to detecting liftoff of the contact, before or after detecting a start of movement of the contact, prior to detecting an end of the contact, before or after detecting an increase in intensity of the contact, and/or before or after detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact). A characteristic intensity of a contact is, optionally, based on one or more of: a maximum value of the intensities of the contact, a mean value of the intensities of the contact, an average value of the intensities of the contact, a top 10 percentile value of the intensities of the contact, a value at the half maximum of the intensities of the contact, a value at the 90 percent maximum of the intensities of the contact, or the like. In some embodiments, the duration of the contact is used in determining the characteristic intensity (e.g., when the characteristic intensity is an average of the intensity of the contact over time). In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is compared to a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by a user. For example, the set of one or more intensity thresholds optionally includes a first intensity threshold and a second intensity threshold. In this example, a contact with a characteristic intensity that does not exceed the first threshold results in a first operation, a contact with a characteristic intensity that exceeds the first intensity threshold and does not exceed the second intensity threshold results in a second operation, and a contact with a characteristic intensity that exceeds the second threshold results in a third operation. In some embodiments, a comparison between the characteristic intensity and one or more thresholds is used to determine whether or not to perform one or more operations (e.g., whether to perform a respective operation or forgo performing the respective operation), rather than being used to determine whether to perform a first operation or a second operation. 
       FIG. 5C  illustrates detecting a plurality of contacts  552 A- 552 E on touch-sensitive display screen  504  with a plurality of intensity sensors  524 A- 524 D.  FIG. 5C  additionally includes intensity diagrams that show the current intensity measurements of the intensity sensors  524 A- 524 D relative to units of intensity. In this example, the intensity measurements of intensity sensors  524 A and  524 D are each 9 units of intensity, and the intensity measurements of intensity sensors  524 B and  524 C are each 7 units of intensity. In some implementations, an aggregate intensity is the sum of the intensity measurements of the plurality of intensity sensors  524 A- 524 D, which in this example is 32 intensity units. In some embodiments, each contact is assigned a respective intensity that is a portion of the aggregate intensity.  FIG. 5D  illustrates assigning the aggregate intensity to contacts  552 A- 552 E based on their distance from the center of force  554 . In this example, each of contacts  552 A,  552 B, and  552 E are assigned an intensity of contact of 8 intensity units of the aggregate intensity, and each of contacts  552 C and  552 D are assigned an intensity of contact of 4 intensity units of the aggregate intensity. More generally, in some implementations, each contact j is assigned a respective intensity Ij that is a portion of the aggregate intensity, A, in accordance with a predefined mathematical function, Ij=A·(Dj/ΣDi), where Dj is the distance of the respective contact j to the center of force, and ΣDi is the sum of the distances of all the respective contacts (e.g., i=1 to last) to the center of force. The operations described with reference to  FIGS. 5C-5D  can be performed using an electronic device similar or identical to device  100 ,  300 , or  500 . In some embodiments, a characteristic intensity of a contact is based on one or more intensities of the contact. In some embodiments, the intensity sensors are used to determine a single characteristic intensity (e.g., a single characteristic intensity of a single contact). It should be noted that the intensity diagrams are not part of a displayed user interface, but are included in  FIGS. 5C-5D  to aid the reader. 
     In some embodiments, a portion of a gesture is identified for purposes of determining a characteristic intensity. For example, a touch-sensitive surface optionally receives a continuous swipe contact transitioning from a start location and reaching an end location, at which point the intensity of the contact increases. In this example, the characteristic intensity of the contact at the end location is, optionally, based on only a portion of the continuous swipe contact, and not the entire swipe contact (e.g., only the portion of the swipe contact at the end location). In some embodiments, a smoothing algorithm is, optionally, applied to the intensities of the swipe contact prior to determining the characteristic intensity of the contact. For example, the smoothing algorithm optionally includes one or more of: an unweighted sliding-average smoothing algorithm, a triangular smoothing algorithm, a median filter smoothing algorithm, and/or an exponential smoothing algorithm. In some circumstances, these smoothing algorithms eliminate narrow spikes or dips in the intensities of the swipe contact for purposes of determining a characteristic intensity. 
     The intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface is, optionally, characterized relative to one or more intensity thresholds, such as a contact-detection intensity threshold, a light press intensity threshold, a deep press intensity threshold, and/or one or more other intensity thresholds. In some embodiments, the light press intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device will perform operations typically associated with clicking a button of a physical mouse or a trackpad. In some embodiments, the deep press intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device will perform operations that are different from operations typically associated with clicking a button of a physical mouse or a trackpad. In some embodiments, when a contact is detected with a characteristic intensity below the light press intensity threshold (e.g., and above a nominal contact-detection intensity threshold below which the contact is no longer detected), the device will move a focus selector in accordance with movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface without performing an operation associated with the light press intensity threshold or the deep press intensity threshold. Generally, unless otherwise stated, these intensity thresholds are consistent between different sets of user interface figures. 
     An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the light press intensity threshold to an intensity between the light press intensity threshold and the deep press intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as a “light press” input. An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the deep press intensity threshold to an intensity above the deep press intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as a “deep press” input. An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the contact-detection intensity threshold to an intensity between the contact-detection intensity threshold and the light press intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as detecting the contact on the touch-surface. A decrease of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity above the contact-detection intensity threshold to an intensity below the contact-detection intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as detecting liftoff of the contact from the touch-surface. In some embodiments, the contact-detection intensity threshold is zero. In some embodiments, the contact-detection intensity threshold is greater than zero. 
     In some embodiments described herein, one or more operations are performed in response to detecting a gesture that includes a respective press input or in response to detecting the respective press input performed with a respective contact (or a plurality of contacts), where the respective press input is detected based at least in part on detecting an increase in intensity of the contact (or plurality of contacts) above a press-input intensity threshold. In some embodiments, the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold (e.g., a “down stroke” of the respective press input). In some embodiments, the press input includes an increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below the press-input intensity threshold, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the subsequent decrease in intensity of the respective contact below the press-input threshold (e.g., an “up stroke” of the respective press input). 
       FIGS. 5E-5H  illustrate detection of a gesture that includes a press input that corresponds to an increase in intensity of a contact  562  from an intensity below a light press intensity threshold (e.g., “IT L ”) in  FIG. 5E , to an intensity above a deep press intensity threshold (e.g., “IT D ”) in  FIG. 5H . The gesture performed with contact  562  is detected on touch-sensitive surface  560  while cursor  576  is displayed over application icon  572 B corresponding to App  2 , on a displayed user interface  570  that includes application icons  572 A- 572 D displayed in predefined region  574 . In some embodiments, the gesture is detected on touch-sensitive display  504 . The intensity sensors detect the intensity of contacts on touch-sensitive surface  560 . The device determines that the intensity of contact  562  peaked above the deep press intensity threshold (e.g., “IT D ”). Contact  562  is maintained on touch-sensitive surface  560 . In response to the detection of the gesture, and in accordance with contact  562  having an intensity that goes above the deep press intensity threshold (e.g., “IT D ”) during the gesture, reduced-scale representations  578 A- 578 C (e.g., thumbnails) of recently opened documents for App  2  are displayed, as shown in  FIGS. 5F-5H . In some embodiments, the intensity, which is compared to the one or more intensity thresholds, is the characteristic intensity of a contact. It should be noted that the intensity diagram for contact  562  is not part of a displayed user interface, but is included in  FIGS. 5E-5H  to aid the reader. 
     In some embodiments, the display of representations  578 A- 578 C includes an animation. For example, representation  578 A is initially displayed in proximity of application icon  572 B, as shown in  FIG. 5F . As the animation proceeds, representation  578 A moves upward and representation  578 B is displayed in proximity of application icon  572 B, as shown in  FIG. 5G . Then, representations  578 A moves upward,  578 B moves upward toward representation  578 A, and representation  578 C is displayed in proximity of application icon  572 B, as shown in  FIG. 5H . Representations  578 A- 578 C form an array above icon  572 B. In some embodiments, the animation progresses in accordance with an intensity of contact  562 , as shown in  FIGS. 5F-5G , where the representations  578 A- 578 C appear and move upwards as the intensity of contact  562  increases toward the deep press intensity threshold (e.g., “IT D ”). In some embodiments, the intensity, on which the progress of the animation is based, is the characteristic intensity of the contact. The operations described with reference to  FIGS. 5E-5H  can be performed using an electronic device similar or identical to device  100 ,  300 , or  500 . 
     In some embodiments, the device employs intensity hysteresis to avoid accidental inputs sometimes termed “jitter,” where the device defines or selects a hysteresis intensity threshold with a predefined relationship to the press-input intensity threshold (e.g., the hysteresis intensity threshold is X intensity units lower than the press-input intensity threshold or the hysteresis intensity threshold is 75%, 90%, or some reasonable proportion of the press-input intensity threshold). Thus, in some embodiments, the press input includes an increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold that corresponds to the press-input intensity threshold, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the subsequent decrease in intensity of the respective contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold (e.g., an “up stroke” of the respective press input). Similarly, in some embodiments, the press input is detected only when the device detects an increase in intensity of the contact from an intensity at or below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity at or above the press-input intensity threshold and, optionally, a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact to an intensity at or below the hysteresis intensity, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the press input (e.g., the increase in intensity of the contact or the decrease in intensity of the contact, depending on the circumstances). 
     For ease of explanation, the descriptions of operations performed in response to a press input associated with a press-input intensity threshold or in response to a gesture including the press input are, optionally, triggered in response to detecting either: an increase in intensity of a contact above the press-input intensity threshold, an increase in intensity of a contact from an intensity below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity above the press-input intensity threshold, a decrease in intensity of the contact below the press-input intensity threshold, and/or a decrease in intensity of the contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to the press-input intensity threshold. Additionally, in examples where an operation is described as being performed in response to detecting a decrease in intensity of a contact below the press-input intensity threshold, the operation is, optionally, performed in response to detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact below a hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to, and lower than, the press-input intensity threshold. 
       FIG. 5I  illustrates exemplary electronic device  580 . Device  580  includes body  580 A. In some embodiments, device  580  can include some or all of the features described with respect to devices  100 ,  300 , and  500  (e.g.,  FIGS. 1A-5B ). In some embodiments, device  580  has one or more speakers  580 B (concealed in body  580 A), one or more microphones  580 C, one or more touch-sensitive surfaces  580 D, and one or more displays  580 E. Alternatively, or in addition to a display and touch-sensitive surface  580 D, the device has a touch-sensitive display (also referred to as a touchscreen). As with devices  100 ,  300 , and  500 , in some embodiments, touch-sensitive surface  580 D (or the touch screen) optionally includes one or more intensity sensors for detecting intensity of contacts (e.g., touches) being applied. The one or more intensity sensors of touch-sensitive surface  580 D (or the touchscreen) can provide output data that represents the intensity of touches. The user interface of device  580  can respond to touches based on their intensity, meaning that touches of different intensities can invoke different user interface operations on device  580 . In some embodiments, the one or more displays  580 E are one or more light-emitting diodes (LEDs). For example, a display can be a single LED, an LED cluster (e.g., a red, a green, and a blue LED), a plurality of discrete LEDs, a plurality of discrete LED clusters, or other arrangement of one or more LEDs. For example, the display  580 E can be an array of nine discrete LED clusters arranged in a circular shape (e.g., a ring). In some examples, the one or more displays are comprised of one or more of another type of light-emitting elements. 
       FIG. 5J  depicts exemplary personal electronic device  580 . In some embodiments, device  580  can include some or all of the components described with respect to  FIGS. 1A, 1B, 3 , and  5 A- 5 B. Device  580  has bus  592  that operatively couples I/O section  594  with one or more computer processors  596  and memory  598 . I/O section  594  can be connected to display  582 , which can have touch-sensitive component  584  and, optionally, intensity sensor  585  (e.g., contact intensity sensor). In some embodiments, touch-sensitive component  584  is a separate component than display  582 . In addition, I/O section  594  can be connected with communication unit  590  for receiving application and operating system data, using Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, near field communication (NFC), cellular, and/or other wireless communication techniques. Device  580  can include input mechanisms  588 . Input mechanism  588  is, optionally, a button, in some examples. Input mechanism  588  is, optionally, a microphone, in some examples. Input mechanism  588  is, optionally, a plurality of microphones (e.g., a microphone array). 
     Electronic device  580  includes speaker  586  for outputting audio. Device  580  can include audio circuitry (e.g., in I/O section  594 ) that receives audio data, converts the audio data to an electrical signal, and transmits the electrical signal to speaker  586 . Speaker  586  converts the electrical signal to human-audible sound waves. The audio circuitry (e.g., in I/O section  594 ) also receives electrical signals converted by a microphone (e.g., input mechanism  588 ) from sound waves. The audio circuitry (e.g., in I/O section  594 ) converts the electrical signal to audio data. Audio data is, optionally, retrieved from and/or transmitted to memory  598  and/or RF circuitry (e.g., in communication unit  590 ) by I/O section  594 . 
     Memory  598  of personal electronic device  580  can include one or more non-transitory computer-readable storage mediums, for storing computer-executable instructions, which, when executed by one or more computer processors  596 , for example, can cause the computer processors to perform the techniques described below, including processes  700 ,  900 ,  1100 ,  1300 ,  1500 ,  1700 ,  1800 ,  2000 ,  2200 ,  2400 ,  2600 ,  2800 ,  3000 ,  3200 ,  3400 ,  3600 , and  3800  ( FIGS. 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, 32, 34, 36, and 38 ). A computer-readable storage medium can be any medium that can tangibly contain or store computer-executable instructions for use by or in connection with the instruction execution system, apparatus, or device. In some examples, the storage medium is a transitory computer-readable storage medium. In some examples, the storage medium is a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium can include, but is not limited to, magnetic, optical, and/or semiconductor storages. Examples of such storage include magnetic disks, optical discs based on CD, DVD, or Blu-ray technologies, as well as persistent solid-state memory such as flash, solid-state drives, and the like. Personal electronic device  580  is not limited to the components and configuration of  FIG. 5J , but can include other or additional components in multiple configurations. 
     As used herein, an “installed application” refers to a software application that has been downloaded onto an electronic device (e.g., devices  100 ,  300 , and/or  500 ) and is ready to be launched (e.g., become opened) on the device. In some embodiments, a downloaded application becomes an installed application by way of an installation program that extracts program portions from a downloaded package and integrates the extracted portions with the operating system of the computer system. 
     As used herein, the terms “open application” or “executing application” refer to a software application with retained state information (e.g., as part of device/global internal state  157  and/or application internal state  192 ). An open or executing application is, optionally, any one of the following types of applications:
         an active application, which is currently displayed on a display screen of the device that the application is being used on;   a background application (or background processes), which is not currently displayed, but one or more processes for the application are being processed by one or more processors; and   a suspended or hibernated application, which is not running, but has state information that is stored in memory (volatile and non-volatile, respectively) and that can be used to resume execution of the application.       

     As used herein, the term “closed application” refers to software applications without retained state information (e.g., state information for closed applications is not stored in a memory of the device). Accordingly, closing an application includes stopping and/or removing application processes for the application and removing state information for the application from the memory of the device. Generally, opening a second application while in a first application does not close the first application. When the second application is displayed and the first application ceases to be displayed, the first application becomes a background application. 
     Attention is now directed towards embodiments of user interfaces (“UI”) and associated processes that are implemented on an electronic device, such as portable multifunction device  100 , device  300 , or device  500 . 
       FIGS. 6A-6AR  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for accessing media playback status of a plurality of available playback devices, in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIGS. 7A-7D . 
       FIGS. 6A-6B  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for managing and controlling a group of devices. In some embodiments, the group of devices includes devices that are placed throughout a user&#39;s home to perform various functions. Such functions can include controlling smart devices (e.g., light bulbs, thermostats, media devices), configuring home automation, and controlling home entertainment. 
       FIG. 6A  depicts home summary screen  601  (on display  602  of device  600 ), which represents an exemplary interface for a home control application (also referred to as a “device management application”) executing on device  600 . In some embodiments, device  600  includes one or more features of device  100 ,  300 , or  500 . An example of a home control application is “Home” (by Apple Inc., of Cupertino, Calif., USA). The home summary screen  601  includes scenes (e.g., pre-configured collection of settings for one more home devices) that have been stored, as well as an indication of devices in the user&#39;s home (also referred to as “home devices” or the like). The home devices are represented by indicators  601 A- 601 C. Indicator  601 A corresponds to the device named “Smart Speaker  1 ” in the room “Living Room”. Indicator  601 B corresponds to the device named “Smart Speaker  2 ” in the room “Kitchen”. Indicator  601 C corresponds to the device named “Smart Bulb” in the room “Bedroom”. Exemplary interfaces and techniques for a home control application described in U.S. Patent Application 62/349,057, “User Interface for Managing Controllable External Devices,” filed Jun. 12, 2016, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. 
       FIG. 6A  also depicts exemplary home configuration screen  603 , which illustrates an exemplary interface for managing configuration settings associated with the home devices represented in home summary screen  601 . In some examples, device  600  displays home configuration screen  603  in response to user input selection of affordance  601 D at home summary screen  601 . At home configuration screen  603 , a user can edit the name of the home (“Home” in this example), edit the members of a home (e.g., Users  1 ,  2 , and  3  in this example), include notes to other members, among other functions. As can be seen, the “Home” in this example includes three members, User  1  (represented by indicator  603 A), User  2  (represented by indicator  603 B), and User  3  (represented by indicator  603 C). In some examples, Users  1 - 3  represent users that live in the location that physically includes the home devices, collectively referred to as the “Home”. Thus, Users  1 - 3  are members of the home. Being a member of a home (or other location), in some examples, provides the users with permission to control devices associated with the home. The users can control the home devices using one or more personal devices associated with at least one of the users. In some examples, a device is associated with a user when it is logged into an account associated with (e.g., owned by) the user. For example, devices that are logged into one or more user accounts associated with exemplary Users  1 - 3  described above are associated with at least one user, and specifically, at least one user of the Home (e.g., home devices). 
       FIG. 6B  depicts exemplary user interfaces of a portable electronic device  600 . Device home screen  605 , displayed on display  602 , is an exemplary default home screen of device  600 . Device home screen  605  includes affordances associated with applications stored on the device. For example, affordance  605 A corresponds to a music application. Selection of affordance  605 A, in some examples, causes the device to display a user interface of the corresponding music application.  FIG. 6B  also depicts exemplary user input  604 , received by device  600  while displaying screen  603 . In this example, user input  604  is a swipe gesture (e.g., touch input followed by a drag) on a touch-sensitive display  602  of device  600 . In the example depicted in  FIG. 6B , the user input  604  is a swipe gesture from an edge of the touch-sensitive display  602 . In some embodiments, user input  604  is an arcuate swipe gesture. For example, an arcuate swipe gesture is a gesture than includes both a horizontal component (e.g., x-direction) and a vertical component (e.g., y-direction) that satisfy arcuate criteria. For instance, user input  604  can be a touch and drag on a touch-sensitive surface that traces the form of a quarter-circle. In response to input  604 , device  600  displays a Control Center interface (e.g.,  FIGS. 6C and 6D ). 
       FIG. 6C  illustrates an exemplary control center interface. Control center interface  606  includes various affordances for controlling various functions and/or components of device  600 . In the example depicted, control center interface  606  includes exemplary illustrations of: a media control interface  606 A, a volume control interface  606 C, a screen brightness control interface  606 D, a camera affordance  606 E, a calculator affordance  606 F, a timer affordance  606 G, a flashlight affordance  606 H, a wireless media streaming affordance  6061 , a screen rotation lock affordance  606 J, a do not disturb affordance  606 K, wireless antenna control interface  606 L. Exemplary media control interface  606 A includes media playback controls  606 M (e.g., previous track, pause/play, next track) and a device selection affordance  606 B. Exemplary wireless antenna control affordances  606 L includes an affordance  606 N for toggling (e.g., turning on and turning off) a Wi-Fi function of device  600 . 
       FIG. 6D  illustrates another exemplary Control Center interface  606  when device  600  is playing back media through an external device. As shown in  FIG. 6D , the device selection affordance  606 B includes an indication that the media that is currently being played back (e.g., the song track “Same Thing” by the artist “Jambug”) is being played back though an external device (or devices) named “AirPods”. Thus, the media control interface  606 A indicates the media currently being played (otherwise referred to as being played back, currently playing back, or the like) as well as the device on which the audio output is being routed. In this case, the audio output is generated by wireless personal earbuds (“AirPods” by Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif. USA).  FIG. 6D  also shows volume control affordance  606 C including an indicator  606 M representative of the “AirPods” device, indicating that the volume control affordance  606 C can be used to adjust the volume of the audio output of the external device “AirPods”. 
       FIG. 6E  illustrates the exemplary Control Center interface, as shown in  FIG. 6C , but with a user input  608 A on device selection affordance  606 B. In some embodiments, device  600  displays a multi-device interface (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 6J ) in response to receiving user input  608 A. For example, user input  608 A is a touch on the device selection affordance (e.g., also referred to as a “tap” or a “press”). 
       FIG. 6F  illustrates the exemplary Control Center interface, as shown in  FIG. 6C , but with a user input  608 B at a location on the media control interface  606 A. In some embodiments, device  600  displays a multi-device interface (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 6J ) in response to receiving user input  608 B. In some examples, user input  608 B is a deep press (e.g., a touch having a characteristic intensity that meets an intensity-dependent criteria). In some examples, an intensity-dependent criteria is whether a characteristic intensity of a touch exceeds a threshold intensity. In some examples, user input  608 B is a tap and hold (e.g., a touch input that is continuously detected on a touch-sensitive surface of device  600  for greater than a threshold length of time). In some examples, the user input  608 B (e.g., whether a deep press, or a tap and hold input) can be received at any location (e.g., completely or partially within) on media control interface  606 A. For example, in response to receiving the user input  606 B on a playback control affordance (e.g.,  606 M), the device  600  performs an operation different than it would had the user input been a tap (e.g., the device  600  performs a second operation, rather than a playback control operation such as pausing playback). 
       FIG. 6G  illustrates an exemplary expanded media control interface for a device. In some embodiments, device  600  displays expanded media control interface  609  of  FIG. 6G  in response to receiving user input  608 B. As shown, the expanded media control interface  609  includes an indicator  609 A representing media that is currently being played back on the device  600 . In this example, the device  600  is named “iPhone” and is currently playing the media track “Same Thing” by the artist “Jambug”. Indicator  609 A includes a graphic to the left of the track name, representing an album cover associated with the media track. The graphic included in the indicator  609 A, in some examples, can be any graphic that is associated with a media track or that can otherwise provide a visual representation of the currently playing media. For example, other appropriate graphic indicators include, but are not limited to, an artist photo, an album cover, a movie cover, a movie poster, a stylized depiction of text, or the like. The exemplary expanded media control interface  609  includes a media progress indicator  609 B (e.g., depicting temporal progress through the media track (time elapsed), and the amount of time until the end of the current media (time remaining)). Exemplary expanded media control interface  609  also includes playback control affordances  609 C (e.g., that function similar or the same to those described above), volume control affordance  609 D (e.g., that function similar or the same to those described above), and a device selection affordance  609 E. 
       FIGS. 6H-6N  illustrate exemplary multi-device interfaces in accordance with some embodiments.  FIG. 6H  depicts an exemplary multi-device interface  610  that includes affordances  610 B- 610 D for the current device  600 . In some embodiments, device  600  displays multi-device interface  610  in response to receiving user input  608 A. In some embodiments, device  600  displays multi-device interface  610  in response to receiving user input  608 B. 
     As shown in  FIG. 6H , multi-device interface  610  includes, as described above regarding expanded media control interface  609 , an indicator  610 A representing media (that is currently being played back on the device  600 , which is named “iPhone”), a media progress indicator  610 B (e.g., depicting temporal progress through the media track (time elapsed), and the amount of time until the end of the current media (time remaining)). Exemplary multi-device interface  610  also includes playback control affordances  610 C (e.g., that function similar or the same to those described above), volume control affordance  610 D (e.g., that function similar or the same to those described above), and a device selection affordance  610 E. In contrast to the expanded media control interface  609  of  FIG. 6G , multi-device interface  610  provides the user with information on the media playback status of multiple devices, as well as the ability to affect the same. 
     As shown in  FIG. 6H , multi-device interface  610  also includes indicators associated with other playback devices. Indicator  610 F corresponds to the one or more devices that are named (or in a set of devices named) “Living Room”. In some embodiments, a set of devices can include one or more devices. The set of devices can be assigned the name “Living Room” based on their location within the user&#39;s home. For example, when configuring (e.g., using device  600  and a home control application) the one or more devices in the set named Living Room (e.g., before first use), the name “Living Room” is assigned to the one or more devices in the set. Thus, when selecting or viewing the playback status of devices throughout the home, the user is provided an intuitive identification of the set of devices by location. In some embodiments, the name of a device or a device set is a default name. For example, if a device is not configured by a user to have a specific name, the device can simply be named “Device  1 ” or “Device  1 —Living Room” if the location is associated (e.g., by a user or automatically). In some embodiments, the name of a device or a device set is a user-configured name. For example, the user selects a name from a predefined set of names. In some examples, the name displayed for a device (e.g., in a multi-device interface) is the location of the device. For example, a device can be named (e.g., in a configuration setting or a home control application) “Tim&#39;s Speaker” but appear as “Tim&#39;s Room” based on a location associated with the device. In some embodiments, a set of devices is a custom name. For example, the user can assign personalized names to device sets, such as “Tim&#39;s Room”. In some embodiments, a name other than a location name is used. For example, the user can give a set of devices an arbitrary name. 
     In this example, the set of devices named Living Room and represented by indicator  610 F are currently playing back the media item titled “Heart Wave” by the artist “MKTS”, which are indicated inside of indicator  610 F. In some embodiments, a media item is one or more of a song, a video, a podcast, an audio stream, a video stream, an audio file, a video file, an e-book (e.g., also referred to as an electronic book), a text document, a webpage, a phone call, a video call, or the like. Indicator  610 G corresponds to the set of devices named or included in the set named “Bedroom”, which are currently playing back the song titled “Vibes” by artist “John Appleseed”. In some embodiments, an indicator for a set of devices (e.g., indicator  610 F and  610 G) is displayed (e.g., in a multi-device interface) even when the corresponding set of devices is not currently playing back media. In some embodiments, an indicator for a set of devices (e.g., indicator  610 F and  610 G) is displayed (e.g., in a multi-device interface) even when fewer than all devices in the corresponding set of devices are currently playing back media. For example, if the set of Living Room devices includes three devices (e.g., three smart speaker devices, such as device  580 ), and only one of the devices is currently playing a media item (e.g., “Heart Wave” by “MKTS”), the corresponding indicator in the multi-device interface still includes an identification of currently playing back media (e.g., “Heart Wave” by “MKTS” is displayed inside of indicator  610 F for the device set “Living Room”). 
     In some embodiments, if individual devices of the set of devices are concurrently playing back different media items, the multi-device interface displays an indication that multiple media items are playing on the devices of a set of devices. For example, the multi-device interface can include a single indicator for the set (e.g.,  610 F) and an identification that multiple media items are being played back on those devices (e.g., “1 movie, 1 song”). For example, the multi-device interface can include two indicators (e.g.,  610 F) for the set and an identification of each respective media item being played back (e.g., an indicator like  610 F for each media item, both identified as “Living Room”, or identified as “Living Room—Device  1 ” and “Living Room—Device  2 ”). 
     A set of devices can also be referred to as a set of “available playback devices”. In some embodiments, available playback devices include one or more (e.g., remote, external) devices on which a current device (e.g., device  600 ) can control or affect playback (e.g., using a multi-device interface such as  610 ). For example, as shown in  FIG. 6H , if the set of devices named Living Room includes three external devices (e.g.,  580  of  FIG. 5I ) that are connected to device  600  via a communication link (e.g., Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, or the like), and can be controlled by instructions issued by device  600  (e.g., representing user input), the devices in the set named Living Room are “available playback devices”. In some embodiments, affecting or controlling playback on an available playback device is subject to conditions or restrictions. For example, device  600  can see the devices in the Living Room represented by indicator  610 F, but modifying the playback status of those devices can be subject to permission (e.g., if the media being played back on the Living Room devices was initiated by another device or user). In some embodiments, available playback devices include the current device. For example, in the example of the Living Room including three devices, a plurality of available devices includes device  600  as well as the three living room devices, for a total of at least four devices. Thus, multi-device interface  610  provides a convenient interface that provides an indication of what is currently playing on the current device, as well as on other devices. 
     In some embodiments, one or more devices automatically detect another device. In some embodiments, the devices then form a network between themselves. For example, two devices (e.g.,  580 ) can detect each other after booting up for the first time (e.g., straight out of the box, without configuration by a user), establish a connection link between themselves (e.g., and between device  600 ), and appear in a multi-device interface (e.g., with a name such as “Speaker  1 ”, and/or a location such as “No Location”). In some embodiments, the device (e.g.,  580 ) is configured to part of a user&#39;s home (e.g., the home devices). One of skill in the art will appreciate that a variety of techniques can be used to interconnect and/or transmit information between devices (e.g.,  580 ,  600 ), which are all intended to be within the scope of this disclosure, and thus additional details are not included here. 
     In  FIG. 6I , device  600  receives user input  612  representing selection of device selection affordance  610 E. For example, user input  612  can be a tap or touch on a location associated with the displayed device selection affordance  610 E. 
       FIG. 6J  illustrates an exemplary multi-device user interface, in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, device  600  displays multi-device interface  610  in response to receiving user input  608 B. In some embodiments, device  600  displays multi-device interface  610  in response to receiving user input  612 . In some examples, a multi-device interface is displayed in response to selection of a device selection affordance (e.g.,  610 E of  FIG. 6I ) in any media application. 
     As shown in  FIG. 6J , multi-device interface  610  includes individual indicators  610 H- 610 O for each device of the available playback devices. In the depicted example, the individual indicators are visually associated with the indicator  610 A (which identifies the media item “Same Thing” by “Jambug”, as well as the devices currently playing back the media, in this case only the device named “iPhone”). Indicator  610 H identifies the current device (named “iPhone”) and includes the selection indicator  610 I. In this example, selection indicator  610 I includes a checkmark, which indicates that the device  610 H is currently playing back the media of indicator  610 A. Indicator  610 J identifies the set of devices named “Bedroom” and includes indicator  610 K, which does not include a checkmark (e.g., the Bedroom set of devices is not currently playing back the media track “Same Thing” by “Jambug”). Indicator  610 J also includes an indication that the Bedroom set of devices are currently playing back other media. For example, in  FIG. 6J , the indicator  610 J includes the title of the track “Vibes”. The visual indication communicates to the user that the Bedroom devices set is currently busy. If the user wishes to add the Bedroom device set to the current playback of “Same Thing” by “Jambug” (e.g., by selecting indicator  610 K), doing so would interrupt media that is currently playing in the Bedroom. Indicator  610 L identifies the set of devices named “Kitchen” and includes indicator  610 M, which does not include a checkmark (e.g., the Kitchen set of devices is not currently playing back the media track “Same Thing” by “Jambug”). Indicator  610 N identifies the set of devices named “Living Room” and includes indicator  610 O, which does not include a checkmark (e.g., the Living Room set of devices is not currently playing back the media track “Same Thing” by “Jambug”). Indicator  610 N also includes an indication that the Living Room set of devices are currently playing back other media. For example, in  FIG. 6J , the indicator  610 J includes the title of the track “Vibes”. 
     As shown in  FIG. 6J , the individual indicators are visually associated with the indicator  610 A. As can be seen, the individual indicators  610 H- 610 O are included within the box outline of indicator  610 A. In some examples, this provides a visual indication that the multi-device interface is currently “targeted” or “focused” on the “media session” identified by indicator  610 A. In some embodiments, a media session includes a device and a media item. In the example shown in  FIG. 6J , indicator  610 A represents a media session that includes the media item “Same Thing” by “Jambug”, and the device “iPhone” (e.g., device  600 ). In some embodiments, a media session includes a plurality of devices. In some embodiments, a media session includes a plurality of media items. For example, a media session can include playback of a playlist or other collection of multiple media items. Visually associating the indicators for individual devices with an indicator for a media session, visually indicates that selecting an individual device will add a device to that media session. This visual indication is useful, for example, when there are multiple concurrent media sessions within the user&#39;s home. For example, indicators  610 F and  610 G represent, respectively, other media sessions (e.g., that represent playback of different media on different devices). 
     As shown in  FIG. 6J , the indicators for individual devices have replaced the media playback control affordances (e.g.,  610 B- 610 D). In some embodiments, indicators for individual devices and media playback control affordances are concurrently displayed. 
     In some embodiments, an indicator associated with a set of devices or an individual device includes an identification of a user who initiated playback of media on, respectively, the set of devices or the individual device. For example, with reference to  FIG. 6J , when media session in the Bedroom was initiated by a user (e.g., Steve), other than the user (e.g., Tim) that is currently associated with device  600 , one or more of indicator  610 G or indicator  610 J can identify the user who initiated media playback in the Bedroom—for example, “Steve is playing Vibes by John Appleseed”. 
     The multi-device interface  610  of  FIG. 6J  also includes affordance  610 R. For example, selection of affordance  61 OR can cause the indicators for individual devices to cease being displayed (and, for example, the media playback control affordances are again displayed). In some examples, if the device  600  received selection of one or more individual indicators  610 K,  610 M, or  610 O (e.g., user input that causes device  600  to display checkmarks inside of the indicators), selection of affordance  610 R causes the device  600 , in response, to initiate media playback on the corresponding selected devices. In some embodiments, device  600  initiates playback in response to the selection of one or more individual indicators  610 K,  610 M, or  610 O. 
       FIG. 6K  illustrates device  600  receiving selection of an individual indicator for a device of the available playback devices. User input  614  is received on indicator  610 , associated with the Kitchen set of devices (represented by  610 L). In some examples, user input  614  is a tap or touch on a location associated with indicator  610 M. In some examples, user input  614  is a deep press on a location associated with indicator  610 M. 
       FIG. 6L  illustrates an exemplary multi-device interface  610  after receiving selection (e.g., user input  614 ) of an individual indicator for a device of the available playback devices. As can be seen in  FIG. 6L , the indicator  610 A now includes an indication (“Kitchen+iPhone”) that the current media session includes the Kitchen set of devices and the device named iPhone (e.g., device  600 ). Further, indicator  610 L has been updated to include an individual volume control affordance, and indicator  610 M now includes a checkmark. In some examples, the Kitchen device set is added to the current media session of indicator  610 A in response to user input selection of their associated indicator  610 M. In some examples, an additional user input (e.g., user input  615 ) on affordance  610 R causes the Kitchen devices to be added to the current media session of indicator  610 A. 
       FIG. 6M-6N  illustrate switching between media sessions using an exemplary multi-device interface when. In  FIG. 6M , multi-device interface  610  is shown, with a first media session associated with indicator  610 A (e.g., playback of “Same Thing” by artists “Jambug” on the device “iPhone”). As shown in  FIG. 6M , device  600  receives user input  616  associated with indicator  610 F, which is associated with a second media session (e.g., playback of “Heart Wave” by artists “MKTS” on the “Living Room” set of devices). In some examples, user input  616  is a tap or touch at a location associated with indicator  610 F. In some examples, user input  616  is a deep press at a location associated with indicator  610 F. 
     In some embodiments, in response to user input  616 , the device  600  updates the display of the multi-device interface to “focus” (also referred to as “target”) the second media session. For example,  FIG. 6N  depicts indicator  610 A, associated with the first media session, as minimized (e.g., with no visually associated indicators for individual available playback devices or media playback controls). However, indicator  610 F has been expanded to include individual indicators for each device of the plurality of available playback devices. Alternatively, or in addition, an expanded indicator for a media session (e.g., indicator  610 F of  FIG. 6N ) can include media playback control affordances. As shown in  FIG. 6N , indicators  610 H,  610 J,  610 L, and  610 N are now visually associated with indicator  610 F for the second media session on the Living Room set of devices. Notably, indicators  610 M and  610 O now include checkmarks, indicating that they are part of the currently-selected media session (e.g., associated with the expanded indicator  610 F). 
     Switching between media sessions can be referred to as “retargeting”, “targeting”, “refocusing”, “focusing”, or the like. Thus, the selection of indicator  610 F can be referred to as “focusing” the current device  600  or “focusing” the multi-device interface  610  on a set of devices or a media session. 
     As shown above with respect to  FIGS. 6H to 6N , a multi-device interface can be used to view a media playback status of a plurality of available playback devices. Additionally, a multi-device interface can be used to view what each device in a set of available playback devices is currently playing back. Further, individual devices can be added or removed from a media session using the multi-device interface. In addition to the examples shown in  FIGS. 6H to 6N , other exemplary techniques for invoking and interacting with the multi-device interface can be used, as described below. 
       FIGS. 6O-6Y  illustrate exemplary techniques for interacting with a multi-device user interface, in accordance with some embodiments.  FIGS. 6O-6R  illustrate an exemplary technique for initiating playback directly onto one or more dynamically-selected external devices.  FIG. 6O  illustrates an exemplary browsing interface. Browsing interface  620  depicts an interface for browsing media items. For example, a user can use a browsing interface to find and select one or more media items for playback. Exemplary browsing interfaces include interfaces for browsing a music library, a video library, media content available for streaming, or the like. In this example, the browsing interface  620  is a music browsing interface. Indicator  620 A shows that the device is displaying a list of media items (e.g., a playlist) titled “New Music”. Media item  620 B (also referred to as song  620 B) is a song titled “Monday Morning” by artist “The Fomoers”. 
     In  FIG. 6P , device  600  receives user input  622  on song  620 B. In some examples, user input representing selection of a media item (e.g., a tap on a song) causes playback of the song to initiate on the current device. For example, if device  600  is currently only “targeting” itself, then a tap on a media item causes playback to initiate on device  600 . For further example, if device  600  is currently targeting itself and the device set “Living Room”, then a tap on a media item causes playback to initiate on device  600  and the set of devices named “Living Room”. In some examples, a deep press user input or a tap and hold user input on a media item causes device  600  to perform a secondary operation (e.g., other than immediately initiate playback of the corresponding media item on the targeted device or devices). In some examples, the secondary operation allows, before playback of the corresponding media is initiated, selection of one or more devices that the user would like to initiate media playback on. In this way, the user can begin playback directly on the desired set of devices, without needing to first initiate playback on a current device (e.g., device  600 ) and then transfer playback to one or more external devices (e.g., through a cumbersome arrangement of interfaces). One of the drawbacks of first initiating playback on the current device (e.g., a personal device) and then transferring playback to other devices (e.g., a home theater system) is that by the time media playback is initiated on the desired set of devices, the media item has already begun playing on the device—if playing back for a room full of listeners, such a scenario is undesirable. Even if playback is restarted (manually or automatically) in response to or after transferring playback to the desired set of devices, the original device that initiated playback will have wasted device resources by starting the playback of the song when such operation was not desired by the user. In some examples, a tap input invokes the primary operation, and a deep press or a tap and hold input invokes the secondary operation. One of skill in the art would recognize that any two user inputs, recognizable by a device as different types of user input, can be used to invoke respective primary and secondary operations. 
       FIG. 6Q  illustrates an exemplary media item menu. For example, media item menu  624  is displayed in response to user input  622 , which is a deep press or a tap and hold input (e.g., invoking a secondary operation on a media item). Menu  624  includes a list of possible actions that can be selected for the media item  620 B (the song titled “Monday Morning” by “The Fomoers”). Media item menu  624  includes play to speaker affordance  624 A. In  FIG. 6R , device  600  receives user input  626  on the play to speaker affordance  624 A. For example, user input  626  is a tap. In some examples, in response to receiving the user input  626  representing selection of the play to speaker affordance  624 A, device  600  displays a multi-device interface (e.g., similar to multi-device interface  610  of  FIG. 6J ) for selecting one or more desired devices to initiate playback on. For example, a multi-device interface can be displayed that includes an indicator (e.g.,  610 A) for a media session that includes the media item “Monday Morning” by “The Fomoers” and no selected devices (e.g., no devices with indicators that include checkmarks). In this example, after selection of the one or more desired devices (e.g., to add them to the media session), playback is then initiated on the desired devices (e.g., device  600  initiates playback on itself and/or transmits and instruction to other devices in the set of desired devices). In this example, a user input (e.g.,  622 ) associated with a media item is used to invoke a multi-device interface (e.g.,  610 ) so that one or more external devices can be selected before device  600  initiates playback of the media. Thus, device  600  initiates playback of the media item (e.g., “Monday Morning” as shown in  FIG. 6P ) from the beginning (e.g., from the start of the song) on the selected one or more external devices, rather than first initiating playback on device  600  and then subsequently transferring playback (e.g., during playback). 
       FIGS. 6S-6Y  illustrate exemplary techniques for providing an indication of a device&#39;s focus.  FIG. 6S  illustrates an exemplary current media interface. Current media interface  630  (also referred to as a “now playing interface”) identifies a media item that is currently being played back. Current media interface  630  includes album art  630 A, media identifier  630 B (song title “Same Thing”), media identifier  630 C (artist “Jambug”), media identifier  630 D (album “Fly Away”), and device selection affordance  630 E. As shown in  FIG. 6S , the device selection affordance  630 E does not include an identifier for another device. Thus, in this example, the media item identified in the current media interface  630 A is currently playing back on the current device, device  600 . In some examples, the media identified by the currently media interface is currently being played back on other devices (e.g., in addition to the current device, or a set that excludes the current device). 
     At  FIG. 6T , device  600  receives user input  632  on device selection affordance  630 E. In response to receiving user input  632 , at  FIG. 6U  the device displays multi-device interface  610 . As can be seen in  FIG. 6U , a first region  611 A (e.g., shown bordered by a first dotted line pattern, for illustration purposes) of the display includes the multi-device interface  610 , and a second region  611 B (e.g., shown bordered by a second dotted line pattern, for illustration purposes) of the display includes a visible indication of the content displayed prior to displaying the multi-device interface. In this case, the content displayed prior to displaying the multi-device interface is the current media interface  630 . For example, the album art  630 A is visible through the multi-device interface. In this example, the first region is visually overlaid on the second region. 
     At  FIG. 6V , device  600  receives a user input  634  on indicator  610 F. In some examples, user input  634  is a tap or touch at a location associated with indicator  610 F. In some examples, user input  634  is a deep press at a location associated with indicator  610 F. 
     As shown in as shown in  FIG. 6W , in some examples, in response to user input  634 , device  600  displays multi-device interface  610  with the indicator  610 F expanded to shown individual indicators for devices in the set of available playback devices as visually associated with indicator  610 F. Thus, device  600  is now focused on the media session that includes the device set Living Room. As can be seen, current media interface  636  (described below) is visible (through the multi-device interface  610 ) in  FIG. 6W . Notably, as seen in  FIG. 6W , in response to input  634 , device  600  ceases to display the visual indications associated with current media interface  630  and displays, instead, visual indications associated with current media interface  636 . This is substitution of current media interfaces is indicative of the device changing the targeted media session from the session associated with indicator  610 A to the session associated with indicator  610 F ( FIG. 6U ). 
     As shown in as shown in  FIG. 6X , in some examples, in response to user input  634 , device  600  ceases displaying multi-device interface  610  and displays the current media interface  636 . Thus,  FIG. 6X  illustrates an alternative response by device  600  to receiving user input  634 . Current media interface  636 , similar to interface  630 , includes album art  636 A, media identifier  636 B (song title “Heart Wave”), media identifier  636 C (artist “MKTS”), media identifier  636 D (album “MKTS”), and device selection affordance  636 E. However, each of the indicators has been updated to reflect that the media item and devices of the selected media session has changed (e.g., because device  600  is now targeted to a media session that includes a different set of devices). Notably, device selection affordance  636 E includes an identifier  636 F, which identifies the currently targeted device. As shown in  FIG. 6X , identifier  636 F includes the text “Living Room” indicating that the current media interface  636  is a current media interface for media currently playing back on the set of devices named Living Room. 
     A user may desire to view the media status of the plurality of devices within their home at any time, even while viewing an interface for a non-media related application on their device. Thus, a technique for accessing a multi-device interface easily and quickly from any application executing on a device is described herein.  FIGS. 6Y-6AA  illustrate an exemplary technique for accessing a multi-device interface, in accordance with some embodiments.  FIG. 6Y  illustrates an exemplary interface for an application. Web browsing interface  640  depicts a currently displayed web browsing session (e.g., a home page of the website “Apple.com”). The web browsing interface  640  includes webpage content  640 A. At  FIG. 6Z , device  600  receives a user input  642 . In some examples, user input  642  is a swipe gesture from an edge of a touch-sensitive surface of device  600 . In some examples, in response to user input  642 , device  600  displays a playback control interface. For example, in response to user input  642 , device  600  displays playback control interface  606 A of  FIG. 6C . In some embodiments, in response to receiving user input  608 A on device selection affordance  606 B at playback control interface  606 A, device  600  displays a multi-device interface (e.g.,  610  of  FIG. 6AA ). 
       FIG. 6AA  illustrates an exemplary multi-device interface visually overlaid on an application interface. As shown in  FIG. 6AA , multi-device interface  610  includes individual indicators for available playback devices. In the example depicted in  FIG. 6AA , there is only one media session currently active on available devices in the user&#39;s home—which includes the playback of “Same Thing” by “Jambug” on the current device  600 . In some examples, the multi-device interface is concurrently displayed with previously-displayed content. For example, as shown in  FIG. 6AA , the multi-device interface  610  is visually overlaid (e.g., displayed in a first region) over the web browsing interface  640  (e.g., displayed in a second region). 
       FIGS. 6AB-6AC  illustrate exemplary techniques for adjusting a volume of available playback devices.  FIG. 6AB  depicts multi-device interface  610  with a single media session that includes playback of the media item “Same Thing” by “Jambug” on three devices: “iPhone” (e.g., device  600 ), the Kitchen set of devices, and the Living Room set of devices.  FIG. 6AB  depicts individual volume control affordance  610 S (corresponding to the device iPhone), individual volume control affordance  610 T (corresponding to the device set Kitchen), individual volume control affordance  610 U (corresponding to the device set Living Room). For example, individual volume control affordances are selectable and can be manipulated (e.g., left and right) in order to adjust volume of the respective corresponding device. In some examples, an individual volume control affordance is not displayed for devices that are not included in the current media session (e.g., the device Bedroom in  FIG. 6AB  does not correspond to a displayed individual volume control affordance).  FIG. 6AB  also depicts a group volume control affordance  610 D, which is selectable and can be manipulated (e.g., left and right) in order to adjust volume of the plurality of devices included the media session represented by indicator  610 A. For example, at  FIG. 6AB , device  600  receives user input  644  on group volume control affordance  610 D, which represents a tap and slide gesture in a leftward direction (e.g., representing a request to lower the volume). In response to the user input  644 , the device lowers the group volume as represented by the location of the sliding affordance  610 D, as shown in  FIG. 6AC .  FIG. 6AC  also illustrates that the individual volume control affordances for each device in the group have been correspondingly lowered. 
       FIGS. 6AD-6AG  illustrate exemplary interfaces for initiating playback on a preferred device. In certain instances, a user may desire to initiate playback of media automatically at one or more preferred devices. For example, because media content can include a visual aspect (e.g., if the media is a video), it can be desirable to automatically initiate playback of such content on a device with a display, or on a device with a large display (e.g., larger than the device that receives the user input request to initiate playback). For example, the user may browse for media content using their personal device (e.g., device  600 ) that has a relatively small screen, but desire that playback of a selected media item (e.g., a feature-length film) begin on their large-screen television. In other examples, the user may request playback of media via voice commands to a device (e.g., device  580 ) that does not have video playback capabilities. In this latter example, the device without the video playback capability is able to receive the user&#39;s request, but hands off video playback responsibility to another device. 
     Turning to the figures,  FIG. 6AD  illustrates an exemplary browsing interface. As shown in  FIG. 6AD , media browsing interface  650  includes a media item with video content. In this example, media item  650 A represents an episode of a television show named “Super Heroes”. At  FIG. 6AE , the device  600  receives user input  652  associated with media item  650 A. In some examples, user input  652  is a tap or touch on media item  650 A. In some examples, user input  652  is a deep press on media item  650 A. 
     In response to receiving the user input  652 , device  600  displays message interface  654  in  FIG. 6AF . Message interface  654  includes an indication that playback of the video content is or has been initiated on a different device (“Beginning playback on Apple TV”) that is not device  600 . In this example, the device named “Apple TV” is different than device  600 , and represents a preferred device for playback of video media. For example, the device Apple TV can be connected to the user&#39;s large-screen TV. In some embodiments, in response to the user input (e.g., user input  652 ) the device (e.g.,  600 ) determines whether it is currently connected to a home network. In accordance with a determination that the device is currently connected to the home network, the device initiates (e.g., transmits an instruction to initiate) playback on the preferred device. For example, if the device determines that the user is home, it forgoes initiating playback on itself, and initiates playback on the external preferred device. In accordance with a determination that the device is not currently connected to the home network, the device initiates playback on itself. For example, if the device determines that the user is not home, it initiates playback on itself. In some examples, the preferred device is a set of preferred devices (e.g., one or more). In some examples, a preferred device (or set of devices) is predetermined. For example, a preferred device can be selected by the user and saved into device or user account settings. In another example, a preferred device is automatically selected. For example, if the user&#39;s home only includes one recognized video capable external device (e.g., an Apple TV), it may be designated as the preferred device. In some embodiments, the device prompts the user whether to initiate playback on a preferred device. For example, regardless of whether a preferred device has been preconfigured by the user, the device  600  may prompt (e.g., visually or audibly) and ask “Would you like to initiate playback of “Super Heroes” on your Apple TV?” in response to user input  652 . 
       FIG. 6AG  illustrates an exemplary playback control interface for video content. Playback control interface  656  includes an indication  656 A of the currently playing media content (“Super Heroes”), playback control affordances  656 B (e.g., rewind 10 seconds, pause, and skip 10 seconds), and an indication  656 C of the device currently playing back the media content (“Apple TV”). In some embodiments, interface  656  is displayed subsequent to message interface  654 . 
       FIGS. 6AH-6AQ  illustrate exemplary multi-device interfaces. As described herein, a multi-device interface can be used to view and control media playback status of a plurality of available playback devices throughout a set of interconnected devices (e.g., devices in a user&#39;s home and associated with the user&#39;s account). Thus, a plurality of different types of devices can be controlled and each device can have a different interface. For example, the set of devices in a home can comprise a first smart speaker (e.g.,  580 ) made by a first manufacturer, a second smart speaker (e.g.,  580 ) made by a second manufacturer different than the first, and home media hub (e.g., an Apple TV by Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif. USA). An exemplary home media hub can include or otherwise be connected to a large display (e.g., larger than the display of personal device  600 ), and thus can have an identical, a similar, or a different interface than those described above with respect to device  600 . Additional exemplary interfaces are described in detail below. 
       FIG. 6AH  illustrates an exemplary current media interface  664 , displayed on display  660 A of device  660 . In some embodiments, device  660  includes one or more features of device  100 ,  300 , or  500 . Device  660  is itself a device included in the set of devices associated with the user&#39;s home (or is otherwise configured to act as a display for a device included in the set of devices associated with the user&#39;s home). Current media interface  664  includes a device selection affordance  664 A (e.g., that functions similar or the same as device selection affordance  630 E of  FIG. 6S ). Device selection affordance  664 A is associated with the text “Living Room Apple TV”, which indicates that the device  660  is currently targeted at itself, device  660 . Current media interface  664  also includes an indication of currently playing media (e.g., indicator  664 C), which is the song titled “Heart Wave” (e.g., indicator  664 D) by artist “MKTS” (e.g., indicator  664 E). In some examples, indicator  664 C of currently playing interface  664  is an animated indictor, further communicating that the associated media item is currently playing back. Indicators  664 F and  664 G correspond to one or more other media items available for playback. 
       FIG. 6AH  also illustrates an exemplary remote control for controlling device  660 . In some examples, remote control  662  is connected to device  660  (e.g., paired) and used by a user to interact with interfaces displayed on device  660 . Because a remote control is effectively an extension of a device that is used for controlling the device remotely, for the purposes of this disclosure, a user input received at device  662  is considered the same as a user input received at device  660 , unless otherwise noted herein. For example, a tap input received on device  662  that represents a request to select an affordance is considered the same as a tap on device  660  (e.g., if device  660  included a touch-sensitive surface) representing a request to select the same affordance, unless otherwise noted. However, one of skill in the art would appreciate that a user input can be received at any device and communicated to another device (e.g., for processing and performing an action in response), and that the particular device that physically receives the user input is not important, unless specifically noted. Likewise, in the example that device  660  is an external display device (e.g., a television) used by another device (e.g., an Apple TV that is a “home device” that receives and processes user input playback commands), because device  660  is effectively an extension of the other device, device  660  as referred to herein interchangeably with said other device, unless otherwise noted. For example, a reference to the “focus” or “target” of device  660  with respect to controlling media refers to the focus or target of the other device (e.g., Apple TV), unless otherwise noted. 
     In  FIG. 6AH , device  662  receives user input  668  on device  662 . User input  668  represents selection of the device selection affordance  664 A. In some examples, user input  668  is a button press on device  662  while device selection affordance  664 A is highlighted or otherwise selected at interface  664 . In some examples, user input  662  is a tap, a tap and hold, or a deep press on a touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, device  660  displays a multi-device interface (e.g.,  670  of  FIG. 6AI ) in response to receiving user input  668 . 
       FIG. 6AI  illustrates an exemplary multi-device interface, in accordance with some embodiments. Multi-device interface  670  includes an identification of the current focus (e.g., the currently-selected media session) of device  660 . Header  670 A indicates that the current focus of the device is the Living Room Apple TV (e.g., device  660 ). Multi-device interface  670  also includes a first indicator  670 B, which indicates the currently-targeted media session. For example, the media session represented by indicator  670 B includes playback of the song titled “Heart Wave” by artist “MKTS” from album “MKTS”. Together, header  670 A and indicator  670 B (which may be collectively referred to as an indicator) indicate the currently-targeted media session (e.g., media playing back, and on which devices) of interface  670 . Multi-device interface  670  also includes a second indicator  670 C, which corresponds to a different media session than the currently-selected media session. As shown in  FIG. 6AI , indicator  670 C is displayed (e.g., partially displayed) on the edge of the display. 
     As described above with respect to multi-device interface  610 , multi-device interface  670  includes individual indicators representing available playback devices (e.g., devices in the user&#39;s home). Indicator  670 D identifies the current device (named “Living Room Apple TV”) and includes the selection indicator  670 K. In this example, selection indicator  670 K includes a checkmark, which indicates that the device  670 D is currently playing back the media of indicator  670 B (e.g., is included in the currently-targeted media session). Indicator  670 E identifies the set of devices named “Kitchen” and includes indicator  670 L, which does not include a checkmark (e.g., the Kitchen set of devices is not currently playing back the media track “Heart Wave” by “MKTS”). Indicator  670 E also includes an indication that the Kitchen set of devices are currently playing back other media. For example, in  FIG. 6AI , the indicator  670 E includes the title of the track “Same Thing” and the artist “Jambug”. Indicator  670 F identifies the set of devices named “Bedroom” and includes indicator  670 M, which does not include a checkmark (e.g., the Bedroom set of devices is not currently playing back the media track “Heart Wave” by “MKTS”). Indicator  670 F also includes an indication that the Bedroom set of devices are currently playing back other media. For example, in  FIG. 6AI , the indicator  670 F includes the title of the track “Vibes” and the artist “John Appleseed”. Indicator  670 G identifies the set of devices named “Patio” and includes indicator  670 N, which does not include a checkmark (e.g., the Patio set of devices is not currently playing back the media track “Heart Wave” by “MKTS”). 
     While multi-device interface  670  is displayed, device  662  receives user input  672 , as shown in  FIG. 6AI . In some examples, user input  672  is a swipe gesture on a touch-sensitive surface of device  662 . For example, user input  672  is a leftward swipe. 
     In response to a user input (e.g., swipe gesture), in some examples, the device updates multi-device interface  670 A to focus on a different media session. As shown in  FIG. 6AJ , in response to user input  672  that is a leftward swipe, device  660  replaces display of the first indicator  670 B with the display of second indicator  670 C, which had been displayed immediately to the right of the first indicator  670 B in  FIG. 6AI . Thus, the multi-device interface  670  can be used to switch between different media sessions, visually indicated by switching between corresponding indicators. In some examples, other user inputs can be used to switch the multi-device interface between media sessions. For example, other user inputs include up or down directional gestures, left or right directional gestures, selection of one or more affordances (e.g., a left or right arrow), press of a button on a device (e.g., device  662 ), or any other appropriate type of user input. 
     As shown in  FIG. 6AJ , in response to the user input  672 , the current media session now corresponds to indicator  670 C, which includes playback on the set of devices identified as “Kitchen” (e.g., as shown in updated header  670 A) of the media item titled “Same Thing” by artist “Jambug” from the album “Fly Away” (e.g., as shown in indicator  670 C). Additionally, the individual device indicators  670 D- 670 G have been updated based on the currently displayed media session associated with indicator  670 C. Thus, the device set named Kitchen corresponding to indicator  670 E is the only device set that includes a checkmark (e.g., in corresponding indicator  670 L). Further,  FIG. 6AJ  shows indicator  670 H (not previously displayed) is now displayed in the area of the display where indicator  670 C was displayed prior to user input  672 . Thus, an additional leftward swipe (e.g.,  674  of  FIG. 6AJ ), in this example, would cause indicator  670 H to replace indicator  670 C.  FIG. 6AJ  also shows indicator  670 B displayed (e.g., partially) to the left of indicator  670 C. Thus, a rightward swipe, in this example, would cause indicator  670 B to replace display of indicator  670 C (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 6AI ). 
       FIG. 6AK  illustrates multi-device interface  670  with a current media session corresponding to indicator  670 I (e.g., one leftward swipe from the media session represented by indicator  670 H, and two leftward swipes from the media session represented by indicator  670 C). In some embodiments, a media session corresponds to a set of devices that are not currently playing back media. For example, as shown in  FIG. 6AK , the current media session includes the device set named “Patio”. Rather than include an identification of a currently playing media item, indicator  670 I includes the text “Choose Music”. Likewise, indicator  670 G does not include an indication of a media item. 
       FIG. 6AL  illustrates multi-device interface  670  with a current media session corresponding to indicator  670 H (e.g., one leftward swipe from the media session represented by indicator  670 C, and one rightward swipe from the media session represented by indicator  670 I). As shown in  FIG. 6AL , indicator  670 H is currently highlighted. In this example, while the indicator  670 H is highlighted, device  662  receives a user input  676 . In some examples, user input  676  is a tap, touch, or press received at device  662 . In response to receiving the user input  676 , device  660  displays current media interface  664  as shown in  FIG. 6AM . As shown in  FIG. 6AM , current media interface  664 , displayed in response to user input  676 , indicates the device  660  is currently targeted at a media session that includes the devices named “Bedroom” (e.g., as indicated by device selection affordance  664 A) that is currently playing the song titled “Vibes” by “John Appleseed” (e.g., corresponding to indicator  664 F, showing the album cover for the song). Thus, the focus of the device  660  has been changed (e.g., as compared to  FIG. 6AH ), and selection of new media for playback (e.g., using interface  664 ) will affect the currently targeted media session. 
       FIG. 6AN  illustrates an exemplary multi-device interface that includes a currently-selected media session that includes two device sets. In  FIG. 6AN , both the Kitchen and Living Room sets of devices are included in the current media session (e.g., playback of the song titled “Same Thing”). As shown in  FIG. 6AN , indicator  670 E is currently highlighted. User input  678  is received at device  662  while indicator  670 E is highlighted. 
     In some examples, in response to user input  678  on a selected indicator corresponding to one or more devices, a volume control affordance is displayed. As shown in  FIG. 6AO , in response to the user input  678  while indicator  670 E is selected, device  660  enters a volume adjustment mode for the corresponding device set named Kitchen. For example, a volume adjustment affordance  670 J is displayed (e.g., replacing indicator  670 E temporarily). While in the volume adjustment mode, the device  662  receives a user input  679 , and in response, adjusts the volume of the Kitchen device set accordingly. In some examples, user input  679  is a directional swipe (e.g., left or right, up or down). 
       FIG. 6AP  illustrates an exemplary browser interface, in accordance with some embodiments. As shown in  FIG. 6AP , browser interface  680  includes an indicator  680 A of media that is now playing, which represents the currently-targeted media session, as well as recently added media items (e.g., that when selected cause playback to initiate on the devices in the currently-selected media session). In some examples, while browser interface  680  is displayed, user input  681  is received. In some examples user input  681  is a selection of button  682  of device  662 . In some examples, user input  681  is a tap and hold user input, a press and hold (e.g., of a button), a deep press, a double tap or double press, or any other appropriate user input on device  662  or device  660 . 
     As shown in  FIG. 6AQ , in response to user input  681 , device  660  displays multi-device interface  670  overlaid on the browser interface  680 . In some examples, multi-device interface  670  is displayed concurrently with other interfaces of device  660 . For example, user input  681  provides a quick access to multi-device interface so that a user can quickly view and control the media playback status of devices throughout their home, even when performing other tasks or operations (e.g., using other, non-media related applications). 
       FIG. 6AR  illustrates a variety of exemplary playback control interfaces. Playback control interface  690 A represents an interface for controlling audio playback, in accordance with some embodiments. Playback control interface  690 B represents an interface for controlling video playback, in accordance with some embodiments. Playback control interface  690 C represents an interface for controlling audio, in accordance with some embodiments. For example, playback control interface  690 C is suited for use as a pop-up interface (e.g., of a tool bar or web browser). For instance, in response to selection of an affordance, interface  690 C can protrude from the selected affordance (e.g., from the pointed shape on one of its sides), temporarily covering currently displayed content (e.g., until dismissed). Playback control interface  690 D is an alternative to  690 A, for example, and can be used as a persistent “widget” in a device operating system interface. 
     In some embodiments, a device (e.g., device  600 ) is configured to receive playback coordination responsibility from another device (e.g., device  580 ). For example, a device that is configured to receive or perform playback coordination responsibility (also referred to as a “hero device”) is a device that is configured to perform one or more of the following tasks: issue commands to one or more external devices to synchronize and/or control playback of media on the external devices; store a media item or a playback queue for playback; access a content stream from a remote location (e.g., an internet location); provide a content stream (e.g., of media) to one or more external devices for playback; and process playback control instructions for a media session (e.g., receive, process (e.g., de-duplicate redundant requests), and forward instructions to appropriate devices). In some embodiments, device  600  coordinates playback on a set of device. In some embodiments, the set of devices excludes the device  600 . For example, if the set of devices does not include a device configured to be hero device, device  600  retains playback coordination responsibility. In some embodiments, device  600  transfers playback coordination responsibility to a device configured to be a hero device. For example, if the set of devices includes a device configured to be hero device, device  600  transfers playback coordination responsibility to that device (e.g., such as a device  580 ). Playback coordination responsibility is described in more detail below. 
       FIGS. 7A-7D  is a flow diagram illustrating a method for accessing media playback status of a plurality of available playback devices using an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. Method  700  is performed at a device (e.g.,  100 ,  300 ,  500 ,  580 ) with a display. Some operations in method  700  are, optionally, combined, the order of some operations are, optionally, changed, and some operations are, optionally, omitted. 
     As described below, method  700  provides an intuitive way for accessing media playback status of a plurality of available playback devices. The method reduces the cognitive burden on a user when accessing media playback status of a plurality of available playback devices, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated computing devices, enabling a user to access media playback status of a plurality of available playback devices faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges. 
     The electronic device (e.g.,  600 ) receives ( 702 ) a user input. For example, the device receives user input (e.g.,  608 A of  FIG. 6E ) selection of an affordance (e.g.,  606 B of  FIG. 6E ). In some examples, the device receives a user input (e.g.,  608 B of  FIG. 6F ) associated with a playback control interface (e.g.,  606 A of  FIG. 6C ). 
     In response to receiving the user input, the electronic device (e.g.,  600 ) displays ( 704 ), on the display, a multi-device interface (e.g.,  610 ) that includes: one or more indicators (e.g.,  610 A,  610 F,  610 G) ( 706 ) associated with a plurality of available playback devices that are connected to the device (e.g.,  600 ) and available to initiate playback of media from the device (e.g.,  600 ), and a media playback status (e.g., as indicated by  610 F and  610 G) ( 708 ) of the plurality of available playback devices. In some examples, a media playback status includes one or more of: an indication of what is currently being played on the plurality of available playback devices. In some examples, the devices in the plurality of available playback devices are associated with a user, a user account, or a plurality of devices associated with a user. For example, the devices may be a collection of devices belonging to the user or designated as residing inside of a user&#39;s home. In some embodiments, an indicator of the one or more indicators can be associated with more than one available playback device. For example, devices that are currently playing the same content can be grouped and displayed as a single indicator (e.g.,  610 A of FIG. AB). 
     Displaying a multi-device interface that includes one or more indicators associated with a plurality of available playback devices that are connected to the device and available to initiate playback of media from the device, along with a media playback status of the plurality of available playback devices, provides the user with visual feedback about the state of a plurality of devices that are available for media playback. Providing improved visual feedback to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     Additionally, displaying such a multi-device interface allows the user to collectively view a plurality of states for a plurality of available devices in one optimized interface. Providing an optimized interface to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, one or more devices are “connected” when data can be exchanged between the devices. For example, devices can be connected to a common Local Area Network (“LAN”) that enables data exchange between the devices. In some embodiments, one or more connected devices are connected directly. In some examples, a direct connection between two devices does not rely on an intermediate device between two directly connected devices. For example, a direct connection can be formed between a device that creates a Wi-Fi connection directly to a second device, without requiring an intermediate wireless access point (“WAP”) to facilitate the connection. 
     In some embodiments, one or more devices are connected indirectly. In some examples, an indirect connection between two devices includes (e.g., is routed through) an intermediate device between two connected devices. For example, an indirect connection can be formed between a device that is connected to a common wireless (e.g., Wi-Fi) connection through an intermediate WAP. 
     In some embodiments, one or more devices are “connected” by virtue of each being logged into (or otherwise associated with) the same user account. For example, a user may have two personal devices that are both logged into an account for a cloud-based service and thus are connected. For instance, the user&#39;s phone (e.g., an iPhone) and their tablet computer (e.g., an iPad) can both be logged into the user&#39;s iCloud account. In this example, the iPhone and the iPad can exchange data through the cloud-based service (e.g., a cloud server). In some embodiments, the device is connected to the available playback devices such that the device can initiate playback of media on one or more of the available playback devices. For example, an available playback device can begin playback of an media file (or stream), transfer playback (currently playing on the device) to the available device, or add the available device to concurrently play back of media a currently playing on the device). 
     In some embodiments, the user input (e.g.,  608 A of  FIG. 6E ) is a first user input, and the electronic device (e.g.,  600 ), receives ( 710 ) a second user input (e.g.,  615  or  616 ) representing selection of the one or more indicators associated with the plurality of available playback devices. In response to receiving the second user input, the electronic device transmits ( 712 ) an instruction to initiate playback on the plurality of available playback devices. In some embodiments, the plurality of devices begin playback immediately. In some embodiments, the available devices begin playback without building up a buffer of media data and then, during playback, build up a buffer. Thus, for example, delay between when a user selects a media item and hears playback is reduced. In some embodiments, playback does not begin until a certain proportion of devices of the plurality are ready to begin playback. For example, playback can begin when 75% of devices are ready (e.g., have buffered a minimum amount of media). 
     In some embodiments, the user input (e.g.,  608 A of  FIG. 6E ) is a first user input, and while displaying the multi-device interface (e.g.,  610 ), the electronic device (e.g.,  600 ) displays ( 714 ), on the display (e.g.,  602 ), a first indicator (e.g.,  610 E,  610 F, or  610 G of  FIG. 6H ). The electronic device receives ( 716 ) a third user input (e.g.,  612  or  616 ) representing selection of the first indicator (e.g.,  610 E or  610 F). In response to receiving the third user input, the electronic device displays ( 718 ), on the display, affordances (e.g.,  610 H- 610 O of  FIG. 6J  or  FIG. 6N ), for each of the devices of the plurality of available playback devices. For example, after selecting an indicator (e.g.,  610 ) for a group of devices (e.g., “Kitchen” and “Living Room” of  FIG. 6N ), the multi-device interface includes affordances (e.g.,  610 H,  610 J,  610 L, and  610 N) for each device in the home (e.g., iPhone, Bedroom, Kitchen, and Living Room in the example in  FIG. 6N ). 
     In some embodiments, while the electronic device (e.g.,  600 ) is playing back a first media item (e.g., represented by  610 A of  FIG. 6J ), the electronic device receives ( 720 ) a fourth user input (e.g.,  616 ) representing selection of a second indicator (e.g.,  610 F) of the one or more indicators, wherein the second indicator is associated with a set of playback devices that does not include the device. In some embodiments, a set of playback devices includes one or more playback devices. Subsequent to receiving the fourth user input representing selection of the second indicator, the electronic device displays ( 722 ), on the display, a browsing interface (e.g.,  620 ), wherein the browsing interface includes an affordance (e.g.,  620 B) associated with a second media item. The electronic device (e.g.,  600 ) receives ( 724 ) a fifth user input (e.g.,  622 ) representing selection of the affordance associated with the second media item. In response to receiving the fifth user input ( 726 ), the electronic device (e.g.,  600 ): transmits an instruction to initiate playback of the second media item on the set of playback devices that does not include the device (e.g.,  600 ); and continues playing back the first media item (e.g., represented by  610 A of  FIG. 6J ) on the electronic device (e.g.,  600 ). For example, in response to the user input selection of affordance  620 B (associated with media item “Monday Morning” by “The Fomoers”), the device initiates playback of the associated media item on the selected devices named “Kitchen” and “Living Room” (e.g., a shown selected in  FIG. 6N ). Further, playback continues on the electronic device (e.g., named iPhone in this example) of the media item titled “Same Thing” by artist “Jambug” (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 6N ). 
     In some embodiments, the browsing interface (e.g.,  620 ) includes an affordance associated with a third media item (e.g.,  620 B), and the electronic device receives a sixth user input (e.g.,  622 ) associated with the affordance associated with the third media item. In accordance with receiving the sixth user input, the electronic device displays, on the display, the multi-device interface. For example, after receiving a deep press on a media item (e.g., a song), the device displays the multi-device interface (e.g.,  610  of  FIG. 6J ). 
     In some embodiments, the sixth user input (e.g.,  622 ) is a press and hold. In some embodiments, in response to the sixth user input, the electronic device displays a menu (e.g.,  624 ) with an affordance (e.g.,  624 A), selection of which causes the multi-device interface (e.g.,  610 ) to be displayed. 
     In some embodiments, the sixth user input (e.g.,  622 ) has a characteristic intensity. In accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity of the sixth user input meets the intensity-dependent criteria, and subsequent to receiving the sixth user input, the electronic device (e.g.,  600 ) displays, on the display (e.g.,  602 ), the multi-device interface (e.g.,  610 ). In some embodiments, in response to the sixth user input, the electronic device displays a menu (e.g.,  624 ) with an affordance (e.g.,  624 A), selection of which causes the multi-device interface (e.g.,  610 ) to be displayed. In accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity of the sixth user input does not meet the intensity-dependent criteria, and subsequent to receiving the sixth user input: the electronic device forgoes displaying, on the display, the multi-device interface; and transmits an instruction to initiate playback of the third media item (e.g.,  620 B) on the set of playback devices that does not include the device (e.g., Living Room+Kitchen, as shown in  FIG. 6N ). 
     In some embodiments, to display the multi-device interface (e.g.,  610 ), the electronic device (e.g.,  600 ) concurrently displays, on the display (e.g.,  602 ): a first region (e.g.,  611 A of  FIG. 6U ) that includes the multi-device interface (e.g.,  610  of  FIG. 6U ); and a second region (e.g.,  611 B of  FIG. 6U ) that includes content (e.g.,  630 ) displayed prior to displaying the multi-device interface. 
     In some embodiments, the first region (e.g.,  6611 A) is visually overlaid on the second region (e.g.,  611 B, as shown in  FIG. 6U ). In some embodiments, the second region is visually blurred, (e.g., to indicate that the first region is an active window). In some embodiments, the second region appears darkened (e.g., to indicate that the first region is an active window). 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g.,  600 ) receives selection (e.g., user input  634 ) of an indicator (e.g.,  6610 F of  FIG. 6V ) of the one or more indicators, wherein the indicator includes a representation of a fourth media item (e.g., “Heart Wave” as shown in  FIG. 6V ). In some examples, the representation of the fourth media item is a thumbnail image that includes album art, an artist thumbnail, or the like. In response to receiving selection of the indicator, and while continuing to concurrently display the first and second regions, the electronic device (e.g.,  600 ) updates display of the second region (e.g.,  611 B) to include at least a portion of the representation of the fourth media item (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 6W ). For example, the second region can be updated to reflect that the device has received user selection of a different media item than that which is currently playing back, a representation of which was displayed immediately prior to receiving the selection. Thus, the electronic device visually indicates that it has been retargeted to the devices that are playing back the fourth media item. In some examples, the second region represents a media application on the device. For example, a media application includes any application executing on the device usable for browsing, selecting, or otherwise initiating playback of media items. 
     In some embodiments, the user input (e.g.,  608 A or  608 B) is a first user input, and prior to receiving the user input, the electronic device (e.g.,  600 ) receives a seventh user input (e.g.,  604  or  642 ). In response to receiving the seventh user input, the electronic device displays, on the display (e.g.,  602 ), a playback control interface (e.g.,  606 A of  FIG. 6C ) that includes: one or more playback control affordances (e.g.,  606 M of  FIG. 6C ); a playback device selection affordance (e.g.,  606 B of  FIG. 6C ); and an affordance for controlling a data connection of the device (e.g.,  606 N). The electronic device receives the first user input (e.g.,  608 A of  FIG. 6E , or  608 B of  FIG. 6F ), wherein the first user input is associated with the playback control interface (e.g., selection of  606 B of  FIG. 6E , or a deep press of  606 A of  FIG. 6F ). 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device receives the first user input (e.g.,  608 A or  608 B), and the first user input has an input characteristic. In some embodiments, an input characteristic is a characteristic intensity of an input. In some embodiments, an input characteristic is a length of time associated with an input. In some examples, a length of time associated with an input is a length of time that a touch input was continuously detected on a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., of device  600 ). 
     The electronic device (e.g.,  600 ) determines whether the input characteristic meets an input characteristic-dependent criteria. In some embodiments, to determine whether the input characteristic meets an input characteristic-dependent criteria, the electronic determines whether the characteristic intensity meets an intensity-dependent criteria. For example, whether the characteristic input of the input is above a threshold intensity. In some embodiments, to determine whether the input characteristic meets an input characteristic-dependent criteria, electronic device determines whether the user input meets a time-based criteria. For example, whether the touch is detected (e.g., on a touch-sensitive surface associated with the electronic device) for a predetermined amount of time. Input characteristics and input characteristic dependent criteria other than those based on intensity or time can be used. In accordance with a determination that the input characteristic meets the input characteristic-dependent criteria, the device displays, on the display, the multi-device interface. In accordance with a determination that the input characteristic intensity does not meet the input characteristic-dependent criteria, the electronic device forgoes displaying, on the display, the multi-device interface. In some embodiments, further in accordance with a determination that the input characteristic intensity does not meet the input characteristic-dependent criteria, the electronic device determines a location associated with the first user input. In accordance with a determination that the location is associated with a playback control affordance (e.g.,  606 M of  FIG. 6C ), the device performs a corresponding playback control function. For example, if the first user input does not have a characteristic intensity that exceeds a threshold intensity, and is received at a location associated with a pause playback affordance, then the device pauses playback. 
     In some embodiments, the seventh user input (e.g.,  642 ) is received while displaying a user interface of an application executing on the device (e.g.,  640  of  FIG. 6Y ). While continuing to display at least a portion (e.g.,  640  of  FIG. 6AA ) of the user interface of the application, the electronic device (e.g.,  600 ) displays, on the display (e.g.,  602 ), the playback control interface (e.g.,  606 A). Subsequent to receiving the first user input, and while continuing to display the at least a portion of the user interface of the application, the electronic device (e.g.,  600 ) displays, on the display, the multi-device interface (e.g.,  610  of  FIG. 6AA ). In some embodiments, a user input (e.g., a touch or click) outside of the multi-device interface portion (e.g., outside of  610  of  FIG. 6AA ) causes the electronic device to cease displaying the multi-device interface (e.g., and display  640  as shown in  FIG. 6Y ). For example, the multi-device interface ceases being displayed overlaid on the application and the application (e.g., represented by  640  of  FIG. 6Y ) becomes the active user interface again. 
     In some embodiments, the multi-device interface (e.g.,  610  of  FIG. 6AB ) includes a volume control affordance (e.g.,  610 D of  FIG. 6AB ) associated with the plurality of available playback devices (e.g., the devices represented by  610 H,  610 L, and  610 N). The electronic device receives an eighth user input (e.g.,  6644 ) associated with the volume control affordance. In response to receiving the eighth user input, the device transmits an instruction to adjust a playback volume of the plurality of available playback devices (e.g., the devices represented by  610 H,  610 L, and  610 N). For example, the device (e.g.,  600 ) transmits instructions to the devices “Kitchen” and “Living Room” that are currently targeted by the device and are playing back the same media content. 
     In some embodiments, the multi-device interface includes a plurality of individual volume control affordances (e.g.,  610 S,  610 T, and  610 U of  FIG. 6AB ), each associated with a single device of the plurality of available playback devices (e.g., the devices represented by  610 H,  610 L, and  610 N, respectively). The device receives a ninth user input associated with an individual volume control affordance (e.g.,  610 U). For example, the electronic device receives a selection and movement of the slider  610 U in FIG. AB. In response to receiving the ninth user input, the device transmits an instruction to adjust a playback volume of the associated device (e.g., device represented by  610 N), wherein the associated device is different than the electronic device (e.g.,  600 ). For example, the electronic device transmits an instruction to adjust the volume for the device associated with the affordance  610 U, forgoing adjustment of volume for other devices in the group. 
     In some embodiments, the one or more indicators associated with the plurality of available playback devices includes ( 728 ): a first indicator (e.g.,  670 B of  FIG. 6AI ) representing a fifth media item currently playing on the electronic device (e.g.,  660 ), wherein the first indicator is displayed in a first region (e.g.,  670 A of  FIG. 6AI ); a second indicator (e.g.,  670 C of  FIG. 6AI ) representing a group of devices (e.g.,  670 E of  FIG. 6AJ ) that are each currently playing back a sixth media item; and individual indicators (e.g., indicators  670 D,  670 E,  670 F, and  670 G of  FIG. 6AI ) for each device of the plurality of available playback devices. While displaying the multi-device interface, the electronic device (e.g.,  600 ) receives ( 730 ) a tenth user input (e.g.,  672 ) representing a request to replace display of the first indicator (e.g.,  670 B of  FIG. 6AI ) in the first region (e.g.,  670 A of  FIG. 6AI ) with display of the second indicator (e.g.,  670 C). In response to the tenth user input, the electronic device replaces display ( 732 ) (e.g., as illustrated in  FIG. 6AJ ) of the first indicator (e.g.,  670 B) in the first region (e.g.,  670 A) with display of the second indicator (e.g.,  670 C as illustrated in  FIG. 6AJ ). In some embodiments, the tenth user input is received at a second device (e.g.,  662 ) associated with the electronic device (e.g.,  600  or  660 ). 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g.,  660 ) displays ( 734 ) an indication (e.g.,  670 K) of whether each device of the plurality of available playback devices is currently playing back a media item associated with an indicator displayed in the first region. 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g.,  660 ) receives an eleventh user input (e.g.,  678 ) associated with an individual indicator (e.g.,  670 E of  FIG. 6AN ) for a device of the plurality of available playback devices. The electronic device determines whether the eleventh user input represents a selection that exceeds a threshold duration. For example, the input can be a tap and hold on a touch-sensitive surface of the device or a touch-sensitive surface associated with the device (e.g., of  662 ). In accordance with the eleventh user input representing a selection that exceeds the threshold duration, the electronic device enters a volume adjustment mode for the device associated with the individual indicator (e.g., illustrated in  FIG. 6AO ). In some examples, entering the volume adjustment mode can include displaying a visual indication (e.g.,  670 J of  FIG. 6AO ) that the electronic device is in a volume adjustment mode. For the visual indication can indicate which device or devices are currently subject to volume adjustment in the volume adjustment mode. For example, indicators for other devices can be grayed out or otherwise altered in appearance in response to the eleventh user input. In some examples, a volume indicator (e.g.,  670 J) such as a slider or knob indicating a volume level appears, appears enlarged, or is otherwise visually altered so as to visually communicate that the electronic device is currently in the volume adjustment mode. In accordance with the eleventh user input (e.g.,  678 ) not representing a selection that exceeds the threshold duration, forgoing entering the volume adjustment mode for the device associated with the individual indicator. 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g.,  600 ,  660 ) receives a twelfth user input representing a request to initiate media playback on the plurality of available devices. In response to receiving the twelfth user input: in accordance with a determination that the plurality of available devices includes at least one device configured to receive playback coordination responsibility, the electronic device transfers playback coordination responsibility to the at least one device of the plurality of devices. In accordance with a determination that the plurality of available devices does not include at least one device configured to receive playback coordination responsibility, the electronic device (e.g.,  600 ,  660 ) coordinates the media playback on the plurality of devices. 
     In some embodiments, while the electronic device (e.g.,  600  or  660 ) is coordinating the media playback on the plurality of devices, the electronic device receives a thirteenth user input representing a request to initiate a phone call on the device. For example, the device receives user input representing a request to answer a phone call or to place a phone call. In response to receiving the thirteenth user input representing the request to initiate the phone call, the electronic device: initiates the phone call; and continues coordinating the media playback on the plurality of devices during the phone call. 
     In some embodiments, further in response to receiving the twelfth user input, the electronic device (e.g.,  600 ,  660 ) transmits data representing a playback queue to each of the devices in the plurality of devices. 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g.,  600  or  660 ) receives a fourteenth user input representing a request to initiate media playback on the plurality of available devices, wherein the fourteenth user input is associated with a first user. In some examples, the electronic device determines that a user input is associated with the first user based on detected voice input, based on a device that sent the request, or the like. In response to receiving the fourteenth user input, in accordance with a determination that the first user is subject to a playback restriction, the electronic device (e.g.,  600 ,  660 ) prevents the electronic device (e.g.,  600 ,  660 ) from initiating media playback on the plurality of available devices in response to the eleventh user input. In accordance with a determination that the first user is not subject to the playback restriction, the electronic device allows the device to initiate media playback on the plurality of available devices in response to the eleventh user input. 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g.,  600  or  660 ) receives ( 736 ) a fifteenth user input (e.g.,  652  of  FIG. 6AE ) representing a request for media output on the device. In some embodiments, the fifteenth user input represents a request to initiate media playback on the device. In some embodiments, the fifteenth user input represents a request to output media having a visual component. For example, media having a visual component includes, but is not limited to, images, videos, browser applications, electronic messages (e.g., emails, text messages), or the like. In response to receiving the fifteenth user input ( 738 ): in accordance with a determination that the request for media output is a request to display content (e.g., represented by  650 A of  FIG. 6AE ), the electronic device transmits ( 740 ) an instruction to a preferred device (e.g.,  660  of  FIG. 6AH ) of the plurality of available playback devices to initiate display of the content in response to the twelfth request. In some embodiments, a request for media output is a request to playback content having a visual component (e.g., video). For example, video content includes but is not limited to: a movie, a show, a video stream, or the like. In some embodiments, a preferred device is a device that is capable of outputting video (e.g., an Apple TV), or a device connected to a large display (e.g., predefined as preferred). In accordance with a determination that the request for media output is not a request to display content, the electronic device (e.g.,  600  or  660 ) ( 742 ): forgoes transmitting the instruction to the preferred device of the plurality of available playback devices to initiate display of the content in response to the twelfth request; and initiates media output on the device in response to the twelfth user input. For example, if the requested playback is of audio content, the electronic device plays back the audio on the requested device instead. 
     Note that details of the processes described above with respect to method  700  (e.g.,  FIGS. 7A-7D ) are also applicable in an analogous manner to the methods described below. For example, method  900 ,  1100 ,  1300 ,  1500 ,  1700 ,  1800 ,  2000 ,  2200 ,  2400 ,  2600 ,  2800 ,  3000 ,  3200 ,  3400 ,  3600 ,  3800 , and  3900  optionally includes one or more of the characteristics of the various methods described above with reference to method  700 . For brevity, these details are not repeated below. 
       FIGS. 8A-8P  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for accessing a multi-device interface, in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIGS. 9A-9C . 
       FIGS. 8A-8B  illustrate an exemplary current media interface, in accordance with some embodiments. At  FIG. 8A , device  800  displays, on display  802 , current media interface  804 . Current media interface  804  (also referred to as a “now playing interface”) identifies a media item that is currently being played back. In some embodiments, device  800  includes one or more features of device  100 ,  300 , or  500 . Current media interface  804  includes album art  804 A, media identifier  804 B (song title “Same Thing”), media identifier  804 C (artist “Jambug”), media identifier  804 D (album “Fly Away”), and device selection affordance  804 E. As shown in  FIG. 8A , the device selection affordance  804 E does not include an identifier for another device. Thus, in this example, the media item identified in the current media interface  804  is currently playing back on the current device, device  800 . In some examples, the media identified by the currently media interface is currently being played back on other devices as well (e.g., in addition to the current device, or a set that excludes the current device). As shown in  FIG. 8B , device  800  receives user input  806  representing selection of device selection affordance  804 E. In some examples, user input  806  can be a tap or touch on a location associated with the displayed device selection affordance  804 E. 
       FIG. 8C  illustrates an exemplary multi-device interface, in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, device  800  displays multi-device interface  810  in response to user input  806 . As shown in  FIG. 8C , multi-device interface  810  includes indicators  810 A- 810 K. Multi-device interface  810  is analogous to multi-device interface  610 , described above (e.g., with respect to  FIG. 6J ). Likewise, indicators  810 A- 810 K are analogous to the indicators of multi-device interface  610 . Accordingly, the above description of a multi-device interface (e.g.,  610 ) is hereby incorporated by reference with respect to multi-device interface  810 . 
     In particular,  FIG. 8C  depicts a multi-device interface  810  that includes an indicator  810 J that represents a media session that includes the device set “Kitchen+Living Room”, which is comprised of the device set “Kitchen” and the device set “Living Room”. In this example, the Kitchen set represents a single smart speaker device (e.g., device  580 ), and the Living Room set represents a different single smart speaker device (e.g., another instance of device  580 ). The media session represented by indicator  810 J includes playback of the media item titled “Heart Wave” by artist “MKTS” on the device set “Kitchen+Living Room”. 
       FIGS. 8D-8H  illustrate exemplary techniques for refocusing a device, in accordance with some embodiments. At  FIG. 8D , the device  800  receives user input  812  representing selection of indicator  810 J. In some embodiments, user input  812  is a tap or touch on a location associated with the indicator  810 J. In some embodiments, user input  812  is a deep press input or a tap and hold input on a location associated with the indicator  810 J. As shown in  FIG. 8D , the current media interface  804  is visible on display  802  concurrently with the display of multi-device interface  810 . Specifically, device  800  displays multi-device interface  810  in a first region  828 A that is visually overlaid on a second region  828 B. Device  800  displays the current media interface  804  in the second region  828 B. As shown in  FIG. 8D , second region  828 B (e.g., the current media interface  804 ) is partially obscured by the first region  828 A, but it still visible. Thus, device  800  provides a visual indication (e.g., other than the multi-device interface  810 ) of the current focus of the device. For instance, because the album art displayed with the indicator  810 A matches the album art of current media interface  804 , the device indicates that the current focus of the device, or the focus of a particular application (e.g., associated with the current media interface  804 ), is the current device “iPhone”, which is currently playing the media item associated with the matching album art. 
     In response to receiving user input  812 , device  800  displays an expanded version of indicator  810 J, as shown in  FIG. 8E . The expanded indicator  810 J (and the reduced size of indicator  810 A) of  FIG. 8E  provide visual indication that the focus of the device is now on the media session represented by indicator  810 J. As shown in  FIG. 8E , in response to changing the focus: indicator  810 B no longer includes a checkmark in indicator  810 F (e.g., because the iPhone is not part of the currently-selected media session), indicators  810 D and  810 E now include checkmarks in indicators  810 H and  810 I, respectively (e.g., because the Kitchen and Living Room set of devices are part of the currently-selected media session). In some examples, an indicator for one or more devices indicates that the corresponding one or more devices are unavailable. For example, an unavailable device is a device that is: offline, currently installing a software or firmware update, configured to be unavailable (e.g., via a setting or button), or the like. In some examples, a corresponding indicator is not displayed for unavailable devices. Alternatively, an indicator for such device or devices is displayed, but with an indication that the device is unavailable for media playback. For example,  FIG. 8E  depicts indicator  810 C, which includes the text “Updating” indicating that the Bedroom device set is currently unavailable for media playback (e.g., initiated from the device  800 ).  FIG. 8E  also depicts the text and image of indicator  810 C different than the other device indicators, further visually indicating that the device set Bedroom is unavailable for media playback from device  800 . For example, the device  800  can display an indicator for an unavailable device in a grey color, or other suitable manner that visually distinguishes the unavailable device from available devices. 
     At  FIG. 8F , device  800  receives user input  814 . In this example, user input  814  represents a contact (e.g., touch, tap, deep press, or press and hold) on a location outside of the displayed multi-device interface  810  (e.g., on a location that does not include display of an indicator of multi-device indicator  810 ). In some examples, in response to receiving user input  814 , device  800  ceases displaying multi-device interface  810 . 
       FIGS. 8G and 8H  illustrate an exemplary current media interface. At  FIG. 8F , device  800  displays current media interface  816 . In some examples, current media interface  816  is displayed in response to user input  814  of  FIG. 8F . In some examples, current media interface  816  is displayed in response to user input  812  of  FIG. 8D . Current media interfaces  804  and  816  are similar, however current media interface  816  is an updated version of interface  804 , and reflects that the device  800  is now targeting a different media session (e.g., set of devices and/or media). In particular, current media interface  816  includes album art  816 A (e.g., different than the album art  804 A) media identifier  816 B (song title “Heart Wave”), media identifier  816 C (artist “MKTS”), media identifier  816 D (album “MKTS”), and device selection affordance  816 E. As shown in  FIG. 8G , the device selection affordance  816 E includes an identifier for another device set, “Kitchen+Living Room”. Thus, in this example, the media item identified in the current media interface  816  is currently playing back on the device set “Kitchen+Living Room” (e.g., which excludes device  800 ). At  FIG. 8H , device  800  receives a user input  818 . In this example, user input  818  represents a contact (e.g., touch, tap, deep press, or press and hold) on a location outside of the displayed current media interface  816  (e.g., on a location that does not include display of an indicator of current media interface  816 ). In some examples, in response to receiving user input  818 , device  800  ceases displaying current media interface  816 . In some examples, device  800  displays browser interface  820  in response to user input  818 . 
       FIGS. 8I and 8J  illustrate an exemplary browser interface. At  FIG. 8I , device  800  displays browser interface  820  for viewing and selecting a plurality of media items. Browser interface  820  depicts a music browsing interface, and in particular, an album view of a music album. Browser interface  820  includes identifier  820 A identifying the currently-selected album, as well as a plurality of affordances (e.g.,  820 B and  820 C), each corresponding to a media item (e.g., tracks of the music album). Current media indicator  822  identifies media currently playing back as part of a currently-selected media session (e.g., the track titled “Heart Wave” playing back on the devices Kitchen+Living Room). At  FIG. 8J , device  800  receives user input  824  representing selection of media item affordance  820 B. In some examples, user input is a tap or touch input at a location associated with affordance  820 B. In some examples, user input is a deep press or touch and hold input at a location associated with affordance  820 B. 
       FIG. 8K  illustrates an exemplary current media interface. In some examples, device  800  displays current media interface  826  in response to user input  824  (e.g., shown in  FIG. 8K ). In some examples, device  800  displays current media interface  826  in response one or more user inputs received subsequent to user input  824 . As shown in  FIG. 8K , current media interface  826  illustrates that, in response to a request to selection of a media item for playback (e.g., selection of affordance  820 B) and while device  800  is targeted to a set of devices (e.g., “Kitchen+Living Room” as shown in  FIG. 8H ), that playback is initiated on the targeted set of devices. Thus, user input selection of affordance  820 B associated with the music item titled “The Spiral” by artist “The Fomoers” causes display of current media interface  826  that includes corresponding appropriate indicators  826 A- 826 D. Device selection affordance  826 E indicates that the focus of device  800  continues to be the device set “Kitchen+Living Room” (e.g., as it was immediately prior to receiving user input  824 ). 
       FIGS. 8L-8P  illustrate exemplary interfaces for initiating playback of media on one or more devices that are currently playing back other media.  FIG. 8L  depicts multi-device interface  810 , as described above with respect to  FIG. 8C . As shown in  FIG. 8L , the currently-selected media session corresponds to the device iPhone and the media track “Same Thing”. 
     At  FIG. 8M , device  800  has received user input selection of the device set Kitchen (e.g., represented by the checkmark in indicator  810 H of indicator  810 D) and the device set Living Room (e.g., represented by the checkmark in indicator  810 I of indicator  810 E). In some examples, the user input selection of a device is user input  830  at a location associated with a device indicator (e.g., indicator  810 D, as shown in  FIG. 8M ).  FIG. 8M  also depicts user input  832 , representing selection of affordance  810 L. In some examples, user input  832  is a contact (e.g., tap, touch, deep press) at a location associated with affordance  810 L. In some examples, the user input selection of a device is user input  832 .  FIG. 8M  also depicts indicator  810 I, for a non-selected media session that includes playback on the devices Kitchen and Living Room. Accordingly, the device Kitchen and Living Room are currently busy (e.g., are part of a different media session (e.g., than the media session that is selected) that includes playback of media content) playing back the media item titled “Heart Wave”. Further,  FIG. 8M  depicts indicator  810 I with identifier  810 M, which identifies a media session owner. In some embodiments, a media session owner is a device. In some embodiments, a media session owner is a user or (e.g., a user account). In some embodiments, a media session owner is a device and a user. As shown in  FIG. 8M , the media session owner associated with the media session of indicator  810 I includes both a user and a device, “Bob&#39;s iPhone”. Thus, in this example, the media session owner includes a device different than device  800 , and the different device is associated with a user (e.g., Bob) that is not associated with device  800  (e.g., device  800  is not logged into an account associated with Bob). 
       FIG. 8N  illustrates an exemplary notification prompt for taking over playback of a device. In some embodiments, device  800  displays notification prompt  834  in response to receiving user input  830 . In some embodiments, device  800  displays notification prompt  834  in response to receiving user input  832 . In some examples, a notification prompt is displayed when device  800  attempts to initiate (or be configured to initiate) media playback on a device that is currently busy playing back media. In some examples, a device is busy playing back media if such media was initiated by a different media session owner. Thus, if device  800  is associated with a first user account (e.g., belonging to user Tim) and the targeted device is currently playing back media that was initiated by a second user account (e.g., from a device associate with a user account belonging to Bob) that is not associated with device  800 , a notification prompt such as notification prompt  834  can be displayed. 
     In some examples, a notification prompt for taking over playback is displayed in response to user input  830 . For example, in response to a user selecting an indicator for Kitchen device in  FIG. 8M , a notification prompt is displayed. In some examples, a notification prompt for taking over playback is displayed in response to user input  832 . For example, in response to receiving selection of affordance  810 L in  FIG. 8M  (e.g., after receiving selection of the Kitchen and Living Room indicators  810 D and  810 E), notification prompt  834  is displayed. Notification prompt  834  includes a message  834 A that reads: “The Kitchen and Living Room speakers are currently playing “Heart Wave”. Are you sure you would like to play “Same Thing” in the Kitchen and Living Room?”. Further, notification prompt  834  includes yes affordance  834 B and cancel affordance  834 C. In some examples, selection of affordance  834 B causes device  800  to take over the playback of the selected devices. In some examples, selection of affordance  834 C causes device  800  to forgo taking over the playback of the selected devices. 
       FIG. 8O  illustrates an exemplary multi-device interface after taking over playback from another media session owner. At  FIG. 8O , device  800  displays the multi-device interface  810  depicted in  FIG. 8O  in response to selection of yes affordance  834 B, representing confirmation of that the device  800  should take over playback and add the Kitchen and Living Room devices to the currently-selected “Same Thing” media session. Notably, in  FIG. 8O , the indicator  810 J (as shown in  FIG. 8L ) is no longer displayed. In some examples, an indicator for a media session ceases to be displayed subsequent to its devices being taken over. In this example, the media session that corresponded to indicator  810 J (e.g., playback of “Heart Wave” on devices “Kitchen+Living Room”) no longer exists (e.g., because each of its devices have been added to another media session). Thus, indicator  810 J is not displayed in multi-device interface  810  of  FIG. 8O . 
       FIG. 8P  illustrates an exemplary multi-device interface after less than all devices of a media session have been taken over.  FIG. 8P  is similar to  FIG. 8O  except that the device set “Living Room” was not taken over (e.g., not selected at  FIG. 8M ) and added to the media session for the media item “Same Thing”. Thus, the indicator  810 J continues to be displayed in  FIG. 8P , but has been updated to reflect that the Kitchen device is no longer a part of that media session. For example indicator  810 J in  FIG. 8P  now identifies “Living Room” as the device set included in its corresponding media session, and no longer identifies “Kitchen+Living Room” (e.g., as in  FIG. 8M ). 
       FIGS. 9A-9C  is a flow diagram illustrating a method for configuring an electronic device to initiate playback on a plurality of available playback devices using an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. Method  900  is performed at a device (e.g.,  100 ,  300 ,  500 ,  580 ) with a display. Some operations in method  900  are, optionally, combined, the order of some operations are, optionally, changed, and some operations are, optionally, omitted. 
     As described below, method  900  provides an intuitive way for configuring an electronic device to initiate playback on a plurality of available playback devices. The method reduces the cognitive burden on a user for configuring an electronic device to initiate playback on a plurality of available playback devices, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated computing devices, enabling a user to configure an electronic device to initiate playback on a plurality of available playback devices faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges. 
     The electronic device (e.g.,  800 ) displays ( 902 ), on the display (e.g.,  802 ), a first current media interface (e.g.,  804  of  FIG. 8A ) for the device, wherein the first current media interface includes: a representation (e.g.,  804 A,  804 B,  804 C, and/or  804 D of  FIG. 8A ) of a first media item available for playback on the device ( 904 ), and a playback device selection affordance ( 906 ) (e.g.,  804 E). In some examples, a current media interface is any user interface for browsing, viewing, or controlling media playback. For example, a current media interface is a “Now Playing” interface. 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g.,  800 ) is currently playing the first media item. For example, the first current media interface is a “Now Playing” interface. In some embodiments, the representation of the first media item available for playback on the device is selectable (e.g., is an affordance), and can be selected to initiate playback of the first media item on the electronic device. For example, the first current media interface is a browsing interface that allows browsing of one or more media items (e.g., the first media item) while a media application on the electronic device (e.g., or the electronic device itself) is targeting the electronic device. In some embodiments, selection of a media item (e.g., the first media item) while the music application is targeted to a device causes playback of the media item to initiate on the targeted device in response. 
     In some embodiments, selection of a playback device selection affordance (e.g.,  804 E) allows one or more available playback devices to be selected. In some embodiments, the available playback devices include the electronic device. Selection of one or more available playback devices may be referred to as “targeting”, “retargeting”, “focusing”, “refocusing” a media application or the electronic device, as described above. For example, a media application or device can be targeted to three discrete devices: the electronic device and two external speakers connected to the device via a wireless connection. In this example, while targeted to the three discrete devices in this example, a media item is selected for playback, and playback is initiated on the three discrete devices. 
     The electronic device (e.g.,  800 ) receives ( 908 ) a first user input (e.g.,  806  of  FIG. 8B ) representing selection of the playback device selection affordance (e.g.,  804 E). 
     In response to receiving the first user input (e.g.,  806 ), the electronic device (e.g.,  800 ) displays ( 910 ), on the display (e.g.,  802 ), one or more affordances (e.g., affordances  804 B- 804 K) associated with a plurality of available playback devices (e.g., the device sets iPhone, Bedroom, Kitchen, and/or Living Room of  FIG. 8C ) connected to the device (e.g.,  800 ). In some examples, available playback devices are devices that are connected to the device such that the electronic device can control or otherwise use the available playback devices to initiate playback of media content (e.g., via instructions transmitted over a communication link). In some examples, the available devices are connected (e.g., to the electronic device) via a wireless connection (e.g., via Wi-Fi, Apple Airplay, or the like). In some embodiments, the plurality of available playback devices includes the electronic device. 
     Displaying one or more affordances associated with a plurality of available playback devices connected to the device provides the user with visual feedback about the state of a plurality of devices that are available for media playback. Providing improved visual feedback to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     Displaying one or more affordances associated with a plurality of available playback devices connected to the device allows the user to collectively view a plurality of states for a plurality of available devices in one optimized interface. Providing an optimized interface to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     The electronic device (e.g.,  800 ) receives ( 912 ) a second user input (e.g.,  812  of  FIG. 8D ) representing selection of the one or more affordances (e.g., affordance  810 J of  FIG. 8D ) associated with the plurality of available playback devices. In some examples, the electronic device receives selection of several devices (e.g., via selection of indicators  810 H and  810 I as shown in  FIG. 8E ), or receives selection of a single indicator (e.g.,  810 J  FIG. 8D ) representing a plurality of devices. 
     In response to receiving the second user input (e.g.,  812 ), the electronic device (e.g.,  800 ) configures ( 914 ) the device to initiate playback on the plurality of available playback devices (e.g., the devices in the set “Kitchen+Living Room” represented by affordance  810 J of  FIG. 8D , and individually by affordances  804 D and  804 E of  FIG. 8E ). In some embodiments, configuring the device to initiate playback comprises initiating playback on the plurality of available playback devices. In some embodiments, playback is not initiated in response to configuring the device to initiate playback on the plurality of available playback devices, but if a command to initiate playback of media is subsequently received by the device, playback will be initiated on the plurality of available playback devices. Thus, in some examples, configuring a device to initiate media playback, on one or more devices, “retargets” the device (e.g., as described above) on the one or more devices, for example, to control and/or output playback on a plurality of available devices. 
     Configuring a device to initiate playback on the plurality of available playback devices allows the user to collectively control a plurality of available devices in one optimized interface. Providing an optimized interface to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, configuring the device to initiate playback on the plurality of available playback devices comprises transmitting ( 916 ) an instruction to the available playback devices to initiate playback (e.g., the devices in the set “Kitchen+Living Room” represented by affordance  810 J of  FIG. 8D , and individually by affordances  804 D and  804 E of  FIG. 8E ). 
     In some embodiments, while the electronic device (e.g.,  800 ) is configured to initiate playback on the plurality of available playback devices (e.g., devices represented by affordances  804 D and  804 E of  FIG. 8E ), and after ceasing to display the one or more affordances (e.g., affordances  804 B- 804 K) associated with the plurality of available playback devices (e.g., the device sets iPhone, Bedroom, Kitchen, and/or Living Room of  FIG. 8C ), the electronic device receives ( 918 ) a third user input (e.g.,  824  of  FIG. 8J ), representing a request to initiate playback of a second media item (e.g., represented by  820 B of  FIG. 8J ). For example, while the electronic device is targeting the plurality of available playback devices, the third user input is received after ceasing to display multi-device interface  810 . In response to receiving the third user input, the electronic device transmits ( 920 ) a request to initiate playback of the second media on the plurality of available playback devices (e.g., the device set “Kitchen+Living Room” indicated by device selection affordance  824 E of  FIG. 8K ). In some embodiments, the third user input is received at a browser interface (e.g.,  820  of  FIG. 8I ). In some examples, a browser interface is an interface for browsing and selecting media items for playback (e.g., a music application, a video application). The browser interface can be displayed after configuring the device to initiate playback on the plurality of available playback device at a multi-device interface, and after ceasing to display (e.g., dismissing, exiting) the multi-device interface. In some examples, the device remembers that playback of selected media will be initiated on the plurality of available devices that were selected at the multi-device interface (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 8F ). In some embodiments, the third user input is selection of an affordance of the browser interface. For example, such as an affordance associated with a media item, such as a song or video. In some embodiments, transmitting a request to initiate playback of the second media comprises transmitting an address (e.g., a URL) that is usable to stream the media. In some embodiments, transmitting a request to initiate playback of the second media comprises transmitting a stream of the media from the electronic device to the plurality of available devices. 
     In some embodiments, the first current media interface (e.g.,  804  of  FIG. 8A ) for the electronic device (e.g.,  800 ) includes an indication (e.g.,  804 A,  804 B,  804 C, and/or  804 D) of a media item currently playing back on the device, and further in response to receiving the first user input (e.g.,  806 ), the electronic device (e.g.,  800 ) concurrently displays, on the display (e.g.,  802 ): a first region (e.g.,  828 A of  FIG. 8D ) that includes the one or more affordances (e.g.,  804 B- 804 K) associated with the plurality of available playback devices; and a second region (e.g.,  828 B of  FIG. 8D ) that includes the indication (e.g.,  804 A,  804 B,  804 C, and/or  804 D) of the media item currently playing back (e.g., “Same Thing” by “Jambug” as indicated by indicator  810 A of  FIG. 8D ) on the electronic device (e.g.,  800 ). Further in response to receiving the second user input (e.g.,  812  of  FIG. 8D ), the electronic device (e.g.,  800 ) visually updates the second region (e.g.,  828 B of  FIG. 8D ) to display an indication of a media item currently playing back (e.g., “Heart Wave” by “MKTS” as indicated by indicator  810 J of  FIG. 810J  of  FIG. 8E ) on the plurality of available playback devices (e.g., the device set “Kitchen+Living Room” represented by indicator  810 J of  FIG. 8E ). 
     In some embodiments, the one or more affordances (e.g.,  810 J of  FIG. 8D ) associated with the plurality of available playback devices connected to the device include information (e.g., “Heart Wave” by “MKTS” as indicated by indicator  810 J of  FIG. 810J  of  FIG. 8D ) identifying media currently being played back by the plurality of available playback devices. 
     In some embodiments, the information identifying the media currently being played back by the plurality of available playback devices includes one or more of: a song title, an artist, a movie title, an episode name, and a URL (e.g., “Heart Wave” by “MKTS” as indicated by indicator  810 J of  FIG. 810J  of  FIG. 8E ). 
     In some embodiments, while the electronic device (e.g.,  800 ) is configured to initiate playback on the plurality of available playback devices (e.g., the device set “Kitchen+Living Room” represented by indicator  810 J of  FIG. 8E ), the electronic device transmits ( 922 ) an instruction to initiate media playback of a third media item (e.g., “Same Thing” by “Jambug”, as indicated by the active media session indicator  810 A of  FIG. 8M ) on the plurality of available playback devices (e.g., the device set Kitchen and the device set Living Room respectively corresponding to indicators  810 D and  810 E of  FIG. 8M ), wherein the plurality of available playback devices are currently playing a fourth media item (e.g., “Heart Wave” by “MKTS”, as indicated by the active media session indicator  810 J of  FIG. 8M ) that was initiated by another device (e.g., the device named “Bob&#39;s iPhone” identified by indicator  810 J of  FIG. 8M ) different than the electronic device (e.g.,  800 ). Subsequent to transmitting the instruction to initiate playback of the third media item, the electronic device (e.g.,  800 ) receives ( 924 ) an indication (e.g., as shown by indicator  810 A of  FIG. 8O , checkmarks in indicators  810 H and  810 I) that the plurality of devices are currently playing back the third media item (e.g., “Same Thing” by “Jambug”, as indicated by the active media session indicator  810 A of  FIG. 8O ). 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g.,  800 ) determines ( 926 ) that the plurality of available playback devices (e.g., the device set Kitchen and the device set Living Room respectively corresponding to indicators  810 D and  810 E of  FIG. 8M ) are currently playing content (e.g., “Heart Wave” by “MKTS”, as indicated by indicator  810 J of  FIG. 8M ) that was initiated by another device (e.g., “Bob&#39;s iPhone” as indicated by indicator  810 J of  FIG. 8M ). In accordance with the determination that the plurality of available playback devices are currently playing content that was initiated by another device, the electronic device requests ( 928 ) (e.g., displays prompt  834  of  FIG. 8N ) user input confirmation (e.g., selection of affordance  834 B or  834 C of  FIG. 8N ) of the instruction to initiate media playback of a third media item on the plurality of available playback devices. The electronic device (e.g.,  800 ) receives ( 930 ) a user input response (e.g., selection of affordance  834 B or  834 C of  FIG. 8N ) to the request for user input confirmation. In accordance with the user input response being a positive confirmation (e.g., selection of affordance  834 B  FIG. 8N ), the electronic device transmits ( 932 ) the instruction to initiate media playback of the third media item on the plurality of available playback devices. In accordance with the user input response being a negative confirmation (e.g., selection of affordance  834 C  FIG. 8N ), the electronic device forgoes ( 934 ) transmitting the instruction to initiate media playback of the third media item on the plurality of available playback devices. 
     In some embodiments, further in response to receiving the second user input ( 936 ) (e.g.,  812  of  FIG. 8D ), the electronic device (e.g.,  800 ) ceases displaying (e.g., replaces display with current media interface  816  of  FIG. 8G ) the one or more affordances (e.g., the affordances included in  810  of  FIG. 8D ) associated with the plurality of available playback devices. 
     In some embodiments, a media item includes ( 938 ) one or more of audio data, video data, or both. 
     Note that details of the processes described above with respect to method  900  (e.g.,  FIGS. 9A-9C  are also applicable in an analogous manner to the methods described below/above. For example, method  700 ,  1100 ,  1300 ,  1500 ,  1700 ,  1800 ,  2000 ,  2200 ,  2400 ,  2600 ,  2800 ,  3000 ,  3200 ,  3400 ,  3600 ,  3800 , and  3900  optionally includes one or more of the characteristics of the various methods described above with reference to method  900 . For brevity, these details are not repeated below. 
       FIGS. 10A-10O  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for configuring an electronic device, in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIGS. 11A-11D . 
       FIG. 10A  illustrates an exemplary smart speaker device. Device  1000  is a smart speaker device, and can include one or more features of device  580  as described above. In some embodiments, device  1000  includes one or more features of device  100 ,  300 , or  500 . As shown in  FIG. 10A , device  1000  can include one or more LED indicators, which are shown displaying a rotating swirling pattern  1004  in  FIG. 10A . In some examples, the LED indicators display a pattern (e.g., also referred to as a “boot up pattern”) when device  1000  is powered on for the first time (e.g., during boot up of the device). The pattern  1004  can be created by one or more LED indicators or other display elements (e.g., a display panel), which are referred to herein interchangeably, unless otherwise noted. In some examples, LED indicators are positioned under a touch-sensitive surface of device  1000 .  FIG. 10B  illustrates three concentric rings,  1006 A,  1006 B, and  1006 C that represent concentric rings of discrete LED indicators that comprise an LED indicator that forms pattern  1004 . The rings  1006 A- 1006 C can be used to create the boot up pattern (e.g., pattern  1004 ). In some examples, other arrangements of lighting elements are used. When device  1000  is finished booting up, or is otherwise ready to pair (e.g., with another device) and/or be configured, the pattern  1004 , in some examples, can change. For example, the pattern may transition to a pulsing pattern (e.g., progressively lighting up each concentric ring  1006 A- 1006 C, and then turning them off in reverse order). 
     As shown in  FIG. 10A , device  1000  has limited display capabilities, and thus configuration of device  1000  can be made easier by the use of a second device having more robust display capabilities. In some examples, device  1000  is a smart home device (e.g., a network connected speaker) that a user places within their home (e.g., in one location, or moving between many locations). In such case, the user has physical access to the device when configuring it, and thus the use of physical proximity can be used as part of an intuitive and easy to use interface for configuring the device  1000 . Thus, rather than making a user navigate various menus attempting to establish or access communication between a personal device (e.g., device  1010 ) and the device  1000 , a user can place their personal device near device  1000 , for example, as part of a configuration process. 
       FIGS. 10C-10G  illustrate exemplary physical arrangements of a first device and a second device.  FIG. 10C  illustrates a first scenario that includes first device (e.g., device  1000 ) sitting on a table, and a user holding a second device (e.g., personal device  1010 ) at a long distance away from the first device. In some embodiments, device  1010  includes one or more features of device  100 ,  300 , or  500 .  FIG. 10D  illustrates an exemplary overhead view of the first scenario. As shown in  FIG. 10D , device  1000  and device  1010  are far apart.  FIG. 10D  includes the proximity condition range indicator  1008 . A proximity condition range indicator is also referred to herein as a “proximity zone indicator” or simply as a “proximity zone”. Device  1010  is not inside of proximity condition range indicator  1008 . Proximity condition range indicator  1008  is included as a visual aid, and is intended to represent a physical proximity that would satisfy a proximity condition. For example, range indicator  1008  can represent the range of a near-field communication detection circuitry of device  1000 . In some embodiments, any appropriate technique can be used to detect proximity between devices. For instance, in some examples, wide-band wireless connection is used. Wide-band wireless connection is used, for example, to determine one or more of: directionality, distance, and orientation, of one or more devices. Thus, presence of a detectable device within (e.g., partially or completely) within the proximity condition range indicator  1008  would satisfy a proximity condition, but would not if the detectable device is located outside of the range indicator  1008 . One of skill would appreciate that a detection range of physical proximity can be non-uniform, can be affected by numerous variables (e.g., wireless interference, air humidity, or the like), and can include points in space in three dimensions, all of which are intended to be within the scope of this disclosure. Thus, the graphical representation of proximity condition range indicator  1008  is not intended to limit the scope of determining whether a proximity condition is satisfied. 
       FIG. 10E  illustrates a second scenario that includes first device (device  1000 ) sitting on a table, and a user holding a second device (personal device  1010 ) at a short distance away from the first device.  FIG. 10F  illustrates an exemplary overhead view of the second scenario. As shown in  FIG. 10F , device  1000  and device  1010  are close together and now device  1010  is at least partially within the proximity condition range indicator  1008 . Because proximity condition range indicator  1008  represents a physical proximity that satisfies the proximity condition, the first device  1000  detects an indication that a physical proximity between the first device and the second device  1010  satisfies the proximity condition. In some examples, in accordance with detecting that a proximity condition is satisfied, device  1000  initiates a configuration process. For example, the device  1000  can enter a configuration mode for receiving configuration data (e.g., settings, account information, and the like) from the second device. In some examples, in accordance with detecting that a proximity condition is satisfied, device  1000  proceeds to a next step in a configuration process. For example, if the device  1000  is already in a configuration mode, the satisfaction of a proximity condition can cause the device  1000  to proceed to a next step. For instance, satisfaction of the proximity condition can be required in order to verify the identity of the second device or verify that the user of the second device has physical access to device  1000  (e.g., is not a user outside of the home that is attempting to remotely access and configure device  1000 ). 
       FIGS. 10G-10J  illustrate exemplary techniques for using audio tone signals when configuring a device.  FIG. 10G  depicts an overhead view similar to  FIG. 10F , but additionally depicts device  1000  outputting an audio tone signal  1014  (e.g., depicted as graphical representations of sound waves). In this example, speaker  1000  plays an audible tone. In some examples, the tone is part of a proximity handshake tone at the beginning of a configuration process (e.g., to initiate the process), or a tone later in (e.g., during) the configuration process. In some embodiments, the audio tone signal is out-of-band to a communication link between the first device and the second device. For example, the first and second devices are connected and exchange data communications over a Bluetooth wireless connection (e.g., a communication link). In this example, while the devices continue to be connected via the Bluetooth connection (e.g., the devices detect each other of Bluetooth and perform a handshake), an audio tone signal (e.g., an audible tone that includes or represents a communication between the devices) is out-of-band with the Bluetooth communication link. In some embodiments, being out-of-band to a communication link means that a signal (e.g., an audio tone signal) is not communicated using the same data exchange technique. In some examples, using a different data exchange technique can include one or more of using a different: transmission protocol (e.g., Bluetooth, Wi-Fi), data carrier technology (e.g., sound (mechanical) waves instead of light (electromagnetic) waves), hardware (e.g., wireless antenna instead of a wired connector), or the like. In some embodiments, an audio tone signal is a sound traveling through a transmission medium (e.g., that is detectable by another device). For example, an audio tone signal can include frequencies inside of the human audible frequency range (e.g., approximately 20 Hertz to 20,000 Hertz), and/or include frequencies outside of the human audible frequency range. 
       FIG. 10H  illustrates an exemplary perspective view of the overhead view of  FIG. 10G . As can be seen, a user is holding second device  1010  a short distance away from device  1000 , which is outputting the audio tone signal  1014 . 
       FIG. 10I  illustrates an exemplary perspective view where the second device  1010  is outputting a second audio tone signal  1016  (e.g., which may referred to as a response audio tone signal). In some embodiments, a response audio tone signal  1016  (also referred to as a “second audio tone signal”) is output by the second device in response to the second device detecting the audio tone signal by device  1000 . For example, device  1010  can play a response tone immediately in response to detecting the tone signal  1014 , in order to communicate to the device  1000  that the first audio tone signal was received. In some embodiments, a response tone signal is a tone signal that is output by the second device at a later step in the configuration process. For example, the first tone signal (e.g.,  1014 ) can represent an audible indication that the configuration process has been initiated (e.g., and proceeds to a first step of the process), and subsequent to initiating the configuration process for the second device (e.g., using the first device), the second device can output the second audio tone signal (e.g.,  1016 ) at a fourth step of the configuration process. In some embodiments, the response tone signal includes encoded data. For example, as part of the configuration process for the second device, the second device (e.g., a personal device  1010  that is already associated with a user&#39;s account) can pass account login information to the first device (e.g., so that the device  1000  can access or update data associated with the user&#39;s account) via encoded data in an audio tone signal. This technique can be used, for example, when transmission of such data by other means may be unsecure (e.g., may be intercepted). In some examples, data is encoded in an audio tone signal by any appropriate technique, as one of skill in the art would appreciate. For example, an audio tone signal can include tones at a particular frequency representing data signatures. In some examples, an audio tone signal includes modulated carrier sound waves that carry data information. 
     In some embodiments, the first device repeats the audio tone signal until it receives a confirmation that the second device detected the audio tone signal. For example, device  1000  can repeat output of audio tone signal  1014  until receiving confirmation that device  1010  detected the signal  1014 . For example, the confirmation can be a response tone (e.g., second audio tone signal  1016 ; “out-of-band”) or a communication over the communication link (e.g., Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, or the like; “in-band”) between the two devices. 
     In some embodiments, the first device repeats the audio tone signal for a predetermined number of times. In some embodiments, the first device repeats the audio tone signal for a predetermined number of times or until a confirmation that the second device detected the audio tone signal is received, whichever comes first. For example, device  1000  can repeat the audio tone signal  1014  three times before it ceases repeating the tone, if no confirmation is received (e.g., response tone signal  1016 ). 
     In some embodiments, the first device outputs a dictated audio passcode. As shown in  FIG. 10J , device  1000  outputs an audio tone signal  1018  that includes the dictated text “The passcode is 061917”. In this example, the user can enter the passcode “061917” into device  1010 , for example, to initiate or proceed to a next step in the configuration process for configuring the first device  1000 . Thus, if the audio tone signal is not detected by the second device (e.g., device  1000  does not receive a conformation), device  1000  can output a dictation of a passcode that can, for example, be used to proceed to a next step in the configuration process or authorize data exchange between the two devices. For example, a user can enter the dictated passcode into device  1010 , or repeat the passcode back to device  1000  (e.g., using voice input). Thus, if the audio tone signal was being used as part of a process of confirming the identity of the first device or second device, but the second device cannot detect the audio tone signal, the user can use the dictated audio passcode to achieve the same effect. For example, using the passcode confirms that the device  1010  is within a relatively close physical proximity by virtue of the user hearing and entering the dictated audio passcode. 
     In some embodiments, device  1000  outputs encoded data visually. For example, LED indicators (e.g.,  1006 A- 1006 B) can be used to output a pattern or sequence of light emission that is detectable by another device (e.g.,  1010 ) and that includes or otherwise represents data information. The other device can, for example, capture or record the light pattern and decode the data, or transmit the captured data back to the device to verify that the other device observed the light pattern. 
     In some embodiments, during a configuration process, configuration data is received and stored by device  1000 . Examples of configuration data include, but are not limited to, one or more of: whether a device (e.g.,  1000  or  1010 ) is a member of a group of devices (e.g., home devices, or a stereo pair), a name or identifier of the device, a user associated with the device, a location (e.g., a room name) of the device, user account credentials (e.g., for network or cloud-based services such as iCloud, iTunes, Apple Music, Spotify, or the like). Configuration data for device  1000  can also be added or edited in a home control application (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 6A ). 
     In some embodiments, the first device is configured to be included in a group of devices.  FIG. 10K  illustrates two devices—first device  1000  and third device  1020 —that make up an exemplary group of devices. As shown in  FIG. 10K , the first and third devices are both smart speaker devices (e.g., such as device  580 ). In some embodiments, each device in the group of devices is configured to output an audio channel.  FIG. 10K  shows the first and third devices placed on either side of a television. In this example, device  1000  is configured to output a left audio channel (e.g., of a stereo audio signal) and the device  1020  is configured to output a right audio channel (e.g., of a stereo audio signal). Thus, the devices in  FIG. 10K  can be referred to as a “stereo pair”, a “stereo group”, or the like. In some embodiments, devices in a group are configured to output identical channels. For example, referring gain to  FIG. 10K , both devices  1000  and  1020  can be configured to output the same audio signal (e.g., monaural audio). In some examples, a group of devices includes more than two devices. For example,  FIG. 10L  illustrates a group of devices comprised of device  1000 , device  1020 , device  1022 , and device  1024 . As described with reference to  FIG. 10K , each device in the group can be configured to output a different audio channel signal (e.g., “rear left” signal on device  1022 , “rear right” signal on device  1024 , “front left” signal on device  1000 , and “front right” signal on device  1020 ). 
     In some embodiments, a group of devices (e.g., as shown in  FIGS. 10K and 10L ), are treated as one device at a user interface for selecting devices for playback. For example, the group of devices  1000  and  1020  of  FIG. 10K  can be configured as a device set named “Living Room”. In some examples, a multi-device interface (e.g., multi-device interface  610  of  FIG. 6J , as described above) would display one individual indicator (e.g., indicator  610 N of  FIG. 6J ) corresponding to the stereo pair of devices  1000  and  1020 . In some examples, the individual indicator includes an indication that it represents a group of devices (e.g., indicator  610 N of  FIG. 6J  can include two graphical speaker icons). 
     In some embodiments, a group of devices (e.g., as shown in  FIGS. 10K and 10L ) are displayed separately at a user interface for selecting devices for playback. In some examples, a multi-device interface (e.g., multi-device interface  610  of  FIG. 6J , as described above) includes an individual indicator for each device in a group of devices. For example, referring back to the group in  FIG. 10K , device  1000  can be made to output a first media item while device  1020  outputs a second media item, concurrently (e.g., using a multi-device interface such as  610  of  FIG. 6J ). 
       FIG. 10M  depicts an exemplary simplified network diagram of a device group, in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, the first device and the third device establish a communication link between, and communicate with, each other directly. For example,  FIG. 10M  depicts an access point  1030 , which may represent a wireless router, network switch, or the like, that creates a location area network that is connected to both devices  1000  and  1020 . In this example, device  1000  is connected to access point  1030  (e.g., as illustrated by communication link  1034 ). In this example, device  1020  is also connected to access point  1030  (e.g., as illustrated by communication link  1036 ). In this example, access point  1030  is a wireless router and devices  1000  and  1020  are connected to the same wireless (e.g., Wi-Fi) network generated by the access point  1030 . Access point  1030  is also connected to second device  1010  (e.g., illustrated by communication link  1038 ) as well as to a wide area network (e.g., internet). Thus, device  1000  and  1020  are connected by access point  1030 . Devices  1000  and  1020 , in some examples, can communicate directly, bypassing the need to exchange communications via access point  1030 . For example, devices  1000  and  1020  can create a Wi-Fi network between them (e.g., where one device acts as an access point for the other). Communication directly with each other, rather than through an access point that each device in the group is connected to, can provide useful benefits. For example, if both devices  1000  and  1020  have a poor connection to access point  1030 , synchronization of simultaneous audio playback on the group of devices can be degraded due to increased latency. If devices  1000  and  1020  have a strong connection directly between them, then latency issues are reduced. Further, routing communication directly between devices  1000  and  1020  reduces usage of the access point  1030 &#39;s bandwidth by reducing traffic on the network created by the access point (e.g., the user&#39;s main home Wi-Fi network). As described previously, in some examples, devices  1000  and  1020  do not have to be grouped to communicate directly. For instance, in some examples, devices  1000  and  1020  can communicate directly out-of-the-box, without being configured by the user to form a device group. 
       FIG. 10M  also depicts communication link  1039  between device  1010  and device  1000 . In some examples, link  1039  is a Bluetooth connection, a Wi-Fi connection, or the like. 
     In some embodiments, device  1000  receives a configuration setting of a permission level that sets a permission condition that another device (e.g.,  1010 ) must meet in order to control the first device. For example, the condition can be that the other device must be connected to the same network (e.g., Wi-Fi network). For further example, the condition can be that the other device is in close proximity. In some examples, the condition is satisfied by either one of these example conditions. In some embodiments, the user can change the configuration setting of a permission level. In some embodiments, the user can remove the configuration setting of a permission level (e.g., any device within a communication range can control device  1000 ). 
       FIGS. 10N-10O  illustrated exemplary techniques for indicating progress in a configuration process. In some examples, the first device and the second device output synchronized audio tone signals. The synchronized audio tone signals, for example, can be used to indicate progression through a configuration process. In some examples, the synchronized tones are output at the completion of each step of a configuration process. For example,  FIG. 10N  illustrates device  1000  outputting audio tone signal  1042 , and device  1010  is outputting audio tone signal  1044 . Audio tone signals  1042  and  1044  are outputting by their respective devices to be synchronized in time (e.g., output such that at least a portion of each tone are played during an overlapping period of time). 
     In some embodiments, synchronized audio tone signals are harmonics. Thus, in some examples, the synchronized audio tone signals are the same audio frequency. For example, audio tone signal  1042  has a frequency of 2000 Hertz, while audio tone signal  1044  has a frequency of 2000 Hertz. In some examples, audio frequency of one of the synchronized audio tone signals is an integer multiple of the audio frequency of the other frequency. For example, audio tone signal  1042  has a frequency of 1000 Hertz, while audio tone signal  1044  has a frequency of 2000 Hertz. 
     In some embodiments, synchronized audio tone signals are each a different frequency of a musical chord or a musical scale. Thus, for example, the synchronized tones sound (e.g., to a user) like they are in harmony. 
     In some embodiments, subsequent synchronized audio tone signals have a different audio frequency. For example, to indicate that the configuration process is progressing, the synchronized audio tone signals can increase (e.g., step up) in frequency at each subsequent step in a configuration process. In the example shown in  FIG. 10N , synchronized audio tone signals  1042  and  1044  are output by their respective devices upon completion of a first step in a configuration process. 
     Turning now to  FIG. 10O , device  1000  outputs synchronized audio tone signal  1046  and device  1010  outputs synchronized audio tone signal  1048 . In this example, the signals  1046  and  1048  are output subsequent to signals  1042  and  1044 , and are output upon completion of a second step in the configuration process. Further, signals  1046  and  1048  can be harmonics (e.g., the same audio frequency or integer multiples of the same frequency) or compatible tones (e.g., frequencies in the same musical chord or musical scale). To illustrate the concept that the synchronized audio tone signals change in frequency as a configuration process progress, plot  1040  of  FIG. 10O  is helpful. Plot  1040  depicts a first point  1040 A at a frequency of 2000 Hertz and a second point  1040 B at a frequency of 8000 Hertz. First point  1040 A represents the frequency of audio tone signals  1042  and  1044 , which are output after the first step in the configuration process. Second point  1040 B represents the frequency of audio tone signals  1046  and  1048 , which are output after the subsequent second step in the configuration process. In some examples, synchronized audio tone signals decrease in frequency as progress during the configuration process progresses. Thus, using synchronized audio tone signals, the first and second devices can audibly indicate progress of a configuration process to the user. For example, the audio tone signals can give the impression of approaching a crescendo or a final completion frequency. As one of skill would appreciate, synchronized audio tone signals can be used to indicate progress of other processes involving two or more devices. Further, as should be apparent, more than two devices can be configured to output synchronized audio tone signals. 
       FIGS. 11A-11D  is a flow diagram illustrating a method for configuring an electronic device using a second device in accordance with some embodiments. Method  1100  is performed at a device (e.g.,  100 ,  300 ,  500 ,  580 ). Some operations in method  1100  are, optionally, combined, the order of some operations are, optionally, changed, and some operations are, optionally, omitted. 
     As described below, method  1100  provides an intuitive way for configuring a first device using a second device. The method reduces the cognitive burden on a user for configuring a first device using a second device, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated computing devices, enabling a user to configure a first device using a second device faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges. 
     The electronic device (e.g.,  1000 ) detects ( 1102 ) an indication that a physical proximity between the electronic device (e.g.,  1000  of  FIG. 10F ) and a second device (e.g.,  1010  of  FIG. 10F ) satisfies a proximity condition (e.g., device  1010  is within proximity zone  1008 , as illustrated in  FIG. 10F ), wherein the electronic device (e.g.,  1000 ) is connected to the second device (e.g.,  1010 ) via a communication link (e.g.,  1039 ). In some examples, the electronic device and second device are connected via a wireless data transmission protocol (e.g., Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, or the like). In some embodiments, the indication is detected using a near-field communication technique. 
     In accordance with detecting the indication, the electronic device audibly outputs ( 1104 ) an audio tone signal (e.g.,  1014 ), wherein the audio tone signal is out-of-band to the communication link (e.g.,  1039 ). For example, the device is a speaker that plays a tone. In some examples the tone is a proximity handshake tone at the beginning of a configuration process. In some examples the tone is played by the speaker during the configuration process (e.g., after it begins). In some embodiments, being out-of-band to a communication link means that a signal (e.g., an audio tone signal) is not communicated using the same data exchange technique. 
     Using a detection of physical proximity allows the user to efficiently move through a configuration process for a device with fewer required user inputs. Providing an optimized configuration process to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     Subsequent to outputting the audio tone signal (e.g.,  1014 ), the electronic device (e.g.,  1000 ) determines ( 1106 ) whether a response audio tone signal (e.g.,  1016 ) from the second device (e.g.,  1010 ) has been received. 
     In accordance with a determination that the response audio tone signal (e.g.,  1016 ) from the second device (e.g.,  1010 ) has been received, the electronic device (e.g.,  1000 ) proceeds ( 1108 ) to a next step in a configuration process. In some embodiments, a configuration process includes receiving one or more configuration settings for the electronic device. In some examples, configuration settings include one or more of: a location (e.g., room name) of the electronic device, a device identifier (e.g., a name), whether the electronic device is a member of a group of devices (e.g., a left or right channel of a stereo pair of speakers), user account credentials (e.g., allowing the electronic device to log into a cloud-based service), audio output preferences (e.g., language, volume), content restrictions (e.g., parental controls), or the like. 
     Proceeding to a next step in a configuration process in accordance with a determination that a response audio tone signal has been received allows the user to efficiently move through a configuration process for a device with fewer required user inputs. Providing an optimized configuration process to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In accordance with a determination that the response audio tone signal from the second device has not been received, the electronic device (e.g.,  1000 ) forgoes ( 1110 ) proceeding to the next step in the configuration process. For example, if the device does not detect a response audio tone signal (e.g.,  1016 ) within a threshold amount of time after outputting an audio tone signal, the device can timeout (e.g., stop listening for a response audio tone signal), can repeat the tone, or dictate an audio passcode aloud. 
     In some embodiments, the response audio tone signal (e.g.,  1016 ) represents ( 1112 ) an indication that the audio tone signal (e.g.,  1014 ) was detected by the second device (e.g.,  1010 ). 
     In some embodiments, at least one of the audio tone signal (e.g.,  1014 ) and the response audio tone signal (e.g.,  1016 ) comprises ( 1114 ) encoded data. In some embodiments, the encoded data comprises an indication of the outputting device&#39;s identity. For example, the encoded data can include an audible representation of data sent from one device to the other. Audibly outputting the data from one device such that the other device can detect it (e.g., using a microphone) can provide sufficient indication that the second device and the electronic device are within a relative close physical proximity to each other. In some embodiments, the encoded data includes user account credentials. For example, the encoded data can include data representing user account information for a cloud-based service (e.g., iCloud login information), a media streaming service (e.g., Apple Music), or data for confirming that the electronic device (e.g.,  1000 ) should be provided access to the user&#39;s account or personal data. 
     In some embodiments, the response audio tone signal (e.g.,  1016 ) comprises encoded data, and further in accordance with a determination that the response audio tone signal from the second device (e.g.,  1010 ) has been received ( 1116 ), the electronic device (e.g.,  1000 ) converts ( 1118 ) the encoded data, of the response audio tone signal, into decoded data. In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g.,  1000 ) uses ( 1120 ) at least a portion of the decoded data to log in to a user account of a cloud-based service. For example, if the encoded data includes login credentials for a cloud-based service (e.g., iCloud) the electronic device decodes the encoded data into an account user name and/or password, and logs into the cloud-based service. 
     In some embodiments, the response audio tone signal (e.g.,  1016 ) comprises data that confirms the identity of the second device (e.g.,  1010 ). For example, the data that is encoded can be data that was transmitted to the second device that is played back as a tone, or can be a unique identifier associated with the second device. 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g.,  1000 ) includes a memory, and the electronic device receives ( 1122 ) one or more configuration settings from the second device (e.g.,  1010 ). In response to receiving the one or more configuration settings, the electronic device stores ( 1124 ) the configuration settings in the memory of the electronic device. In some examples, configuration settings include one or more of the settings as described above. 
     In some embodiments, the one or more configuration settings includes a location identifier representing a physical location of the electronic device (e.g.,  1000 ). For example, a location identifier can include a room identifier such as “Living Room”, “Bedroom”, “Bedroom  2 ”, “Kitchen”, “Tim&#39;s Room”, or the like. In some embodiments, the location identifier is associated with the electronic device (e.g.,  1000 ) and communicated to other devices (e.g.,  1010 ). For example, the identifier can be used in a multi-device interface (e.g.,  610  of  FIG. 6J ) or in a device management application (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 6A ) to provide an intuitive and/or descriptive identification of the device. 
     In some embodiments, the one or more configuration settings includes ( 1126 ) an indication that the electronic device (e.g.,  1000 ) is included in a device group (e.g., a group comprised of device  1000  and  1020  of  FIG. 10K ), wherein the device group includes the electronic device (e.g.,  1000  of  FIG. 10K ) and a third device (e.g.,  1020  of  FIG. 10K ). For example, a device group includes two or more devices (e.g., smart speakers) configured to coordinate (e.g., synchronize) output of media (e.g., audio). In some embodiments, the devices in a device group (e.g., a speaker pair, such as left and right channels  1000  and  1020  of  FIG. 10K , respectively) are treated as one unit. For example, the devices in a device group can be identified (e.g., at a multi-device user interface) by a single device group identifier (e.g., “Living Room”) rather than as individual devices. Thus, a command to “Play audio in the Living Room” can cause all devices in the group “Living Room” to playback the audio. 
     In some embodiments, the first device (e.g.,  1000 ) and the second device (e.g.,  1010 ) are connected ( 1128 ) to a local area network via an access point (e.g.,  1030 ). In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g.,  1000 ) establishes a communication link (e.g.,  1032 ) to the third device (e.g.,  1020  of  FIG. 10M ), wherein the communication link to the third device does not include the access point (e.g.,  1030 ). In some embodiments, the communication link utilizes a wireless communication protocol. In some embodiments, the communication link is a wired connection between the electronic device and the third device. In some examples, the access point is a network router, a network switch, or other hardware for communicatively coupling a plurality of devices. In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g.,  1000 ) synchronizes ( 1130 ) media playback with the third device (e.g.,  1010 ) using the communication link (e.g.,  1032 ) to the third device. 
     In some embodiments, to audibly output the audio tone signal ( 1132 ), the electronic device (e.g.,  1000 ) audibly outputs ( 1134 ) the audio tone signal (e.g.,  1014 ), and determines ( 1136 ) whether the second device (e.g.,  1010 ) detected the audio tone signal. In some embodiments, determining whether the second device detected the audio tone signal includes determining whether data is received over the communication link (e.g.,  1038 ) representing confirmation that the second device (e.g.,  1010 ) detected the audio tone signal (e.g.,  1014 ). In some embodiments, the electronic device receives (e.g., detects) a response audio tone signal (e.g.,  1016 ) from the second device (e.g.,  1010 ) representing confirmation that the second device detected the audio tone signal (e.g.,  1014 ). In accordance with a determination that the second device (e.g.,  1010 ) did not detect the audio tone signal (e.g.,  1014 ), the electronic device (e.g.,  1000 ) repeats ( 1138 ) audibly outputting the audio tone signal (e.g.,  1014 ). For example, the electronic device plays the tone (e.g.,  1014 ) a second time (or an nth time). In accordance with a determination that the second device detected the audio tone signal, the electronic device forgoes ( 1140 ) repeating audibly outputting the audio tone signal. 
     In some embodiments, further in accordance with a determination that the second device (e.g.,  1010 ) did not detect the audio tone signal (e.g.,  1014 ), the electronic device (e.g.,  1000 ) determines ( 1142 ) whether the audio tone signal has been audibly outputted a threshold number of times. In accordance with a determination that the audio tone signal has been audibly outputted a threshold number of times, the electronic device (e.g.,  1000 ) audibly outputs ( 1144 ) a dictated passcode (e.g.,  1018  of  FIG. 10J ). For example, the threshold number of times can be three. Thus, if the electronic device plays a tone (e.g.,  1014 ) once and repeats the tone twice thereafter, without receiving confirmation (e.g.,  1016 ) that the second device detected the audio tone signal, the electronic device can (e.g., on the fourth occurrence) output a dictated passcode instead of replaying the tone. In some embodiments, a passcode includes one or more alphanumeric characters. In some embodiments, audibly outputting a dictated passcode includes reading out individual characters of the passcode. For example, a text-to-speech algorithm is used to audibly output the passcode (e.g., as a phrase, as individual characters). In some embodiments, audibly outputting a dictated passcode includes reading out a phrase (e.g., formed by a plurality of alphanumeric characters). In accordance with a determination that the audio tone signal has not been audibly outputted a threshold number of times, the electronic device forgoes ( 1146 ) audibly outputting a dictated passcode. In some embodiments, the electronic device repeats outputting the audio tone signal until reaching the threshold number of times. 
     In some embodiments, the audio tone signal (e.g.,  1014 ) is a first audio tone signal, and in response to progressing from a first step in the configuration process to a second step in the configuration process, the electronic device (e.g.,  1000 ) outputs a second audio tone signal (e.g.,  1042  of  FIG. 10N ), wherein the second audio tone signal is outputted concurrently with the output of a third audio tone signal (e.g.,  1044  of  FIG. 10N ) outputted by the second device (e.g.,  1010 ), and wherein the second audio tone signal and the third audio tone signal are harmonics. For example, the second audio tone signal and the third audio tone signal are the same frequency or are integer multiples of the same frequency. In some examples, concurrent output of harmonic frequencies by the electronic device and the second device can provide audible feedback to a user of progress through the configuration process. For example, higher pitched (e.g., higher frequency) tones can indicate that the configuration process is near completion. Thus, relative or absolute progress through the configuration process can be provided in an intuitive manner. 
     In some embodiments, in response to progressing from the second step in the configuration process to a third step in the configuration process, the electronic device (e.g.,  1000 ) outputs a fourth audio tone signal (e.g.,  1046  of  FIG. 10O ), wherein the fourth audio tone signal is outputted concurrently with the output of a fifth audio tone signal (e.g.,  1048  of  FIG. 10O ) outputted by the second device (e.g.,  1010 ), wherein the fourth audio tone signal and the fifth audio tone signal are harmonics, and wherein the fourth audio tone signal is a higher frequency tone than the second audio tone signal (e.g., as illustrated by  1040 ). In some examples, the concurrently played tones escalate in frequency as progression through the configuration process increases. 
     In some embodiments, subsequent to proceeding to the next step in the configuration process, the electronic device (e.g.,  1000  or  1906 ) outputs an audible voice prompt by a voice assistant prompting a user to provide user voice input invoking one or more functions of the voice assistant (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 19AL , where device  1906  outputs audible voice prompt “Now you try, say ‘Hey, play some music.’”). The electronic device (e.g.,  1000  or  1906 ) receives user voice input (e.g., “Hey, play some music”) invoking a first function (e.g., a music function, also referred to as a music feature) of the voice assistant. In response to receiving the user voice input invoking the first function of the voice assistant, electronic device (e.g.,  1000  or  1906 ) performs the first function (e.g., begins playing music). For example, after completion of the configuration process, device  1000  invokes a personal digital assistant that prompts the user to provide a voice command related to one or more features that device  1000  is capable of performing. 
     Outputting an audible voice prompt by a voice assistant prompting a user to provide user voice input invoking one or more functions of the voice assistant provides the user with information regarding the capabilities and state of a device. Providing such information to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the audible voice prompt is a prompt to provide a command for performing the first function (e.g., a music function) of the voice assistant, and the user voice input is a command to perform the first function of the voice assistant (e.g., “Hey, play some music”). For example, the prompt relates to the same function as the received command. 
     In some embodiments, the audible voice prompt is a prompt to provide a command for performing a second function (e.g., a weather function) of the voice assistant, and the user voice input is a command to perform the first function (e.g., a music function) of the voice assistant, different than the second function. For example, the prompt relates to a different function as the received command, but the device  1000  performs the respective action anyway. Thus, device  1000  can output the voice prompt “Now you try, say ‘Hey, tell me the news,’” but perform a music function if the user responds with the voice command “Hey, play some music.” 
     In some embodiments, in accordance with performing the first function, the electronic device (e.g.,  1000  or  1906 ) transmits data related to the first function to the second device (e.g., device  1010  or  1900 ). 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g.,  1000  or  1906 ) receives, from the second device, a configuration setting of a permission level that sets a permission condition that another device must meet in order to control the first device. In some embodiments, the permission condition is that the other device and the first device must be connected to the same local area network. In some embodiments, the permission condition is that the other device and the first device are within a threshold physical proximity. 
     In some embodiments, prior to establishing the communication link connecting the first device (e.g.,  1000  or  1906 ) and the second device (e.g.,  1010  or  1900 ) the electronic device (e.g.,  1000  or  1906 ) detects an indication that a physical proximity between the first device and the second device satisfies a proximity condition. In response to detecting the indication that the physical proximity between the first device and the second device satisfies the proximity condition, the electronic device (e.g.,  1000  or  1906 ) outputs an audio tone signal. In some embodiments, both the first and second devices (e.g.,  1000  and  1010 ) play tones in response to satisfying the proximity condition. 
     Using an indication that the physical proximity between the first device and the second device satisfies the proximity condition in order to output an audio tone signal provides the user with auditory feedback regarding the state of the first device. For example, when there are other potential devices in proximity that are configurable, the audio tone signal can indicate which device will be configured. Providing improved feedback to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     Note that details of the processes described above with respect to method  1100  (e.g.,  FIGS. 11A-11D ) are also applicable in an analogous manner to the methods described below/above. For example, method  700 ,  900 ,  1300 ,  1500 ,  1700 ,  1800 ,  2000 ,  2200 ,  2400 ,  2600 ,  2800 ,  3000 ,  3200 ,  3400 ,  3600 ,  3800 , and  3900  optionally includes one or more of the characteristics of the various methods described above with reference to method  1100 . For brevity, these details are not repeated below. 
       FIGS. 12A-12AM  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for controlling media playback, in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIGS. 13A-13F . 
     As described above (e.g., with respect to  FIGS. 10A-10F ), devices can use the satisfaction of a proximity condition to perform one or more functions. The use of proximity of one device to another device can be used as a clear indicator that a user (e.g., holding one of the devices) would like to perform some action (e.g., invoke an interface) on one or both of the devices. For example, this can prevent a waste of device resources by avoiding excessive user input (e.g., to navigate one or more menus on a device display) in order perform a function. Moreover, this can save the user time as well, for example, by reducing the number of user inputs required to perform a function (e.g., invoke an interface on a display). 
     In some examples, the satisfaction of a proximity condition between two devices can be used as an indication that a user (e.g., of one of the devices, a mobile device) would like to transfer media playback to or from one device (e.g., the mobile device) to the other device (e.g., a stationary smart speaker). Exemplary techniques are described below. 
       FIGS. 12A-12F  illustrate an exemplary scenario in which a first device and a second device are not playing back media content when they are placed in close proximity. 
       FIG. 12A  illustrates an exemplary scenario in which a user is holding device  1200  (e.g., a personal device, such as device  100 ,  300 ,  500 ) in close proximity to device  1202  (e.g., a smart speaker, such as device  580 ). In some embodiments, device  1200  includes one or more features of devices  100 ,  300 , or  500 . Thus,  FIG. 12A  is similar to  FIG. 10E , the description of which is hereby incorporated by reference. In the example depicted in  FIG. 12A , device  1200  and device  1202  are both not currently outputting audio (e.g., are not playing back media). In the example depicted in  FIG. 12A , the physical distance between device  1200  and device  1202  satisfies a proximity condition. In some examples, device  1200  detects an indication that the proximity condition is satisfied (e.g., and, in response, initiates communication with device  1202 , for example, to send an indication that the condition is satisfied). In some examples, device  1202  detects an indication that the proximity condition is satisfied (e.g., and, in response, initiates communication with device  1200 , for example, to send an indication that the condition is satisfied). 
     It is noted that  FIG. 12A , and the figures that follow, are not necessarily to scale and are included merely as a visual aid. Thus, unless otherwise noted, they are not intended as a limitation on a distance required to be in close proximity or to satisfy a proximity condition. 
       FIG. 12B  illustrates an exemplary media information interface.  FIG. 12B , also depicts an overhead view of the scenario of  FIG. 12A . As can be seen, device  1200  is within (e.g., at least a portion of the device inside of) the proximity zone  1204  (also referred to as proximity condition range indicator  1204 ). Device  1200  is inside of proximity condition range indicator  1204 , and thus the proximity condition is satisfied. The phrase “close proximity” or “in close proximity”, as used herein, refers to a scenario in which a physical distance between two devices satisfies a proximity condition (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 12B  and  FIG. 10F ). Proximity condition range indicator  1204  is included as a visual aid, and is intended to represent a physical proximity that would satisfy a proximity condition. For example, range indicator  1204  can represent the range of a near-field communication detection circuitry of device  1202 . Thus, presence of a detectable device within (e.g., partially or completely) the proximity condition range indicator  1204  would satisfy a proximity condition, but would not if the detectable device is located outside of the range indicator  1204 . One of skill would appreciate that a detection range of physical proximity can be non-uniform, can be affected by numerous variables (e.g., wireless interference, air humidity, device orientation, among others), and can include points in space in three dimensions, all of which are intended to be within the scope of this disclosure. Thus, the proximity condition range indicator  1204  is not intended as a limitation on the scope of determining whether a proximity condition is satisfied. 
       FIG. 12B  illustrates media information interface  1208  displayed on a display  1206  of device  1200 . In some embodiments, device  1200  includes one or more features of device  100 ,  300 , or  500 . In some examples, media information interface  1208  is displayed in response to device  1200  being placed (e.g., briefly or continuously) in close proximity with device  1202 . Thus, because media information interface  1208  displayed in response to the device being placed in close proximity, it can referred to as a type of “proximity card” or specifically a “media proximity card”. 
     In the example shown in  FIG. 12B , device  1202  is a device associated with the location (or name) “Kitchen” and is a speaker (e.g., a smart speaker). Thus, proximity card  1208  includes the title  1208 B “Kitchen Speaker”, visually indicating the name of the speaker that the user placed device  1200  in close proximity to. Proximity card  1208  also includes an album affordance  1208 A representing media content, as well as an identifier  1208 C describing the status of the media content. In this example, the media content displayed in proximity card  1208  is content that was recently played on the second device, device  1202  (e.g., Kitchen Speaker). Thus, in this example, when neither device  1200  or device  1202  are currently playing back media content, placing the devices in close proximity causes device  1200  to display an interface for viewing recently played media. In some examples, the recently played media was recently played by the first device (e.g., device  1200 ). In some examples, the recently played media is media that was recently played on both devices  1200  and  1202 . In some embodiments, proximity card  1208  is displayed when one or more of devices  1200  and  1202  are currently playing back media. 
     At  FIG. 12C , device  1200  receives user input  1210  on album affordance  1208 A. In some examples, user input  1210  is a tap, touch, deep press, or a press and hold input received at device  1200 . In some examples, a first device (e.g., device  1200 ) continues displaying a proximity card after the first device is no longer in close proximity to a second device (e.g., device  1202 ). 
     At  FIG. 12D , in response to receiving user input  1210 , device  1200  displays current media interface  1212 . Current media interface  1212  (also referred to as “now playing screen”  1212 ) depicts one or more media items that are currently playing back (e.g., on the device  1202 ). Interface  1212  includes an identifier  1212 A of a media item (e.g., the song titled “Same Thing” by artist “Jambug” from the album “Fly Away”), album art  1212 B, and device selection affordance  1212 C. As described above, a device selection affordance can indicate the current focus of the device. In this example,  FIG. 12D  depicts that the current media interface  1212  is targeting the Kitchen Speaker. Thus, in response to the user input selection of the affordance  1208 A (e.g., representing a media item), device  1200  transmits an instruction to device  1202  to initiate playback of the corresponding media item, and updates the display of device  1200  to include playback controls and a media status of the device  1202 . Accordingly, the user is provided a convenient technique for quickly beginning and controlling media playback on a second device (e.g., Kitchen Speaker) using a first device (e.g., person device  1200 ). 
     In some examples, current media interface is displayed on lock screen of device  1200 . For example, the proximity card  1208  can be displayed while the device  1200  was locked and, while remaining locked, the device receives user input that causes the device to initiate playback of media and update the lock screen (e.g., to display interface  1212 ). 
       FIGS. 12E-12F  illustrate exemplary techniques for browsing media within a media information interface, in accordance with some embodiments. At  FIG. 12E , device  1200  receives user input  1214  on affordance  1208 A, wherein affordance  1208 B is visible.  FIG. 12F  shows user input  1214  shift to the left. In this example, user input  1214  was a leftward swipe on the recently played media affordances of proximity card  1208 . In some embodiments, user input  1214  is a directional swipe in any direction (e.g., up, down, left, right, etc.). As shown in  FIG. 12F , the affordances representing media items have shifted in accordance with the user input  1214 . Affordance  1208 B is now centered within proximity card, and affordance  1208 C (e.g., representing a third media) is now visible. 
       FIGS. 12G-12N  illustrate an exemplary scenario in which a first device and a second device are both playing back media content when they are placed in close proximity. 
       FIG. 12G  illustrates an exemplary scenario in which a user is holding device  1200  (e.g., a personal device) in close proximity to device  1202  (e.g., a smart speaker). Thus,  FIG. 12G  is similar to  FIG. 12A , the description of which is hereby incorporated by reference. In the example depicted in  FIG. 12G , device  1200  and device  1202  are both currently outputting audio, as represented by sound waves  1216  (from device  1200 ) and sound waves  1218  (from device  1202 ). 
       FIG. 12H  illustrates the states of devices  1200  and  1202  prior to them being placed in close proximity. As can be seen, device  1200  is currently playing back a first media item, as presented by current media interface  1220 . Media indicator  1220 A identifies the song titled “Monday Morning” currently playing on device  1200 , album art  1220 B, device selection affordance  1220 C (indicating that device  1200  is targeted on itself, the device named “iPhone”), and playback control affordances  1220 D. Device  1202  is currently playing back a media item as well, the song titled “Same Thing” by artist “Jambug”, as represented by media state  1222 . 
       FIG. 12I  illustrates an exemplary media information interface.  FIG. 12I , also depicts an overhead view of the scenario of  FIG. 12G . As can be seen, device  1200  is within (e.g., at least a portion of the device is inside) the proximity zone  1204  (also referred to as proximity condition range indicator  1204 ). Device  1200  is inside of proximity condition range indicator  1204 , and thus is in close proximity (e.g., the proximity condition is satisfied). 
       FIG. 12I  illustrates media information interface  1224  displayed on a display  1206  of device  1200 . In some examples, media information interface  1224  is displayed in response to device  1200  being placed (e.g., briefly or continuously) in close proximity with device  1202 . Thus, because media information interface  1224  displayed in response to the device being placed in close proximity, it is also referred to as a “proximity card” or specifically a “media proximity card”. 
     In the example shown in  FIG. 12I , device  1202  is a device associated with the location (or name) “Kitchen” and is a speaker (e.g., a smart speaker). Thus, proximity card  1224  includes the title  1224 B “Kitchen Speaker”, visually indicating the name of the speaker that the user placed device  1200  in close proximity to. Proximity card  1224  also includes album affordances  1224 A and  1224 D representing media content (e.g., media items). Proximity card  1224  also includes a volume control affordance  1224 C for controlling the volume of the Kitchen Speaker. In this example, the media content displayed in proximity card  1224  is content that is currently playing on the device  1200  (e.g., affordance  1224 A), and other media items (e.g., affordance  1224 D), for example, media that was recently played on the first device  1200 . Proximity card  1224  includes identifier  1224 B below affordance  1224 A, which indicates which device (e.g., if any) is currently playing back the media item corresponding to affordance  1224 A. In this example, identifier  1224 B includes a graphic (e.g., which can be animated to convey that music is currently playing) and the text “From iPhone”, which refers to device  1200  in this example. Proximity card  1224  provides an interface that allows the user to add the device “Kitchen Speaker” into the current playback session (e.g., of “Monday Morning” on device  1200 ). 
     As shown in  FIG. 12I , proximity card  1224  also includes device selection affordance  1224 E. In some examples, device selection affordance  1224 E can be used to change the focus of the proximity card. For example, if the user desired to add the iPhone (e.g., device  1200 ) to the media session of the Kitchen Speaker (e.g., playback of the song “Same Thing” as shown in  FIG. 12H ), they can select affordance  1224 E and change the targeted device (e.g., of proximity card  1224 ) to iPhone, and then select the indicator associated with the media item “Same Thing”. For example, after receiving user input on  1224 E and selection of the device “iPhone” (e.g., via a drop down menu, or the like), device  1200  updates the display of affordance  1224 A to show the album art of the song “Same Thing”, and updates identifier  1224 B to include the text “From Kitchen Speaker”. 
     In some embodiments, a proximity card is displayed concurrently with a current media interface. In some embodiments, display of a proximity card replaces display of a portion of a current media interface. For example,  FIG. 12I  shows proximity card  1224  having replaced the album art  1220 B of current media interface  1220  (of  FIG. 12H ). In some embodiments, a proximity card is not displayed concurrently with a current media interface. For example proximity card  1208  of  FIG. 12E  is not currently displayed with a current media interface (e.g.,  1220  of  FIG. 12H ). 
     At  FIG. 12J , device  1200  receives user input  1226  representing selection of affordance  1224 A. In response to user input  1226 , device  1200  displays current media interface  1228 , as shown in  FIG. 12K . Current media interface  1228  represents an updated version of interface  12 H. As can been, device selection indicator  1228 D has been updated to indicate that the Kitchen Speaker has been added to the media session for the song “Same Thing”—the accompanying text now states “iPhone+Kitchen”. Media indicator  1228 A identifies the song titled “Monday Morning” currently playing on device  1200  and device  1202 , playback control affordances  1228 B, album art  1228 C, device selection affordance  1228 D (indicating that device  1200  is targeted on itself, the device named “iPhone”, and also targeted on the Kitchen device set). 
       FIGS. 12L-12N  illustrate exemplary interfaces for controlling media playback on a second device. In some examples, affordance  1224 E of  FIG. 12I  can be used to change the function of the proximity card. For instance, a user may desire to control playback of the existing media session that includes the second device (e.g., device  1202 ) rather than to add the second device to a media session of the first device (e.g., device  1200 ). For example, referring back to  FIG. 12H , the user may want to maintain the two separate media sessions that are currently playing back on the two devices, but wants to control playback on the second device  1202 . In some examples, the device receives selection of affordance  1224 E of  FIG. 12I  and, in accordance with the selection (e.g., with our without additional user input), subsequently changes the displayed proximity card into a current media interface proximity card  1230 , as shown in  FIG. 12L . In this example, proximity card  1230  of  FIG. 12L  replaces display of proximity card  1224  of  FIG. 12I . Proximity card  1230  is a type of current media interface, but is presented visually as a proximity card (e.g., with a displayed border, and occupying less than all of the display  1206 ), to visually indicate that it represents a current media interface for a device that was placed in close proximity to device  1200 . In some embodiments, in accordance with a selection of  1224 E, device  1200  displays a current media interface such as that shown in  FIG. 12H  (e.g., full size). 
     Proximity card  1230  includes an identifier  1230 A that indicates the current focus of the proximity card (e.g., Kitchen Speaker), a media identifier  1230 B identifying a media item currently being played back by the targeted device (e.g., the song “Same Thing” by “Jambug”), and playback control affordances  1230 C for controlling playback of the current media session. 
     At  FIG. 12M , device  1200  receives user input  1232  associated with a playback control affordance  1230 C. In this example, the user input is a selection “next track” affordance. User input  1232  can be a tap, a touch, a deep press, a tap and hold input, or the like. 
     At  FIG. 12N , in response to user input  1232 , device  1200  updates the display of media identifier  1230 B to identify the next track (e.g., the song “Tuesday Morning” by “The Fomoers”). 
       FIGS. 12O-12W  illustrate an exemplary scenario in which only a first device is playing back media content when placed in close proximity with to a second device. 
       FIG. 12O  illustrates an exemplary scenario in which a user is holding device  1200  (e.g., a personal device) in close proximity to device  1202  (e.g., a smart speaker). Thus,  FIG. 12O  is similar to  FIG. 12A , the description of which is hereby incorporated by reference. In the example depicted in  FIG. 12O , device  1200  is currently outputting audio, as represented by sound waves  1234  (from device  1200 ), and device  1202  is not currently outputting audio (e.g., no media playback). 
       FIG. 12P  illustrates the state of device  1200  immediately prior to being placed in close proximity with device  1202 . As can be seen, device  1200  is currently playing back a first media item, as indicated by current media interface  1220  (e.g., described above with respect to  FIG. 12H ). Media indicator  1220 A identifies the song titled “Monday Morning” currently playing on device  1200 . 
       FIG. 12Q  illustrates an exemplary media information interface.  FIG. 12Q  illustrates media information interface  1236  displayed on a display  1206  of device  1200 . In some examples, device  1200  displays media information interface  1236  in accordance with detecting that device  1200  is in close proximity to device  1202 . For example, media information interface  1236  is displayed in response to detecting that device  1200  is within (e.g., at least a portion of the device) the proximity zone  1204  (also referred to as proximity condition range indicator  1204 ) of device  1202 . Thus, the proximity condition is satisfied. 
     In some examples, media information interface  1236  is displayed in response to device  1200  being placed (e.g., briefly or continuously) in close proximity with device  1202 . Thus, because media information interface  1236  displayed in response to the device being placed in close proximity, it is also referred to as a “proximity card” or specifically a “media proximity card”. 
     In the example shown in  FIG. 12Q , device  1202  is a device associated with the location (or name) “Kitchen” and is a speaker (e.g., a smart speaker). Thus, proximity card  1236  includes the title  1236 A “Kitchen Speaker”, visually indicating the name of the device that the user placed device  1200  in close proximity to (e.g., also referred to as the “focus” or “target” of the proximity card). Proximity card  1236  also includes an action indicator  1236 B (e.g., an arrow), indicating that a user input gesture on the proximity card (e.g., in the direction of the arrow) will cause the device to perform an action. Likewise, action indicator  1236 D (the text “Push to Play”) indicates to a user that a user input on the proximity card  1236  will cause the device to take action. Additionally, proximity card  1236  includes a media affordance  1236 C representing media content (e.g., one or more media items). In this example, media affordance  1236 C includes album art for the track titled “Monday Morning” by the artist “The Fomoers” (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 12P ). In some examples, media affordance  1236 C includes other types of visual indications of one or more media items (e.g., text, images, or other appropriate visual representations). In this example, the media content represented (e.g., by affordance  1236 C) by the proximity card  1236  is content that is currently playing on the device  1202  (e.g., the Kitchen Speaker). Proximity card  1236  provides an interface that allows the user to add the device “Kitchen Speaker” to the current media session (e.g., of playback of “Monday Morning” on device  1200 ). 
       FIGS. 12R-12U  illustrate and exemplary push interaction with a media control interface. At  FIG. 12R , device  1200  receives user input  1238  on proximity card  1236 . At  FIG. 12S , user input  1238  has moved across the display (e.g., in the direction of action indicator  1236 B). In this example, user input  1238  is a directional swipe gesture.  FIG. 12R  also illustrates proximity card  1236  has shifted position on the display  1206  in accordance with the directional swipe gesture user input  1238 , which will be referred to as the “push position”. 
     In some examples, device  1200  requires that the proximity card  1236  be held at the push position for a threshold amount of time before performing an action in response. In some examples, device  1200  provides a visual indication of the progress toward satisfying the threshold amount of time. For example,  FIG. 12T  illustrates push progress indicator  1236 E, which is a partially completed ring. In some examples, other types of indicators can be used. Thus, in the example in  FIG. 12T , the elapsed time that the proximity card  1236  has been held in the push position is approximately one-quarter of the necessary threshold time. In some embodiments, a requirement to satisfy a threshold amount of time in the push position can be bypassed (e.g., overridden) if a user input (e.g.,  1238 ) satisfies an additional criteria. For example, if the user input is a deep press or is a swipe past an edge of the display (e.g., through the push position and off the top edge of display  1206 ), the device can perform the push function immediately in response. 
     In response to the user input  1238 , device  1200  performs an action in response. In some embodiments, the device  1200  “pushes” media playback onto the device  1202 . In some examples, device  1200  initiates playback of the media item represented by proximity card  1236  on device  1202  (e.g., transmits an instruction to device  1202  in response to user input  1238 ). In some examples, playback on device  1200  ceases in response to user input  1238 .  FIG. 12U  illustrates proximity card  1236  upon completion of the push action (e.g., user input  1238  holding the proximity card  1236  in the push position for longer than the threshold duration). As shown, proximity card  1236  now includes confirmation  1236 F (“Playing on Kitchen Speaker”) and push progress indicator  1236 E now includes a checkmark. Thus, in this example, when the display  1206  of device  1200  appears as shown in  FIG. 12U , the device  1202  is currently playing back the media item “Monday Morning”. 
       FIG. 12V  illustrates an exemplary current media interface  1220 . Current media interface  1220  is displayed subsequent to device  1200  receiving user input  1238  pushing the playback to the Kitchen Speaker. Thus, device  1200  updates the device selection indicator  1220 C to indicate that the current focus of the device (e.g., the devices in the current media session) is the Kitchen Speaker. Thus, in this example, playback on the device iPhone (e.g., device  1200 ) ceased and audio playback was handed off to the Kitchen Speaker. In some embodiments, pushing playback includes initiating playback on the target device (e.g., hand off playback) and ceasing playback on the current device (e.g.,  1200 ). In some embodiments, pushing playing includes initiating playback on the target device (e.g., hand off playback) and continuing playback on the current device (e.g.,  1200 ). 
       FIG. 12W  illustrates an alternate technique for pushing media to a second device, in accordance with some embodiments.  FIG. 12W  depicts current media interface  1220 , as described with respect to  FIG. 12P . Notably, device  1200  is currently targeted at itself (“iPhone”). Device  1200  receives user input  1239  on device selection affordance  1220 C. In some examples, a multi-device interface is displayed in response to user input  1239 . As described above, the multi-device interface can be used to add the second device (e.g.,  1202 ) to the current media session (e.g., effectively pushing playback to it). 
     In accordance with some embodiments, media content is automatically transferred from a first device to a second device if the devices are in close proximity for a length of time greater than a threshold length of time. For example, if device  1200  is placed in close proximity to device  1202  for longer than a threshold length of time (e.g., 5 seconds), device  1200  can automatically (e.g., without further user input) transfer playback of media to device  1202 . This can be referred to as “automatic push” or “auto-push”. In accordance with some embodiments, media content is automatically transferred from a second device to a first device if the devices are in close proximity for a length of time greater than a threshold length of time. For example, if device  1200  is placed in close proximity to device  1202  for longer than a threshold length of time (e.g., 5 seconds), device  1202  can automatically (e.g., without further user input) transfer playback of media to device  1200 . This can be referred to as “automatic pull” or “auto-pull”. When a user places a device in close proximity to another device for an extended period of time, this can be a strong indication that the user wishes playback to transfer between the devices. For example, a user can place their smartphone next to their smart speaker (e.g.,  580 ) after entering their home and have what they were listening to on headphones begin playing on their home sound system, without further input at any device. Thus, by automatically pushing or pulling content from a personal electronic device, the number of user inputs for transferring media playback is reduced. 
       FIGS. 12X-12AG  illustrate an exemplary scenario in which only a second device is playing back media content when placed in close proximity with to a first device. 
       FIG. 12X  illustrates an exemplary scenario in which a user is holding device  1200  (e.g., a personal device) in close proximity to device  1202  (e.g., a smart speaker). Thus,  FIG. 12X  is similar to  FIG. 12A , the description of which is hereby incorporated by reference. In the example depicted in  FIG. 12X , device  1200  is not currently outputting audio, and device  1202  is currently outputting audio (e.g., media playback), as represented by sound waves  1240  (from device  1202 ). 
       FIG. 12Y  illustrates an exemplary media information interface. In some examples, device  1200  displays media information interface  1242  in accordance with detecting that device  1200  is in close proximity to device  1202 . For example, media information interface  1242  is displayed in response to detecting that device  1200  is within (e.g., at least a portion of the device is inside) the proximity zone  1204  (also referred to as proximity condition range indicator  1204 ) of device  1202 . Thus, the proximity condition is satisfied. 
       FIG. 12Y  illustrates media information interface  1242  displayed on a display  1206  of device  1200 . In some examples, media information interface  1242  is displayed in response to device  1200  being placed (e.g., briefly or continuously) in close proximity with device  1202 . Thus, because media information interface  1242  displayed in response to the device being placed in close proximity, it is also referred to as a “proximity card” or specifically a “media proximity card”. 
     In the example shown in  FIG. 12Y , proximity card  1242  includes the title  1242 A “iPhone”, visually indicating the name of the device (e.g., device  1200 ) that is the target of the proximity card action (e.g., will receive media playback in response to appropriate user input on the proximity card). Proximity card  1242  also includes an action indicator  1242 C (e.g., an arrow), indicating that a user input gesture on the proximity card (e.g., in the direction of the arrow) will cause the device to perform an action. Likewise, action indicator  1242 D (the text “Pull down to play on iPhone”) indicates to a user that a user input on the proximity card  1242  will cause the device to take action. Additionally, proximity card  1242  includes a media affordance  1242 B representing media content (e.g., one or more media items). In this example, media affordance  1242 B includes album art for the track titled “Same Thing” by the artist “Jambug” (e.g., that is currently playing on device  1202 ). In some examples, media affordance  1242 B includes other types of visual indications of one or more media items (e.g., text, images, or other appropriate visual representations). In this example, the media content represented (e.g., by affordance  1242 B) by the proximity card  1242  is content that is currently playing on the device  1202  (e.g., the Kitchen Speaker). Proximity card  1242  provides an interface that allows the user to add the device “iPhone” (e.g.,  1200 ) to the current media session (e.g., of playback of “Same Thing” on device  1202 ) of another device in close proximity (e.g., device  1202 ). 
       FIGS. 12Z-12AC  illustrate and exemplary pull interaction with a media control interface. At  FIG. 12Z , device  1200  receives user input  1244  on proximity card  1242 . At  FIG. 12AA , user input  1244  has moved across the display (e.g., in the direction of action indicator  1242 C). In this example, display  1206  is a touch-sensitive display. In this example, user input  1244  is a directional swipe gesture.  FIG. 12AA  also illustrates proximity card  1242  has shifted position on the display  1206  in accordance with the directional swipe gesture user input  1244 , which will be referred to as the “pull position”. 
     In some examples, device  1200  requires that the proximity card  1242  be held at the pull position for a threshold amount of time before performing an action in response. In some examples, device  1200  provides a visual indication of the progress toward satisfying the threshold amount of time. For example, at  FIG. 12AB  illustrates pull progress indicator  1242 E, which is a partially completed ring. In some examples, other types of indicators can be used. Thus, in the example in  FIG. 12AB , the elapsed time that the proximity card  1242  has been held in the push position is approximately one-quarter of the necessary threshold time. In some embodiments, a requirement to satisfy a threshold amount of time in the push position can be bypassed (e.g., overridden) if a user input (e.g.,  1244 ) satisfies an additional criteria. For example, if the user input is a deep press or is a swipe past an edge of the display (e.g., through the push position and off the top edge of display  1206 ), the device can perform the pull function immediately in response. 
     In response to the user input  1242 , device  1200  performs an action in response. In some embodiments, the device  1200  “pulls” media playback onto the device  1200 . In some embodiments, pulling playback includes initiating playback on the current device (e.g.,  1200 ) and ceasing playback on the external device (e.g.,  1202 ). In some embodiments, pulling playback includes initiating playback on the current device (e.g.,  1200 ) and continuing playback on the external device (e.g.,  1202 ). 
     In some examples, device  1200  initiates playback of the media item represented by proximity card  1242 . In some examples, playback on device  1202  ceases in response to user input  1242  or in response to device  1200  initiating playback.  FIG. 12AC  illustrates proximity card  1242  upon completion of the pull action. As shown, proximity card  1242  now includes confirmation  1242 F (“Playing on iPhone”) and pull progress indicator  1242 E now includes a checkmark. Thus, in this example, when the display  1206  of device  1200  appears as shown in  FIG. 12AC , the device  1200  is currently playing back the media item titled “Same Thing”. 
       FIG. 12AD  illustrates an exemplary current media interface  1246 . Current media interface  1246  is displayed subsequent to device  1200  receiving user input  1244  and pulling the playback to the iPhone. Current media interface  1246  includes a media identifier  1246 A (e.g., showing the track titled “Same Thing” by “Jambug”), device selection affordance  1246 B (e.g., showing focus is on the iPhone), media playback indicator  1246 C (showing temporal progress of playback of the current media item), and playback control affordances  1246 D. As shown in  FIG. 12AD , device  1200  updates the device selection indicator  1246 B to indicate that the current focus of the device (e.g., the devices in the current media session) is the iPhone (e.g., device  1200 ). Thus, in this example playback on the device Kitchen Speaker (e.g., device  1202 ) ceased and audio playback was handed off to the iPhone (e.g., device  1200 ). 
     In some examples, if device  1200  is associated with a personal listening device (e.g., headphones), device  1200  automatically pulls the media playback from device  1202  and initiates the playback on the personal listening device. For example, as shown in the current media interface  1246  of  FIG. 12AE , the playback of the pulled media item “Same Thing” is currently playing back on the headphones named “AirPods” (e.g., indicated by device selection indicator  1246 B). For example, if a user is about to leave their home and would like to take music with them (e.g., to go running), device  1200  routes the music to an associated set of headphones (e.g., if turned on and/or being worn by the user) without first beginning playback on a speaker of device  1200  in response to user input  1244 . 
       FIG. 12AF-12AG  illustrates an exemplary alternate technique for interacting with a proximity card, in accordance with some embodiments.  FIG. 12AF  depicts proximity card  1242 , with a user input  1248  on the media affordance  1242 B. In some examples, user input  1248  is a tap, a touch, a deep press, or a press and hold input, or the like. At  FIG. 12AG , device  1200  displays a current media interface  1250  that is targeted at the Kitchen Speaker in response to user input  1248 . Current media interface  1250  includes a device selection affordance  1250 A (e.g., indicating the focus of the interface  1250 ) and playback control affordances  1250 B. Thus, if a user wishes to control playback on the Kitchen speaker, rather than pull the media to the iPhone, a tap on the proximity card can be used to reveal a current media interface targeted to the Kitchen Speaker&#39;s media session. 
       FIGS. 12AH-12AJ  illustrate exemplary interfaces for transferring playback of video content between devices. In the examples described above, reference was made to transferring playback of media, and in particular audio. In some embodiments, media content includes video content. For example, a media item can be a video file or a video stream. Thus, the techniques described above are applicable to video content as well. 
     For example,  FIG. 12AH  illustrates playback of exemplary video content  1252  on device  1200 .  FIG. 12AI  illustrates an exemplary proximity card  1254  for transferring video content from device  1200  to another device. Proximity card  1254  is analogous to proximity card  1236  of  FIG. 12Q , the description of which is hereby incorporated by reference. Similar to proximity card  1236 , proximity card  1254  includes the title  1254 A “Apple TV”, visually indicating the name of the device that the user placed device  1200  in close proximity to. Title  1254 A also visually indicates the focus of the proximity card (e.g., the device that will receive the media content in response), in this case the device named “Apple TV”. Proximity card  1254  also includes an action indicator  1254 D (e.g., an arrow), indicating that a user input gesture on the proximity card (e.g., in the direction of the arrow) will cause the device to perform an action. Likewise, action indicator  1254 C (the text “Push to Play”) indicates to a user that a user input on the proximity card  1254  will cause the device to take action. Additionally, proximity card  1254  includes a media affordance  1254 B representing media content (e.g., one or more media items). In this example, media affordance  1254 B includes a video screen shot (e.g., depicting a dog) of a video (e.g.,  1252  of FIG. AH) currently playing on device  1200 . In some examples, media affordance  1254 B includes other types of visual indications of one or more media items (e.g., a video screen shot, video cover art, text, images, or other appropriate visual representations). Proximity card  1254  provides an interface that allows the user to add the device “Apple TV” to the current media session (e.g., of playback of the video media  1252 ). 
       FIG. 12AJ  illustrates an exemplary result of transferring the video content depicted in  FIG. 12AI  from a first device  1200  to a second device  1260 . In some examples, device  1260  can be a device as described above with respect to device  660  of  FIG. 6 . In this example, device  1260  is media device (e.g., Apple TV made by Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif. USA) connected to a display  1256  of device  1258  (e.g., a television). In this example, the user placed device  1200  in close proximity to device  1260 , causing device  1200  to display proximity card  1254 . In response to user input representing an upward swipe on proximity card  1254 , playback of the video content is transferred to the device  1260 . For example, device  1260  is currently playing back the video content  1252  from  FIG. 12AH . In this example, device  1260  is configured to output the video content via the display of television device  1256 . In some embodiments, device  1260  includes a display, which is used to playback the transferred media content. 
     Further, in the example depicted in  FIG. 12AJ , device  1202  is currently playing back the audio portion of the video content playing back on device  1260 . In some examples, device  1260  acts like a media hub, and can route video and/or audio data (e.g., for playback and output) to other devices connected to it (e.g., via wireless or wired connections). For example, as shown in  FIG. 12AJ , device  1260  outputs video playback to television  1256  and audio playback (e.g., from the same media) to smart speaker  1202 . In some embodiments, the device routing of a component signal (e.g., video or audio) of media content is preconfigured. For example, a user can configure device  1260  to always output audio on device  1202  and always output video on device  1256  (e.g., when a request for playback is received at either device, or a some other external device via a multi-device interface). In some embodiments, device  1260  dynamically determines the routing of a component signal (e.g., video or audio) of media content. For example, a user can configure device  1260  to always output audio on device  1202  and always output video on device  1256 —however, if device  1202  is busy playing back other content, device  1260  can instead route the audio signal to be output by the speakers of television  1256 . In some embodiments, device  1260  automatically detects the appropriate device (e.g., a preferred device) and automatically routes the content to that device. For example, device  1260  automatically detects speaker  1202  and automatically routes (e.g., hands off) audio playback of the audio portion of media). Likewise, device  1202 , in some examples, automatically routes video to a video playback device, such as device  1260  (e.g., an Apple TV). 
     One of skill in the art would appreciate the numerous possible combinations of devices (e.g., two or more) that can be used to create an integrated media playback experience as described herein (e.g., with respect to  FIGS. 12A-12AM ). For example, the functions as described above (e.g., with respect to detecting proximity, displaying interfaces for transferring media between devices, displaying visual content, and/or outputting audible content) are not limited to being performed by a single device. In some embodiments, any number of devices are used to perform a function (e.g., and achieve a desired end result). One of skill in the art would appreciate that any number of devices can be used to perform the functions described above and, thus, to achieve the same desired end result, and the various combinations of devices possible are intended to be within the scope of this disclosure. In some examples, reducing the dependence on a single device or a limited number of devices to perform a desired media function, provides the user with a seamless and integrated media experience that can be accessed using various devices. 
       FIGS. 12AK-12AL  illustrate exemplary interfaces for transferring a phone call between devices. In the examples described above, reference was made to transferring playback of media, and in particular audio and video. However, for example, the transfer of playback is not limited to transferring media such as songs and movies. In some embodiments, media content includes a phone call. For example, media content can be a telephone call, a voice over internet protocol “VOIP” call, a video call, or the like. 
     For example,  FIG. 12AK  illustrates an exemplary call interface  1262 , displayed on device  1200 . Call interface  1262  indicates that device  1200  is currently in an active phone call (e.g., a VOIP call). 
       FIG. 12AL  illustrates an exemplary proximity card  1264  for transferring the phone call to another device (e.g.,  1202 ). Proximity card  1264  is analogous to proximity card  1236  of  FIG. 12Q , the description of which is hereby incorporated. Similar to proximity card  1236 , proximity card  1264  includes the title  1264 A “Kitchen Speaker”, visually indicating the name of the device that the user placed device  1200  in close proximity to. Title  1264 A also visually indicates the focus of the proximity card (e.g., the device that will receive the media content in response), in this case the device named “Kitchen Speaker”. Proximity card  1264  also includes an action indicator  1264 C (e.g., an arrow), indicating that a user input gesture on the proximity card (e.g., in the direction of the arrow) will cause the device to perform an action. Likewise, action indicator  1264 D (the text “Push Call”) indicates to a user that a user input on the proximity card  1264  will cause the device to take action. Additionally, proximity card  1264  includes a media affordance  1264 B representing media content (e.g., a phone call). In this example, media affordance  1264 B includes an image of a contact, a contact name, and a call time for the current phone call. In some examples, media affordance  1264 B includes any appropriate visual indication of one or more media items (e.g., a video screen shot, video cover art, text, images, or other appropriate visual representations). Proximity card  1264  provides an interface that allows the user to add the device “Kitchen Speaker” to the current media session (e.g., of outputting audio of the phone call). 
     As one of skill in the art would appreciate, a phone call involves both audio output and audio input (e.g., using a microphone). In some embodiments, transferring a media item (e.g., a phone call or a video call) from one device to another device comprises transferring media output (e.g., audio or video output), but not transferring a media input function (e.g., audio or video input). For example, in the example depicted in  FIG. 12AL , device  1200  can handoff audio output (e.g., so that phone call audio output is audibly output by a smart speaker  1202 ), but forgo handing off the media input function and continue to use its microphone to receive phone call audio (e.g., or its camera, in the case of a video call). In some embodiments, transferring a media item (e.g., a phone call or a video call) from one device to another device comprises transferring media output (e.g., audio or video output), and transferring a media input function. For example, in the example depicted in  FIG. 12AL , device  1200  can handoff audio output (e.g., so that phone call audio output is audibly output by a smart speaker  1202 ), as well has handoff the media input function (e.g., so that smart speaker  1202  uses its microphone to receive phone call audio). In some embodiments, transferring a media item (e.g., a phone call or a video call) from one device to another device comprises transferring media input function, but not transferring a media output (e.g., audio or video output). In some embodiments, a device transfers less than all media output functions and/or media input functions. For example, if a video call is pushed to a display device with no audio output capability, the device (e.g.,  1200 ) can transfer the visual output function to the display the device, and retain both the audio output function and the audio input function. 
     It should be apparent to one of skill in the art that the various interfaces and techniques described herein (e.g., with respect to  FIGS. 12A-12AM ) for controlling and/or transferring media content between devices is applicable to many types of media. Any media with one or more of an audio component and a visual component, and that are formatted to be communicated between electronic devices, are intended to be within the scope of this disclosure. For example, other specific examples of media that can be controlled or transferred in accordance with the techniques described herein include, but are not limited to: an electronic book (e.g., also commonly referred to as an “e-book”), a webpage, textual content (e.g., documents, spreadsheets), screen sharing (e.g., mirroring a first device&#39;s screen at a second device), and an image (e.g., photos, animations). 
     In certain situations, the owner of a device may not desire to allow any user that has physical access to a device to be able to control the device. For example, it may not be desirable to allow guests (e.g., via the guests&#39; devices) to control playback on the owner&#39;s home device.  FIG. 12AM  illustrates an exemplary media information interface. Media information interface  1266  (also referred to as proximity card  1266 ) depicts an interface that is displayed, in some examples, when a guest device is placed in close proximity to a home owner&#39;s device. In some examples, a guest device is a device that is not associated with a user account that is a member of an authorized set of users (e.g., one or more). For example, an authorized set of users (e.g., user accounts) are users that have been added to a group in a device management application (e.g., a group of users  602 A- 602 C as described above with respect to  FIG. 6A ). Thus, in some examples, if device  1200  is not logged into a user account associated with a user of the authorized set of users, device  1200  does not present a proximity card for controlling playback (e.g., a push proximity card, a pull proximity card, or a recently played media proximity card). Rather, in some examples, device  1200  displays proximity card  1266  in response to being placed in close proximity to a device that is associated with an authorized set of users. 
     Proximity card  1266  includes the title  1266 A “Kitchen Speaker”, visually indicating the name of the device (e.g., device  1202 ) that is the target of the proximity card (e.g., whose media playback information is presented on the card). Additionally, proximity card  1266  includes a media affordance  1266 B representing media content (e.g., one or more media items). In this example, media affordance  1266 B includes album art for the track titled “How Many Times” by the artist “Jambug” (e.g., that is currently playing on device  1202 ). In some examples, media affordance  1266 B includes other types of visual indications of one or more media items (e.g., text, images, or other appropriate visual representations). In this example, the media content represented (e.g., by affordance  1266 B) by the proximity card  1266  is content that is currently playing on the device  1202  (e.g., the Kitchen Speaker). Proximity card  1266  also includes a textual identification  1266 C of the currently playing media. Thus, proximity card  1266  provides an informational interface that allows a guest to view information about media playback on a device in close proximity, without being able to affect the playback. For example, a swipe on proximity card  1266  will not push or pull media playback to device  1200 . 
       FIGS. 13A-13F  is a flow diagram illustrating a method for displaying a media information interface using an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. Method  1300  is performed at a device (e.g.,  100 ,  300 ,  500 ) with a display. Some operations in method  1300  are, optionally, combined, the order of some operations are, optionally, changed, and some operations are, optionally, omitted. 
     As described below, method  1300  provides an intuitive way for displaying a media information interface. The method reduces the cognitive burden on a user for displaying a media information interface, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated computing devices, enabling a user to display a media information interface faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges. 
     The electronic device (e.g.,  1200 ) detects ( 1302 ), while connected to a second device (e.g.,  1202 ), an indication that a physical proximity between the first device and the second device satisfies a proximity condition. For example, the devices are connected when the second device is in Bluetooth range of the first device, or is connected to the same Wi-Fi network as the first device. In some examples, the proximity condition is satisfied when a physical proximity of the electronic device (e.g.,  1200 ) is within a proximity zone of the second device (e.g., such as proximity zone  1204  of  FIG. 12B ). In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g., device  1200  or  1202 ) detects whether the proximity condition is satisfied using a near-field communication technique. In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g.,  1200 ) that determines whether the proximity condition is satisfied communicates the determination to the other device (e.g.,  1202 ). 
     In accordance with detecting that the physical proximity satisfies the proximity condition (e.g., the electronic device is within the proximity zone  1204  of  FIG. 12B ), the electronic device (e.g.,  1200 ) displays ( 1304 ), on the display (e.g.,  1206 ), a media information interface (e.g.,  1208  of  FIG. 12B ). 
     Using a detection of physical proximity for displaying a media information interface allows the user to efficiently invoke a device-specific user interface with fewer required user inputs. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the indication is detected while the first device (e.g.,  1200 ) is not playing media content and while the second device (e.g.,  1202 ) is not playing media content. In some embodiments, displaying the media information interface (e.g.,  1208 ) comprises displaying ( 1306 ), on the display (e.g.,  1206 ), a first affordance (e.g.,  1208 A) representing a first media item that was recently played on the second device. In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g.,  1200 ) receives ( 1308 ) a first user input (e.g.,  1210 ) representing selection of the first affordance. In response to receiving the first user input (e.g.,  1210 ), the electronic device (e.g.,  1200 ) transmits ( 1310 ) an instruction to the second device (e.g.,  1202 ) to initiate playback of the first media item. 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g.,  1200 ) receives ( 1312 ) a second user input (e.g.,  1214  of  FIGS. 12E and 12F ) representing a directional swipe gesture on the first affordance (e.g.,  1208 A). In response to receiving the second user input (e.g.,  1214 ), and while continuing to display the first affordance (e.g.,  1208 A of  FIG. 12F ), the electronic device displays ( 1314 ), on the display (e.g.,  1206 ), a second affordance (e.g.,  1208 C of  FIG. 12F ) representing a second media item that was recently played on the second device, wherein the second affordance was not displayed prior to receiving the second user input (e.g.,  1214  of  FIG. 12F ). 
     In some embodiments, the indication is detected while the first device (e.g.,  1200 ) is playing a third media item (e.g.,  1220 A of  FIG. 12H ) and while the second device (e.g.,  1202 ) is playing a fourth media item (e.g.,  1222  of  FIG. 12H ) different than the third media item. In some embodiments, displaying the media information interface (e.g.,  1224  of  FIG. 12I ) comprises displaying ( 1316 ), on the display (e.g.,  1206 ), a third affordance (e.g.,  1224 A of  FIG. 12I ) associated with the third media item (e.g.,  1220 A) currently playing on the first device (e.g.,  1200 ). In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g.,  1200 ) receives ( 1318 ) a third user input (e.g.,  1226  of  FIG. 12J ) representing selection of the third affordance (e.g.,  1224 A). In response to receiving the third user input (e.g.,  1226 ), the electronic device (e.g.,  1200 ) transmits ( 1320 ) an instruction to the second device (e.g.,  1202 ) to initiate playback of the third media item (e.g.,  1220 A). 
     In some embodiments, further in response to receiving the third user input (e.g.,  1226 ), the electronic device (e.g.,  1200 ) ceases playing ( 1322 ) the third media item (e.g.,  1220 A) on the first device (e.g.,  1200 ). 
     In some embodiments, further in response to receiving the third user input (e.g.,  1226 ), the electronic device (e.g.,  1200 ) displays ( 1324 ), on the display, playback control affordances (e.g.,  1228 B of  FIG. 12K ) that control the playback of the third media item (e.g.,  1228 A of  FIG. 12K , or  1230 C of  FIG. 12L ) on the second device (e.g.,  1202 ). 
     In some embodiments, the indication is detected while the first device (e.g.,  1200 ) is playing a fifth media item (e.g.,  1220 A of  FIG. 12P ) and while the second device (e.g.,  1202 ) is not playing media content. In some embodiments, displaying the media information interface (e.g.,  1236  of  FIG. 12Q ) comprises displaying ( 1326 ), on the display, a fourth affordance (e.g.,  1236 C of  FIG. 12Q ) representing the fifth media item (e.g., represented by  1236 C of  FIG. 12Q ). In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g.,  1200 ) receives ( 1328 ) a fourth user input (e.g.,  1238  of  FIGS. 12R and 12S ). In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g.,  1200 ) determines ( 1330 ) whether the fourth user input (e.g.,  1238 ) represents a directional swipe gesture on the fourth affordance (e.g.,  1236 C). In some embodiments, the swipe gesture is an upward swipe. In some embodiments, the swipe gesture is a swipe in a direction toward the second device (e.g.,  1202 ). For example, the swipe gesture would depend on the orientation of the first device (e.g.,  1200 ) relative to the second device (e.g.,  1202 ). In response to receiving the fourth user input (e.g.,  1238 ), and in accordance with a determination that the fourth user input represents a directional swipe gesture on the fourth affordance (e.g.,  1236 C) ( 1332 ): the electronic device (e.g.,  1200 ) transmits ( 1334 ) an instruction to the second device (e.g.,  1202 ) to initiate playback of the fifth media item (e.g., represented by affordance  1236 C of  FIG. 12Q , or by  1220 A of  FIG. 12C ). In some embodiments, further in response to the fourth user input (e.g.,  1236 C), and in accordance with a determination that the fourth user input represents a directional swipe gesture on the fourth affordance (e.g.,  1236 C), the electronic device (e.g.,  1200 ) ceases playback ( 1336 ), on the first device (e.g.,  1200 ), of the fifth media item. In some embodiments, in response to receiving the fourth user input (e.g.,  1236 C), and in accordance with a determination that the fourth user input does not represent a directional swipe gesture on the fourth affordance (e.g.,  1236 C) ( 1338 ): the electronic device (e.g.,  1200 ) forgoes ( 1340 ) transmitting an instruction to the second device (e.g.,  1202 ) to initiate playback of the fifth media item. In some embodiments, further in response to receiving the fourth user input (e.g.,  1236 C), and in accordance with a determination that the fourth user input does not represent a directional swipe gesture on the fourth affordance (e.g.,  1236 C), the electronic device (e.g.,  1200 ) continues playback ( 1342 ), on the first device (e.g.,  1200 ), of the fifth media item (e.g., represented by affordance  1236 C of  FIG. 12Q , or by  1220 A of  FIG. 12C ). 
     In some embodiments, the first device (e.g.,  1200 ) ceases playback of the fifth media item at a playback time (e.g., as illustrated by  1220 D of  FIG. 12V ) of the fifth media item (e.g., represented by affordance  1236 C of  FIG. 12Q , or by  1220 A of  FIG. 12C ). In some embodiments, transmitting the instruction to the second device (e.g.,  1202 ) to initiate playback of the fifth media item comprises transmitting ( 1344 ) an instruction to the second device to begin playback at approximately the playback time of the fifth media item. For example, so that the playback is perceived as continuous by a listener. For example, the first device instructs the second device to begin playback at the same time that the first device ceases playback of the fifth media item, a certain amount of time after the time that the first device ceases playback, or within a range of time based on the time that the first device ceases playback. 
     In some embodiments, displaying the media information interface comprises displaying, on the display (e.g.,  1206 ), a fifth affordance (e.g.,  1220 C of  FIG. 12W ). In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g.,  1200 ) determines whether the fourth user input (e.g.,  1239 ) represents a selection of the fifth affordance (e.g.,  1220 C of  FIG. 12W . In some embodiments, in response to receiving the fourth user input, and in accordance with a determination that the fourth user input represents a selection of the fifth affordance, displaying, on the display (e.g.,  1206 ), a multi-device interface (e.g.,  610  of  FIG. 6J ). In some embodiments, further in response to receiving the fourth user input, and in accordance with a determination that the fourth user input does not represent a selection of the fifth affordance, the electronic device (e.g.,  1200 ) forgoes displaying the multi-device interface. 
     In some embodiments, the indication is detected while the first device (e.g.,  1200 ) is not playing media content and while the second device (e.g.,  1202 ) is playing a sixth media item (e.g., represented by  1242 B of  FIG. 12Y ). In some embodiments, displaying the media information interface (e.g.,  1242  of  FIG. 12Y ) comprises displaying ( 1346 ), on the display (e.g.,  1206 ), a sixth affordance (e.g.,  1242 B of  FIG. 12Y )) representing the sixth media item. In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g.,  1200 ) receives ( 1348 ) a fifth user input (e.g.,  1244  of  FIGS. 12Z and 12AA ). In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g.,  1200 ) determines whether the fifth user input represents a directional swipe gesture on the fifth affordance (e.g.,  1242 B). In some embodiments, the swipe gesture is a downward swipe. In some embodiments, the swipe gesture is a swipe in a direction away from the second device (e.g.,  1202 ). For example, the directional swipe would depend on the orientation of the first device relative to the second device. In some embodiments, in response to receiving the fifth user input (e.g.,  1244 ), and in accordance with a determination that the fifth user input represents a directional swipe gesture on the sixth affordance ( 1350 ): the electronic device (e.g.,  1200 ) transmits ( 1352 ) an instruction to the second device (e.g.,  1202 ) to cease playback of the sixth media item. In some embodiments, further in response to receiving the fifth user input (e.g.,  1244 ), and in accordance with a determination that the fifth user input represents a directional swipe gesture on the sixth affordance, electronic device (e.g.,  1200 ) initiates playback ( 1354 ), on the first device (e.g.,  1200 ), of the sixth media item (e.g., represented by  1242 B of  FIG. 12AA ). For example, pulling on a displayed proximity card causes playback of media from the second device to transfer to the first device. In some embodiments, in response to receiving the fifth user input, and in accordance with a determination that the fifth user input does not represent a directional swipe gesture on the sixth affordance ( 1356 ): the electronic device (e.g.,  1200 ) forgoes transmitting ( 1358 ) an instruction to the second device (e.g.,  1202 ) to cease playback of the sixth media item. In some embodiments, further in response to receiving the fifth user input, and in accordance with a determination that the fifth user input does not represent a directional swipe gesture on the sixth affordance: the electronic device (e.g.,  1200 ) forgoes initiating playback ( 1360 ), on the first device (e.g.,  1200 ), of the sixth media item. 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g.,  1200 ) determines ( 1362 ) whether the fifth user input (e.g.,  1248  of  FIG. 12AF ) represents a selection (e.g., a tap, touch, press, deep press, or tap and hold input) of the sixth affordance (e.g.,  1242 B of  FIG. 12AF ). In some embodiments, further in response to receiving the fifth user input, and in accordance with a determination that the fifth user input (e.g.,  1248 ) represents a selection of the sixth affordance, the electronic device (e.g.,  1200 ) displays ( 1364 ), on the display (e.g.,  1206 ), playback control affordances (e.g.,  1250 B of  FIG. 12AG ) for controlling the playback of the sixth media item (e.g., represented by  1242 B of  FIG. 12AF ) on the second device (e.g.,  1202 , represented by  1250 A of  FIG. 12AG ). In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the fifth user input does not represent a selection of the sixth affordance, the electronic device (e.g.,  1200 ) forgoes displaying ( 1366 ), on the display (e.g.,  1206 ), playback control affordances (e.g.,  1250 B of  FIG. 12AG ) for controlling the playback of the sixth media item on the second device (e.g.,  1202 ). 
     In some embodiments, the second device (e.g.,  1202 ) ceases playback of the sixth media item (e.g., represented by  1246 A of  FIG. 12AD ) at a playback time (e.g.,  1246 C of  FIG. 12AD ) of the sixth media item. In some embodiments, initiating playback, on the first device (e.g.,  1200 ), of the sixth media item comprises beginning playback at approximately the playback time (e.g.,  1246 C of  FIG. 12AD ) of the sixth media item. In some examples, the transfer of playback from the second device to the first device is perceived as continuous by a listener. For example, the first device can begin playback at the same time that the second device ceases playback, a certain amount of time after the time that the second device ceases playback, or within a range of time based on the time that the second device ceases playback. 
     In some embodiments, initiating playback, on the first device (e.g.,  1200 ), of the sixth media item (e.g., represented by  1246 A of  FIG. 12AD ) comprises displaying, on the display (e.g.,  1206 ): an identification of the sixth media item (e.g.,  1246 A of  FIG. 12AD ), and playback control affordances (e.g.,  1246 D of  FIG. 12AD ) for controlling playback of the sixth media item on the first device (e.g.,  1200 ). 
     In some embodiments, the first device (e.g.,  1200 ) is connected to a plurality of devices, wherein the plurality of devices includes the second device (e.g.,  1202 ), and wherein the displayed media information interface (e.g.,  1208 ,  1224 ,  1236 , or  1242 ) corresponds to the second device (e.g.,  1202 ). 
     In some embodiments, the first device (e.g.,  1200 ) is connected to the second device (e.g.,  1202 ) via a wireless communication link. 
     In some embodiments, the media information interface (e.g.,  1236 , or  1242 ) comprises an indication (e.g.,  1236 B,  1236 D,  1242 C, and/or  1242 D) that the media content playing back on the first device (e.g.,  1200 ) or the second device (e.g.,  1202 ) can be transferred to the other device not playing back the media content. For example, proximity cards can include an indication (e.g., text, an arrow) that the media content can be “pushed” to the second device (e.g., an up arrow) or “pulled” from the second device (e.g., down arrow). 
     In some embodiments, a media item is selected from the group consisting of an audio file, an audio stream, a video file, a video stream, a phone call, and a video call. 
     In some embodiments, the first device (e.g.,  1200 ) is associated with a first user account (e.g., user  602 A of  FIG. 6A ), and the second device (e.g.,  1202 ) is associated with a set of user accounts. In some embodiments, the set of user accounts includes one or more user accounts. In some embodiments, further in accordance with detecting that the physical proximity satisfies the proximity condition: in accordance with a determination that the first user account is a member of the set of user accounts, the electronic device (e.g.,  1200 ) displays ( 1368 ) an indication (e.g.,  1236 B,  1236 D,  1242 C, and/or  1242 D) that media playback can be transferred between the first device (e.g.,  1200 ) and the second device (e.g.,  1202 ). For example, the indication provides a visual indication that media playback can be pushed from the first device to the second, or pulled from the second device to the first. In some embodiments, the device also displays playback control affordances (e.g.,  1220 D of  FIG. 12H ). In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the first user account is not a member of the set of user accounts, the electronic device (e.g.,  1200 ) forgoes displaying ( 1370 ) the indication (e.g.,  1236 B,  1236 D,  1242 C, and/or  1242 D) that media playback can be transferred between the first device and the second device. For example, the electronic device can instead display an interface  1266  as shown in  FIG. 12AM . In some examples, interface  1266  includes an indication of what is now playing on the second device, but does not include an affordance that can be swiped to transfer playback, nor does it include arrows prompting a swipe gesture. In some embodiments, the device also forgoes displaying playback controls (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 1266 ). 
     In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination (e.g., by device  1200  or  1202 ) that the physical proximity between the first device (e.g.,  1200 ) and the second device (e.g.,  1202 ) has satisfied the proximity condition continuously for a threshold amount of time, the first device automatically transfers ( 1372 ) playback of a media item between the first device and the second device. In some embodiments, automatically transferring comprises transferring without further user input and/or without requiring an additional condition be met. In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the physical proximity between the first device and the second device has not satisfied the proximity condition continuously for a threshold amount of time, the electronic device (e.g.,  1200 ) forgoes automatically transferring ( 1374 ) playback of a media item between the first device and the second device. 
     Note that details of the processes described above with respect to method  1300  (e.g.,  FIGS. 13A-13F ) are also applicable in an analogous manner to the methods described below/above. For example, method  700 ,  900 ,  1100 ,  1500 ,  1700 ,  1800 ,  2000 ,  2200 ,  2400 ,  2600 ,  2800 ,  3000 ,  3200 ,  3400 ,  3600 ,  3800 , and  3900  optionally includes one or more of the characteristics of the various methods described above with reference to method  1300 . For brevity, these details are not repeated below. 
       FIGS. 14A-14M  illustrate exemplary techniques for controlling a device, in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIGS. 15A-15C . 
       FIG. 14A  illustrates an exemplary device  1400 , in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, device  1400  includes one or more features of devices  100 ,  300 ,  500 , or  580 . In some embodiments, as shown in  FIG. 14A , device  1400  includes a touch-sensitive surface  1402 . In this example, the touch-sensitive surface is arranged on top of the device, which is a smart speaker device sitting on surface. In some embodiments, device  1400  includes a touch-sensitive display. 
       FIG. 14B  illustrates an overhead view of exemplary device  1400 . Touch-sensitive surface  1402  can be seen. Also visible are LED indicators  1404 ,  1406 A, and  1406 B. In some examples, one or more of the LED indicators on device  1400  are used to visually indicate a status of the device. For example, touch-sensitive surface  1402  can respond differently to the same user input (e.g., a tap at the same location) based on a state of device  1400  (e.g., at different times). Thus, device  1400  can use the LED indicators to visually communicate the current status of the device (e.g., and in turn, indicate the effect that a user input (e.g., on touch-sensitive surface  1402 ) will have on the device). In some examples, one or more of the following properties of one or more LED indicators are controlled by the device  1400  to communicate a state of the device: illumination (e.g., on or off), brightness, color, diameter, and shape. In some examples, other visual properties of the LED indicators can be controlled (e.g., adjusted) in order to indicate a device state (e.g., a media playback status, a state of a touch-sensitive surface or a touch-sensitive display). In some embodiments, the LED indicators are a display screen (e.g.,  112  of  FIG. 1B, 504  of  FIG. 5A ). For example, instead of using LED indicators, a device  1400  can include a display screen, such as an organic light-emitting diode (OLED) panel, an LED panel, an LCD panel, or the like. In some embodiments, LED indicators are any component(s) that can be controlled by an electronic device (e.g.,  1400 ) to output a visual indication. 
       FIGS. 14C-14L  depict various exemplary states of device  1400 , and actions performed by the device in response to user input in accordance with the states. 
       FIG. 14C  illustrates the overhead view shown in  FIG. 14B , but where device  1400  receives a user input  1408  at a location on the touch-sensitive surface  1402 . In this example, the user input  1408  is received at a location over LED indicator  1406 A. In this example, device  1400  is not playing back media content at the time when user input  1408  is received. For example, device  1400  is in a paused state during a media playback session, or is not currently a part of a media playback session. 
     At  FIG. 14D , in response to receiving user input  1408 , device  1400  initiates playback of media. For example, device is now outputting media (e.g., via a speaker), as represented graphically by sound wave  1410  in  FIG. 14D . In this example, device  1400  has resumed playing media playback that was paused. In some examples, if no media playback is currently paused, device  1400  still initiates playback of media in response to user input  1408 . For example, the device  1400  can initiate playback of recently played media, default media (e.g., configured by user, or automatically selected), favorite media associated with a user account, preconfigured media (e.g., configured to playback during a predetermined time, day), or the like. In some examples, device  1400  updates the LED indicators to visually indicate that the device is currently playing back media content. In this example, indicator  1406 A now includes a “+” icon and indicator  1406 B now includes a “−” icon. In some examples, the indicators  1406 A and  1406 B of  FIG. 14D  visually communicate that the device is currently playing back media (e.g., outputting an audio signal). One of skill would appreciate that other visual indications (e.g., icons) and/or indicators (e.g., indicator  1406 ) can be used to visually communicate that the device is currently playing back media. Further, in some examples, indicators  1406 A and  1406 B of  FIG. 14D  visually communicate that they can be touched in order to adjust volume. One of skill would appreciate that other indications (e.g., icons) and/or indicators (e.g., indicator  1406 ) can be used to visually communicate the state (e.g., function in response to user input) of a touch-sensitive or touch-sensitive display. 
     In some embodiments, the “+” and “−” indicators  1406 A and  1406 B cease to be displayed in response to device  1400  performing a voice assistant function. For example, in response to detecting voice user input (e.g., “Hey Siri”), the device can cease displaying one or more of the icons within indicator  1406 A and  1406 B. In some examples, the illumination of one or more of indicators  1404 ,  1406 A, and  1406 B changes during a voice assistant function. For example, indicators  1404 ,  1406 A, and  1406 B can turn off, be illuminated, change color, or the like in response to a voice assistant function being performed on device  1400 . 
       FIG. 14E  illustrates the overhead view shown in  FIG. 14D , but where device  1400  receives a user input  1410  at a location on the touch-sensitive surface  1402 . In this example, the user input  1410  is received at a location over LED indicator  1406 A, which is the same location as user input  1408 . In this example, device  1400  (as shown in  FIG. 14D ) is currently playing back media content at the time when user input  1410  is received. For example, device  1400  is included in a media playback session (e.g., and is playing music audio, or the audio component of video playback). 
     In response to receiving user input  1410 , device  1400  adjusts a volume of device  1400 . For example, as illustrated by the volume level meter  1412  in  FIG. 14F , device  1400  adjusts (e.g., increases) volume from a first level  1412 A (e.g., the volume immediately prior to the user input  1410 ) to a second level  1412 B (e.g., the volume immediately subsequent to the user input  1410 ), in response to user input  1410 . 
       FIGS. 14G-14J  illustrate exemplary techniques for expanding the size of a responsive area on a touch-sensitive surface, in accordance with some embodiments. 
       FIG. 14G  illustrates an overhead view of device  1400  while it is currently playing back media content (e.g., as described in  FIG. 14F ). Additionally,  FIG. 14G  depicts the boundaries of touch-sensitive regions  1414 A and  1414 B over indicators  1406 A and  1406 B, respectively. In some examples, touch-sensitive region boundaries are not displayed or visible on an electronic device (e.g.,  1400 ). For instance, in this example, the regions  1414 A and  1414 B are included for reference only and are not displayed by device  1400 . In some examples, an electronic device displays boundaries of one or more touch-sensitive regions (e.g.,  1414 A or  1414 B). 
     At  FIG. 14H , the device (as shown in  FIG. 14G ) receives user input  1416  over indicator  1406 A. In this example, user input  1416  is a touch on touch-sensitive surface  1402 . As can be seen, at least a portion of user input  1416  is included within the touch-sensitive region  1414 A. In response to user input  1416 , device  1400  increases a volume (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 14F ). 
     In some embodiments, further in response to receiving user input  1416  on an indicator  1406 A, device  1400  temporarily expands the touch-sensitive region  1414 A to form an expanded touch-sensitive region (also referred to as an “expanded region”). An exemplary expanded region  1418  is shown in  FIG. 14I . As can be seen in  FIG. 14I , the expanded region  1418  covers are larger area of touch-sensitive surface  1402  than region  1414 A did (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 14G ). In some examples, an expanded region replaces a region. For instance, in this example, expanded region  1418  (e.g., which will perform the same function as region  1414 A, in response to a touch within it) covers the area (and more) that region  1414 A occupied, thus replacing it. 
     In some embodiments, the device ceases to maintain the expanded touch-sensitive region after a predetermined amount of time. In some embodiments, the device ceases to maintain the expanded touch-sensitive region after a predetermined amount of time since the last user input within the expanded region. For example, subsequent user inputs (e.g., taps) within the expanded region would cause a measure (e.g., a timer) of the amount of time since the last user input to be reset after each detect touch input. In this example, the expanded region returns to its normal size (e.g.,  1414 A) after the amount of time reaches the predetermined amount of time after the final user input with the expanded region. 
     At  FIG. 14J , device  1400  receives a second user input  1420  within the expanded region  1418 , but outside of region  1414 A. In some examples, in accordance with a determination that the second user input (e.g.,  1420 ) was received during the predetermined amount of time after detecting the first user input (e.g.,  1416 ), device  1400  adjusts (e.g., increases) a volume of the currently playing media. For example, as illustrated by the volume level meter  1422  in  FIG. 14K , device  1400  adjusts volume from a first level  1422 A (e.g., the volume immediately prior to the user input  1420 ) to a second level  1422 B (e.g., the volume immediately subsequent to the user input  1420 ), in response to user input  1420 . 
     In some examples, in accordance with a determination that the second user input (e.g.,  1420 ) was not received during the predetermined amount of time after detecting the first touch, device  1400  ceases playing media. For example, if user input  1420  was received after a predetermined amount of time after a touch that caused the region  1414 A to expand (or a subsequent touch within the expanded region  1418 ), and was not within the region  1414 A, then the volume is not increased because the temporary expansion (e.g., increase in responsive area on a touch-sensitive surface) ended before the user input  1420  was received. In some examples, device  1400  ceases playback in response to user input  1420 , when it is received after the predetermined amount of time, and is outside of the second region. For instance, in the example shown in  FIG. 14J , user input  1420  is within a region  1414 C that is configured to cause device  1400  to pause media playback (or resume paused playback). Thus, in response to user input  1420  when it is received after the predetermined amount of time, and is outside of the second region, device  1400  pauses playback. 
       FIG. 14L  illustrates an exemplary technique for adjusting the volume of a device. While the description above referenced increasing a volume of device  1400  in response to user input on a touch-sensitive surface,  FIG. 19L  illustrates an exemplary technique for lowering the volume of device  1400 . In response to receiving user input  1410 , device  1400  adjusts a volume of device  1400 . For example, as illustrated by the volume level meter  1426  in  FIG. 14L , device  1400  adjusts volume from a first level  1426 A (e.g., the volume immediately prior to the user input  1424 ) to a second level  1426 B (e.g., the volume immediately subsequent to the user input  1424 , lower than level  1426 A), in response to user input  1424 . 
     In some embodiments, device  1400  includes a plurality of volume levels. For example, device  1400  can maintain e.g., store in memory) a volume level for a media playback function, and maintain a volume level for a voice assistant function. In some examples, the plurality of volume levels are each different. For example, device  1400  can adjust a first volume level (e.g., of media playback) to 0% of maximum (e.g., muted, no sound is produced by a speaker of device  1400 ) while a second volume level is set to a non-zero value of 50% of maximum (e.g., a maximum output level of the speaker, or a maximum level of a volume level meter). 
     For example,  FIG. 14M  illustrates two volume level meters, representing two volume levels stored by device  1400 . Media volume level meter  1430  includes a maximum level and a minimum level. Voice assistant volume level meter  1432  includes a maximum level and a minimum level. 
     In some embodiments, a second volume level is a derivative of a first volume level. For example, the volume level of a voice assistant (e.g., represented by volume meter  1432 ) can be mathematically derived from the volume level of media playback volume. For example, Volume(voice assistant)=(Volume (media)÷1.5). Thus, the second volume level (e.g., of the voice assistant) is derived from a first volume level (e.g., of media playback), and adjustment of the first results in an adjustment of the second. 
     In some embodiments, a second volume level is non-zero when a first volume level is zero. For example, as shown in  FIG. 14M , the virtual assistant volume meter  1432  has a non-zero minimum. Thus, in some examples, when media volume level is set to zero, the voice assistant volume is non-zero, and thus a user can continue to hear and interact with the voice assistant. For example, the voice assistant volume can be derived as follows (where Volume(voice assistant)=((Volume(media)÷1.5)+x), where “x” is a constant representing an amount of volume added back into the result of Volume(media)÷1.5. One of skill in the art would appreciate that a volume level can be represented using a variety of units or quantities, which are not discussed in more detail here. Any appropriate representation of a volume level that an electronic device (e.g., device  1400 ) can use to control the volume of sound output is intended to be within the scope of this disclosure. 
     In some embodiments, user input on touch-sensitive surface  1402  causes device  1400  to change playback of currently playing media. For example, user input on touch-sensitive surface  1402  can cause device  1400  to skip to next media item (e.g., on a playlist), to go back to a previous media item (e.g., on a playlist), pause playback, or the like. In some embodiments, device  1400  concurrently plays back a plurality of media items. In some embodiments, in response to user input on touch-sensitive-surface  1402 , device  1400  adjusts the output of each of the plurality of concurrently playing media items. In some embodiments, each of the plurality of media items are adjusted differently. For example, if device  1400  is concurrently playing back first media representing a news program (e.g., an audio stream) and second media representing music (e.g., an audio stream), a user input (e.g., a swipe gesture, a rotational swipe, a multi-contact swipe, or the like) on surface  1402  causes device  1400  to adjust an output level of the first and second media. In some embodiments, the adjustment is relative. For example, an output level of the first media is adjusted higher while an output level of the second media is adjusted lower. For example, an output level of the first media is adjusted lower while an output level of the second media is adjusted higher. For example, if the user desires to increase the volume of the news program and lower the music volume, a counter-clockwise rotational swipe gesture on surface  1402  causes device  1400  to adjust the volume of each media item accordingly. Conversely, in this example, a clockwise rotational swipe gesture on surface  1402  causes device  1400  to increase the volume of the music and lower the volume of the news program. Thus, device  1400  receives user input to control a crossfade between a plurality of currently playing media signals. 
     In some embodiments, device  1400  includes one or more microphones. In some examples, device  1400  detects, with the one or more microphones, a voice command user input from a voice command source. In some embodiments, the voice command source is moving. For example, the voice command source is a user that is speaking to the device, and the user may move (e.g., walk around a room) relative to the device (e.g., stationary in the room). In some embodiments, while continuing to detect the voice command user input: device  1400  determines a plurality of spatial positions of the moving voice command source, and illuminates light-emitting elements (e.g., indicators  1404 ) based on the plurality of spatial positions of the moving voice command source. Thus, for example, device  1400  can use (e.g., selectively illuminate) indicators  1404  based on the direction of a voice command source (e.g., a user speaking to device  1400  to invoke a voice assistant function using device  1400 ). For instance, when a user stands at a first position relative to device  1400  (e.g., and speaks a command to the device), indicators  1404  include one or more illuminated LEDs that visually appear to align with or indicate (e.g., “point in”) the direction of the first position. Likewise, when a user stands at a second position relative to device  1400  (e.g., and speaks a command to the device), different than the first position, indicators  1404  include one or more illuminated LEDs that visually appear to align with or indicate (e.g., “point in”) the direction of the second position. 
     In some embodiments, device  1400  detects a plurality of voice sources. In some embodiments, the device determines that one voice source, of the plurality of voice sources, represents a voice command user input. In some embodiments, device  1400  illuminates light-emitting elements (e.g., indicators  1404 ) based on the one voice source, of the plurality of voice sources. For example, if device  1400  is placed in a room with a plurality of speaking users and one user (or more than one) utters a voice command, the device  1400  uses indicators  1404  to visually indicate the direction of the user whose voice is currently being used to generate and/or process a voice command. 
       FIGS. 14N-14Q  illustrate exemplary patterns created by illuminate light-emitting elements (e.g., indicators  1404 ) based on a spatial positions of a voice command source (e.g.,  1440 ). At  FIG. 14N , a user  1440  utters the user input voice command  1442  “Hey Siri” to invoke a personal assistant voice function on device  1400 .  FIG. 14O  illustrates an overhead view (not to scale) of  FIG. 14N , before the user utters voice command  1442 . As shown, the indicator lights  1404  are not illuminated. 
     In  FIG. 14P , an “input gravity” type of illumination pattern is shown, displayed in response to device  1400  detecting voice command  1442 . The illuminated light-emitting elements of indicator  1404  form a semi-circular illumination pattern bordering the edge of indicators  1404 . The elements that are closest to the edge and in the direction of the voice command source appear different from the surrounding elements. For example, the center of the semi-circle indicates the direction of the voice source (e.g., user  1440 ) being listened to by device  1400  and can appear to be brighter or a different color than the surrounding elements. 
     In  FIG. 14Q , a “linear” type of illumination is shown (an alternative to  FIG. 14P &#39;s “input gravity” type of illumination pattern), displayed in response to device  1400  detecting voice command  1442 . The illuminated light-emitting elements of indicator  1404  form a substantially linear pattern within indicators  1404 . Elements that align with the direction (e.g., relative to device  1400 ) of the voice command source appear different from the surrounding elements. For example, the elements aligned with the direction of the voice source being listened to by device  1400  and can appear to be brighter or a different color than the surrounding elements. 
     In some examples, other appropriate types of visual patterns can be used to indicate direction of a voice command source, and the examples above are not intended to limit the scope of this disclosure. 
       FIGS. 14R-14T  illustrate exemplary arrangements and states of light-emitting indicators, in accordance with some embodiments. For example,  FIGS. 14R-14T  illustrate exemplary illumination patterns of indicator  1404 , for communicating various states of device  1400 . In some embodiments, device  1400  includes a cover over indicator  1404 . For example, a partially opaque cover placed over indicator  1404  can cause the output of the light emitting elements to diffuse, and form patterns, which are also illustrated in  FIGS. 14R-14T , for ease of reference. 
       FIG. 14R  illustrates four illumination states of indicator  1404 , both with and without a diffusion cover over the indicator. Pattern  1454 A illustrates a large pattern (all LEDs illuminated), pattern  1454 B illustrates a medium pattern (middle two rings illuminated), pattern  1454 C illustrates a small pattern (e.g., inner-most ring illuminated), and pattern  1454 D illustrates a circling pattern (e.g., various LEDs illuminated in a shape). In some examples, lighting elements of  1404  form the shape of  1454 D and alternate illumination to give the appearance that the shape is moving (e.g., swirling a circular pattern). Covered patterns  1452 A- 1452 D correspond to patterns  1454 A- 1454 D, respectively, and depict how the patterns appear with a diffusion cover over indicator  1404 . 
       FIG. 14S  illustrates four illumination patterns that are presented by indicator  1404  in response to a voice user input (e.g., invoking a voice assistant), in accordance with some embodiments. As shown in  FIG. 14S , pattern  1454 E is displayed prior to voice input. Patterns  1454 F- 1454 I are displayed in sequence in response to the voice input, giving the appearance of a small pattern transitioning into a large pattern, and then settling at a medium sized pattern. Covered patterns  1452 E- 14521  correspond to patterns  1454 E- 1454 I, respectively, and depict how the patterns appear with a diffusion cover over indicator  1404 . In some embodiments, the patterns  1454 E- 1454 I form a series (e.g., that are displayed sequentially, in the order shown or in any order). 
       FIG. 14T  illustrates three illumination patterns that are presented by indicator  1404 , in accordance with some embodiments. For example, the patterns  1454 J- 1454 L (and corresponding  1452 J- 1452 L) can be displayed while device  1400  is performing a voice assistant function. In some embodiments, the patterns  1454 J- 1454 L form a series (e.g., that are displayed sequentially, in the order shown or in any order). For example, performing a voice assistant function can include one or more of: listening to voice input (e.g., after detecting it), listening for voice input (e.g., prior to detecting it), outputting a voice assistant output (e.g., providing a text-to-speech audible response to voice input), processing user input (e.g., parsing the voice input, or performing a task in response to the voice input), or the like. In the examples depicted in  FIG. 14T , each pattern includes shapes (e.g., circles) and each shape includes a number (e.g., the pattern in  1454 J includes the numbers 1, 2, and, 3), wherein each number represents a color. Thus, the three circles of pattern  145 J are each a different color. In patterns  1452 J and  1454 J, the elements in indicator  1404  are illuminated so that the colors do not appear to mix. In pattern  1452 K and  1454 K, the elements in indicator  1404  are illuminated so that the colors do appear to mix. For example, the colors are mixed and form new colors  4 ,  5 ,  6 , and  7 , based on the overlap of colors  1 ,  2 , and  3 . In pattern  1452 L and  1454 L, the elements in indicator  1404  are illuminated so that the colors do appear to mix, and the shapes within the pattern are less clearly defined (e.g., are no longer perfect circles, are swirling in an animated fashion). As can be seen, the colors  1  and  3  have changed relative position from pattern  1454 K to  1454 L. In some examples, the various patterns  1452 J- 1452 L are be used (e.g., as sequence or part of an animation) to indicate the state of a voice assistant function. 
     In some examples, the color elements in indicator  1404 , as described above with respect to patterns  1454 J- 1454 L, are used to provide visual indication that the device  1400  is performing a first function (e.g., a voice assistant function), in contrast to a second function (e.g., media playback). For example, monochromatic light can be output by indicator  1404  when device  1400  is only playback media (e.g., a song), but transition to color when the device (e.g., even while continuing media playback) begins performing a voice assistant-related function (e.g., detects voice input of a token phrase, such as “Hey Siri”). 
       FIGS. 15A-15C  is a flow diagram illustrating a method for controlling media playback using an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. Method  1500  is performed at a device (e.g.,  100 ,  300 ,  500 ) with a touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method  1500  are, optionally, combined, the order of some operations are, optionally, changed, and some operations are, optionally, omitted. 
     As described below, method  1500  provides an intuitive way for controlling media playback. The method reduces the cognitive burden on a user for controlling media playback, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated computing devices, enabling a user to control media playback faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges. 
     The electronic device (e.g.,  1400 ) detects ( 1502 ) a touch (e.g.,  1408  or  1410 ) on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g.,  1402 ). In response to detecting the touch on the touch-sensitive surface, the electronic device (e.g.,  1400 ) determines ( 1504 ) whether the electronic device (e.g.,  1400 ) is currently playing media (e.g., represented by  1410  of  FIG. 14D ). 
     In accordance with a determination that the device (e.g.,  1400 ) is currently playing media ( 1506 ): the electronic device (e.g.,  1400 ) determines ( 1508 ) whether a location of the touch (e.g.,  1408  or  1410 ) is within a first area (e.g.,  1414 C of the touch-sensitive surface (e.g.,  1402 ) or within a second area (e.g.,  1414 A) of the touch-sensitive surface, wherein the first area and the second area are non-overlapping. 
     In accordance with a determination that the location of the touch is within the first area (e.g.,  1414 C) of the touch-sensitive surface, the electronic device (e.g.,  1400 ) ceases playing media ( 1510 ). 
     In accordance with a determination that the location of the touch is within the second area (e.g.,  1414 A) of the touch-sensitive surface, the electronic device (e.g.,  1400 ) adjusts ( 1512 ) a volume of the currently playing media (e.g., adjust up or down). 
     In accordance with a determination that the device is not currently playing media, the electronic device (e.g.,  1400 ) initiates playback of media ( 1514 ). 
     Using a device state as well as a location of an area of a touch on a touch-sensitive surface to determine how a device responds to touch user input provides the user with a simplified interface that provides contextually relevant controls. Providing additional control of the device without cluttering the UI with additional displayed controls enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the second area is comprised of a plurality of non-contiguous and non-overlapping areas (e.g.,  1414 A and  1414 B of  FIG. 14G ) of the touch-sensitive surface (e.g.,  1402  of  FIG. 14G ). 
     In some embodiments, the second area is comprised of a first sub-area (e.g.,  1414 A) and a second sub-area (e.g.,  1414 B), and wherein adjusting the volume of the currently playing media comprises: lowering the volume of the currently playing media if the location of the touch is within the first sub-area (e.g.,  1414 B); and raising the volume of the currently playing media if the location of the touch is within the second sub-area (e.g.,  1414 A). 
     In some embodiments, the touch is a first touch (e.g.,  1416 ), and, subsequent to adjusting the volume of the currently playing media in accordance a determination that the location of the touch (e.g.,  1416 ) is within the second area (e.g.,  1414 A): the electronic device (e.g.,  1400 ) temporarily expands ( 1516 ) the second area to create an expanded second area (e.g.,  1418  of  FIG. 14I ) for a predetermined amount of time after detecting the first touch (e.g.,  1416 ) on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g.,  1402 ). In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g.,  1400 ) receives ( 1518 ) a second touch (e.g.,  1420 ) on the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the second touch (e.g.,  1420 ) is located within the expanded second area (e.g.,  1418 ). In some embodiments, the second touch (e.g.,  1420 ) is not located within the second area (e.g.,  1414 A). In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g.,  1400 ) determines ( 1520 ) whether the second touch (e.g.,  1420 ) was received during the predetermined amount of time after detecting the first touch (e.g.,  1416 ). In accordance with a determination that the second touch was received during the predetermined amount of time after detecting the first touch, the electronic device (e.g.,  1400 ) adjusts ( 1522 ) the volume of the currently playing media (e.g., as illustrated by  1422  of  FIG. 14K ). In accordance with a determination that the second touch was not received during the predetermined amount of time after detecting the first touch, the electronic device (e.g.,  1400 ) ceases playing ( 1524 ) media. In some embodiments, ceasing playing media comprises pausing playback of currently playing media. 
     In some embodiments, the touch-sensitive surface includes a display (e.g.,  1404 A and  1404 B). In some embodiments, the display is an LED array (e.g.,  1406 ). In some embodiments, further in accordance with a determination that the device is currently playing media, the electronic device (e.g.,  1400 ) displays ( 1526 ), on the display, an indicator (e.g., +icon in  1406 A of  FIG. 14D ) within the second area (e.g.,  1414 A). In some embodiments, further in accordance with a determination that the device is not currently playing media, the electronic device (e.g.,  1400 ) forgoes displaying ( 1528 ) the indicator within the second area. 
     In some embodiments, to adjust the volume of the currently playing media comprises ( 1530 ): the electronic device (e.g.,  1400 ) adjusts ( 1532 ) a media playback volume (e.g.,  1430  of  FIG. 14M ); and the electronic device (e.g.,  1400 ) adjusts ( 1534 ) a virtual assistant volume (e.g.,  1432  of  FIG. 14M ). In some embodiments, the virtual assistant volume is proportional to the media playback volume. 
     In some embodiments, the virtual assistant volume is non-zero when the media playback volume is zero. 
     In some embodiments, a maximum value of the virtual assistant volume (e.g.,  1432 ) is lower than a maximum value of the media playback volume (e.g.,  1430 ). 
     Note that details of the processes described above with respect to method  1500  (e.g.,  FIGS. 15A-15C ) are also applicable in an analogous manner to the methods described below/above. For example, method  700 ,  900 ,  1100 ,  1300 ,  1700 ,  1800 ,  2000 ,  2200 ,  2400 ,  2600 ,  2800 ,  3000 ,  3200 ,  3400 ,  3600 ,  3800 , and  3900  optionally includes one or more of the characteristics of the various methods described above with reference to method  1500 . For brevity, these details are not repeated below. 
       FIGS. 16A-16P  illustrate exemplary user techniques and interfaces for adding media to a playback queue, in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIGS. 17-18 . 
       FIG. 16A  illustrates an exemplary scenario in which a plurality of devices are connected. Specifically, device  1600  is a smart speaker that is connected to both devices  1602  and  1604  (e.g., personal devices). In some embodiments, device  1600  includes one or more features of devices  100 ,  300 ,  500 , or  580 . In some embodiments, devices  1602  and  1604  include one or more features of devices  100 ,  300 ,  500 , or  580 . In some examples, the respective users of devices  1602  and  1604  may desire to add media to a shared payback queue that is maintained by, and/or stored in, device  1600 .  FIGS. 16B-16P  illustrate exemplary techniques for doing so. 
     At  FIG. 16B , device  1602  displays an exemplary playlist selection interface  1606  on display  1603 . Under interface heading  1606 A, device  1602  displays a playlist affordance  1606 B, representing the playlist titled “Tim&#39;s Birthday”. As shown in  FIG. 16B , the playlist “Tim&#39;s Birthday” is identified as a “Shared Playlist”. In some embodiments, a shared queue (e.g., a shared playlist) is a queue that one or more users and/or one or more devices can access and/or manage (e.g., add media items, remove media items, begin playback, or the like). At  FIG. 16C , device  1602  receives user input  1608 , representing selection of affordance  1606 B. In some embodiments, device  1602  displays interface  1610  of  FIG. 16D  in response to receiving user input  1608 . 
       FIG. 16D  illustrates an exemplary interface representing a playback queue (also referred to variously as a “media playback queue” or simply a “queue”). Playlist interface  1610  of  FIG. 16D  includes a single media item  1610 B listed under playlist identifier  1610 A. As shown in  FIG. 16D , media item  1610 B represents the song “Same Thing” by artist “Jambug”. In some embodiments, an interface representing a playback queue includes additional information associated with a media item. For example, media item  1610 B also includes an identification of the user who added the media item to the playlist (e.g., the user named Tim) and a source of the media item (e.g., a media streaming service named Apple Music). 
     In this example, playlist interface  1610  is displayed on device  1602 . However, because the playback queue represented by playlist interface  1610  is a shared queue, it can be accessed by multiple users and/or multiple devices. In some embodiments, device  1604  displays playlist interface  1610 . In some embodiments, device  1602  and device  1604  display (e.g., concurrently) playlist interface  1610 . Referring back to the scenario in  FIG. 16A , devices  1602  and  1604  are associated with different users. 
     While reference is made to a playlist of songs in this example, an exemplary playback queue is not limited to songs. In some embodiments, a playback queue is any data representing one or more media items and information usable to access the media items (e.g., for playback). In some embodiments, a playback queue includes data associated with the one or more media items. For example, the playback can include information regarding one or more of: when the media was added to the queue, when the media expires from the queue, a source of the media (e.g., file location, a URL, an identification of a streaming service, a source device (e.g., the device that stores the media item)), credentials for accessing media (e.g., login credentials or a token granting access to a media streaming service), an identifier of a user that added the media to the queue, an identifier of a device that added the media to the queue, or the like. In some embodiments, a playback queue includes, but is not limited to, one or more of the following types of media items: an audio file, a video file, an audio stream, a video stream, or the like. 
     Turning back to the figures,  FIGS. 16E-16P  illustrate exemplary interfaces for adding media items to the playlist depicted in playlist interface  1610 , in accordance with some embodiments. 
     At  FIG. 16E , device  1602  displays browsing interface  1612 , which is identified by browsing interface header  1612 A as a list of New Music. In some embodiments, device  1602  displays browsing interface  1612  subsequent to displaying playlist interface  1610 . In some embodiments, a browsing interface is any interface (e.g., of a media application) for browsing and selecting media items. Browsing interface  1612  includes affordance  1612 B representing a first media item (e.g., the song “Monday Morning” by artist “The Fomoers”) and affordance  1612 C representing a second media item (e.g., the song “Paradise” by artist “MKTS”). At  FIG. 16F , device receives user input  1614 , associated with affordance  1612 B. In some examples, user input  1614  is a deep press or a press and hold user input. 
     At  FIG. 16G , device  1602  displays media menu  1616  in response to user input  1614 . Media menu  1616  includes various items for performing actions associated with the media item of affordance  1612 B. Media menu  1616  includes affordance  1616 A (e.g., an “add to playlist” affordance). At  FIG. 16H , device  1602  receives user input  1618  representing a selection of affordance  1616 A. In some examples, user input  1618  is a tap user input. 
     In response to user input  1618 , device  1602  displays playlist interface  1610 , which has been updated to include media item  1610 C ( FIG. 16I ). Media item  1610 C represents the media item associated with media menu  1616  of  FIG. 16G  (e.g., the song “Monday Morning” by artist “The Fomoers”). Thus, the user of device  1602  has added a media item to the shared playlist titled “Tim&#39;s Birthday”. As described above, other users and devices (e.g., device  1604 ) can view and add media to a shared queue, as illustrated below. 
     At  FIG. 16J , device  1604  displays a media menu  1619  on display  1605 . In some embodiments, device  1604  displays media menu  1619  in response to a user input (not illustrated) associated with affordance  1612 C, of browser interface  1612  (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 16E ), representing the second media item (e.g., the song “Paradise” by artist “MKTS”). Media menu  1619  includes affordance  1619 A (e.g., an “add to playlist” affordance). As shown in  FIG. 16J , device  1604  receives user input  1620 , associated with affordance  1619 A. In some examples, user input  1620  is a tap user input. 
     In response to input  1620 , device  1604  displays playlist interface  1610 , which has been updated to include media item  1610 D ( FIG. 16K ). Media item  1610 D represents the media item associated with media menu  1619  of  FIG. 16J  (e.g., the song “Paradise” by artist “MKTS”). Thus, the user of device  1604  has added a media item to the shared playlist titled “Tim&#39;s Birthday”. Accordingly, in this example, two devices associated with two different users accessed and added media to a shared queue (e.g., the media queue “Tim&#39;s Playlist”, as represented by  1610 ). 
       FIG. 16K  also depicts additional information regarding one or more of the media items in the playback queue represented by playlist interface  1610 , in accordance with some embodiments. As shown, each affordance includes information regarding a user (e.g., a user account) that added the corresponding media item to the queue. Additionally, each affordance includes information regarding a source (e.g., a media application) of the corresponding media item to the queue. As shown, media item  1610 B was added by the user “Tim” from the source “Apple Music” (e.g., a music application, for playing local files or media streams). Media item  1610 C was added by the user “Jessica” (identifier  1610 G) from the source “Music Streamer” (e.g., a music streaming application) (identifier  1610 E). Media item  1610 D was added by the user “Jim” (identifier  1610 H) from the source “Music Website” (e.g., a music streaming website) (identifier  1610 F). 
     In some embodiments, users can remove media items from a shared queue.  FIGS. 16L-16O  depict exemplary interfaces for removing media items from a shared queue. At  FIG. 16L , device  1604  receives user input  1621  associated with affordance  1610 C of playlist interface  1610 . In some examples, user input  1621  is a deep press or a press and hold user input. 
     In response to input  1621 , device  1604  displays media menu  1622 , which includes an affordance  1622 A for deleting a media item from the playlist (e.g., that includes the text “Delete from Tim&#39;s Birthday”) ( FIG. 16M ). At  FIG. 16M , device  1604  receives user input  1623  representing selection of affordance  1622 A. In some examples, user input  1623  is a tap user input. 
     At  FIG. 16N , in response to input  1623 , device  1604  displays playlist interface  1610 , which has been updated to remove the media item associated with affordance  1610 C. Thus, in the examples shown in  FIG. 16N , the user of device  1604  has deleted a media item that was added by the user of device  1602 . In some embodiments, any user can delete a media item from a shared queue. In some embodiments, a user can only delete media items that were added by them. In some embodiments, a user cannot delete any media items from a queue (e.g., even if added by them). In some embodiments, a user&#39;s ability to delete media items from a queue is subject to permissions. For example, a user can lack the ability (e.g., permission) to delete media items from a shared queue, but subsequently gain such ability after being granted permission (e.g., by a member of the home). In some embodiments, a user has the ability (e.g., permission) to remove media items from a queue by virtue of being a member of a set of users (e.g., a member of the home that includes device  1600  or another device that maintains or stores the queue). 
       FIG. 16O  illustrates an exemplary message informing a user that they do not have permission to delete an item from a shared queue. Message box  1624  includes the message “You do not have permission to delete tracks from Tim&#39;s Birthday Playlist”. In some embodiments, device  1604  displays message box  1624  in response to user input  1623 . Thus, as alternative to the result shown in  FIG. 16N , in some examples, device  1604  displays message box  1624  as shown in  FIG. 16O  if the user of device  1604  does not have permission to remove the media item that was added by the user of device  1602 . 
     In some embodiments, a user or device requires permission to add a media item to a playback queue. For example, if a user lacks permission to add a media item to a shared queue, a message box similar to  1624  can be displayed that reads “You do not have permission to add tracks to Tim&#39;s Birthday Playlist”. In some embodiments, permission to add media items are subject to the same conditions or approval states and levels described above with respect to permission to remove media items, and thus are not repeated. 
       FIG. 16P  illustrates an exemplary queue removal condition, in accordance with some embodiments. Queue removal condition  1632  indicates that the media item  1610 C will “expire” (e.g., be automatically removed from the queue) in 23 hours. In some embodiments, a media item in a playback queue is subject to being removed from the queue after a condition is met (e.g., or is not met), also referred to as a “queue removal condition”. In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that a queue removal condition associated with a media item is satisfied, a device (e.g., a device that maintains or stores the queue) removes the media item from the playback queue. In some embodiments, the queue removal condition is satisfied if the requester (e.g.,  1602 ) that added the media item (e.g.,  1610 C) is no longer connected to a local area network that includes the device that maintains or stores the playback queue (e.g.,  1600 ). In some embodiments, the queue removal condition is satisfied if a predetermined amount of time passes after the first media item was added to the queue. In some embodiments, the predetermined amount of time is 24 hours. In some embodiments, the queue removal condition is satisfied if the requester (e.g., user and/or device that added the media item to the queue) is no longer connected to the local area network and the device that maintains or stores the queue (e.g.,  1600 ) is not logged in to a media streaming service (e.g., that is the source of the media item). 
     Notably, a fourth device  1630  displays playback interface  1610  of  FIG. 16P . In some embodiments, the fourth device is associated with a user (e.g., user account) different than the users associated with devices  1600 ,  1602 , and  1604 . Thus, as described above,  FIG. 16P  further illustrates that a shared playback queue can be viewed by any number of devices and any number of users. In some embodiments, a device can access a shared queue when connected (e.g., directly) to the device that maintains or stores the queue (e.g., communication link  1039  of  FIG. 10M  between devices  1010  and  1000 ). In some embodiments, a device can access a shared queue when connected to common network as a device that maintains or stores the queue (e.g., via access point  1030  of  FIG. 10M  between devices  1010  and  1000 ). 
     In some embodiments, a device is associated with a media preference profile (also referred to as a “taste preference profile”). For example, device  1600  can be associated with (e.g., logged into) a user account associated with a third user (e.g., not the users of devices  1602  and  1604 ). The third user, in some examples, may not want the media that is added to the shared playback queue on their device (e.g.,  1600 ) to affect their media preference profile. For example, the media preference profile can include data representing one or more of: particular media items associated the third user&#39;s account, media item playback history, media recommendations based on history or taste preferences, or the like. Thus, in some embodiments, media added to the playback queue on the first device (e.g.,  1600 ) does not affect a media preference profile of a user account associated with the first device (e.g.,  1600 ). In some examples, if the user of device  1602  is the same as the third user (e.g., whose account is associated with device  1600 ), device  1600  updates the media preference profile of third user based on media added by device  1602 , but not based on media added by device  1604  (e.g., associated with a different user than the third user). Thus, the owner of a device can allow others to add music to a playback queue on a device associated with the owner&#39;s user account, without affect the device owner&#39;s taste preference profile. 
       FIGS. 17A-17C  is a flow diagram illustrating a method for playing back media from a plurality of media streaming services using an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. Method  1700  is performed at a device (e.g.,  100 ,  300 ,  500 ,  580 ,  1600 ). Some operations in method  1700  are, optionally, combined, the order of some operations are, optionally, changed, and some operations are, optionally, omitted. 
     As described below, method  1700  provides an intuitive way for playing back media from a plurality of media streaming services. The method reduces the cognitive burden on a user for playing back media from a plurality of media streaming services, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated computing devices, enabling a user to play back media from a plurality of media streaming services faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges. 
     The electronic device (e.g.,  1600 ) receives ( 1702 ) a first request (e.g., represented by user input  1618  of  FIG. 16H ) to queue a first media item (e.g.,  1612 B) for playback on a set of devices (e.g.,  1600 ). In some embodiments, the set of devices includes the first device (e.g.,  1600 ). In some embodiments, the set of devices includes one or more devices. In some embodiments, the set of devices excludes the first device (e.g.,  1600 ). 
     The electronic device (e.g.,  1600 ) adds ( 1704 ) the first media item (e.g.,  1610 C as shown in  FIG. 16K ) to a playback queue (e.g.,  1610 A). 
     The electronic device (e.g.,  1600 ) receives ( 1706 ) a second request (e.g., represented by user input  1620  of  FIG. 16J ) to queue a second media item (e.g.,  1612 C) for playback on the set of devices (e.g.,  1600 ). 
     The electronic device (e.g.,  1600 ) adds ( 1708 ) the second media item (e.g.,  1610 D as shown in  FIG. 16L ) to the playback queue (e.g.,  1610 A). 
     The electronic device (e.g.,  1600 ) accesses ( 1710 ) the first media item (e.g.,  1610 C) from a first media streaming service (e.g., represented by  1610 E of  FIG. 16K ). 
     The electronic device (e.g.,  1600 ) initiates playback ( 1712 ) of the first media item (e.g.,  1610 C) on the set of devices (e.g.,  1600 ); 
     The electronic device (e.g.,  1600 ) accesses ( 1714 ) the second media (e.g.,  1610 D) item from a second media streaming service (e.g., represented by  1610 F of  FIG. 16K ) different than the first media streaming service (e.g.,  1610 E). 
     The electronic device (e.g.,  1600 ) initiates playback ( 1716 ) of the second media item (e.g.,  1610 D) on the set of devices (e.g.,  1600 ). 
     Allowing a first media item from a first media streaming service and a second media item from a second media streaming service, different than the first media streaming service, to be added to a common playback queue, accessed, and played back allows the user to efficiently queue and manage playback of media from different sources using a single interface, thus requiring fewer user inputs to do so. Reducing the number of inputs needed to perform an operation enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the first request is received from a first requester (e.g.,  1602 ). In some embodiments, a requester is a device (e.g.,  1602 ). In some embodiments, a requester is a user account (e.g., a user account associated with identifier  1610 G of  FIG. 16K ). In some embodiments, a requester is a user account associated with a device. In some embodiments, the first request includes identification of the first requester (e.g., represented by  1610 G of  FIG. 16K ). 
     In some embodiments, the second request is received from a second requester (e.g.,  1604 ) different than the first requester (e.g.,  1602 ). In some embodiments, the second request includes identification of the second requester (e.g., represented by  1610 H of  FIG. 16L ). 
     In some embodiments, the first requester is a second device (e.g.,  1602 ) associated with a first user account (e.g., a user account associated with identifier  1610 G). In some embodiments, the second requester is a third device (e.g.,  1604 ) associated with a second user account (e.g., a user account associated with identifier  1610 H). 
     In some embodiments, further in response to receiving the first request, the electronic device (e.g.,  1600 ) determines whether the first requester (e.g.,  1602 ) has permission to add a media item (e.g.,  1610 C) to the playback queue (e.g.,  1610 ). In accordance with a determination that the first requester has permission to add a media item to the playback queue (e.g.,  1610 ), the electronic device (e.g.,  1600 ) adds the first media item to the playback queue (e.g.,  1610  as shown in  FIG. 16I ). In accordance with a determination that first requester does not have permission to add a media item to the playback queue, the electronic device (e.g.,  1600 ) forgoes adding the first media item to the playback queue (e.g.,  1610  remains as shown in  FIG. 16D ). 
     In some embodiments, to determine whether the first requester has permission to add a media item to the playback queue, the electronic device (e.g.,  1600 ) determines whether a user account (e.g., a user account associated with identifier  1610 G) associated with the first requester (e.g.,  1602 ) has permission to add a media item (e.g.,  1610 C) to the playback queue (e.g.,  1610 ). In accordance with a determination that the user account associated with the first requester has permission to add a media item to the playback queue, the electronic device (e.g.,  1600 ) adds the first media item (e.g.,  1610 C) to the playback queue (e.g.,  1610  as shown in  FIG. 16I ). In accordance with a determination that the user account associated with the first requester does not have permission to add a media item to the playback queue, the electronic device (e.g.,  1600 ) forgoes adding the first media item to the playback queue (e.g.,  1610  remains as shown in  FIG. 16D ). 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g.,  1600 ) receives, from the second requester (e.g.,  1604 ), a third request (e.g.,  1623 ) to remove the first media item (e.g.,  1610 C) from the playback queue (e.g.,  1610 ). The electronic device (e.g.,  1600 ) determines whether the second requester has permission to remove the first media item from the playback queue. In accordance with a determination that the second requester has permission to remove the first media item from the playback queue, the electronic device (e.g.,  1600 ) removes the first media item from the playback queue (e.g.,  1610  as shown in  FIG. 16N ). In accordance with a determination that the second requester does not have permission to remove the first media item from the playback queue, the electronic device (e.g.,  1600 ) forgoes removing the first media item from the playback queue (e.g.,  1610  remains as shown in  FIG. 16K ). 
     In some embodiments, to determine whether the second requester (e.g.,  1604 ) has permission to remove the first media item from the playback queue, the electronic device (e.g.,  1600 ) determines whether the second requester (e.g.,  1604 ) is a member of a predefined set of requesters (e.g., the set of users represented by  603 A- 603 C of  FIG. 6A ) associated with the first device. In accordance with a determination that the second requester is a member of a predefined set of requesters associated with the first device (e.g.,  1600 ), the electronic device (e.g.,  1600 ) removes the first media (e.g.,  1610 C) item from the playback queue (e.g., as shown in  1610  of  FIG. 16N ). In accordance with a determination that the second requester is a member of a predefined set of requesters associated with the first device, the electronic device (e.g.,  1600 ) forgoes removing the first media item from the playback queue (e.g.,  1610  remains as shown in  FIG. 16K ). 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g.,  1600 ) transmits ( 1718 ), to a fourth device (e.g.,  1630  of  FIG. 16P ), an indication of the content of the playback queue (e.g., playlist  1610  of  FIG. 16P ) for display on the fourth device. In some embodiments, the indication of the content of the playback queue includes: an indication (e.g.,  1610 G) of the first requester that is associated with the first media item (e.g.,  1610 C) in the playback queue (e.g.,  1610  of  FIG. 16P ) ( 1720 ), an indication of the first media streaming service from which the first media is accessible ( 1722 ), an indication (e.g.,  1610 H) of the second requester that is associated with the second media item (e.g.,  1610 D) in the playback queue ( 1724 ), and an indication of the second media streaming service from which the second media item is accessible ( 1726 ). 
     In some embodiments, subsequent to adding the first media item to the playback queue: the electronic device (e.g.,  1600 ) determines ( 1728 ) whether a queue removal condition (e.g., illustrated by  1632  of  FIG. 16P ) for the first media item (e.g.,  1610 C) is satisfied. In some embodiments, the queue removal condition is satisfied if the requester (e.g.,  1602 ) that added the media item (e.g.,  1610 C) is no longer connected to a local area network that includes the first device (e.g.,  1600 ). In some embodiments, the queue removal condition is satisfied if a predetermined amount of time passes after the first media item was added to the queue. In some embodiments, the predetermined amount of time is 24 hours. In some embodiments, the queue removal condition is satisfied if the requester is no longer connected to the local area network and the first device (e.g.,  1600 ) is not logged in to the first media streaming service. In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the queue removal condition for the first media item is satisfied, the electronic device (e.g.,  1600 ) removes ( 1730 ) the first media item from the playback queue (e.g., removal of a media item as shown in  FIG. 16O ). In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the queue removal condition for the first media item is not satisfied, the electronic device (e.g.,  1600 ) forgoes removing ( 1732 ) the first media item from the playback queue. 
     In some embodiments, the first device (e.g.,  1600 ) is not included ( 1734 ) in the set of devices. 
     Note that details of the processes described above with respect to method  1700  (e.g.,  FIGS. 17A-17C ) are also applicable in an analogous manner to the methods described below/above. For example, method  700 ,  900 ,  1100 ,  1300 ,  1500 ,  1800 ,  2000 ,  2200 ,  2400 ,  2600 ,  2800 ,  3000 ,  3200 ,  3400 ,  3600 ,  3800 , and  3900  optionally includes one or more of the characteristics of the various methods described above with reference to method  1700 . For brevity, these details are not repeated below. 
       FIGS. 18A-18C  is a flow diagram illustrating a method for playing back media requested by a plurality of devices using an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. Method  1800  is performed at a device (e.g.,  100 ,  300 ,  500 ,  580 ,  1600 ). Some operations in method  1800  are, optionally, combined, the order of some operations are, optionally, changed, and some operations are, optionally, omitted. 
     As described below, method  1800  provides an intuitive way for playing back media requested by a plurality of devices. The method reduces the cognitive burden on a user for playing back media requested by a plurality of devices, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated computing devices, enabling a user to play back media requested by a plurality of devices faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges. 
     The electronic device (e.g.,  1600 ) receives ( 1802 ), from a second device (e.g.,  1602 ) associated with a first user (e.g., a first user account), a first request (e.g., represented by user input  1618  of  FIG. 16H ) to queue a first media item (e.g.,  1612 B of  FIG. 16E ) for playback on a set of devices (e.g.,  1600 ). In some embodiments, the set of devices includes the first device (e.g.,  1600 ). In some embodiments, the set of devices includes one or more devices. In some embodiments, the set of devices excludes the first device (e.g.,  1600 ). 
     The electronic device (e.g.,  1600 ) adds ( 1804 ) the first media item (e.g.,  1610 C of  FIG. 16K ) to a playback queue (e.g.,  1610  of  FIG. 16K ); 
     The electronic device (e.g.,  1600 ) receives ( 1806 ), from a third device (e.g.,  1604 ) associated with a second user (e.g., a second user account), a second request (represented by user input  1620  of  FIG. 16J ) to queue a second media item (e.g.,  1612 C of  FIG. 16E ) for playback on the set of devices (e.g.,  1600 ). In some embodiments, the second user is different than the first. 
     The electronic device (e.g.,  1600 ) adds ( 1808 ) the second media item (e.g.,  1610 D of  FIG. 16K ) to the playback queue (e.g.,  1610  of  FIG. 16L ). 
     The electronic device (e.g.,  1600 ) initiates playback ( 1810 ) of the first media item (e.g.,  1610 C of  FIG. 16K ) on the set of devices (e.g.,  1600 ). 
     The electronic device (e.g.,  1600 ) initiates playback ( 1812 ) of the second media item (e.g.,  1610 D of  FIG. 16L ) on the set of devices (e.g.,  1600 ). 
     Allowing a first media item from a first device associated with a first user and a second media item from a second device associated with a second user, different than the first user, to be added to a queue for playback on a common set of devices allows a plurality of users to efficiently share and manage a common playback queue from any of a plurality of devices, thus requiring fewer user inputs to do so. Reducing the number of inputs needed to perform an operation enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the first request includes ( 1814 ) a first identifier (e.g.,  1610 G of  FIG. 16K ) of at least one of the first user and the second device. 
     In some embodiments, the second request includes ( 1814 ) a second identifier (e.g.,  1610 H of  FIG. 16K ) of at least one of the second user and the third device. 
     In some embodiments, the second device (e.g.,  1602 ) is associated with a first user account that is associated with the first user. In some embodiments, the first user account is a user account on a media streaming service. For example, exemplary media streaming services include Apple Music, Spotify, or the like. In some embodiments, the first user account is a cloud-based service user account. For example, exemplary media streaming services include Apple iCloud, or the like. 
     In some embodiments, the third device (e.g.,  1604 ) is associated with a second user account that is associated with the second user. 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device transmits, to a fourth device (e.g.,  1630  of  FIG. 16P ), an indication (e.g., playlist  1610  of  FIG. 16P ) of the content of the playback queue for display on the fourth device, wherein the indication of the content of the playback queue includes: the first identifier (e.g.,  1610 G or  1610 E of  FIG. 16P ) associated with the first media item (e.g.,  1610 C of  FIG. 16P ) in the playback queue, and the second identifier (e.g.,  1610 H or  1610 F of  FIG. 16P ) associated with the second media item (e.g.,  1610 D of  FIG. 16P ) in the playback queue. 
     In some embodiments, further in response to receiving the second request, and in accordance with a determination that the third device (e.g.,  1604 ) has permission to add a media item to the playback queue, the electronic device (e.g.,  1600 ) adds the second media (e.g.,  1610 D of  FIG. 16K ) item to the playback queue. In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the third device does not have permission to add a media item to the playback queue, the electronic device (e.g.,  1600 ) forgoes adding the second media item to the playback queue (e.g.,  1610  remains as shown in  FIG. 16I ). 
     In some embodiments, further in response to receiving the second request ( 1818 ): in accordance with a determination that the second user (e.g.,  1610 H of  FIG. 16K ) associated with the third device (e.g.,  1604 ) has permission to add a media item (e.g.,  1610 D of  FIG. 16K ) to the playback queue, the electronic device (e.g.,  1600 ) adds ( 1820 ) the second media item to the playback queue (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 16K ). In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the second user associated with the third device does not have permission to add a media item to the playback queue, the electronic device (e.g.,  1600 ) forgoes adding ( 1822 ) the second media item to the playback queue (e.g., the playback queue remains as shown in  FIG. 16I , which does not include media item  1610 D). 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g.,  1600 ) receives ( 1824 ), from the third device (e.g.,  1604 ), a third request (e.g.,  1623  of  FIG. 16M ) to remove the first media item (e.g.,  1610 C) from the playback queue. In some embodiments, in response to receiving the third request ( 1826 ), and in accordance with a determination that the third device has permission to remove the first media item from the playback queue, the electronic device (e.g.,  1600 ) removes ( 1828 ) the first media item from the playback queue (e.g.,  1610  as shown in  FIG. 16N ). In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the third device does not have permission to remove the first media item from the playback queue, the electronic device (e.g.,  1600 ) forgoes removing ( 1830 ) the first media item from the playback queue (e.g., and displays message  1624  of  FIG. 16O ). 
     In some embodiments, in response to receiving the third request (e.g.,  1623  of  FIG. 16M ), and in accordance with a determination that the second user is a member of a predefined set of users (e.g., the set of users represented by  603 A- 603 C of  FIG. 6A ) associated with the first device (e.g.,  1600 ), the electronic device (e.g.,  1600 ) removes the first media item (e.g.,  1610 C) from the playback queue (e.g.,  1610  as shown in  FIG. 16N ). In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the second user is not a member of a predefined set of users associated with the first device, the electronic device (e.g.,  1600 ) forgoes removing the first media item from the playback queue. 
     In some embodiments, subsequent to adding the first media item to the playback queue, and in accordance with a determination that a queue removal condition (e.g., illustrated by  1632  of  FIG. 16P ) for the first media item (e.g.,  1610 C) is satisfied, the electronic device (e.g.,  1600 ) removes the first media item from the playback queue (e.g.,  1610  as shown in  FIG. 16N ). In some embodiments, the queue removal condition is satisfied if the requester (e.g.,  1602 ) that added the media item (e.g.,  1610 C) is no longer connected to a local area network that includes the first device (e.g.,  1600 ). In some embodiments, the queue removal condition is satisfied if a predetermined amount of time passes after the first media item was added to the queue. In some embodiments, the predetermined amount of time is 24 hours. In some embodiments, the queue removal condition is satisfied if the requester is no longer connected to the local area network and the first device (e.g.,  1600 ) is not logged in to a media streaming service (e.g., that is the source of the media item). In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the queue removal condition for the first media item is not satisfied, the electronic device (e.g.,  1600 ) forgoes removing the first media item from the playback queue. 
     In some embodiments, the first device (e.g.,  1600 ) is not included ( 1816 ) in the set of devices. 
     In some embodiments, the first device (e.g.,  1600 ) is associated with a media preference profile, wherein the media preference profile is associated with the first user. In some embodiments, further in response to receiving, from the second device (e.g.,  1602 ) associated with the first user, the request (e.g.,  1618 ) to queue the first media item (e.g.,  1610 C) for playback, the electronic device (e.g.,  1600 ) updates ( 1832 ) the media preference profile based on the first media item. In some embodiments, further in response to receiving, from the third device associated with the second user, the request to queue the second media item for playback, the electronic device (e.g.,  1600 ) forgoes updating ( 1834 ) the media preference profile based on the second media item. For example, if the request to queue the first media item is received from a device or user that is not associated with an owner of device  1600  (e.g., a home member), then a request to queue the media item will not affect the owner&#39;s taste preferences (e.g., which can be based on history of media played back on device  1000 , or other home devices). 
     Note that details of the processes described above with respect to method  1800  (e.g.,  FIGS. 18A-18C ) are also applicable in an analogous manner to the methods described below/above. For example, method  700 ,  900 ,  1100 ,  1300 ,  1500 ,  1700 ,  2000 ,  2200 ,  2400 ,  2600 ,  2800 ,  3000 ,  3200 ,  3400 ,  3600 ,  3800 , and  3900  optionally includes one or more of the characteristics of the various methods described above with reference to method  1800 . For brevity, these details are not repeated below. 
       FIGS. 19A-19AL  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for using a first device to configure a second device, in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIGS. 20A-20C . 
       FIG. 19A  illustrates a scenario (e.g., similar to that shown in  FIG. 10E ) in which a user brings device  1900  into close proximity to device  1906 . In this example, device  1900  is being used to configure device  1906  (e.g., an initial configuration after powering on device  1906  for the first time). As shown, device  1906  is outputting an audio tone signal  1904  (e.g., representing sound waves). In some embodiments, device  1906  outputs an audio tone signal (e.g.,  1904 ) in response to an indication that device  1900  is in close proximity to device  1906 . In some embodiments, device  1900  outputs an audio tone signal (not illustrated) in response to an indication that device  1900  is in close proximity to device  1906 . In some embodiments, the audio tone signals from devices  1900  and  1906  are synchronized (e.g., are outputted concurrently). In some embodiments, one of the audio tone signals are staggered in time (e.g., device  1900  plays a tone first, followed by device  1906 ). In some embodiments, the audio tone signals are harmonically related or compatible (e.g., as described above with respect to  FIGS. 10O-10N ). For brevity, the above description regarding placement and detection of devices in close proximity (e.g., with respect to  FIGS. 10A-10O ) is hereby incorporated by reference, and thus not repeated. 
     In some embodiments, an audio tone signal is only output by one device (e.g., to be configured, such as device  1906 ) that is in close proximity to device  1900 , other than device  1900 . For example, in some situations, device  1900  is placed in close proximity to multiple other devices that can be configured using device  1900 . For example, a user may have purchased two speakers (e.g., such as device  1906 ) and wishes to configure one of them. In such case, it is useful to the user to be aware of which speaker device  1900  has connected to and that will be configured, for example, according to the techniques described below. Thus, even though device  1900  is brought into close proximity to two configurable devices, only the configurable device (e.g., device  1906 ) that will be configured during the configuration process will output an audio tone in response to an indication that device  1900  is in close proximity. 
       FIG. 19B  depicts an exemplary state of device  1900  immediately prior to being placed in close proximity to device  1906 . As shown, device  1900  displays a home screen (e.g., home screen  605  as shown in  FIG. 6B ) on display  1902 . At  FIG. 19C , device  1900  is placed into close proximity to device  1906  (e.g., is within the proximity zone  1908 ). In some embodiments, proximity is detected in a manner similar to that discussed with respect to  FIGS. 10C-10G . In some embodiments, in response to detecting an indication that device  1900  entered into close proximity to device  1906 , device  1900  displays proximity card  1910 , as shown in  FIG. 19D . 
       FIGS. 19D-19AJ  illustrate exemplary interfaces of a configuration process, in accordance with some embodiments. In this example, the configuration process is a process for configuring a second device using a first device. Thus, as shown, the interfaces are displayed on a first device (e.g., device  1900 ), and the steps of the configuration process pertain to, for example, transmitting data to the second device, selecting or entering configuration settings, and the like. In some embodiments, the steps shown in  FIGS. 19D-19AJ  can be displayed in any order (e.g., other than that shown or described herein). In some embodiments, one or more of the steps shown in  FIG. 19D-19AJ  are omitted from a configuration process. In some embodiments, one or more steps other than those shown in  FIG. 19D-19AJ  are added to a configuration process. In some embodiments, the first device and the second device are devices that include one or more features of devices  100 ,  300 ,  500 , or  580 . 
       FIG. 19D  illustrates an exemplary setup card. In some embodiments, device  1900  displays setup card  1910  in response to being placed in close proximity to device  1906 . Thus, a setup card is also referred to herein as a “proximity card” as described above, the description of which is hereby incorporated by reference. In some embodiments, a device continues displaying a proximity card after being removed from close proximity to another device. 
     Setup card  1910  includes an identification of the device to be configured, which is the device (e.g.,  1906 ) that device  1900  was placed in close proximity to. As shown, setup card  1910  includes the title “Speaker” (e.g., device  1906  is a smart speaker), as well as an image depicting the device (e.g., in the shape of device  1906  as shown in  FIG. 19A ). Setup card  1910  also includes affordance  1910 A. In some embodiments, device  1900  initiates a configuration process (or otherwise proceeds to a next step in a configuration process) in response to receiving selection of affordance  1910 A. 
     At  FIG. 19E , device  1900  displays setup card  1912 . In some embodiments, device  1900  displays setup card in response to user input selection (not illustrated) of affordance  1910 A in  FIG. 19D . Setup card  1912  depicts an exemplary location selection interface. Setup card  1912  includes a location selection affordance  1912 A (e.g., which can be a scrollable list or a movable list item selector). Setup card also includes affordance  1912 B, for example, for proceeding to a next step in the configuration process. In this example, the location “John&#39;s Room” is selected using affordance  1912 A, and device  1900  receives user input  1913  on affordance  1912 B. In some embodiments, device  1900  transmits configuration data in response to user input (e.g.,  1913 ) associated with a setup card. In some examples, device  1900  transmits a location identifier for “John&#39;s Room” to device  1906 , in response to proceeding to a next step (e.g., in response to user input  1913 ) while the location “John&#39;s Room” is selected. In some examples, device  1906  receives the location identifier and saves it into memory (e.g., storing it with one or more other configuration settings). In some embodiments, device  1900  transmits the configuration data to a third device (e.g., not device  1900  or  1906 ). For example, device  1900  can transmit configuration data to another device within the user&#39;s home (e.g., a home control hub device, such as an Apple TV by Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif. USA). In some embodiments, device  1900  displays setup card  1914  of  FIG. 19F  in response to user input  1913 . 
     At  FIG. 19F , device  1900  displays setup card  1914 . Setup card  1914  includes a prompt to the user to share settings with device  1906  (“Share Your Settings”). In some embodiments, setup card  1914  includes an identification of settings to be shared with device  1906 . For example, as shown in  FIG. 19F , setup card identifies a user account (e.g., login credentials) and a home wireless network (e.g., connection credentials) to be transmitted to device  1906 . In some embodiments, device  1900  is already connected to or logged into (or otherwise able to log into (e.g., the credentials are stored in memory)) the accounts or networks identified by setup card  1914 . Thus, setup card  1914  provides an easy interface for identifying and permitting the sharing of certain settings with device  1906 . In some embodiments, setup card  1914  allows selection of one or more of the settings to share with device  1906 . For example, setup card  1914  can include selection affordances that allow selection of less than all of the accounts listed therein, thus allowing the user to share some (but not all) settings with device  1906 . As shown in  FIG. 19F , the settings to be shared in this example are: credentials for a user account (e.g., associated with the “Apple ID” “JAppleseed@icloud.com”) and credentials for a wireless network (e.g., for the Wi-Fi network named “Appleseed Home”). In some embodiments, device  1900  transmits the settings information to device  1900  in response to user input selection of affordance  1914 B. 
     At  FIG. 19G , device  1900  displays setup card  1916 . In some embodiments, device  1900  displays setup card  1916  in response to user input selection of affordance  1914 B. In some examples, setup card  1916  is displayed while device  1900  exchanges data with device  1906  (e.g., device  1900  transmits settings data as described above). For example, setup card  1916  includes status  1916 A showing that the devices are connecting (or otherwise exchanging data). 
     At  FIG. 19H , device  1900  displays setup card  1918 . In some embodiments, device  1900  displays setup card  1918  subsequent to setup card  1916 . For example, device  1900  displays setup card  1916  after transmitting the settings data to device  1906 . Setup card  1918  includes a message  1918 A. In some embodiments, the message conveys a current state of the configuration process. For example, as shown in  FIG. 19H , message  1918 A says “Playing Tone”. Thus, in the example depicted, device  1906  is currently playing a tone (e.g., an audio tone signal). In some embodiments, while displaying message  1916 A, device  1900  is listening for the tone played by device  1906 . For brevity, the description of audio tone signals above (e.g., with respect to  FIGS. 10A-10O ) are hereby incorporate by reference. 
     In some embodiments, device  1900  displays a message (not illustrated) indicating that the tone was not detected by device  1900 . For example, device  1900  can update message  1916 A to read “Your device is listening but cannot detect a tone, please move your phone closer”. 
     In some embodiments, setup card  1918  includes one or more fields for entering a passcode (not illustrated). In some embodiments, device  1900  displays setup card  1972  ( FIG. 19AJ ), which includes a keyboard and fields for entering a passcode. For example, as described above (e.g., with respect to  FIGS. 10A-10O ), device  1906  can output a dictated passcode (e.g., if a tone cannot be detected by device  1900  after a threshold number of attempts). Thus, using the one or more fields of setup card  1918  or  1972 , a user can enter the passcode that was dictated by device  1906 , for example, in order to progress to a next step in the configuration process (e.g., complete the setup process). 
     At  FIG. 19I , device  1900  displays setup card  1920 , which depicts a completion setup card. In some embodiments, device  1900  displays setup card  1920  after transmitting the settings data to device  1906 . In some embodiments, device  1900  displays setup card  1920  after detecting an audio tone output by device  1906 . Selection of the done affordance  1920 A, in some examples, dismisses the setup card  1920 . 
     As described previously, a device (e.g., device  1906 ) can be configured to be part of a device group (e.g., a stereo pair).  FIGS. 19J-19L  illustrate exemplary interfaces for configuring a device to be part of a device group, in accordance with some embodiments. 
     At  FIG. 19J , device  1900  displays setup card  1922 . In some embodiments, device  1900  displays setup card  1922  in response to user input  1913  (e.g., representing selection of affordance  1912 B of  FIG. 19E , setting the location of device  1906 ). In the example shown in  FIG. 19J , the location “John&#39;s Room” already includes an existing device (e.g., another smart speaker like device  1906 ), and the user is presented the option to create a device group that includes the existing device and device  1906 . The user can select either affordance  1922 A (“Use as a stereo pair”) or affordance  1922 B (“Not now”). In some examples, selection of affordance  1922 B continues the configuration process as described above (e.g., display of setup card  1914 ). As shown in  FIG. 19J , device  1900  receives user input  1923  representing selection of affordance  1922 A. In some embodiments, device  1900  displays setup card  1924  in response to receiving user input  1923 . 
       FIG. 19K  illustrates an exemplary device group configuration interface. Setup card  1924  includes affordances  1924 A and  1924 B for selecting an audio channel for the device being configured (e.g., device  1906 ). In this example, the device group being created is a stereo pair (e.g., two devices that will be used to respectively output left and right channel stereo audio). In some embodiments, selection of affordance  1924 C cancels the creation of a device group, and continues the configuration process as described above (e.g., display of setup card  1914 ). At  FIG. 19K , device  1900  receives user input  1925  representing selection of the left channel (denoted “L”). Thus, device  1906  will be configured to output the left channel of a stereo audio signal for the device group named “John&#39;s Room Speakers”. 
     In some embodiments, device  1900  displays setup card  1926  of  FIG. 19L  in response to receiving user input  1925 .  FIG. 19L  indicates that the creation of the stereo pair was successful and includes affordance  1926 A. In some embodiments, selection of affordance  1926 A continues the configuration process as described above (e.g., display of setup card  1914 ). 
       FIGS. 19M-19N  illustrate exemplary interfaces for creating a new location. In some examples, the configuration process allows for a user to create a new location identifier to associate with device  1906 . Setup card  1928  of  FIG. 19M  illustrates an alternative version of the location selection setup card  1912  of  FIG. 19E . Setup card  1928  includes an option, selected by affordance  1928 A, to create a new location (e.g., as indicated by the text “Create New Room”).  FIG. 19N  illustrates an exemplary interface  1930  for entering a location identifier. In some embodiments, interface  1930  is displayed as a proximity card. Interface  1930  includes a field  1930 A for entering a name of a new location (e.g., room), for example, using displayed keyboard  1930 B. As shown, the user of device  1900  has entered the name “Tim&#39;s Room” into field  1930 A. Device  1900  receives user input  1931  representing selection of a done affordance. In some embodiments, device  1900  creates the location named “Tim&#39;s Room” and associates device  1906  therewith (e.g., transmits the identifier to device  1900 ) in response to selection of the done affordance. Thus, in some examples, the user is not required to exit, or otherwise terminate, the configuration process in order to seek out an interface (e.g., an interface of a home control application, as described above with respect to  FIG. 6A ) for creating a new location identifier for their home group of devices, only to return and restart the configuration process from the beginning, wasting time and device resources. In some embodiments, in response to receiving user input  1931 , device displays setup card  1914 . In some embodiments, in response to receiving user input  1931 , device  1900  proceeds to a next step in a configuration process. 
     In some embodiments, a location identifier is a name associated with the device. For instance, in some examples, a location identifier does not include reference to any particular location (e.g., “Speaker  1 ”). Thus, the location identifier can simply be used as a name by which to identify a configured device (e.g., at a multi-device interface as described above). 
     In some examples, the configuration process requires that device  1900  logs into a user account in order to proceed with the configuration process.  FIGS. 19O-19P  illustrate exemplary interfaces for logging into a user account during a configuration process, in accordance with some embodiments. Setup card  1932  includes the message “Please login to your iCloud account to continue”, and includes an affordance  1932 A that includes the option “Login Now”. In some embodiments, setup card  1932  is displayed prior to setup card  1914 . For example, if device  1900  determines that it is not logged into a required user account, it displays setup card  1932  in response. In some embodiments, after receiving login credentials, device  1900  displays setup card  1914 . In some embodiments, device  1900  displays setup card  1932  in response to selection of affordance  1914 B (“Share Settings”). 
     At  FIG. 19P , device  1900  displays a setup card  1934  with fields  1934 A and  1934 B for receiving login credentials during the configuration process. Thus, in some examples, the user is not required to exit, or otherwise terminate, the configuration process in order to seek out a login page, only to return and restart the configuration process from the beginning, wasting time and device resources. In some embodiments, after receiving login credentials in fields  1934 A and  1934 B (e.g., and after verifying them or using them to successfully login to the user account), device displays setup card  1914 . In some embodiments, after receiving valid credentials (e.g., via setup card  1934 ), device  1900  proceeds to a next step in a configuration process. 
       FIGS. 19Q-19R  illustrate additional exemplary interfaces that can be displayed during a configuration process.  FIG. 19Q  illustrates an exemplary interface for enabling a voice assistant function. In some examples, the configuration process allows the user to enable a voice assistant function that allows a device (e.g., device  1906 ) to provide (e.g., via audio output, such as dictation) personal data associated with a user account. For example, this feature can be referred to as “personal requests”. In some examples, device  1906  is used by several users (associated with respective user accounts), and thus explicit permission to enable a personal requests feature can be solicited from a user (e.g., of device  1900 ). Personal request setup card  1936  includes an affordance (labeled “Enable”) that, when selected, enables the personal requests feature, and an affordance (labeled “Not Now”) that, when selected, does not enable the personal requests feature (e.g., and dismisses the card and proceeds to a next step in the configuration process). In some embodiments, the personal requests feature can be enabled or disabled after the configuration process (e.g., via a settings menu, or the like). In some embodiments, card  1936  is optional. In some embodiments, card  1936  is displayed in any order during configuration process. 
       FIG. 19R  illustrates an exemplary interface for enabling a music service subscription. In some embodiments, during the configuration process, a device (e.g., device  1900 ) determines that it does not include a valid subscription to a music service (e.g., the service is not enabled, the user account has not subscribed, or one or more credentials for accessing the music service are not accessible to the device). Setup card  1938  includes an affordance (labeled “Get 3 Months Free”) that, when selected, enables the user to setup a music service subscription, and an affordance (labeled “Not Now”) that, when selected, does not proceed to setup the music subscription service (e.g., and dismisses the card and proceeds to a next step in the configuration process). In some embodiments, the music service subscription can be enabled or disabled after the configuration process (e.g., via a settings menu, or the like). In some embodiments, setup card  1938  is optional. In some embodiments, card  1938  is displayed in any order during configuration process. 
       FIG. 19S  illustrates an exemplary interface for sharing settings. Setup card  1940  includes a prompt to the user to share settings with device  1906  (“Share Settings”). Setup card  1940  is similar to setup card  1914 , and can be displayed in place of, or in addition to, setup card  1914 . Setup card  1940  includes graphical depictions representing the data that will be shared between device  1906  and device  1900  (e.g., music data, calendar data, home data, or the like). In some embodiments, setup card  1940  allows selection of one or more of the settings to share with device  1906 . For example, setup card  1940  can include selection affordances that allow selection of less than all of the data depicted therein (e.g., music, calendar), thus allowing the user to share some (but not all) data with device  1906 . In some embodiments, device  1900  transmits the settings information to device  1900  in response to user input selection of the affordance (labeled “Share Settings”) of card  1940 . In some embodiments, in response to user input selection of the “Share Settings” affordance of card  1940 , device  1900  displays setup card  1916  ( FIG. 19G ). 
       FIGS. 19T-19Y  illustrate exemplary interfaces after successful configuration.  FIG. 19T  depicts setup card  1942 , which includes a depiction of device  1906  and a check mark icon, indicating a successful data transfer (e.g., settings were successfully shared) or configuration (e.g., configuration is complete). In some embodiments, device  1900  displays setup card  1942  in response to user input selection to share settings. In some embodiments, device  1900  displays setup card  1942  after setup card  1916  ( FIG. 19G ) or setup card  1918  ( FIG. 19H ). 
       FIG. 19U  depicts setup card  1944 , which includes an indication of the user&#39;s name. In this example, the user (“Emily”) is greeted by name (“Hi, Emily!”), indicating that device  1906  successfully received the user&#39;s account data and/or other settings data. Device  1900  optionally displays setup card  1944  after setup card  1942 . 
       FIG. 19V  depicts setup card  1946 , which includes a prompt for the user to invoke a function of a voice assistant. For example, after successful configuration of device  1906 , device  1900  displays setup card  1946  encouraging the user to try out one or more features of the newly-configured device  1900 . Setup card  1946  includes the text “Try Me” and prompts the user to “Say ‘Hey, What Can You Do?’” In some embodiments, device  1900  displays setup card  1942  after setup card  1916  ( FIG. 19G ), setup card  1918  ( FIG. 19H ), setup card  1920  ( FIG. 19I ), setup card  1940  ( FIG. 19S ), setup card  1942  ( FIG. 19T ), or setup card  1944  ( FIG. 19U ). In some embodiments, device  1906  outputs a voice prompt that matches the card displayed by device  1900 , as shown in  FIG. 19AK , which shows device  1906  outputting the voice prompt “Try me, say: ‘Hey, What Can You Do?” 
       FIG. 19W  depicts setup card  1948 , which includes various example voice commands for invoking features of a voice assistant operation of device  1906 . In some embodiments, device  1900  displays setup card  1948  in response to receiving an indication that the user provided a voice command while setup card  1946  is displayed. For example, the device  1900  determines (e.g., detects using a microphone, or receives an indication of detection by another device) that the user issued the voice command “Hey, what can you do?” while card  1946  was displayed, and in response displays setup card  1948 . In some embodiments, setup card  1948  includes one or more prompts related to one or more features of a voice assistant on (e.g., accessible using) device  1906 . In the example depicted, setup card  1948  includes the text “Try Asking Me:” and below that lists various prompts for invoking functions of the voice assistant. For example, setup card  1948  includes the prompt “Hey, turn off the lights” related to a home application control feature (e.g., application), the prompt “Hey, what&#39;s the latest local news?” related to a news feature (e.g., application), the prompt “Hey, what&#39;s the weather today?” related to a weather feature (e.g., application), and “Hey, play some music” related to a music feature (e.g., application). Setup card can also include done affordance  1948 A that, when selected, causes the setup card  1948  to be dismissed (e.g., cease being displayed). In some embodiments, setup card  1948  remains displayed until done affordance  1948 A is selected. For example, if a user invokes the weather feature by saying “Hey, what&#39;s the weather like,” setup card  1948  remains displayed, which gives the user the opportunity to try invoking another example feature, such as the music feature or the news feature. In some embodiments, device  1900  ceases displaying setup card  1948  in response to a determination (e.g., detects using a microphone, or receives an indication of detection by another device) that the user issued voice command. 
     In some embodiments, device  1906  outputs an audible voice prompt prompting the user to provide one or more of the voice commands shown in setup card  1948  of  FIG. 19W . For example, in response to the voice command “Hey, what can you do?” received at  FIG. 19V , device  1906  can output the voice prompt: “I can do lots of things, like turn on the lights, give you news updates, and tell you about the weather. Now you try, say ‘Hey, play some music.’”  FIG. 19AL  shows device  1906  outputting the voice prompt “Now you try, say: ‘Hey, play some music.’” The output of device  1906  shown in  FIG. 19AL  can occur while device  1900  displays setup card  1948  of  FIG. 19W . In this example, the voice assistant prompts the user to provide the command related to the music feature (“Hey, play some music.”). 
     While the examples shown in setup card  1948  of  FIG. 19W  illustrate some functions, the user&#39;s voice command can invoke any feature of device  1906 , since it is fully operational upon successful configuration. For example, the voice assistant (e.g., on device  1906 ) could respond correctly to a user voice command asking the voice assistant to provide information related to a calendar feature (e.g., “Hey, what meetings are on my calendar today?”), even though the calendar feature is not one of the example features/prompts illustrated in setup card  1948 . Additionally, the voice assistant (e.g., on device  1906 ) can correctly respond to a user input voice command that is related to either the same feature prompted in the voice prompt, or can respond to a user input voice command that is related to a different feature than what is prompted in the voice prompt. For example, as described above, device  1906  can output the voice prompt: “I can do lots of things, like turn on the lights, give you news updates, and tell you about the weather. Now you try, say ‘Hey, play some music.’” Following this voice prompt, if the user provides a voice command that relates to the same feature (music) (e.g., user says “Hey, play some music”), device  1906  can respond appropriately (e.g., plays some music). If instead the user provides a voice command that relates to a different feature (e.g., news), then the device  1906  still responds appropriately (e.g., by outputting news). Thus, as can be seen above in the description related to  FIG. 19W , the displayed prompts (e.g., in card  1948 ) or the outputted voice prompts (e.g., by device  1906 ) provide a tutorial of one or more features of the newly-configured device  1906 , which is operational (e.g., subject to the configuration settings established during the configuration process). 
     At  FIG. 19X , device  1900  displays current media interface  1950  (also referred to as a “Now Playing interface”) that identifies a media item that is currently being played back (e.g., by device  1906 ). In some embodiments, device  1900  displays current media interface  1950  in accordance with device  1906  playing music. For example, device  1906  begins playing music in response to the user input voice command “Hey, play some music” while device  1900  displays setup card  1948 . In some embodiments, current media interface  1950  is displayed concurrently with setup card  1948 . For example, in  FIG. 19X , setup card  1948  is superimposed on top of current media interface  1950 . In some examples, current media interface  1950  is superimposed on top of setup card  1948 . 
     Additionally,  FIG. 19X  depicts setup card  1948  sliding off (e.g., in a downward direction) the display of device  1900 . In this example, subsequent to displaying current media interface  1950 , device receives user input selection of affordance  1948 A ( FIG. 19W ) and, in response, ceases displaying setup card  1948 . In some embodiments, ceasing displaying setup card  1948  includes displaying setup card  1948  gradually sliding off of the display. At  FIG. 19Y , device displays current media interface  1950  after ceasing to display setup card  1948 . 
       FIGS. 19Z-19AJ  illustrates various interfaces that can be displayed during a configuration process. In some embodiments, one or more of the interfaces depicted in  FIGS. 19Z-19AJ  are optional. In some embodiments, a device (e.g., device  1900 ) displays one or more of the interfaces depicted in  FIGS. 19Z-19AJ  in any order during a configuration process for configuration another device (e.g., device  1906 ). For example, one or more of the interfaces depicted in  FIGS. 19Z-19AJ  can be displayed in addition to or in place of one or more of the interfaces depicted in  FIGS. 19D-19P . 
       FIG. 19Z  depicts setup card  1952 , which prompts the user to sign in with a User ID using device  1900  in order to proceed with the configuration process. In some embodiments, signing in with a User ID (e.g., an iCloud account, an Apple ID, or other user account that can be used to identify one or more users) is required as part of the configuration process (e.g., for configuring device  1906 ). In this example, an affordance labeled “Go to Settings” is included in setup card  1952 , and there is no option to proceed without signing in with a User ID. Setup card  1952  can be displayed in addition to or in place of card  1932  ( FIG. 19O ) or card  1934  ( FIG. 19P ). 
       FIG. 19AA  depicts setup card  1954 , which prompts the user to download a home control application (e.g., called the “home app”) to device  1900 . Notably, at  FIG. 19AA , the device  1900  does not include the application icon labeled “Home” (as shown in  FIG. 19Z ). Setup card  1954  includes an affordance (labeled “Go To App Store”) that, when selected, causes device  1900  to perform an action related to downloading the home control application (e.g., display an application download interface, or download the application directly), and an affordance (labeled “Not Now”) that, when selected, does not perform the action related to downloading the application (e.g., and dismisses the card and proceeds to a next step in the configuration process). 
       FIG. 19AB  depicts setup card  1956 , which prompts the user to enable location services on device  1900 . Setup card  1956  includes an affordance (labeled “Enable Location Services”) that, when selected, causes device  1900  to perform an action related to enabling location services on device  1900  (e.g., displays a settings interface, or enables location services directly), and an affordance (labeled “Not Now”) that, when selected, does not perform the action related to enabling location services (e.g., and dismisses the card and proceeds to a next step in the configuration process). 
     The configuration process can require that certain features be enabled on the device being configured (e.g., device  1906 ), even if such features are disabled on the device doing the configuring (e.g., device  1900 ).  FIG. 19AC  depicts setup card  1958 , which informs the user that the voice assistant will be enabled on the speaker (e.g., device  1906 ). Setup card  1958  does not include an option to disable the feature (e.g., voice assistant), but informs the user that such feature will be enabled on the device being configured. In some embodiments, device  1900  displays setup card  1958  if the feature (e.g., voice assistant) is disabled on device  1900 . In some embodiments, device  1900  does not display setup card  1958  if the feature (e.g., voice assistant) is enabled on device  1900 . In such case, the configuration process can enable the voice assistant without notifying the user, as the user has already indicated a desire to use the voice assistant function. In some embodiments, the setup card  1958  informs the user that the feature (e.g., voice assistant) will remain disabled on device  1900  (e.g., even though it will be enabled on device  1906 ). 
       FIG. 19AD  depicts setup card  1960  for selecting a language. For example, a voice assistant on device  1906  can speak in the selected language (e.g., or with a selected dialect or accent). In setup card  1960 , three language options are presented for selection (e.g., English (Australian), English (U.K.), and English (U.S.)). In some embodiments, device  1900  receives user input selection of one of the languages, which will cause device  1900  to be configured with the selected language. 
     In some embodiments, a setting of device  1900  that is compatible with device  1906  is automatically adopted in the configuration settings of device  1906 . For example, if device  1900  has English (U.S.) set as their default language on device  1900 , and device  1906  is only compatible with English (U.S.), English (U.K,) and English (Australian), then device  1900  would not display setup card  1960  during the configuration process. Rather, the configuration settings of device  1906  would be automatically include English (U.S.) as the language (e.g., for a voice assistant feature). 
     In some embodiments, a setting of device  1900  that is not compatible with device  1906  causes device  1900  to display an interface for selecting a compatible setting. For example, if device  1900  has Latin set as their default language on device  1900 , and device  1906  is only compatible with English (U.S.), English (U.K,) and English (Australian), then device  1900  would display setup card  1960  during the configuration process, prompting user to select a compatible language setting. 
       FIG. 19AE  depicts setup card  1962 , which prompts the user to sign in to a music service account using device  1900  in order to proceed with the configuration process. In some examples, if a user has a music service account but needs to log in, setup card  1962  can be displayed. In this example, setup card  1962  includes an affordance labeled “Go to Music Settings” that, when selected, causes device  1900  to perform an action related to signing into a music service (e.g., display a music settings interface), and an affordance (labeled “Not Now”) that, when selected, does not perform the action related to signing into a music service (e.g., and dismisses the card and proceeds to a next step in the configuration process). 
       FIG. 19AF  depicts setup card  1964 , which prompts the user to select “home” location for the speaker (e.g., device  1906 ). In some embodiments, a user account is associated with more than one home location (e.g., a primary residence and a vacation residence). In such case, device  1900  displays setup card  1964 , which allows the user to select the home location that device  1906  will be located in (e.g., physically). In some embodiments, device  1900  receives user input selection of one of the home locations, which will cause device  1900  to be configured with the selected location. In some embodiments, if a user account is associated with one home location, then that home location is automatically selected (e.g., a setup card  1964  is not displayed) by the configuration process. In some embodiments, setup card  1964  includes an option to create a new home location. For example, an interface for creating a new home location can operate similar to the interfaces described with respect to  FIGS. 19M-19N  for creating a new location identifier (e.g., room). In some embodiments, device  1900  displays a error if the user account associated with device  1900  is not the user who created the home location. 
       FIG. 19AG  depicts setup card  1966 , which prompts the user to set up an additional account security measure (e.g., two-factor authentication). In some embodiments, the additional account security measure is required as part of the configuration process (e.g., for configuring device  1906 ). In this example, an affordance labeled “Go to Settings” is included in setup card  1966 , and there is no option to proceed without setting up two-factor authentication. 
       FIGS. 19AH-19AI  depict exemplary interfaces for connecting to a network during the configuration process.  FIG. 19AH  depicts setup card  1968 , which prompts the user select an affordance (e.g., labeled “Open Wi-Fi Settings) for performing an action related to connecting to a wireless network, in order to continue configuration of the device  1900 .  FIG. 19AI  depicts setup card  1970 , which prompts the user to connect to a wireless network (e.g., Wi-Fi) in order to continue configuration of the device  1900 . Selection of the affordance labeled “Continue” in  FIG. 19AI  can cause Wi-Fi to be enabled directly, and connection to a known network automatically established, so that the configuration can proceed. 
       FIGS. 20A-20C  is a flow diagram illustrating a method for configuring a second device using an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. Method  2000  is performed at a device (e.g.,  100 ,  300 ,  500 ,  580 ,  1900 ) with a display. Some operations in method  2000  are, optionally, combined, the order of some operations are, optionally, changed, and some operations are, optionally, omitted. 
     As described below, method  2000  provides an intuitive way for configuring a second device. The method reduces the cognitive burden on a user for configuring a second device, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated computing devices, enabling a user to configure a second device faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges. 
     The electronic device (e.g.,  1900 ) (also referred to as a “first device”) detects ( 2002 ) an audio tone signal (e.g.,  1904 ) indicative of a pairing handshake with a second device (e.g.,  1906 ). In some embodiments, the audio tone signal is an initial tone. For example the tone is played in response to the devices being place in close proximity. In some embodiments, the audio tone signal is played during a configuration process. In some embodiments, the audio tone signal represents a response to another audio tone signal played by the electronic device. 
     In some embodiments, the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) is connected ( 2004 ) to the second device via a communication link (e.g.,  1039  of  FIG. 10M ). In some embodiments, the communication link is a wireless communication link. For example, the communication can be a Bluetooth or a Wi-Fi connection, or the like. 
     In some embodiments, the audio tone signal (e.g.,  1904 ) is out-of-band to the communication link ( 2006 ). For example, the audio tone signal is not transmitted using the communication link. For example, the first and second devices are connected and exchange data communications over a Bluetooth wireless connection (e.g., a communication link). In this example, while the devices continue to be connected via the Bluetooth connection (e.g., while the devices are paired), an audio tone signal (e.g., an audible tone that includes or represents a communication between the devices) is out-of-band with the Bluetooth communication link. In some embodiments, being out-of-band to a communication link means that a signal (e.g., an audio tone signal) is not communicated using the same data exchange technique. 
     Using an audio tone signal that is out-of-band with a communication link between two devices allows the user to efficiently move through a configuration process for a device with fewer required user inputs, while ensuring that the devices are in relatively close proximity and that the user has physical access to both devices. Providing an optimized configuration process to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In accordance with detecting the audio tone signal, the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) initiates ( 2008 ), on the first device (e.g.,  1900 ), a configuration process for configuring the second device (e.g.,  1906 ). 
     Using a detection of an audio tone signal allows the user to efficiently move through a configuration process for a device with fewer required user inputs. Providing an optimized configuration process to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     During the configuration process, the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) displays ( 2010 ), on the display (e.g.,  1902 ), a configuration user interface (e.g.,  1912 ) that includes a prompt to select a location (e.g., “Where is this speaker?” as shown in  FIG. 19E ). 
     The first device (e.g.,  1900 ) receives ( 2012 ) user input selection (e.g.,  1913 ) of a location (e.g., the location “John&#39;s Room” shown in  1912 A of  FIG. 8J ). 
     In response to receiving the user input, the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) configures ( 2014 ) the second device (e.g.,  1906 ) to be associated with the location. In some embodiments, configuring the second device to be associated with the location includes transmitting configuration data that includes the location. In some embodiments, the data is transmitted to the second device (e.g., a smart speaker). In some embodiments, the data is transmitted to a third device (e.g., an Apple TV). 
     In some embodiments, the audio tone signal (e.g.,  1904 ) is generated by the second device (e.g.,  1906  as shown in  FIG. 19A ). 
     In some embodiments, the audio tone signal includes an audio passcode. In some embodiments, the audio passcode is dictated (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 10J ). In some embodiments, the audio passcode is encoded in the audio tone signal. 
     In some embodiments, the audio tone signal (e.g.,  1904 ) is received while the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) is physically positioned within a threshold physical proximity (e.g.,  1908  of  FIG. 19C ) to the second device (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 19C ). 
     In some embodiments, the audio tone signal is a first audio tone signal, and during the configuration process (e.g., while displaying setup card  1918  of  FIG. 19H ) ( 2016 ): the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) detects ( 2018 ) a second audio tone signal comprising encoded data. For example, the second audio tone signal includes one or more of user account login information, an identifier for the second device, or other data for confirming that the second device should be provided access to the user&#39;s account or personal data. In response to detecting the second audio tone signal ( 2020 ): the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) transmits ( 2022 ) an acknowledgement to the second device (e.g.,  1906 ); and the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) proceeds ( 2024 ) to a next step in the configuration process (e.g., displays the setup card  1920  of  FIG. 19I ). 
     In some embodiments, further in response to receiving the user input selection (e.g.,  1913 ) of the location (e.g., “John&#39;s Room” as shown in  FIG. 19J ) ( 2026 ): in accordance with a determination that a third device (e.g., device  1020  of  FIG. 10K , where the second device is device  1000  of  FIG. 10K ) is currently associated with the location (e.g., “John&#39;s Room”), the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) displays ( 2028 ), on the display (e.g.,  1902 ), a configuration user interface (e.g., setup card  1922  of  FIG. 19J ) that includes a prompt (e.g., affordance  1922 A in  FIG. 19J  that includes text “Use as a stereo pair”) to select whether to create a device group (e.g., stereo pair) that includes the second device and the third device. In some embodiments, a device group includes two or more devices. In accordance with a determination that a third device is not currently associated with the location, the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) forgoes displaying ( 2030 ), on the display, the configuration user interface that includes the prompt to select whether to create the device group (e.g., displays setup card  1914  of  FIG. 19F  instead of setup card  1922 ). 
     In some embodiments, the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) receives user input (e.g.,  1923 ) representing an affirmative request create the device group. In some embodiments, in response to the user input representing an affirmative request create the device group, the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) displays, on the display, a configuration user interface (e.g.,  1924  of  FIG. 19K ) that includes a prompt (e.g., “Is this speaker left or right?” as shown in  FIG. 19K ) to select an audio output channel (e.g., left or right, as shown in  FIG. 19K ) to associate with the second device. In some embodiments, the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) receives user input (e.g.,  1925 ) representing selection of an audio output channel (e.g., left, as shown in  FIG. 19K ). In response to receiving the user input representing selection of a selected audio output channel, the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) associates (e.g., transmits configuration data to) the second device with the selected audio channel. 
     In some embodiments, the prompt to select a location includes a plurality of predetermined location identifiers (e.g., Kitchen, Bedroom, Patio, Dining Room, as shown in  FIG. 19E ). 
     In some embodiments, the plurality of predetermined location identifiers includes a user-defined location identifier (e.g., John&#39;s Room, as shown in  FIG. 19E ). 
     In some embodiments, the prompt to select a location includes a field (e.g., “Create New Room” option as shown in  FIG. 19M ) for creating a new location identifier. In some embodiments, the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) receives user input (e.g.,  1931 ) associated with the field for creating a new location identifier (e.g., text entered into field  1930 A of  FIG. 19N ), wherein the user input includes a location identifier (e.g., “Tim&#39;s Room” a shown in  FIG. 19N ). The first device (e.g.,  1900 ) creates a new location identifier based on the received user input associated with the field for creating the new location identifier, and associates the second device with the new location identifier (e.g., transmits configuration data that includes the new location identifier to the second device). 
     In some embodiments, during the configuration process ( 2032 ): the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) displays ( 2034 ), on the display (e.g.,  1902 ), a configuration user interface (e.g., setup card  1914  of  FIG. 19F ) that includes a prompt (e.g., “Share your settings” affordance  1914 B as shown in  FIG. 19F ) requesting permission to transmit user account information (e.g., login credentials) to the second device (e.g.,  1906 ). The first device (e.g.,  1900 ) receives ( 2036 ) user input (e.g., selection of affordance  1914 B) providing permission to transmit the user account information to the second device. In response to receiving the user input providing permission, the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) transmits ( 2038 ) the user account information to the second device (e.g.,  1906 ). 
     In some embodiments, prior to transmitting the user account information to the second device, and in accordance with a determination that the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) is not currently logged into a user account associated with the user account information (e.g., is not currently logged into an iCloud account), the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) displays, on the display (e.g.,  1902 ), a prompt to log in to the user account (e.g., setup card  1932  that includes the text “Please login to your iCloud account to continue” as shown in  FIG. 19O ), and forgoes transmitting the user account information to the second device. In accordance with a determination that the first device is currently logged into the user account associated with the user account information, the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) transmitting the user account information to the second device (e.g.,  1906 ). 
     In some embodiments, in response to progressing from a first step (e.g., setup card  1912 ) in the configuration process to a second step (e.g., setup card  1914 ) in the configuration process, the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) outputs a third audio tone signal (e.g.,  1044  of  FIG. 10N ). In some embodiments, the third audio tone signal is outputted concurrently with the output of a fourth audio tone signal (e.g.,  1042  of  FIG. 10N ) outputted by the second device (e.g.,  1906 ). In some embodiments, the third audio tone signal and the fourth audio tone signal are harmonics. 
     In some embodiments, in response to progressing from the second step (e.g., setup card  1914 ) in the configuration process to a third step (e.g., setup card  1916 ) in the configuration process, the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) outputs a fifth audio tone signal (e.g.,  1048  of  FIG. 10O ). In some embodiments, the fifth audio tone signal is outputted concurrently with the output of a sixth audio tone signal (e.g.,  1046  of  FIG. 10O ) outputted by the second device (e.g.,  1906 ). In some embodiments, the fifth audio tone signal and the sixth audio tone signal are harmonics. In some embodiments, the fifth audio tone signal is a higher frequency tone than the third audio tone signal (e.g., as shown in plot  1040  of  FIG. 10O ). 
     In some embodiments, subsequent to initiating the configuration process, the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) receives data regarding an output of an operation being performed by the second device (e.g.,  1906 ). For example, the output can be audio output (e.g., dictation by a voice assistant) by device  1906  of media (e.g., music), weather information, news, calendar appointments, or the like. In response to receiving the data regarding the output of the operation being performed by the second device (e.g.,  1906 ), the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) displays a user interface (e.g., interface  1950  of  FIG. 19X-19Y ) that includes a representation of the output of the operation being performed by the second device (e.g.,  1906 ) (e.g. interface  1950  includes information identifying a song currently being played by device  1906 ). In some embodiments, the representation of the output can be displayed when device  1900  is locked or unlocked. For example, when device  1906  starts playing music, device  1900  displays a Now Playing interface (e.g., interface  1950 ). In some embodiments, device  1900  displays a Now Playing interface whenever music is playing on device  1906  (e.g., music initiated by any device, including other devices). In some embodiments, the operation is output of weather information, and the representation of the output includes current temperature information, forecast information, or the like. In some embodiments, the operation is output of news information, and the representation of the output includes current news, or the like. 
     Displaying a user interface that includes a representation of the output of the operation being performed by the second device, provides the user with visual feedback about the state of a state of the second device. Providing improved visual feedback to the user enhances the operability of the second device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the operation being performed by the second device (e.g.,  1906 ) includes audibly outputting information (e.g., playing the song identified in interface  1950 ). In some embodiments, receiving the data regarding the output of the operation being performed includes receiving data representing the information (e.g., song title, elapsed play time, weather forecast data, news stories). In some embodiments, displaying the user interface (e.g., interface  1950  which includes information about the song being played), that includes the representation of the output of the operation being performed by the second device, includes displaying at least a portion of the data representing the information (e.g., displaying less than all of the data, such as a song title but not an album name, or displaying one news story where there are three current news stories in the data received by device  1900 ). 
     Displaying data representing information corresponding to information being audibly outputted by the second device provides the user with visual feedback about the state of the second device, in addition to the audio feedback being provided directly by the second device. Providing improved (e.g., supplemental or additional) visual feedback to the user enhances the operability of the second device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the information includes a media item (e.g., a song), and the operation being performed by the second device (e.g.,  1906 ) includes audibly outputting the media item. In some embodiments, displaying the data representing the information includes displaying one or more of: an artist, a media item name, an album name, album art, and a media playback progress indicator (e.g., as shown in interface  1950  of  FIG. 19Y ). 
     Displaying additional data (e.g., one or more of artist, a media item name, an album name, album art, and a media playback progress indicator) that corresponds to a media item being audibly outputted by the second device provides the user with visual feedback about the state of the second device. Providing improved (e.g., supplemental or additional) visual feedback to the user enhances the operability of the second device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, displaying the user interface that includes the representation of the output of the operation being performed by the second device includes displaying one or more of news information or weather information. 
     In some embodiments, during the configuration process: in accordance with a first configuration setting of the first device being compatible with the second device (e.g.,  1906 ), the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) configures the second device (e.g.,  1906 ) to include the first configuration setting. For example, a configuration setting can be a language setting for a voice assistant, and a first configuration setting can be “English (U.S.)” In this example, English (U.S.) is compatible with (e.g., supported by) a voice assistant on device  1906 . In some embodiments, the configuration is done automatically, without requiring user input or confirmation, if the setting is compatible. In accordance with the first configuration setting of the first device not being compatible with the second device (e.g.,  1906 ), the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) displays an indication that the first configuration setting is not compatible with the second device (e.g., displays a message). In some embodiments, the indication that the first setting is not compatible with the second device is the display of a setup card for selecting a different/compatible setting (e.g., setup card  1960  of  FIG. 19AD  for selecting a compatible language). 
     Using a first configuration setting of the first device that is compatible with the second device allows the user to efficiently move through a configuration process for a device with fewer required user inputs, providing an optimized configuration process. Providing an optimized configuration process to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, further in accordance with the first configuration setting of the first device being compatible with the second device (e.g.,  1906 ), the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) displays a configuration user interface that includes a prompt requesting acceptance of the first configuration setting for the second device. In response to receiving user input accepting the first configuration setting for the second device (e.g.,  1906 ), the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) configures the second device to include the first configuration setting. 
     Displaying a configuration user interface that includes a prompt requesting acceptance of the first configuration setting for the second device, provides the user with visual feedback about the state of the second device (e.g., that it is compatible with the first configuration setting). Providing improved visual feedback to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the first configuration setting is a setting disabling a device feature (e.g., a voice assistant), and wherein a second configuration setting is a setting enabling the device feature (e.g., a voice assistant). In accordance with a determination that the configuration process requires enabling the device feature on the second device (e.g.,  1906 ): the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) displays an indication that the device feature will be enabled on the second device (e.g., setup card  1958  of  FIG. 19AC ); and the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) configures the second device (e.g.,  1906 ) to include the second configuration setting (e.g., enabling a voice assistant on the second device). 
     Displaying an indication that the device feature will be enabled on the second device (e.g., even when it is disabled on the first device) provides the user with visual feedback about the state of the second device (e.g., that the feature is required on the second device). Providing improved visual feedback to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, displaying the indication that the device feature will be enabled on the second device (e.g.,  1906 ) includes displaying an indication that the device feature will remain disabled on the first device. 
     Displaying an indication that the feature will remain disabled on the first device provides the user with visual feedback about the nature of the operation and the state of the first device (e.g., that enabling the feature on the second device will not alter the state of the first device, as to the feature). Providing improved visual feedback to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, further in accordance with the first configuration setting of the first device not being compatible with the second device (e.g.,  1906 ), the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) displays a configuration user interface (e.g.,  1960  of  FIG. 19AD ) that includes a prompt requesting selection of a third configuration setting compatible with the second device. For example, if device  1900  has a default language set to Latin (e.g., a first configuration setting), which is not a language compatible with the voice assistant feature of device  1906 , then device  1900  prompts to select a compatible language (e.g., those listed in setup card  1960 ). In response to receiving user input selection of the third configuration setting (e.g., “English (U.K.)”), the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) configures the second device (e.g.,  1906 ) to include the third configuration setting. In some embodiments, configuring the second device includes preparing a configuration setting for transfer to the second device later at a later time (e.g., during the configuration process). For example, all configuration settings may be transferred to the second device at once. 
     Displaying a configuration user interface that includes a prompt requesting selection of a third configuration setting compatible with the second device reduces the number of inputs needed to configure the second device by surfacing compatible options to the user and provides an optimized configuration process. Providing an optimized configuration process to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, prior to establishing the communication link connecting the first device and the second device (e.g.,  1906 ), the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) detects an indication that a physical proximity between the first device and the second device satisfies a proximity condition (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 19A ). In response to detecting the indication that the physical proximity between the first device and the second device satisfies the proximity condition, the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) outputs an audio tone signal (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 10I , where device  1010  is outputting an audio tone signal  1016 ). 
     Using an indication that the physical proximity between the first device and the second device satisfies the proximity condition in order to output an audio tone signal provides the user with auditory feedback regarding the state of the first device. For example, when there are other potential devices in proximity that are configurable, the audio tone signal can indicate which device will be configured. Providing improved feedback to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, subsequent to transmitting the user account information to the second device (e.g.,  1906 ), the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) displays a configuration user interface (e.g.,  1948  of  FIG. 19W ) associated with a voice assistant, wherein the configuration user interface associated with a voice assistant includes a prompt to provide user voice input invoking one or more functions of the voice assistant. In some embodiments, the one or more functions of the voice assistant include audibly outputting one or more of: media (e.g., music), weather information, news, calendar information, messages, or the like. 
     Displaying a configuration user interface associated with a voice assistant that includes a prompt to provide user voice input invoking one or more functions of the voice assistant provides the user with information regarding the capabilities and state of a device. Providing such information to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that user voice input invoking one or more of the features of the voice assistant has been received by either the first device or the second device (e.g.,  1906 ), the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) maintains display of the configuration user interface (e.g.,  1948 ) associated with the voice assistant. In response to receiving user input selection of an affordance (e.g., affordance labeled “Done” in setup card  1948 ) included in the configuration user interface associated with the voice assistant, the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) ceases display of the configuration user interface associated with the voice assistant (e.g., setup card  1948  slides off the display, as shown in  FIGS. 19X-19Y ). 
     Note that details of the processes described above with respect to method  2000  (e.g.,  FIGS. 20A-20C ) are also applicable in an analogous manner to the methods described below/above. For example, method  700 ,  900 ,  1100 ,  1300 ,  1500 ,  1700 ,  1800 ,  2200 ,  2400 ,  2600 ,  2800 ,  3000 ,  3200 ,  3400 ,  3600 ,  3800 , and  3900  optionally includes one or more of the characteristics of the various methods described above with reference to method  2000 . For brevity, these details are not repeated below. 
       FIGS. 21A-21I  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for adjusting a device output of an audible signal, in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIGS. 22A-22B . 
       FIG. 21A  illustrates an exemplary scenario in which a plurality of devices are connected. Specifically, device  2100  (also referred to as a first device) is a smart speaker that is connected to device  2110  (e.g., another smart speaker, also referred to as a second device). Device  2100  is optionally connected to the device being held by user  2106  (e.g., a personal device). In some embodiments, devices  2100 ,  2107 , and  2110  include one or more features of devices  100 ,  300 ,  500 , or  580 . In some examples, device  2100  and/or device  2110  includes one or more audio signal detection components (e.g., microphones) and can detect voice user input. As shown in  FIG. 21A , the user  2106  utters the voice input command  2108  “Hey Siri” aloud, which is detected by device  2100 . Further, the voice input command  2108  is uttered while device  2100  is currently outputting an audible signal  2104  (e.g., media playback, voice assistant text-to-speech output), and while device  2110  is currently outputting an audible signal  2112  (e.g., media playback, voice assistant voice output). In some embodiments, device  2100  and device  2110  are concurrently outputting synchronized audible signals (e.g., are a stereo pair group, and are outputting synchronized playback of the same media item). 
       FIG. 21B  depicts an overhead view of the scenario of  FIG. 21A , and illustrates the relative spatial positioning of device  2100 , device  2110 , and user  2106  relative to each other. 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the user input voice command (e.g.,  2108  by user  2106 ), device  2100  adjusts the output of an audible signal (e.g.,  2104 ). In some embodiments, device  2100  adjusts the output of the audible signal based on a spatial position of the voice command source (e.g., the position of user  2106 ) while continuing to output the audible signal (e.g.,  2104 ). For example, device  2100  applies spatial domain audio processing to project the sound away from the user  2106 , to filter the sound with low pass, and/or band pass, and/or high pass filters, or to lower the volume (e.g., to zero) of one or more of its speakers (e.g., where device  2100  includes an array of a plurality of speakers). For example, device  2100  can lower the volume of a speaker (e.g. of an array of speakers of device  2100 ) that is outputting the audible signal and that is nearest the spatial position of user  2106 . 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the user input voice command (e.g.,  2108 ), device  2100  determines a spatial position of a voice command source (e.g., user  2106 ).  FIG. 21C  illustrates exemplary values that a device (e.g.,  2100 ) uses to determine a spatial position of a voice command source (e.g.,  2106 ). As shown, user  2106  is standing at a position that is a lateral angle  2122  (e.g., θ (theta) degrees) from a reference point on reference marker  2120 . Reference marker  2120  is included for illustrative purposes. User  2106  is standing at a distance  2124  (e.g., d units of length) away from device  2100  (e.g., which is depicted as the center of reference marker  2120 ). In some embodiments, device  2100  uses one or more of an angle and distance to determine a spatial position of a voice command source. In some embodiments, an angle is a lateral angle (e.g. as shown in  FIG. 21C ). In some embodiments, an angle is a vertical angle. For example, using a vertical angle (not illustrated), device  2100  can determine a height (e.g., in a z-direction, a third dimension) of a voice command source relative to device  2100 . In some embodiments, a spatial position of the voice command source is a position relative to device  2100  (e.g., relative to a coordinate system of device  2100 , as illustrated by  2120 ). 
     In some embodiments, a plurality of devices (e.g.,  2100  and  2110 ) are used to determine a spatial position of a voice command source (e.g., user  2106 ). For example, both devices  2100  and  2110 , as shown in  FIG. 21C , can determine a distance to user  2106  and share the results with the other device. In some examples, device  2100  uses both distance measurements to determine a spatial position of user  2106 . For further example, three devices can be used to triangulate a position of a voice command source (e.g., user  2106 ). Utilizing a plurality of approximations or measurements from a plurality of devices, in some examples, results in a more accurate determination of spatial position of a voice command source than would otherwise be achieved with a single device. 
     In some embodiments, device  2100  adjusts the output of the audible signal based on the spatial position of the voice command source (e.g., user  2106 ).  FIG. 21D  illustrates the overhead view of  FIGS. 21C and 21D , however the output of the audible signal  2104  has been adjusted (e.g., reduced) in the direction of user  2106 , as shown by the lack of sound waves emanating from device  2100  in the direction of user  2106 . As seen in  FIG. 21D , device  2100  continues to output audible signal  2104  in directions not directly facing the user. 
     In some embodiments, device  2100  adjusts the output of the audible signal based on the second device (e.g.,  2110 ).  FIG. 21E  illustrates that device  2100  has adjusted (e.g., ceased) the output of the audible signal  2104  (similar to  FIG. 21D ) both in the direction of user  2106  and in the direction of the second device  2110 . This can be done, for example, when device  2110  is also listening to the voice command input. In some examples, devices  2100  and  2110  can both detect voice user input  2108 . In such examples, device  2110  can better suited (e.g., is a shorter distance from the user, has a more sensitive microphone, has faster speech processing hardware) for detecting the voice user input (e.g.,  2108 ). Thus, for example, device  2100  can reduce the output of an audible signal so as to reduce an influence on the device  2110  (e.g., thus reducing interference with device  2110 &#39;s audio detection function). In some embodiments, the first device (e.g., device  2100 ) uses a known influence (e.g., that its audio output has) on the second device (e.g., device  211 ) to adjust output. In some embodiments, the first device (e.g., device  2100 ) determines a known influence based on data received from the second device (e.g., device  2110 ). For example, device  2100  can receive (e.g., from device  2110 ) data representing an influence that audio output from device  2100  has on detection circuitry (e.g., a microphone array) of device  2110 . In some embodiments, a known influence is determined during playback (e.g., device  2100  determines a known influence while outputting the audible signal  2104 ). For instance, in some examples, device  2100  and device  2110  are outputting the same output signal, and device  2100  thus uses the known output signal to reduce interference with any input signal (e.g., voice input) from user  2106  (e.g., device  2100  subtracts one signal from the other before signal output). In some embodiments, a known influence is predetermined data retrieved from memory (e.g., previously determined and subsequently retrieved from memory of device  2100 ). In some embodiments, a known influence (e.g., on a second device) includes data regarding the influence of one or more of the following characteristics of audio output by the first device: frequency, volume, and direction. 
       FIGS. 21F and 21G  illustrate an exemplary adjustment of output of device  2100 . As shown, device  2100  includes a speaker array (e.g., one or more speakers) of three speakers (e.g.,  2102 A- 2102 C), each pointing in different directions (e.g., directions 120 degrees apart). In some embodiments, a speaker array includes any number of two or more speakers. Before adjustment (e.g., before detection of voice user input  2108 ), the output levels of the speakers  2102 A- 2102 C are shown in  FIG. 21F . As shown in  FIG. 21G , in response to detecting voice user input  2108 , device  2100  reduces the output of speaker  2102 B (e.g., which faces the user  2106 ) to zero (e.g., zero volume), and slightly reduces the output of speakers  2102 A and  2102 C. 
     In some embodiments, a first device performs an audio processing technique. For example, device  2100  can perform an audio processing technique to project the audio output so that it is perceived by a user to be in a direction away from the user. For example, device  2100  performs a spatial audio processing technique on one or more signals representing the audio output. The spatial audio processing technique, in some examples, is used to transform the one or more signals representing the audio output, when outputted by the device, is perceived by a listener to emanate from a selected spatial position. One of skill in the art would recognize that various appropriate techniques can be used for performing such audio processing, all of which are intended to be within the scope of this disclosure. 
       FIG. 21H  illustrates the overhead view of devices  2100  and  2110  and user  2106 , and includes two points—a first point  2132  (e.g., representing a spatial position) that is in a direction away from user  2106  (e.g., relative to device  2100 ), and a second point  2130  (e.g., representing a spatial position) that is in a direction toward the user (e.g., relative to device  2100 ). 
     In some embodiments, device  2100  adjusts audio output such that it will be perceived by a voice command source (e.g., user  2106 ) to emanate from a point in a direction away from them (e.g., relative to device  2100 ). For example, in response to detecting voice user input  2108 , the device can adjust the output of  2104  (e.g., playback of music as shown in  FIG. 21I ) so that the user  2106  perceives the sound to emanate from point  2132 , rather than from the position of device  2100 . Thus, while user is speaking, for example, they are provided an indication that device  2100  is currently listening (e.g., even though it continues playing back media) when they perceive the volume of audio output to be lowered (e.g., in comparison to the audible output prior to adjustment, as seen in  FIG. 21B ). Further, in this example, media playback is not interrupted (e.g., paused, stopped, muted) by a user voice command. 
     In some embodiments, device  2100  adjusts audio output such that it will be perceived by a voice command source (e.g., user  2106 ) to emanate from a point in a direction toward them (e.g., relative to device  2100 ). For example, as shown in  FIG. 21I , in response to detecting voice user input  2108  (e.g., a command to a voice assistant function on device  2100 ), device  2100  outputs a response  2140  (e.g., text-to-speech output “OK, I&#39;ll set a timer for 30 minutes”) in a direction toward user  2106  (e.g., toward point  2130  of  FIG. 21H ). In this example, voice user input  2108  included the command “Hey Siri, set a timer for 30 minutes”. Thus, user  2106  perceives the response sound (e.g.,  2140 ) to emanate from point  2130 . Thus, device  2100  utilizes a known spatial position of a voice command source to target an audible response in the direction of the source. Thus, the user is provided a response that is more likely to be heard by the user. For example, if the user is in a noisy environment, targeting the audio output to the user&#39;s position can increase the likelihood that the user hears the output of device  2100 . Further, in this example, media playback is not interrupted (e.g., paused, stopped, muted at least in directions facing away from the voice command source) while providing response sound  2140 , since response sound  2140  is directed towards the user is therefore readily perceptible, even while media playback continues. Further, if there are multiple users in a room, device  2100 &#39;s spatially-targeted output can provide increased privacy by targeting a response such that other, non-targeted users are less likely to hear. 
       FIGS. 22A-22B  is a flow diagram illustrating a method for adjusting audible output using an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. Method  2200  is performed at a device (e.g.,  100 ,  300 ,  500 ,  580 ). Some operations in method  2200  are, optionally, combined, the order of some operations are, optionally, changed, and some operations are, optionally, omitted. 
     As described below, method  2200  provides an intuitive way for adjusting audible output. The method reduces the cognitive burden on a user for adjusting audible output, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated computing devices, enabling a user to adjust audible output faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges. 
     While outputting an audible signal (e.g.,  2104 ) from the electronic device (e.g.,  2100 ), the electronic device (e.g.,  2100 ) detects a ( 2202 ) user input voice command (e.g.,  2108 ) from a voice command source (e.g.,  2106 ). 
     In response to detecting the user input voice command, the electronic device (e.g.,  2100 ) determines ( 2204 ) a spatial position (e.g., angle  2122  and/or distance  2124  of  FIG. 21C ) of the voice command source (e.g.,  2106 ) relative to the electronic device (e.g.,  2100 ). In some embodiments, determining a spatial position includes determining one or more of a distance (e.g.,  2124  of  FIG. 21C ) and an angle (e.g.,  2122  of  FIG. 21C ) to the voice command source (e.g., a user speaking). For example, an angle can be a lateral angle or a vertical angle relative to a coordinate system of the electronic device. 
     While continuing to output the audible signal (e.g.,  2104 ), the electronic device (e.g.,  2100 ) adjusts ( 2206 ) the output (e.g., volume, frequency, and/or direction) of the audible signal based on the spatial position of the voice command source (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 12D ). In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g.,  2100 ) applies spatial domain audio processing to the audible signal. In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g.,  2100 ) projects the output of the audible signal (e.g., sound) in one or more directions other than a direction toward the voice command source (e.g.,  2106 ). In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g.,  2100 ) projects the output in a direction away from the voice command source. In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g.,  2100 ) includes an array (e.g., two or more) of speakers. In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g.,  2100 ) adjusts the outputs of each speaker in the array of speakers. For example, the electronic device (e.g.,  2100 ) adjusts the relative output of one or more speakers in the array to spatially-target output of the audible signal in a direction other than toward the voice command source. In some examples, the electronic device (e.g.,  2100 ) lowers the output volume (e.g., to zero) of a speaker (e.g., of an array of speakers) that is outputting the audible signal and that is nearest to the spatial position. 
     Adjusting the output of an audible signal, while continuing to output it, based on a spatial position determined in response to a user input voice command provides the user with feedback that their voice command is being detected. Providing improved audible feedback to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the device is a first device, and the audible signal is a first audible signal. In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g.,  2100 ) determines ( 2208 ) that a second device (e.g.,  2110 ) is currently outputting a second audible signal (e.g.,  2112 ). For example, the first and second device are currently playing the same content (e.g., are a device group), or the first device detects (e.g., via one or more microphones) that the second device is outputting audio (e.g., which can be a different audio signal). 
     In some embodiments, adjusting, by the first device (e.g.,  2100 ), the output of the first audible signal is further based on ( 2210 ) a known influence that audio output by the first device has on the second device (e.g.,  2110 ). For example, the second device may be closer to the voice command source (e.g.,  2106 ), and thus may be the most appropriate device to listen to the user input voice command (e.g.,  2108 ). In some embodiments, the audio output of the first device is adjusted so as to reduce interference with the second device&#39;s ability to detect and/or process the user input voice command. For example, the second device includes a microphone for detecting voice input and the first device adjusts its output so as to reduce interference with the second devices use of its microphone to detect voice user input. In some embodiments, the known influence is determined (e.g., by device  2100 ) based on the spatial position of the second device (e.g., relative to the position of the first device). In some embodiments, the known influence is based on data received from the second device (e.g., the second device transmits quantitative data regarding how the output of audible signals by the first device affects the audio detection circuitry (e.g., microphone) of the second device). 
     In some embodiments, the first device (e.g.,  2100 ) adjusts the output (e.g., volume, frequency, and/or direction) of the audible signal based on the spatial position of second device (e.g.,  2110 ) (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 21E ). 
     In some embodiments, the device (e.g.,  2100 ) includes a speaker array (e.g., two or more speakers, such as speakers  2102 A- 2102 C of  FIG. 21F ), wherein each speaker in the speaker array (e.g.,  2102 A- 2102 C) receives a respective output signal ( 2212 ). In some embodiments, adjusting the output of the audible signal based comprises ( 2212 ): performing ( 2214 ) an audio processing technique using at least: the respective output signals of each speaker in the speaker array (e.g., as illustrated in  FIG. 21F ), and the spatial position of the voice command source (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 21C ). In some embodiments, adjusting the output of the audible signal based comprises ( 2212 ): adjusting ( 2216 ) at least one of the respective output signals corresponding to a speaker of the speaker array (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 21G , in which speaker  2102 B&#39;s output volume level has been reduced). 
     In some embodiments, the audio processing technique includes transforming the audio output into the spatial domain and applying one or more filters (e.g., head-related transfer functions (HRTFs). For example, the filter can create a three-dimensional audio effect at a position that is laterally located in the opposite direction of the voice command source (e.g., point  2132  as shown in  FIG. 21H ). Thus, if a user is located at a position that is at some lateral angular position relative to the device (e.g., an angular position relative to the speaker that will be referred to as 0 degrees for reference), the speaker can apply a 3D audio effect to adjust the output of the audible signal so that the user perceives the audio to be emanating from an angular position of 180 degrees relative to the speaker (e.g., point  2132  as shown in  FIG. 21H ). In some embodiments, the audio processing includes a cross-talk cancellation (CTC) process. In some embodiments, the audio processing technique includes a beamforming process (e.g., using constructive and/or destructive interference of sound waves to achieve spatial selectiveness of audio output). Any technique for creating a perceived spatial audio effect to a human listener is intended to be within the scope of this disclosure. 
     In some embodiments, the spatial position is a first spatial position (e.g.,  2130  of  FIG. 21H ), and wherein adjusting the output of the audible signal further comprises outputting the audible signal (e.g.,  2104 ) such that it will be perceived, by a listener (e.g., user  2106 ) at the first spatial position (e.g.,  2130  of  FIG. 21H ), to emanate from a second spatial position (e.g.,  2132  of  FIG. 21H ) that is in a direction, relative to the device (e.g.,  2100 ), away from the first spatial position of the voice command source. For example, device  2100  applies a 3D audio effect such that a human listener located at the user&#39;s position will perceive the output (e.g.,  2104 ) to be emanating from the spatial position that is in a direction away from the user, relative to the device. 
     In some embodiments, subsequent to adjusting the output of the audible signal: the electronic device (e.g.,  2100 ) detects that the user input voice command (e.g.,  2108 ) from the voice command source (e.g.,  2106 ) has ended. In response to detecting that the user input voice command from the voice command source has ended, the electronic device (e.g.,  2100 ) ceases adjusting the output the audible signal. For example, the adjusted audio output (shown in  FIG. 12G ) returns to its previous unadjusted state (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 21F ). 
     In some embodiments, determining the spatial position of the voice command source relative to the device comprises: determining a distance (e.g.,  2124 ) of the voice command source relative (e.g.,  2106 ) to the electronic device (e.g.,  2100 ), and determining an angular position (e.g., a lateral or vertical angle) (e.g.,  2122 ) of the voice command source relative to the device. 
     In some embodiments, the audible signal (e.g.,  2104 ) is a first audible signal, and while adjusting the output of the audible signal (e.g.,  2104  as shown in  FIG. 21D ): the electronic device (e.g.,  2100 ) outputs ( 2218 ) a second audio signal (e.g.  2140 ) based on the spatial position of the voice command source. 
     In some embodiments, the spatial position (e.g., position of user  2106  in  FIG. 21I ) is a first spatial position, and outputting the second audible signal (e.g.,  2140  as shown in  FIG. 21I ) comprises outputting the second audible signal such that it will be perceived, by a listener at the first spatial position, to emanate from a third spatial position (e.g., point  2130 ) that is in a direction, relative to the device, toward the first spatial position of the voice command source. 
     In some embodiments, the first audible signal represents playback of a media item (e.g., a song, video audio), and wherein the second audible signal represents a virtual assistant output (e.g., a voice assistant output  2140 , as shown in  FIG. 21I ). 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g.,  2100 ) includes a plurality of microphones (e.g., a microphone array). 
     Note that details of the processes described above with respect to method  2200  (e.g.,  FIGS. 22A-22B ) are also applicable in an analogous manner to the methods described below/above. For example, method  700 ,  900 ,  1100 ,  1300 ,  1500 ,  1700 ,  1800 ,  2000 ,  2400 ,  2600 ,  2800 ,  3000 ,  3200 ,  3400 ,  3600 ,  3800 , and  3900  optionally includes one or more of the characteristics of the various methods described above with reference to method  2200 . For brevity, these details are not repeated below. 
       FIGS. 23A-23K  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for blended taste profile playback queues, in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIGS. 24A-24B . 
       FIG. 23A  illustrates an exemplary scenario in which a plurality of devices are connected. Specifically, device  2300  is a smart speaker that is connected to both devices  2302  and  2310  (e.g., personal devices). In some embodiments, device  2300  includes one or more features of devices  100 ,  300 ,  500 , or  580 . In some embodiments, devices  2302  and  2304  include one or more features of devices  100 ,  300 ,  500 , or  580 . In some examples, the respective users of devices  2302  and  2310  may desire to playback media based on both of their taste profiles. In some examples, devices  2300 ,  2302 , and/or  2310  are used to create, maintain and/or store a playback queue based on a plurality of taste profiles.  FIGS. 23B-23K  illustrate exemplary interfaces for doing so. 
       FIG. 23B  illustrates an exemplary playback queue interface. In this example, playlist interface  2312  represents the playlist named “Users Nearby” and includes media items  2314 A- 2314 C. In some embodiments, a device (e.g.,  2300 ) automatically generates (e.g., creates or populates with media items) a media playback queue based on the taste profiles of connected devices. For example, device  2300  creates (or otherwise populate with media items) the playlist “Users Nearby” based on taste profiles associated with devices (e.g., or users associated with those devices) connected to device  2300 . Thus, as shown in  FIG. 23B , the playlist  2312  (displayed by device  2310 ) is created and the media items  2314 A- 2314 C are added to the playlist automatically in response to detecting that a single device is connected (e.g., device  2310 ) to device  2300  (e.g., on the same Wi-Fi network, via Bluetooth, or the like). In some embodiments, a device (e.g.,  2300 ) automatically generates a media playback queue (e.g., the playlist named “Users Nearby” (displayed by device  2310 ) depicted in  FIG. 23B ) in response to detecting that the device (e.g.,  2300 ) is connected to one or more other devices (e.g.,  2302  or  2310 ). 
       FIGS. 23C-23D  illustrate depictions of exemplary taste profiles of two users, and two exemplary combined taste profiles. In some embodiments, a device (e.g.,  2300 ) generates a playback queue based on one or more taste profiles. In some embodiments, a device (e.g.,  2300 ) generates a playback queue based on a combined taste profile. 
       FIG. 23C  illustrates taste profile  2316 A (of a first user) and taste profile  2316 B (of a second user). Taste profile  2316 A includes the media preferences: Music Genre  1 , Music Genre  2 , and Music Genre  3 . Taste profile  2316 B includes the media preferences: Music Genre  2 , Music Genre  3 , and Music Genre  4 . Thus, taste profiles  2316 A and  2316 B have some overlap in media preference. In some embodiments, a device (e.g.,  2300 ) generates a combined taste profile based on an overlap of media preferences. For example, device  2300  generates combined taste profile  2316 C, which includes the media preferences that are common to both taste profile  2316 A and  2316 B, namely the media preferences: Music Genre  2  and Music Genre  3 . Thus, generating a playback queue using the combined taste profile  2316 C will result in a playback queue that includes media items that the users associated with the taste profiles  2316 A and  2316 B are both likely to enjoy. 
       FIG. 23D  illustrates taste profile  2318 A (of a first user) and taste profile  2318 B (of a second user). Taste profile  2318 A includes the media preferences: Music Genre  1  and Music Genre  2 . Taste profile  2318 B includes the media preferences: Music Genre  3  and Music Genre  4 . Thus, taste profiles  2318 A and  2318 B do not have overlap in media preference. In some embodiments, a device (e.g.,  2300 ) generates a combined taste profile based on one or more media preferences for each taste profile associated with a detected. For example, device  2300  generates combined taste profile  2318 C, which includes at least one media preference from each of taste profile  2318 A and  2318 B, namely the media preferences: Music Genre  1 , Music Genre  2 , Music Genre  3 , and Music Genre  4 . Thus, generating a playback queue using the combined taste profile  2318 C will result in a playback queue includes media items that at least one user associated with the profiles  2318 A and  2318 B is likely to enjoy. 
     In some embodiments, a device (e.g.,  2300 ) populates (e.g., adds media items to) an existing media playback queue in response to detecting a device associated with a taste profile. Thus, in some examples, device  2300  dynamically updates a queue based user taste profiles as more users are detected.  FIG. 23E  illustrates playlist  2312  (displayed by device  2310 ), but it has been updated to include media items  2314 D and  2314 E. For example, device  2300  added media items  2314 D and  2314 E in response to detecting connection to device  2302 . In this example, device  2300  updated the combined taste profile (e.g., used to populate playlist  2312 ) based on the taste profile associated with device  2302 . 
     In some embodiments, a device (e.g.,  2300 ) removes media items from a playback queue in response to no longer detecting a device associated with a taste profile. For example, device  2300  updates a queue to cater to the users that remain connected. For instance, in response to device  2302  no longer being detected by device  2300 , device  2300  can remove media items  2314 D and  2314 E from playlist  2312 . Thus, media playback can be tailored to users who remain present in a location (e.g., connected to device  2300 ) even as users come and go, without requiring excessive user inputs to do so. 
     In some embodiments, a device (e.g.,  2300 ) creates a playback queue based on a plurality of taste profiles in response to user input.  FIGS. 23F-23K  illustrate exemplary interfaces for doing so. 
       FIG. 23F  illustrates an exemplary playlist selection interface  2320 , that includes a playlist creation affordance  2320 A. At  FIG. 23G , device  2310  receives user input  2322  representing selection of affordance  2320 A. 
     In response to user input  2320 A, device  2310  displays playlist creation interface  2324  ( FIG. 23H ). Playlist creation interface  2324  includes a title  2324 A (“Dinner Party”), an affordance  2324 B for making the playlist public (e.g., make it a shared playlist that can be viewable by other users, editable by other users, or the like), and an affordance  2324 C for adding music to the playlist. At  FIG. 23I , device  2310  receives user input  2326  representing selection of affordance  2324 C. 
     In some embodiments, a device (e.g.,  2310 ) displays a prompt to create a queue based on a plurality of taste profiles of detected devices in response to receiving user input (e.g.,  2326 ). As shown in  FIG. 23J , in response to receiving user input  2326 , device  2310  displays message  2328 , which reads: “The following users have been detected in your home: Tim, Jessica, Sophia, and Zachary. Would you like to create a playlist based on each user&#39;s tastes?” In response to selection of affordance  2328 A, device  2310  generates a playback queue (e.g., such as illustrated in  FIG. 23E ) based on the plurality of taste profiles associated with the detected devices (e.g., corresponding to the users named Tim, Jessica, Sophia, and Zachary). Thus, as shown in the example in  FIGS. 23H-23J , device  2310  determines that a user is attempting to make a playlist and displays a prompt to create a queue based on the taste profiles of detected users. 
     As described above, a device can automatically generate a playback queue based on a plurality of taste profiles. In some embodiments, a device (e.g.,  2300 ,  2310 ) generates the queue based on a plurality of taste profile in response to user input activating (e.g., opening) a media application. For example,  FIG. 23K  illustrates playlist selection interface  2320  (similar to  FIG. 23F ), but it has been updated to include an affordance  2320 B representing a playlist that was automatically generated based on the taste profiles of detected users (e.g. Tim, Jessica, and 2 others). Thus, when a user opens a music application to browse playlists, a playlist based on a combined taste profile of detected users can already exist (e.g., and be displayed), reducing the number of inputs required to create and/or access such a queue. 
       FIGS. 24A-24B  is a flow diagram illustrating a method for maintaining a queue based on multiple user taste profiles using an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. Method  2400  is performed at a device (e.g.,  100 ,  300 ,  500 ,  580 ). Some operations in method  2400  are, optionally, combined, the order of some operations are, optionally, changed, and some operations are, optionally, omitted. 
     As described below, method  2400  provides an intuitive way for maintaining a queue based on multiple user taste profiles. The method reduces the cognitive burden on a user for maintaining a queue based on multiple user taste profiles, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated computing devices, enabling a user to maintain a queue based on multiple user taste profiles faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges. 
     The electronic device (e.g.,  2300  or  2302 ), which is a first device, detects ( 2402 ) that a second device (e.g.,  2310 ) associated with a second user account (e.g., an iCloud account) is connected to the first device (e.g.,  2300  or  2302 ). For example, the second device is connected to the same Wi-Fi network, within Bluetooth range of the first device, or the like. The first device is associated ( 2404 ) with a first user account (e.g., an iCloud account). The first user account is associated ( 2406 ) with a first media preference profile (e.g.,  2316 A or  2318 A). In some embodiments, a media preference profile includes data representing media items or information for identifying media items that represents the preferences of the owner of the first user account. In some embodiments, a preference profile includes one or more media items. For example, the profile includes identifiers for media (e.g., songs, videos) that the first user account has saved, liked, listened to (e.g., a plurality of times), or otherwise indicates that the owner of the first user account likes a media item. In some embodiments, the preference profile includes generalized information for identifying media items. For example, generalized information can include a genre (e.g., type of music), an artist, an album (e.g., comprised of a plurality of media items). Such generalized information can be used to identify media items by matching, for example, metadata associated with media items to the generalized information. The second user account is associated ( 2408 ) with a second media preference profile (e.g.,  2316 B or  2318 B) different than the first media preference profile. 
     The first device (e.g.,  2300  or  2302 ) initiates ( 2410 ) playback of media based on the first media preference profile and the second media preference profile. 
     Initiating playback of media based on first and second media profiles associated with first and second devices that are connected provides users with an improved media playback feature for creating playback queues according to the tastes of multiple users whose devices are connected while reducing redundant user inputs at each device. Providing improved media playback features to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the first device (e.g.,  2300  or  2302 ) determines ( 2412 ) a combined preference profile (e.g.,  2316 C or  2318 C) based on the first media preference profile (e.g.,  2316 A or  2318 A) and the second media preference profile (e.g.,  2316 B or  2318 B). 
     In some embodiments, determining a combined preference profile based on the first media preference profile and the second media preference profile comprises: determining ( 2414 ) a media preference that is related to both the first media preference profile and the second media preference profile. In some embodiments, a media preference includes one or more of a genre of media (e.g., music), an artist, a media item (e.g., a song), or the like. In some embodiments, a media preference that is related to both is a media preference that is common to both profiles (e.g.,  2316 C). In some embodiments, a media preference that is related to both is a media preference that is a subset or superset of both profiles. For example, rock and roll music is a superset of rock and roll music from the year 1987. 
     In some embodiments, while continuing to detect that the second device (e.g.,  2310 ) is connected to the first device ( 2416 ): the first device (e.g.,  2300  or  2302 ) adds ( 2418 ) a plurality of media items (e.g.,  2314 D and  2314 E of  FIG. 23E ) to a playback queue (e.g., the playlist “Users Nearby” shown in  FIG. 23E ) based on the first media preference profile (e.g.,  2316 A or  2318 A) and the second media preference profile (e.g.,  2316 B or  2318 B). In some embodiments, the first device (e.g.,  2300  or  2302 ) initiates ( 2420 ) playback of the plurality of media items. 
     In some embodiments, the first device (e.g.,  2300  or  2302 ) receives a request (e.g., selection of affordance  2314 F) to initiate playback on the first device, and in response to receiving the request, initiates the playback of media based on the first media preference profile and the second media preference profile. 
     In some embodiments, the request (e.g., selection of  2314 F) is received from the second device (e.g.,  2310 ). For example, a guest device (e.g., not associated with the device or the home set of devices) initiates playback of a playback queue that includes a media items pertaining to a blended taste profile. 
     In some embodiments, the first device includes a display (e.g.,  2302 ), and wherein the method further comprises: displaying, on the display, an affordance (e.g., a “play now” affordance (e.g.,  2314 F), a media item in a playlist (e.g.,  2314 D), a “shuffle all” affordance, or the like), and wherein receiving the request to initiate playback on the first device comprises receiving user input selection of the affordance (e.g.,  2314 F). In response to receiving user input selection of the affordance, the first device (e.g.,  2300  or  2302 ) initiates the playback of media based on the first media preference profile and the second media preference profile. 
     In some embodiments, initiating playback of media based on the first media preference profile and the second media preference profile comprises: transmitting an instruction to a third device (e.g.,  2300 ) to initiate playback. 
     In some embodiments, the first device (e.g.,  2300  or  2302 ) receives ( 2422 ) a media item (e.g., an identifier of a media item, a link to the media item, or a copy of the media item). In response to receiving the media item ( 2424 ): in accordance with a determination that the media item was received from the first device, the first device (e.g.,  2300  or  2302 ) updates ( 2426 ) the first media preference profile based on the media item (e.g.,  2316 A or  2318 A); and in accordance with a determination that the media item was received from the second device (e.g.,  2310 ), the first device (e.g.,  2300  or  2302 ) forgoes updating ( 2428 ) the first media preference profile based on the media item. For example, if the media item was added to a blended taste profile queue by a device not associated with a user account of the device managing or storing the queue (e.g., the owner&#39;s device), the owner&#39;s taste profile is not updated based on the addition of that media item to the queue. 
     Note that details of the processes described above with respect to method  2400  (e.g.,  FIGS. 24A-24B ) are also applicable in an analogous manner to the methods described below/above. For example, method  700 ,  900 ,  1100 ,  1300 ,  1500 ,  1700 ,  1800 ,  2000 ,  2200 ,  2600 ,  2800 ,  3000 ,  3200 ,  3400 ,  3600 ,  3800 , and  3900  optionally includes one or more of the characteristics of the various methods described above with reference to method  2400 . For brevity, these details are not repeated below. 
       FIGS. 25A-25I  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for allowing guest playback on a set of devices, in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIGS. 26A-26B . 
       FIG. 25A  illustrates an exemplary scenario in which a plurality of devices are connected. Specifically, device  2500  is a smart speaker that is connected to both devices  2502  and  2504  (e.g., personal devices). In some embodiments, device  2500  includes one or more features of devices  100 ,  300 ,  500 , or  580 . In some embodiments, devices  2502  and  2504  include one or more features of devices  100 ,  300 ,  500 , or  580 . In this example, the user (also referred to as a first user) of device  2504  is associated with a user account that is associated with device  2500  (e.g., both device  2504  and  2500  are members of a home set of devices, as described above with respect to  FIG. 6A ). Further, in this example, the user of device  2502  is not associated with device  2500  (e.g., is a guest of (e.g., not a member of) the home that includes the home set of devices). The user (also referred to as a second user) of device  2502  may desire access to device  2500 , for example, to initiate playback therefrom.  FIGS. 25B-25I  illustrate exemplary interfaces for requesting and granting access, in accordance with some embodiments. 
       FIG. 25B  illustrates an exemplary current media interface. As shown, device  2502  (e.g., the guest device) displays current media interface  2506  on display  2503 . As shown, device  2502  is currently playing back a media item (“Same Thing”) on itself (e.g., as indicated by device selection affordance  2506 A, which identifies device  2502 , named “iPhone”). At  FIG. 25C , device  2502  receives user input  2508  representing selection of device selection affordance  2506 A. 
     In response to user input  2508 , device  2502  displays exemplary multi-device interface  2510  ( FIG. 25D ). In some embodiments, multi-device interface  2510  is a multi-device interface such as multi-device interface  610  of  FIGS. 6H-6N  and multi-device interface  810  of  FIGS. 8C-8P , discussed above. In this example, the devices listed in interface  2510  (except  2510 A, “iPhone”, which represents device  2502 ) are devices associated with the first user (e.g., associated with device  2504  and device  2500 ) that are members of the home set of devices. At  FIG. 25D , device  2502  receives user input  2512  representing selection of indicator  2510 C, which is associated with indicator  2510 B, representing the device named “Living Room” (e.g., device  2500 ). In some embodiments, device  2502  transmits a request to initiate playback on the selected set of devices (e.g., transmits a request to  2500 ). 
     In response to receiving selection of the device named “Tim&#39;s Living Room” (e.g., user input  2512 ), device  2502  displays message  2514  ( FIG. 25E ), which prompts the user to “Please wait”. In some examples, message  2514  is displayed while permission for device  2502  is being requested (e.g., at another device). For example, subsequent to transmitting a request to initiate playback to device  2500  (e.g., and while device  2502  is awaiting confirmation that playback has been initiated or permission has not been granted), device  2502  displays message  2514 . In some embodiments, the ability of device  2502  to initiate playback on a device with which it is not associated (e.g., device  2502  is not associated with same user account, or is not a member of a common set of devices (e.g., home set devices) with device  2500 ) is subject to permission from another device associated with device  2500 . In some embodiments, the requesting device (e.g.,  2502 ) transmits a request for permission to a device (e.g., device  2500  or device  2504 ) of the set of devices associated with (e.g., that includes) device  2500 . For example, in response to a user input request to initiate playback on a device of a home set of devices, device  2502  transmits a request for permission to one or more devices in the home set of devices (e.g., device  2500 , or another device in the set of devices). In some embodiments, the request is transmitted by the requesting device (e.g.,  2500 ) to another device (e.g., with a display) of the set of devices (e.g., device  2504 ). For example, device  2500  receives the playback request from device  2502  and, in response, transmits the request for permission (e.g., for device  2502 ) to device  2504 . 
       FIGS. 25F-25G  illustrate exemplary permission request interfaces. In some embodiments, a permission request interface (e.g.,  2516  or  2518 ) is displayed on a device (e.g., by device  2504 ) of the set of devices (e.g.,  2500  and  2504 ) in response to a request to initiate playback on a device (e.g.,  2500 ) of the set of devices by a device (e.g.,  2502 ) that is not included in the set of devices. 
     At  FIG. 25F , device  2504  (e.g., which is included in the home set of devices) displays permission request interface  2516 , which includes affordances for granting permission ( 2516 A) and denying permission ( 2516 B). For example, user input associated with  2516 A will grant device  2502  permission to initiate media playback of “Same Thing” on device  2500 , and user input user input associated with  2516 B will deny device  2502  such permission. In some embodiments, a permission request interface includes information about the request to initiate playback on the set of devices. In some embodiments, the information includes one or more of, but is not limited to, an identification of: the device requesting initiation of playback (e.g.,  2502 ), a user (e.g., a user account) associated with the request (e.g., the user of  2502 ), and an identification of the devices on which playback is requested (e.g., the device  2500  named Living Room). As shown in  FIG. 25F , interface  2516  includes the information: “Would you like to allow Bob to play music in the Living Room?”, which identifies the user (e.g., named Bob) requesting initiation of playback and the device on which they are requesting it (e.g., named or located in the Living Room). 
     In some embodiments, a permission interface allows selection of a plurality of different permission levels. In some embodiments, a permission level grants conditional permission. For example, permission request interface  2518  ( FIG. 25G ) includes a plurality of permission levels (associated with affordances  2518 A- 2518 D) that can be granted by the user of device  2504 : “Always Allow” (e.g., always allow the user Bob to initiate playback), “Allow Once” (e.g., allow the current request, but not future requests from Bob), “Not Now” (e.g., deny the current request, but ask permission for future requests from Bob), and “Never Allow” (e.g., deny the currently request and all future requests from Bob). 
       FIG. 25H  illustrates an updated current media interface  2506  displayed on device  2502 . In some embodiments, the updated current media interface  2506  is displayed in response to device  2502  being granted permission (e.g., user input associated with affordance  2516 A at device  2504 ). As shown, device selection affordance  2506 A indicates that playback is occurring on device  2500  and device  2502  (e.g., the devices selected at  FIG. 25D ). In some embodiments, the current media interface includes an indication of a user associated with the device of the set of devices. For example, as shown in  FIG. 25H , device selection affordance  2506 A identifies the Living Room device as “Tim&#39;s Living Room” (e.g., wherein “Tim” is a user associated with device  2500 ). 
     In some embodiments, playback of media by guests (e.g., by device  2502 ) on a device of the home set of devices does not affect a preference profile and/or playback history of a user associated with the set of devices. For example,  FIG. 25I  illustrates an exemplary interface  2520  for browsing the recently played media items by the user Tim (e.g., the user of device  2504 ). In some embodiments, device  2504  displays interface  2520  subsequent to user input granting permission to a device that is not a member of the set of devices (e.g., to device  2502 ). As shown, the recently played media items  2520 A- 2520 C do not include the media item “Same Thing” that was played back in response to the request by device  2502 . 
       FIGS. 26A-26B  is a flow diagram illustrating a method for allowing a guest device to initiate playback using an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. Method  2600  is performed at a device (e.g.,  100 ,  300 ,  500 ,  580 ). Some operations in method  2600  are, optionally, combined, the order of some operations are, optionally, changed, and some operations are, optionally, omitted. 
     As described below, method  2600  provides an intuitive way for allowing a guest device to initiate playback. The method reduces the cognitive burden on a user for allowing a guest device to initiate playback, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated computing devices, enabling a user to allowing a guest device to initiate playback faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges. 
     The electronic device (e.g.,  2500 ), which is a first device, receives a request ( 2602 ), from a third device (e.g.,  2502 ), to initiate media playback on at least one device of a set of devices (e.g., a set that includes devices  2500  and  2504 ). 
     In some embodiments, the set of devices comprises ( 2604 ) the first device (e.g.,  2500 ) and a second device (e.g.,  2504 ). In some embodiments, the set of devices is a home set of devices (e.g., configured using a home control application as described with respect to  FIG. 6A ). For example, the set of devices includes one or more devices associated with one or more members of a household. In some embodiments, a member of the household is identified by device (e.g., from which a request originates) and/or by one or more user accounts associated with one or more devices (e.g., the user&#39;s devices are each logged into the user&#39;s iCloud account). Thus, a household can be defined as devices associated with a set of user accounts. In some embodiments, the set of user accounts comprises a single user account. In some embodiments, the set of user accounts comprises more than one user account. 
     In some embodiments, the third device is not a ( 2606 ) member of the set of devices. For example, the third device belongs to a guest or visitor to the home that includes the set of devices. For example, the third device can be associated with a user account that is not a member of the set of user accounts that comprise the set of users making up the household.), and 
     In some embodiments, the third device (e.g.,  2502 ) is connected to ( 2608 ) the first device (e.g.,  2500 ). In some examples, the devices are connected via Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, or the like. 
     In some embodiments, in response to receiving the request ( 2610 ): in accordance with a determination that the third device (e.g.,  2502 ) has permission (e.g., previously granted by member of the home) to initiate media playback on the at least one device (e.g.,  2500 ) of set of devices, the electronic device (e.g.,  2500 ) initiates ( 2612 ) media playback on the set of devices (e.g.,  2500 ). In some embodiments, a set of devices includes one or more devices. 
     In accordance with a determination ( 2614 ) that the third device does not have permission to initiate media playback on the at least one device of set of devices: the electronic device (e.g.,  2500 ) transmits ( 2616 ) a request for permission (e.g., represented by  2516  of FIG.  25 F) to the second device (e.g.,  2504 ). For example, the second device displays a prompt (e.g., as shown in  2516  of  FIG. 25F ). 
     Requesting permission, by a first device, from a second device to initiate playback based on a request from a third device in response to the request provides users with the ability to quickly and dynamically request permission for media playback while reducing the number of user inputs required to navigate permissions menus or resend a request to initiate playback after being granted permission. Providing improved media playback permissions features to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In response to receiving permission from the second device, the electronic device (e.g.,  2500 ) initiates ( 2618 ) media playback on the at least one device (e.g.,  2500 ) of the set of devices. In some embodiments, initiating playback includes transmitting an instruction (e.g., to another device in the set of devices) to initiate playback. 
     In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that a first user account associated with the third device has permission to initiate media playback on the set of devices, the electronic device (e.g.,  2500 ) determines ( 2620 ) that the third device (e.g.,  2502 ) has permission (e.g., device  2502  has permission by virtue being associated with a user (e.g., user account) that has permission), wherein the first user account is not associated with any device of the set of devices (e.g., is an account (e.g., iCloud) of a guest user that is not associated with any device in the home of the home set of devices). In accordance with a determination that the first user account associated with the third device does not have permission to initiate media playback on the set of devices, the electronic device (e.g.,  2500 ) forgoes determining ( 2622 ) that the third device has permission. For example, if the user account associated with the third device does not have permission, playback does not initiate in response to a request from the third device. 
     In some embodiments, further in accordance with a determination that the third device does not have permission, the electronic device (e.g.,  2500 ) transmits ( 2624 ) the request for permission to a plurality of devices (e.g.,  2504  and another device (e.g., a personal device with a display), both associated with the home owner) that includes the second device (e.g.,  2504 ). For example, the plurality of devices are devices that are associated with the first device. In some embodiments, the first device and the plurality of devices are each associated with one or more user accounts that are not associated with the third device. For example, the plurality of devices can be other devices associated with an owner (e.g., their user account) of the first device (e.g., logged into a common account belonging to the owner, or logged in to accounts associated with a predefined group of users such as a family of the owner), but the third device is associated with a guest (e.g., with the guest&#39;s user account) to the owner&#39;s home. Thus, the third device is not included in the group of users in the owner&#39;s household. 
     In some embodiments, initiating media playback on the at least one device of the set of devices comprises: initiating playback on the first device (e.g.,  2500 ); and forgoing initiating playback on the second device (e.g.,  2504 ). Thus, in some examples, the device that initiates playback is not the device that granted permission. 
     In some embodiments, subsequent to receiving permission from the second device (e.g.,  2504 ): the electronic device (e.g.,  2500 ) receives a request, from the third device (e.g.,  2502 ), to initiate playback on a fourth device (e.g., another smart speaker device that is not device  2500 ), wherein the set of devices comprises the fourth device, and wherein the fourth device is not included in the at least one device of the set of devices (e.g., the original request (by device  2502 ) to initiate playback on device  2500  did not include a request to initiate playback on the fourth device.). In response to receiving the request to initiate playback on a fourth device, (by device  2502 ) initiates playback on the fourth device. In some embodiments, initiating playback includes transmitting an instruction (e.g., to another device) to initiate playback. For example, if the guest user subsequently selects additional devices (e.g., at a multi-device interface) in the home owner&#39;s home (e.g., after being granted permission to initiate playback on the first device  2500 ), the permission extends to other devices (e.g., all devices) associated with the home set of devices. 
     In some embodiments, subsequent to receiving permission from the second device: receiving a request, from the third device, to remove a media item (e.g., as shown in  FIGS. 16M-16O ) from a playback queue on the at least one device of the set of devices (e.g.,  2500 ). In response to receiving the request: in accordance with a determination that the media item was added to the playback queue by the third device (e.g., was added by the guest), the electronic device (e.g.,  2500 ) removes the media item from the playback queue. In accordance with a determination that that the media item was not added to the playback queue by the third device (e.g., not added by the guest), forgoing removing the media item from the playback queue. 
     In some embodiments, the first device is associated with a media preference profile (e.g.,  2316 A as shown in  FIG. 23C ), and further in response to receiving the request from the third device that is not a member of the set of devices, the electronic device (e.g.,  2500 ) forgoes updating the media preference profile based on the request. For example, device  2500  (e.g., which is associated with the home owner) does not update a taste profile associated with the owner&#39;s user account based on media items played back in response to a request for another user (e.g., a user associated with a guest user account). 
     Note that details of the processes described above with respect to method  2600  (e.g.,  FIGS. 26A-26B ) are also applicable in an analogous manner to the methods described below/above. For example, method  700 ,  900 ,  1100 ,  1300 ,  1500 ,  1700 ,  1800 ,  2000 ,  2200 ,  2400 ,  2800 ,  3000 ,  3200 ,  3400 ,  3600 ,  3800 , and  3900  optionally includes one or more of the characteristics of the various methods described above with reference to method  2400 . For brevity, these details are not repeated below. 
       FIGS. 27A-27E  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for providing data based on a physical position, in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIGS. 28A-28C . 
       FIG. 27A  illustrates an exemplary scenario in which two devices ( 2700  and  2702 ) are connected. In some embodiments, device  2700  includes one or more features of device  100 ,  300 ,  500 , and  580 . In some embodiments, device  2702  includes one or more features of device  100 ,  300 ,  500 , and  580 . In some examples, a user may wish to use device  2700  (e.g., a smart speaker) as an extension of device  2702  (e.g., a personal device), wherein device  2702  is associated with the user&#39;s account (e.g., a thus their account data). For example, utilizing a smart speaker as an extension of a device (e.g., to output audio, phone calls, dictated messages, or the like; and/or to detect user voice input) allows the user improved hands-free access to the functions of their personal device. Further example, such functionality can also extend the distance that a user can be from their personal device while maintaining the ability to access data from their personal device. However, providing unconditional access of data from a personal device to a public device (e.g., potentially used by more than one user in a household) can be undesirable to the owner of the personal device. Thus, access to data from the personal device can be subject to satisfaction of one or more conditions, such as physical position condition.  FIGS. 27B-27E  provide exemplary interfaces for facilitating the sharing of data from one device to another based on physical positioning. 
       FIG. 27B  illustrates an exemplary scenario in which the physical positioning of a device (e.g.,  2702 ) satisfies a permissive condition (e.g., is placed in close proximity to device  2700 ). In the example of  FIG. 27B , device  2700  received a user input request (e.g., a voice input), requesting the output of data from personal device  2702  through device  2700 . For example, the request is a user input voice request to dictate the user&#39;s messages stored on (or otherwise associated with) device  2702 . In response to the request, device  2700  determines that a physical positioning of device  2702  is in satisfaction of a physical position-based permissive condition. For example, device  2700  determines that device  2702  is in a permissive physical position (e.g., is in close proximity, such as within proximity zone  2704 ). In response to determining that the physical positioning of device  2702  satisfies a permissive condition, device  2700  outputs the data (e.g., dictation output  2706 ). Dictation output  2706  includes the response “You have  3  appointments today.” In this example, dictation output  2706  is output in response to the user input voice request “Do I have any appointments today?” 
       FIG. 27C  illustrates an exemplary scenario in which the physical positioning of a device (e.g.,  2702 ) does not satisfy a permissive condition. As shown, for example, device  2702  is not within proximity zone  2704  of device  2700 , which is the permissive condition in this example. Thus, in response to receiving voice input “Do I have any appointments today?”, device  2700  does not output the dictation shown in  FIG. 27B . In some embodiments, a device (e.g.,  2700 ) outputs an indication of how to satisfy the permissive condition. As shown, device  2700  outputs the dictation  2708  “Please move your phone closer”. 
     As illustrated above, a permissive condition can be based on device proximity. In some embodiments, a permissive condition is based on (or further based on) an orientation of a device (e.g.,  2702 ).  FIG. 27D  illustrates an exemplary scenario in which device  2702  is within close proximity to device  2700 , but does not satisfy a permissive condition. In the example shown in  FIG. 27D , the permissive condition is satisfied when device  2702  is in a permissive physical orientation. In some embodiments, an orientation of a device (e.g.,  2702 ) satisfies the permissive condition when the device is face up. For example, in  FIG. 27D , the main display (e.g., the “face” or “front” of the device) the main display  2703  of device  2702  is oriented down (e.g., the device is face down). In some embodiments, an orientation of a device satisfies the permissive condition when the device (e.g.,  2702 ) is pointing in a direction (e.g., from the top of the device) toward the second device (e.g.,  2700 ). In some embodiments, a permissive condition is satisfied when both a physical proximity and a physical orientation condition are satisfied. 
       FIG. 27E  illustrates an exemplary scenario in which the physical positioning of device  2702  satisfies the permissive condition.  FIG. 27E  illustrates that device  2700  can be used to output dictation of data from device  2702 . As shown, device  2700  outputs a dictation of a text message, the dictation being: “Text message from Bob, ‘Let&#39;s meet at 6 P.M.’”. 
       FIGS. 28A-28C  is a flow diagram illustrating a method for providing data based on a physical position using an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. Method  2800  is performed at a device (e.g.,  100 ,  300 ,  500 ,  580 ). Some operations in method  2800  are, optionally, combined, the order of some operations are, optionally, changed, and some operations are, optionally, omitted. 
     As described below, method  2800  provides an intuitive way for providing data based on a physical position. The method reduces the cognitive burden on a user for providing data based on a physical position, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated computing devices, enabling a user to provide data based on a physical position faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges. 
     The electronic device (e.g.,  2700 ), which is at a first device associated with a user account (e.g., logged into user&#39;s iCloud) receives ( 2802 ) user input (e.g., a user input voice command) representing a request to access data from the user account. In some embodiments, data from a user account can include one or more of: calendar data (e.g., meetings, events, or the like), messages (e.g., text messages, iMessages, emails, voice messages, or the like), notes, reminders (e.g., audio or text reminders), or the like. 
     In response to receiving ( 2804 ) the user input (e.g., user input voice command), the first device (e.g.,  2700 ) determines ( 2806 ) whether a physical positioning of the first device (e.g.,  2700 ) and a second device (e.g.,  2702 ) associated with the user account satisfies a permissive condition. In some embodiments, a permissive condition is satisfied when the second device is in close proximity to the first device (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 27B ). In some embodiments, a permissive condition is satisfied when a device orientation of the second device is a permissive orientation (e.g., lying face up on a surface) (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 27B ). 
     In accordance with a determination that the physical positioning satisfies the permissive condition, the first device (e.g.,  2700 ) provides ( 2808 ) the data from the user account through the first device (e.g., dictates the data, as shown in  FIG. 27B ). 
     In accordance with a determination that the physical positioning does not satisfy the permissive condition, the first device (e.g.,  2700 ) forgoes ( 2810 ) providing the data from the user account through the first device (e.g., requests that the second device is placed in close proximity, as shown in  FIG. 27C ; requests unlocking of second device, as shown in  FIG. 27D ). 
     Using a determination of whether the physical positioning of device satisfies a permissive condition provides the user with an easy technique for granting permission without extraneous user inputs. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, providing the data from the user account through the first device comprises: outputting ( 2812 ) an audio signal (e.g.,  2706  or  2712 ) representative of the data from the user account. 
     In some embodiments, outputting an audio signal representative of the data from the user account comprises: causing audible output ( 2814 ) of a dictation (e.g.,  2706  or  2712 ) representative of the data from the user account using a text-to-speech algorithm In some embodiments, the dictation is in a natural language (e.g., a spoken language such as English, Spanish, French, or the like). For example, the dictation comprises data being read aloud (e.g., using a text-to-speech algorithm) through a speaker of the first device. 
     In some embodiments, the data from the user account comprises data from one or more of: a calendar entry (e.g., a meeting, an appointment), a notification (e.g., of an incoming text message), an email, a text message, a stored text document (e.g., a note), stored contact information, phone call audio, video call audio or video (e.g., FaceTime, Skype), a voice message, an address (e.g., user&#39;s home), and a media item (e.g., music, video). 
     In some embodiments, determining whether the physical positioning of the first device and second device satisfies the permissive condition comprises: determining ( 2816 ) whether a physical proximity between the first device and the second device satisfies a proximity condition (e.g., the first and second device are in close proximity to each other). 
     In some embodiments, determining whether the physical positioning of the first device and second device satisfies the permissive condition comprises: determining whether ( 2818 ) a physical orientation of the first device satisfies an orientation condition. In some embodiments, the physical orientation can be detected via sensors on the second device (e.g., and communicated to the first device), such as one or more of: accelerometer, ambient light sensor, camera, or the like. In some embodiments, an orientation condition is satisfied when the second device is positioned such that a main display is not covered. For example, a device that is resting face up (e.g., with its display visible, in contrast to face down) satisfies the orientation condition. 
     In some embodiments, further in accordance with a determination that the physical positioning does not satisfy the permissive condition, the first device (e.g.,  2700 ) outputs ( 2820 ) an indication (e.g.,  2708  or  2710 ) that the permissive condition is not satisfied (e.g., the devices are not in close proximity). 
     In some embodiments, outputting the indication that the permissive condition is not satisfied comprises: outputting ( 2822 ) an audible indication (e.g.,  2708  or  2710 ) of a user action required to satisfy the permissive condition (e.g., a dictated output of: “Please unlock your device” or “Please bring your phone closer”, or the like.). 
     In some embodiments, the user input representing a request to access data from the user account is a first user input, the method further comprising, subsequent to providing the data from the user account through the first device (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 27B ): the first device (e.g.,  2700 ) receives ( 2824 ) a second user input (e.g., a user input voice command) representing a request to access additional data from the user account. In response to receiving the second user input, the first device (e.g.,  2700 ) determines ( 2826 ) whether the physical positioning of the first device (e.g.,  2700 ) and the second device (e.g.,  2702 ) associated with the user account satisfies the permissive condition. In accordance with a determination that the physical positioning satisfies the permissive condition, the first device provides ( 2828 ) the additional data (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 27E ) from the user account through the first device. In accordance with a determination that the physical positioning does not satisfy the permissive condition, the first device forgoes ( 2830 ) providing the additional data from the user account through the first device (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 27C ). 
     Note that details of the processes described above with respect to method  2800  (e.g.,  FIGS. 28A-28C ) are also applicable in an analogous manner to the methods described below/above. For example, method  700 ,  900 ,  1100 ,  1300 ,  1500 ,  1700 ,  1800 ,  2000 ,  2200 ,  2400 ,  2600 ,  3000 ,  3200 ,  3400 ,  3600 ,  3800 , and  3900  optionally includes one or more of the characteristics of the various methods described above with reference to method  2800 . For brevity, these details are not repeated below. 
       FIGS. 29A-29I  illustrate exemplary user interfaces and techniques for managing playback of media on a plurality of devices, in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIGS. 30A-30C . 
       FIG. 29A  illustrates an exemplary multi-device interface (e.g., such as multi-device interface  610  or  810  as described above with respect to  FIGS. 6 and 8 ) that includes Devices  1  through  4 , displayed on display  2902  of device  2900 . In this example, a user uses device  2900  to transmit a request to initiate media playback on a set of devices that includes Devices  1  through  4 . In some embodiments, device  2900  includes one or more features of devices  100 ,  300 ,  500 , and  580 . 
       FIG. 29B  illustrates an exemplary arrangement of Devices  1  through  4  (e.g., devices  2910 ,  2912 ,  2914 , and  2916 , respectively) that are included in the set of devices on which playback has been requested (e.g., by device  2900 ). In some embodiments, devices  2910 ,  2912 ,  2914 , and  2916  are smart speakers that include one or more features of devices  100 ,  300 ,  500 , and  580 . 
     At  FIG. 29C , the set of devices have initiated playback of media (e.g., are outputting audio), in response to the request form device  2900 . 
     In some embodiments, a set of devices that is concurrently playing back media (e.g., as part the same media session) synchronizes playback of the media. In some embodiments, one device coordinates playback synchronization (e.g., also referred to as a “primary device” or “hero device”). Coordinating playback synchronization can include one or more of: processing playback control commands (e.g., pause, next track), streaming media to the other devices in the set of devices, storing and/or maintaining a playback queue, detecting whether the other devices are outputting the media in synchronization with each other (e.g., via use of a clock signal), or the like. 
     In some embodiments, a set of devices (e.g., for a media session) includes an heir device (also referred to as a “designated heir” or a “backup primary device”). In some embodiments, the designated heir is configured to take over responsibility of the primary device in response to the primary device no longer being able to playback media (e.g., for the media session) and/or coordinate playback synchronization. In some embodiments, several “generations” of heirs are designated (e.g., a designated heir, a designated heir to the designated heir, and so forth). 
       FIG. 29D  depicts an exemplary scenario in which device  2910  is the designated heir to device  2912 , the primary device. As shown, device  2912  (primary) connects to each of the devices in the set and, for example, synchronizes playback from each device. 
       FIG. 29E  depicts an exemplary scenario in which device  2910  has become the primary device and (e.g., because device  2912  is no longer available) and device  2914  is now the designated heir to device  2910 , the primary device. For example, the scenario in  FIG. 29E  follows an event (e.g., during the scenario in  FIG. 29D ) in which device  2912  (e.g., the previous primary) is no longer available for playback during the media session on the set of devices. As shown, device  2910  (primary) connects to each of the remaining devices in the set (e.g.,  2914  and  1216 ) and, for example, coordinates playback with each of these devices. 
       FIG. 29F  depicts an exemplary scenario in which device  2914  has become the primary device and (e.g., because device  2910  is no longer available) and device  2916  is now the designated heir to device  2914 , the primary device. For example, the scenario in  FIG. 29F  follows an event (e.g., during the scenario in  FIG. 29E ) in which device  2910  (e.g., the previous primary) is no longer available for playback during the media session on the set of devices). As shown, device  2914  (primary) connects to each of the remaining devices (e.g.,  2916 ) in the set and, for example, coordinates playback with each of these devices. 
       FIG. 29G  depicts an exemplary scenario similar to that shown in  FIG. 29D , but in which device  2916  is not part of the original set of devices selected by the user (e.g., using device  2900 ) for the media playback session. In some embodiments, a device that is not part of the set of devices (e.g., of the requested media session) performs the function of designating the primary device and/or the designated heir for the media playback session. For example, as shown in  FIG. 29G , device  2916 , even though not in the set of devices, designates device  2910  as the heir and device  2912  as the primary device. In some embodiments, the device that designates a primary device is a home media control device (e.g., an Apple TV). 
     In some embodiments, primary device responsibility (e.g., playback coordination) includes processing playback control commands. For example, because the devices in a set of devices are interconnected with each other (and potentially connected with other devices), a playback control command can be received by any device of the set of devices (or by the other devices). In some embodiments, the playback control command is forwarded to the primary device if it is a device that is not the primary device for a media session. In some embodiments, the primary device processes the playback control command, and then transmits instructions to the (e.g., remaining) devices in the set of devices (e.g., for enacting the playback control command). 
     For example,  FIG. 29H  illustrates the exemplary scenario in which a playback control command  2920  is received at a non-primary device (e.g., designated heir, device  2910  in this example). Thus, as shown, device  2910  forwards the playback control command to the primary device. In contrast, at  FIG. 29I , device  2910  is the primary device and receives the playback control command  2920 . Thus, in the example depict in  FIG. 29I , device  2910  processes the playback control command and transmits playback instructions (e.g., skip to next track, pause playback, or the like) to the remaining devices in the set (e.g., that are included in the media session). 
       FIGS. 30A-30C  is a flow diagram illustrating a method for managing playback coordination using an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. Method  3000  is performed at a device (e.g.,  100 ,  300 ,  500 ,  580 ). Some operations in method  3000  are, optionally, combined, the order of some operations are, optionally, changed, and some operations are, optionally, omitted. 
     As described below, method  3000  provides an intuitive way for managing playback coordination. The method reduces the cognitive burden on a user for managing playback coordination, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated computing devices, enabling a user to manage playback coordination faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges. 
     The electronic device (e.g.,  2910 ), which is a first device, receives ( 3002 ) a command to initiate playback of media on a set of devices comprising the first device (e.g.,  2910 ) and a second device (e.g.,  2912 ). In some embodiments, the first and second devices are both configured to be capable of receiving playback coordination responsibility for the set of devices. 
     In response to receiving the command, the first device (e.g.,  2910 ) initiates ( 3004 ) synchronized playback of the media on the set of devices (e.g.,  2910  and  2912 ), wherein the second device is designated ( 3006 ) as a primary device (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 29D ) configured to coordinate the playback of the media on the set of devices, and wherein the first device is configured ( 3008 ) to be a designated heir to the primary device (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 29D ). In some embodiments, coordinating playback on the set of devices includes one or more of: storing a media playback queue, synchronizing media playback start time, and receiving and routing playback commands. In some embodiments, a designated heir to the primary device is a device that will take over duty as the primary device if the current primary device becomes unavailable. 
     Initiating synchronized playback and automatically managing the coordination of media playback without requiring further user input reduces the burden on the user when playing back media on a plurality of devices. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the set of devices further comprises a third device (e.g.,  2914  as shown in  FIG. 29D ), and during playback on the set of devices, the first device (e.g.,  2910 ) detects ( 3010 ) that the second device (e.g.,  2912 ) is no longer available for playback of the media (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 29E ). For example, a device is no longer available for playback if the device is requested to play something else or to cease playback, the device is disconnected, or the like. In response to detecting that the second device is no longer available to playback the media ( 3012 ): the first device (e.g.,  2910 ) determines ( 3014 ) that the first device is designated as the primary device configured to coordinate the playback of the media on the set of devices (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 29E ), continues ( 3016 ) playback of the media on the first device (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 29E ), and coordinates ( 3018 ) the playback of the media on the third device (e.g.,  2914 , as shown in  FIGS. 29E and 29I ). In some embodiments, the first device determines that it is the primary device. In some embodiments, the first device receives notification from another device that the first device has been designated the primary device. For example, the first device assumes the role of primary device and begins coordination playback on the remaining device(s) in the set of devices. In this example, the third device is a remaining device. 
     In some embodiments, coordinating the playback of the media on the third device comprises one or more of ( 3020 ): providing a link to the media (e.g., a URL); providing a stream of the media (e.g., a real time or buffered stream of data representing the media); and providing a copy of the media (e.g., a media file). 
     In some embodiments, the first device (e.g.,  2910 ) receives ( 3022 ) a command to cease playback of media on the first device. In response to receiving the command to cease playback of media on the first device ( 3024 ): the first device (e.g.,  2910 ) ceases playback ( 3026 ) of media on the first device (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 29F ), and designates ( 3028 ) the third device to be the primary device configured to coordinate the playback of the media on the set of devices (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 29F ). 
     In some embodiments, the set of devices further comprises a third device (e.g.,  2914 ), and during playback on the set of devices (e.g.,  2910 ,  2912 , and  2914 ), the first device (e.g.,  2910 ) detects that the second device (e.g.,  2912 ) is no longer available for playback of the media (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 29E ). In response to detecting that the second device is no longer available to playback the media: the first device (e.g.,  2910 ) determines that the third device (e.g.,  2914 ) (e.g., despite the first device being the designated heir) is designated as the primary device configured to coordinate the playback of the media on the set of devices, and the first device (e.g.,  2910 ) continues playback of the media on the first device, and the first device (e.g.,  2910 ) receives, from the third device (e.g., the new primary device), an instruction for coordinating playback of the media on the first device. For example, the first device does not assume the role of primary device, and thus begins receiving coordinating instructions for playback from the new primary device, the third device. 
     In some embodiments, the first device (e.g.,  2910 ) receives, from a fourth device (e.g.,  2916 ), a command to initiate playback of media on the set of devices. The first device (e.g.,  2910 ) receives, from the fourth device, a designation that the first device is the designated heir. For example, the device that transmits the command to initiate playback and that designates the designated heir is a device different than the designated heir and the designated primary device. 
     In some embodiments, the fourth device is not a member of the set of devices. For example, the fourth device is a device in the home set of devices that initially coordinates playback on device(s) regardless of whether playback includes the fourth device. In some embodiments, initially coordinating playback includes designating a designated heir and/or a primary device for the playback session on the set of devices. 
     In some embodiments, initiating synchronized playback of the media on the set of devices comprises transmitting a copy of a playback queue to each device in the set of devices. 
     In some embodiments, during synchronized playback, the first device (e.g.,  2910 ) receives, at the first device, a playback control command (e.g.,  2920 , such as pause, next track, seek, or the like). In response to receiving the playback control command: in accordance with the first device being designated the primary device, the first device (e.g.,  2910 ) transmits an instruction to each of the devices in the set of devices based on the playback control command (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 29I ). In accordance with the first device not being designated the primary device, the first device (e.g.,  2910 ) transmits the playback control command to a designated primary device (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 29H ). For example the first device forwards the command to the primary device for processing, and does not take further action until receiving an instruction from the primary device). 
     Note that details of the processes described above with respect to method  3000  (e.g.,  FIGS. 30A-30C ) are also applicable in an analogous manner to the methods described below/above. For example, method  700 ,  900 ,  1100 ,  1300 ,  1500 ,  1700 ,  1800 ,  2000 ,  2200 ,  2400 ,  2600 ,  2800 ,  3200 ,  3400 ,  3600 ,  3800 , and  3900  optionally includes one or more of the characteristics of the various methods described above with reference to method  3000 . For brevity, these details are not repeated below. 
       FIGS. 31A-31N  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for outputting an audible output based on user location, in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIGS. 32A-32C . 
       FIG. 31A  illustrates in exemplary home that includes an exemplary home set of devices (e.g., the set of devices  3100 ,  3102 , and  3104 ). As shown, devices  3100  and  3102  are in the room named “Living Room” (e.g., are named or otherwise associated with an identifier “Living Room”) and device  3104  is in the room “Bedroom”. In this example, devices  3100 ,  3102 , and  3104  represent smart speaker devices that the user has positioned around their home, and that are connected to each other (e.g., via Wi-Fi). In some embodiments, devices  3100 ,  3102 , and  3104  include one or more features of devices  100 ,  300 ,  500 , and  580 .  FIG. 31A  also depicts device  3106  (representing a car), which is optionally a device that is connected to the user&#39;s home set of devices (e.g., devices  3100 ,  3102 , and  3104 ). In some embodiments, device  3108  includes one or more features of devices  100 ,  300 ,  500 , and  580 . 
     As described above, devices such as devices  3100 ,  3102 , and  3104  (e.g., smart speaker devices), in accordance with some embodiments, can determine a spatial position of a user for targeting audio content to a voice command source and/or act as an extension (e.g., for notifications output) of another device (e.g., a personal device). Similarly, a device (or a set of devices) (e.g., such as devices  3100 ,  3102 , and  3104 ) can be configured to automatically and selectively output audible output based on whether a user is within a range of the device (e.g., physically present near the device).  FIGS. 31B-31N  illustrates exemplary techniques for doing so. 
       FIG. 31B  depicts the scenario of  FIG. 31A , however user  3108  is present in the Living Room near device  3100 . In some embodiments, a device (e.g.,  3100 ) of a set of devices (e.g.,  3100 ,  3102 , and  3104 ) receives an audible output trigger event. For example, in  FIG. 31B , user  3108  utters the user input voice command  3112  “Hey Siri, set a timer for 10 minutes”. In some embodiments, an audible output trigger event is any data configured to cause a device to output an audible output in response to a trigger event. For instance, in some examples, an audible output trigger event includes one or more of: notification settings (e.g., identifying events for which a device should issue an audible notification such as phone calls, text messages, reminders, calendar events, or the like), a user input request to set an alarm/reminder/timer, or the like. In some embodiments, the audible output trigger event is received via user input (e.g., a voice command) or data transfer (e.g., from a user&#39;s personal device, or from their user account (e.g., iCloud)). Subsequent to the user input voice command  3112 , in the example shown in  FIG. 31C , the user is still in the same position nearest device  3100 , and so device  3100  outputs an audible alarm  3110  upon the occurrence of the trigger event (e.g., expiration of the 10 minute timer). 
     In some embodiments, a device (e.g.,  3100 ) has an audible output range (e.g., a designated, predetermined, or dynamic range). In some embodiments, if a device (e.g.,  3100 ) determines that a user is located outside of the audible output range of the device, it forgoes outputting the audible output when the trigger event occurs. For example, as shown in  FIG. 31D , user  3108  is closest to device  3102  when the trigger event occurs (e.g., the expiration of the 10 minute timer), and thus device  3102  outputs the audible alarm  3110 . Similarly, in  FIG. 31E , the user  3108  is closest to device  3104  when the trigger event occurs (e.g., the expiration of the 10 minute timer), and thus device  3104  outputs the audible alarm  3110 . 
     In some embodiments, determining whether a user is located within an audible output range is based on one or more of: a detected physical proximity of the device (e.g.,  3100 ) to the user (e.g.,  3108 ), a detected presence of the user (e.g.,  3108 ) in the same room as the device (e.g.,  3100 ), and the output characteristics (e.g., audio output power) of the device (e.g.,  3100 ). In some embodiments, determining whether a user is located within an audible output range is based on detection of a device associated with the user. 
     An audible output range can be determined in a variety of manners. In some embodiments, the audible output range (e.g., of each device) is fixed. For example,  FIG. 31F  depicts the audible output range  3100 A of device  3100  (e.g., is a proximity range represented by the dotted line), the audible output range  3102 A of device  3102 , and audible output range  3104 A of device  3104 , which represent fixed ranges. In some embodiments, an audible output range is independent for each device (or is not affected by whether there are other devices in the set of devices, or other devices nearby. For example, a device can have a fixed proximity range (e.g.,  3100 A,  3102 A, or  3104 A), such that it is possible for a user to be out of range (e.g., in the garage in  FIG. 31F ) of each device in a set of devices (e.g.,  3100 ,  3102 , and  3104 ). 
     In some embodiments, a user can be within the audible output range of a plurality of devices. For example, as shown in  FIG. 31G , user  3108  is within the output range of both devices  3100  and  3102 , and thus both devices are outputting audible alarm  3110 . In some embodiments, only one device of the plurality of devices outputs an audible output if a user is within range of the plurality of devices. 
     In some embodiments, an audible output range of a device is the room in which a device is located. For example, as shown in  FIG. 31H , the user is physically positioned in the Bedroom upon the occurrence of the trigger event, and thus device  3104  outputs audible alarm. Notably, in  FIG. 31H , device  3104  outputs the alarm even though user  3106  is physically positioned closer to device  3100 . Thus, in this example, it is the room that the user is in, and not necessarily physical proximity, that affects whether a device outputs in response to a trigger event. 
     In some embodiments, each device in a set of devices (e.g.,  3100 ,  3102 , and  3104 ) receives the audible output trigger event. As shown in  FIG. 31H , even though the user&#39;s voice input (e.g., to set a timer) was received at device  3100 , device  3104  responds to the trigger event by audibly outputting the alarm  3110 . In some embodiments, a device (e.g.,  3104 ) receives an audible output trigger event from another device (e.g., another device (e.g.,  3100 ) in a set of devices, such as a home set of devices; or another device connected to the device). In some embodiments, a device (e.g.,  3104 ) receives an audible output trigger event from a user account (e.g., downloaded from an iCloud account). 
     In some embodiments, the audible output range of a device (e.g.,  3100 ) is relative to one or more other devices (e.g.,  3102 ), or is otherwise affected by other devices in a set of devices or nearby. For instance,  FIG. 31I  illustrates a scenario in which device  3100  is physically nearest to the user  3106  (or is the last device to which the user  3106  was detected to be nearest). Thus, in  FIG. 31I , device  3100  outputs the audible alarm  3110 , even though the user is in the next room. This, for example, can ensure that at least one device outputs the audible output. In some embodiments, a device adjusts its output (e.g., outputs at a loud volume) based on a user&#39;s positioning (e.g., if the user is detect to be positioned far away from the device). 
     In some embodiments, a device (e.g.,  3100 ) of the set of devices (e.g.,  3100 ,  3102 , and  3104 ) detects a user voice to determine whether the user is located within the device&#39;s audible output range. For example, in  FIG. 31J  user  3108  speaking with user  3116  in the Living Room, as represented by user voice  3114  (“How are you?”). In some example, device  3100  detects the voice of user  3106 , and determines that the user is in the Living Room (e.g., and within the audible output range of device  3100 ). Thus, in this example, device  3100  will output the audible alarm  3110  upon occurrence of the trigger (e.g., if user  3106  continues to be detected, or is detected within a threshold amount of time preceding the trigger event (e.g., within the last 5 minutes before the trigger)). 
     In some embodiments, a device (e.g.,  3106 ) that is not one of the set of devices (e.g.,  3100 ,  3102 , and  3104 ) is connected to the set of devices. In this example, device  3106  is a car that connected to a personal device of user  3106  when the user entered the car. In some embodiments, the devices of the set of devices forgo outputting audible outputs in response to determining that the user is within an audible output range (e.g., while the car is powered on) of the device (e.g.,  3106 ) that is not one of the set of devices. For example, as shown in  FIG. 31K , when the user enters car  3106 , the set of devices  3100 ,  3102 , and  3104  do not output the audio output in response to trigger event (e.g., because the user is likely to be leaving their home). 
     In some examples, the devices of a set of devices are used as intelligent end-to-end communication tools. In some embodiments, a first device (e.g.,  3100 ) of a set of devices (e.g.,  3100 ,  3102 , and  3104 ) receives a user input request (e.g.,  3118 ) to deliver a message (e.g.,  3120 ) to a user (e.g.,  3116 ) that is within audible output range of at least one device of the set of devices. In some embodiments, the first device (e.g.,  3100 ) transmits the message to a second device (e.g.,  3104 ) (e.g., that the user  3116  is within audible output range of) of the set of devices (e.g.,  3100 ,  3102 , and  3104 ). For example, as shown in  FIG. 31L , user  3108  is located in the Living Room and user  3116  is located in the Bedroom. At  FIG. 31M , user  3108  utters the user input voice command  3118  “Send a message to Tim, dinner is ready”, which is detected by device  3100 . As described above, the devices of the set of devices (e.g.,  3100 ,  3102 , and  3104 ) can determine a physical position of a user in order to deliver output of audible notifications as appropriate. Thus, as shown in  FIG. 31N , a message  3120  (“Dinner is ready”) is audibly output by a second device (e.g.,  3104 ) of the set. In this example, the user  3116  (the target of the voice input command, Tim) is located within the audible output range of device  3104 , and thus device  3104  outputs the message  3120 . In some embodiments, the first device transmits a request to the second device inquiring whether the user (e.g.,  3116 ) is within the devices audible output range (e.g., and if confirmation is received, transmits the message  3120  to the second device). 
     In some embodiments, the audible output range of a device (e.g.,  3100 ) is based on one or more of: other detectable indicia of a user presence or location, including footsteps (e.g., determining and detecting a footstep pattern associated with a user, tracking the location of a set of footsteps as they move around (e.g., which are presumed to be the user), determining and detecting a breathing pattern of the user, using a visual detection mechanism (e.g., a motion sensor, a camera), or the like. 
       FIGS. 32A-32C  is a flow diagram illustrating a method for outputting an audible output based on user location using an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. Method  3200  is performed at a device (e.g.,  100 ,  300 ,  500 ). Some operations in method  3200  are, optionally, combined, the order of some operations are, optionally, changed, and some operations are, optionally, omitted. 
     As described below, method  3200  provides an intuitive way for outputting an audible output based on user location. The method reduces the cognitive burden on a user for outputting an audible output based on user location, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated computing devices, enabling a user to outputting an audible output based on user location faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges. 
     The electronic device (e.g.,  3100 ), which is a first device of a set of devices (e.g.,  3100 ,  3102 , and  3104 ) associated with a first user account: receives ( 3202 ) an audible output trigger event. In some embodiments, an audible output trigger event is any data configured to cause a device to output an audible output in response to a trigger event. In some embodiments, an audible output trigger events is one or more of: a notification (e.g., alarm/timer/reminder) for a particular time (e.g., 5:00 PM) or some length of time in the future (e.g., in 30 minutes). In some embodiments, an audible output trigger event is a device notifications setting. 
     The first device (e.g.,  3100 ) determines ( 3204 ) that a first user (e.g.,  3108 ), associated with the first user account, is located within an audible output range (e.g.,  3100 A,  3102 A, and/or  3104 A) of a device of the set of devices. In some embodiments, an audible output range is independent for each device (or is not affected by whether there are other devices in the set of devices). For example, each device has an “fixed” proximity range, so a user (e.g.,  3108 ) can be out of range of each device in a set of devices. In some embodiments, the audible output range of a device is relative or otherwise affected by other devices in the set of devices. For example, the user may always be within the audible output range of the closest (most proximate) device of the set (e.g., closest device responds, even if it is in the next room or 100 meters away; a shown in  FIG. 31I ). In some embodiments, the audible output range is the room that the device is located in (e.g., for a device located in a room that is correctly identified as being in the “Bedroom” in device settings, then a user is within the audible output range of the bedroom device (e.g.,  3104 ) is present (physically located) in the Bedroom, as shown in  FIG. 31H .); 
     In accordance with a determination that the first user (e.g.,  3108 ) is within the audible output range of the first device (e.g.,  3100 ), and in accordance with an occurrence of the audible output trigger event, the first device (e.g.,  3100 ) outputs ( 3206 ) an audible output (e.g.,  3110  as shown in  FIG. 31C ). For example, the first device outputs an audible tone for timer expiring, or outputs a received phone call. 
     Using a determination of whether the physical position of a user is within an audible output range of a device provides the user with an easy technique for receiving output from appropriately positioned devices without extraneous user inputs. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In accordance with a determination that the first user is within the audible output range of a second device (e.g.,  3102  as shown in  FIG. 31D ), and in accordance with an occurrence of the audible output trigger event, the first device (e.g.,  3100 ) forgoes outputting ( 3208 ) the audible output (e.g.,  3100  does not output audible tone for timer expiring; as shown in  FIG. 31D ). 
     In some embodiments, the device (e.g.,  3102 ) of the set of devices is a second device, and wherein outputting the audible output comprises transmitting ( 3210 ) an instruction to the second device (e.g.,  3102 ) to output the audible output (e.g.,  3110  as shown in  FIG. 31D ). 
     In some embodiments, outputting the audible output includes playing ( 3212 ) an audible tone (e.g., a sound, or voice dictation). In some embodiments, the device also outputs a visual output (e.g., using an LED or a display.). 
     In some embodiments, receiving the audible output trigger event comprises receiving ( 3214 ) user input representing configuration of the audible output trigger event (e.g., setting a timer, an alarm, or reminder; or setting up notification or phone call output settings). 
     In some embodiments, receiving the audible output trigger event comprises receiving ( 3216 ) data representing audible output settings associated with the first user account (e.g., whether to push one or more of: phone calls, text message notifications, email notifications, etc., to the first device (e.g., for audible output)). 
     In some embodiments, the audible output range of the first device is based on one or more of ( 3218 ): a detected physical proximity (e.g., distance) of the first device to the first user; a detected presence of the first user in the same room as the first device; and the output characteristics of the first device (e.g., speaker output power). 
     In some embodiments, determining that the first user is located within the audible output range of the device of the set of devices comprises one or more of the following ( 3220 ): detecting ( 3222 ), at the device (e.g.,  3100 ), a voice associated with the first user (e.g.,  3112  or  3114 ) (e.g., within a threshold time before the notification trigger event, indirectly (e.g., overhearing user), or directly (e.g., user interacts with device with a voice command)); detecting ( 3224 ), at the device, a third device (e.g., a personal device) associated with the user, wherein the third device is not a member of the set of devices (e.g., the device is the user&#39;s personal phone, and is not part of a group of stationary devices (e.g., devices  3100 ,  3102 , and  3104 )); and receiving a signal ( 3226 ), from an external sensor (e.g., a sensor on an external device, or a sensor on the device), representative of the first user being physically near the device (e.g., motion sensor, camera). 
     In some embodiments, subsequent to outputting the audible output ( 3228 ): in accordance with a determination that the first user (e.g.,  3108 ) is within an audible output range of a fourth device (e.g.,  3106 ) that is not a member of the set of devices (e.g.,  3100 ,  3102 , and  3104 ), and in accordance with an occurrence of the audible output trigger event, the first device (e.g.,  3100 ) forgoes outputting ( 3228 ) the audible output. For example, the user has entered their car in the garage (e.g., which is connected to the set of devices), and the set of devices forgoes outputting the audible output even though the user is still be within range of a device of the set of devices. 
     In some embodiments, the first device (e.g.,  3100 ) plays back media content. Further in accordance with a determination that the first user is within the audible output range of the fourth device (e.g.,  3106 ) that is not a member of the set of devices, ceasing playback of the media content. 
     Note that details of the processes described above with respect to method  3200  (e.g.,  FIGS. 32A-32C ) are also applicable in an analogous manner to the methods described below/above. For example, method  700 ,  900 ,  1100 ,  1300 ,  1500 ,  1700 ,  1800 ,  2000 ,  2200 ,  2400 ,  2600 ,  2800 ,  3000 ,  3400 ,  3600 ,  3800 , and  3900  optionally includes one or more of the characteristics of the various methods described above with reference to method  3200 . For brevity, these details are not repeated below. 
       FIGS. 33A-33G  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for controlling media playback, in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIGS. 34A-34B . 
       FIGS. 33A-33B  illustrate an exemplary scenario that includes a plurality of connected devices, the plurality including a first device (e.g.,  3300 ) that is not currently playing back media and a second device (e.g.,  3304 ) that is currently playing back media.  FIG. 33A  depicts a home room named “Living Room” that includes: device  3302  (e.g., a television), device  3304  (e.g., a home media hub, such as an Apple TV), and devices  3306  and  3308  (e.g., smart speakers). FIG.  33 A also depicts a home room named “Kitchen” that includes device  3300  (e.g., a smart speaker). In some embodiments, devices  3300 ,  3302 ,  3304 ,  3306 , and  3308  each includes one or more features of devices  100 ,  300 ,  500 , or  580 . As shown, device  3302  is displaying a visual component (e.g., image  3310 ) representative of a media signal (e.g., a video) of media currently playing back on device  3304 . Further, devices  3306  and  3308  are outputting an audio component (e.g., represented by sound waves  3312 ) representative of a media signal (e.g., audio) of the media currently playing back on device  3302 . In this example, devices  3306  and  3308  are configured as a stereo pair of speakers, as described above. Thus, in the scenario of  FIG. 33A , the interconnected living room devices (e.g., via media hub device  3304 ) are playing back video media content (e.g., a movie or television show), using device  3302  to output the video signal of the media and using devices  3306  and  3308  to output the audio signal of the media. Device  3300  is not currently part of the media playback session of device  3304 , and is not currently outputting audio. 
       FIG. 33B  illustrates an overhead view of the scenario of  FIG. 33A , which depicts the following devices in the living room: device  3302 , device  3304 , device  3306  (currently outputting audio), and device  3308  (currently outputting audio). Device  3300  is shown in the kitchen. 
     As described above with respect to  FIG. 6AH , in some examples a display device (e.g., device  3302 ) is itself playing back the media content (e.g., is a “smart” device), and in some examples it is used as a display by another device (e.g., device  3304 )—both situations are intended to be within the scope of this disclosure. Thus, in this example, when reference is made to the device  3302  or device  3304  playing back media, either of these situations is intended to be within the scope of such disclosure, unless otherwise noted. Likewise, in some examples devices  3306  and  3308  access and/or stream audio content corresponding to the media session (e.g., are smart devices), and in some examples are used as regular speakers by (e.g., receive audio from) device  3302  or device  3304 —both situations are intended to be within the scope of this disclosure. 
       FIG. 33C  illustrates an exemplary expanded media control interface for a device. As shown, expanded media interface  3320  graphically represents the scenario describe above with respect to  FIGS. 33A and 33B —expanded media interface  3320  indicates that the “Apple TV” (e.g., device  3304 ) is currently playing back media (e.g., a movie named “Super Heroes”). In some embodiments, expanded media interface includes one or more of the features of expanded media control interface  609  of  FIG. 6G . 
     A user may desire to listen to the media content, currently being played back by the living room devices, on a device (e.g.,  3300 ) in the kitchen. In some embodiments, user input (e.g., voice input  3314 ) is received at a device (e.g.,  3300 ) connected to the set of devices (e.g.,  3302 ,  3304 ,  3306 , and  3308 ) playing back media content (e.g., the movie “Super Heroes”). In some embodiments, in response to the user input, a new device (e.g.,  3300 ) that is not currently part of the media session initiates output of a signal representative of the media. For example, user input received at any device that is connected to the living room devices (or is part of the living room set of devices) can be used to add the kitchen device  3300  to the “Super Heroes” media session that includes the living room devices. In some examples, the user input is voice user input. For instance,  FIGS. 33A and 33B  depict a user uttering the voice command “Hey Siri, let me listen to the movie in the kitchen”. In this example, device  3300  receives the voice command. 
       FIGS. 33D-33G  illustrate exemplary techniques and interfaces for adding a new device to a media session in response to the user&#39;s utterance.  FIGS. 33D and 33E  depict the scenario of  FIGS. 33A and 33B  subsequent to device  3300  receiving voice user input  3314 . As shown in  FIGS. 33D and 33E , in response to user input  3314 , device  3300  is now outputting audio (e.g., represented by sound waves  3312 ) representative of the media being played back by device  3304 . In some embodiments, a device (e.g., device  3300 ) determines a target media session (e.g., the movie playing in the living room) and a target set of devices (e.g., one or more devices, such as device  3300 ) to add to the target media session. For example, if the user input is a voice user input, the input can be parsed to determine such information. In this example, in response to the voice input “Hey Siri, let me listen to the movie in the kitchen”, device  3300  determined that the movie “Super Heroes” (e.g., the only movie currently playing back on a connected device in the user&#39;s home) was the target media, and that device  3300  (e.g., the only device in the kitchen) was the target set of devices (e.g., wherein a set of devices is one or more devices). Thus, kitchen speaker device  3300  initiates playback of the audio portion of the media session. In some embodiments, the user is prompted for further input. For example, if two different media sessions are concurrently playing back on different connected devices in the user&#39;s home, device  3300  may respond (e.g., using a text-to-speech output) with the prompt “Which movie would you like to listen to in the kitchen?” 
       FIG. 33F  illustrates expanded media interface  3320 , which has been updated to reflect that the kitchen device  3300  has been added to the living room media session. Expanded media interface  3320  now indicates that the “Apple TV+Kitchen” devices (e.g., devices  3304  and  3300 ) are currently playing back media (e.g., a movie named “Super Heroes”). Alternatively, in some examples expanded media interface identifies all devices in the media session using room names (e.g., “Living Room+Kitchen”). 
     In some embodiments, a signal representative of media includes a video component and/or an audio component. In some embodiments, a device initiates output of one or more of the video component and the audio component. For example, as described above, the audio portion of a media session was forwarded to a new device (e.g.,  3300 ) in response to a user request. In some examples, a video portion of the media can be forwarded to a device in response to a user request (e.g., “Hey Siri, let me watch the movie on the display in the kitchen”). Likewise, in some examples, both the audio and video portions can be forward to a device (e.g., “Hey Siri, let me watch the movie in the home theater room.”) 
     In some embodiments, a device (e.g.,  3300 ), that is not a member of the set of devices (e.g.,  3302 ,  3304 ,  3306 , and  3308 ) currently playback back media, initiates output of a component of the media in response to a user input (e.g.,  3314 ), and the set of devices ceases to output that portion. For example,  FIG. 33G  illustrates an alternative scenario to that depicted in  FIG. 33D  in which the kitchen device  3300  becomes the only output of audio for the media session in response to user input  3314 . Thus, if a user is moving to the kitchen and no other users will be listening in the living room, the kitchen can become the lone source of audio output for the media session, but video will continue, for example, if the kitchen device does not include a display. In some embodiments, a device determines whether to cease output of the portion on the set of devices by determining whether any user remains in a room that includes the set of devices. In some embodiments, this behavior is predetermined based on a preconfigured setting (e.g., always cease output of audio when user asks to listen in another room, or do not cease output of audio when user asks to listen in another room). In some embodiments, a device prompts a user whether to cease output of a component by second device (e.g.,  3306  and/or  3308 ) subsequent to initiating the component at the first device (e.g.,  3300 ). 
       FIGS. 34A-34B  is a flow diagram illustrating a method for controlling media playback using an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. Method  3400  is performed at a device (e.g.,  100 ,  300 ,  500 ,  580 ). Some operations in method  3400  are, optionally, combined, the order of some operations are, optionally, changed, and some operations are, optionally, omitted. 
     As described below, method  3400  provides an intuitive way for controlling media playback. The method reduces the cognitive burden on a user for controlling media playback, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated computing devices, enabling a user to control media playback faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges. 
     The electronic device (e.g.,  3300 ) (also referred to as a “first device”) receives ( 3402 ) a user input voice command (e.g., represented by voice input  3314 ) representing a request to output a signal (e.g., audio output  3312  of  FIG. 33D ) representative of media currently being played back by a second device (e.g., device  3302  or  3304  of  FIG. 33A ) that is connected to the first device (e.g.,  3300 ). In some embodiments, the media includes at least an audio and/or video signal portion. In some embodiments, the media currently playing back on a second device includes media that the second device is playing by causing playback on one or more external device (e.g., on external speaker devices  3306  and  3308 , and/or on external display  3302 , as shown in  FIG. 33A ). In some embodiments, the first and second devices are connected via a wired or wireless connection (e.g., via Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, or the like). 
     In response to receiving the user input, the first device (e.g.,  3300 ) transmits ( 3404 ) a request for information regarding the media currently being played back by the second device (e.g.,  3302  or  3304 ). In some embodiments, the request is transmitted to the second device. In some embodiments, the request is transmitted to a device different than the second device. For instance, in some examples, the first device transmits the request to a primary device for the media session currently playing back on the second device. In some embodiments, the request is a request for one or more of: a media stream of the media, a location where the first device can stream the media from (e.g., a URL, a media service usable to access the media, login credentials for the media service, or the like), or an identification that the first device can use to locate a source of the media (e.g., identifying information of the media, such as a title, a unique number, or the like). 
     The first device (e.g.,  3300 ) receives ( 3406 ) the information regarding the media currently being played back by the second device. For example, the second device (e.g., or a primary device for the media session that includes the second device) received the request, and in response, transmitted the information regarding the media to the first device. 
     In accordance with receiving the information regarding the media currently being played back by the second device, and while the second device continues playback of at least one component of the media, the first device (e.g.,  3300 ) initiates ( 3408 ) output of at least one component (e.g., audio component and/or video component) of the signal representative of the media currently being played back by the second device (e.g., as shown in  FIGS. 33D and 33E ). In some embodiments, the media has an audio component and a video component. In some embodiments, continuing playback comprises the second device continuing to output one component (e.g., video) but ceasing to output the other component (e.g., audio). For example, the first device becomes the exclusive output of audio for the media session (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 33G ). In some embodiments, continuing playback comprises the second device continuing to output both audio and video components. For example, the first device becomes a supplemental source of audio output for the media session and the second device continues to output audio (e.g., as shown in  FIGS. 33D and 33E ). 
     Using a voice command to cause a device to initiate playback of a component representative of media currently playing back on another device, wherein the other device continues playing back a component representative of the media, provides the user an efficient user interface to manage the devices that are included in a media playback session that requires fewer user inputs. Reducing the number of inputs needed to perform an operation enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the signal representative of the media currently being played back by the second device includes ( 3410 ) one or more of: an audio signal, a video signal, or both. 
     In some embodiments, the media currently being played back by the second device (e.g.,  3302  or  3304 ) includes a video component and an audio component, and initiating output of the at least one component of the signal representative of the media currently being played back by the second device comprises initiating output ( 3412 ) of the audio component without initiating output of the video component (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 33D ). In some embodiments, the first device (e.g.,  3300 ) initiates output of the video component without initiating output of the audio component. In some embodiments, the first device initiates output of both the audio and video components. 
     In some embodiments, the second device (e.g.,  3302  or  3304 ) continues playback of both the video component and the audio component subsequent to the first device initiating output of the at least one component of the signal (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 33D ). 
     In some embodiments, the second device (e.g.,  3302  or  3304 ) continues playback of the video component and ceases playback of the audio component subsequent to the first device initiating output of the at least one component of the signal (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 33G ). 
     In some embodiments, initiating output of at least one component of the signal representative of the media currently being played back by the second device comprises playing back ( 3414 ), by the first device (e.g.,  3300 ), the at least one component of the signal representative of the media currently being played back by the second device (e.g.,  3302  or  3304 ). For example, the first device  3300  receives the user input voice command  3314  and, in response, begins output of the audio component of the media session. 
     In some embodiments, initiating output of the at least one component of the signal representative of the media currently being played back by the second device comprises transmitting an instruction ( 3416 ), to a third device (e.g., connected to the first device), to initiate output of the at least one component of the signal representative of the media currently being played back by the second device. For example, the first device  3300  receives the user input voice command  3314  and, in response, causes a third device to output the audio component of the media session. For instance, the third device can be one or more personal listening device, such as headphones. In some examples, the third device does not include the ability to process the user input (e.g., the third device does not include a microphone) but the user requests that output begin on the third device—thus, the first device receives the user input, but causes output on (e.g., provides a media stream to) the third device. In some embodiments, the first and third devices are connected via a wired or wireless connection (e.g., Bluetooth, or the like). 
     In some embodiments, the media currently being played back by the second device is being played back in a first natural language (e.g., English), and transmitting the instruction, to the third device, to initiate output of the at least one component of the signal representative of the media currently being played back by the second device comprises transmitting an instruction to initiate output of the at least one component of the signal being played back by the second device in a second natural language (e.g., Spanish) different than the first natural language. For example, the first device causes the third device (e.g., headphones) to output audio (e.g., movie dialogue) in a different language. Thus, for example, when one or more users are watching a movie in a first language, another user can concurrently watch the same movie and while listening to audio in another language using headphones. 
     In some embodiments, the user input voice command (e.g.,  3314 ) is a first user input, and the first device (e.g.,  3300 ) receives a second user input representing a playback control command. For example, as described above, a playback control command is a command for controlling media playback such as pause, next track, seek, or the like. In response to receiving the second user input, the first device (e.g.,  3300 ) transmits the playback control command to the second device (e.g.,  3304 ). For example, if the first device is not a primary device for the media session and the second device (e.g.,  3302  or  3304 ) is the primary device, the first device forwards the playback control command to the primary device for processing. In some embodiments, the first device forgoes performing the playback control command. In some embodiments, the first device subsequently receives an instruction from the second device to perform the playback command. For example, the second device processes the playback control command and transmits an instruction to the first device to alter playback in accordance with the command. In some examples, relying on the primary device for processing of a command helps maintain synchronization between the devices in the media session when the first device is independently streaming the content (e.g., synchronizing whether to perform a responsive action, the timing of a responsive action, etc.). That is, when the second device is not providing a media stream to the first device, the first and second devices must coordinate their action responsive to the playback control command—otherwise, media playback on each device my become unsynchronized, which is undesirable for users. 
     In some embodiments, receiving the information regarding the media currently being played back by the second device comprises receiving one or more of: an identifier of the media (e.g., so the first device can determine if it has access to the media), a location where the signal representative of the media is accessible (e.g., a location or media streaming service, a URL, or the like), and a media stream of the signal representative of the media (e.g., the second device provides media stream to the first device). In some embodiments, the first device receives the information (e.g., an audio stream) from the second device. In some embodiments, the first device receives the information from a fourth device, different than the second device.). 
     In some embodiments, receiving the information regarding the media currently being played back by the second device comprises the first device (e.g.,  3300 ) receiving, from a fourth device (e.g.,  3308 ), a media stream of the at least one component of the signal representative of the media the media currently being played back by the second device. For example, a fourth device (e.g., a primary device to the second device, or a device close to the first device that is part of the media session), can provide an audio stream to the first device of the media currently playing back on the second device. In some embodiments, the first device receives the information regarding the media from the fourth device. 
     Note that details of the processes described above with respect to method  3400  (e.g.,  FIGS. 34A-34B ) are also applicable in an analogous manner to the methods described below/above. For example, method  700 ,  900 ,  1100 ,  1300 ,  1500 ,  1700 ,  1800 ,  2000 ,  2200 ,  2400 ,  2600 ,  2800 ,  3000 ,  3200 ,  3600 ,  3800 , and  3900  optionally includes one or more of the characteristics of the various methods described above with reference to method  3400 . For brevity, these details are not repeated below. 
       FIGS. 35A-35J  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for managing playback of media on a set of devices, in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIGS. 36A-36C . 
       FIG. 35A  illustrates an exemplary multi-device interface. As shown, device  3500  displays, on display  3501 , a multi-device interface  3510 . In some embodiments, device  3500  includes one or more features of device  100 ,  300 ,  500 , or  580 . In some embodiments, multi-device interface  3510  includes one or more of the features of multi-device interface  610 , for example as described above with respect to  FIG. 6J . As shown, indicators for the devices in the following rooms are selected “Bedroom” (e.g., indicator  3510 B), “Kitchen” (indicator  3510 C) and “Living Room” (indicator  3510 D) (e.g., which corresponds to two devices, a stereo pair). The indicator ( 3510 A) for the iPhone (e.g., device  3500 ) is unselected. While indicators  3510 B- 3510 D are selected, device  3500  receives user input  3512 , representing selection of the done affordance  3510 E. Thus, the user wishes begin a media session that includes playback the media item titled “Same Thing” on the set of devices in the Bedroom, Kitchen, and Living Room. 
       FIG. 35B  illustrates an exemplary overhead view of a user&#39;s home subsequent to device  3500  receiving user input  3512 . As shown, in response to the user input, the selected devices are currently playing back media (represented by the sound waves emanating from the devices): device  3502  (in the Kitchen), devices  3504  and  3506  (in the Living Room), and device  3508  (in the Bedroom). In some embodiments, devices  3502 ,  3504 ,  3506 , and  3508  each includes one or more features of device  100 ,  300 ,  500 , or  580 . 
     In some embodiments, a device (e.g.,  3500 ) receives user input (e.g.,  3512 ) requesting playback on a set of devices (e.g.,  3502 ,  3504 ,  3506 , and  3508 ) that does not include the device. As shown in  FIG. 35A , device  3500  receives user input  3512  representing a request to initiate playback on devices  3502 ,  3504 ,  3506 , and  3508 . Thus, in this example, the device that received the request is not a device that will be playing back the requested media. In some embodiments, the device (e.g.,  3500 ) that received the request but that is not included in the set of devices (e.g., of the media session) determines whether it can hand off media coordination responsibility to another device.  FIGS. 35C-35J  illustrate exemplary techniques for doing so. 
       FIG. 35C  illustrates a simplified depiction of the scenario of  FIG. 35B , prior to device  3500  receiving the user input  3512  (e.g., thus, the set of devices are depicted as not currently playing back media). In some embodiments, in response to receiving user input (e.g.,  3512 ) requesting media playback on a set of devices (e.g.,  3502 ,  3504 ,  3506 , and  3508 ), a device (e.g.,  3500 ) determines whether the set of devices includes a device that is configured to coordinate media playback (e.g., configured to act as a primary device for the media session). 
       FIG. 35D  illustrates an exemplary scenario in which a set of devices includes a device configured to coordinate media playback. As shown, device  3504  is selected to be the primary device for the media session (e.g., playback of the media item “Same Thing”) on the set of devices (e.g.,  3502 ,  3504 ,  3506 , and  3508 ). Thus, for example, device  3504  provides a media stream to each of the other devices in the set (e.g., as depicted by the dotted lines). In some embodiments, the device (e.g.,  3500 ) selects the primary device (e.g.,  3504 ). In some embodiments, the device (e.g.,  3500 ) selects a designated heir (e.g.,  3502 ) to the primary device (e.g.,  3504 ). As shown, device  3502  is selected as the designate heir to device  3504  (e.g., and will take over as primary device if device  3504  becomes unavailable). Thus, in the example of  FIG. 35D , the set of devices included device  3504  capable of acting as a primary device, and so the first device  3500  handed over media playback coordination responsibility (e.g., one or more tasks) to that device. In some embodiments, the device (e.g.,  3500 ) selects the primary device (e.g.,  3504 ), which, in turn, selects the designated heir (e.g.,  3502 ). In some embodiments, a separate device (e.g., a server) selects the primary device (e.g.,  3504 ) and/or the designated heir (e.g.,  3502 ). 
       FIG. 35E  illustrates an exemplary scenario in which a set of devices does not include a device configured to coordinate media playback. In the example of  FIG. 35E , the set of devices does not include a device that is configured to coordinate media playback on the set of devices. For example, the set of devices does not include a device capable of (e.g., limited by hardware or software) acting as a primary device. As shown, device  3500  is the primary device for the media session (e.g., playback of the media item “Same Thing”) on the set of devices (e.g.,  3502 ,  3504 ,  3506 , and  3508 ). Thus, for example, in response to user input  3512 , device  3500  retains responsibility as the primary device for the media session on the set of devices, and provides a media stream to each of the other devices in the set (e.g., as depicted by the dotted lines). 
       FIG. 35F  illustrates an exemplary scenario in which another device (e.g.,  3514 ), not included in the set of devices and not the device that received the request to initiate media playback, is selected as a primary device for a media session on a set of devices. In some embodiments, the device (e.g.,  3500 ) transfers a media playback coordination task to another device (e.g.,  3514 ) that is not in the set of devices (e.g.,  3502 ,  3504 ,  3506 , and  3508 ). As shown, device  3514  (e.g., a home media hub, such as an Apple TV) is the primary device for the media session (e.g., playback of the media item “Same Thing”) on the set of devices (e.g.,  3502 ,  3504 ,  3506 , and  3508 ). Thus, for example, device  3514  provides a media stream to each of the devices in the set (e.g., as depicted by the dotted lines). A device other than the first device and not included in the set of devices can serve as a primary device even if the set of devices includes a device configured to coordinate media playback. For instance, in the example of  FIG. 35F , the set of devices includes a device  3502  that is configured to coordinate media playback on the set of devices. However, device  3502  is a designated primary. In some embodiments, a device not included in the set (e.g., device  3514 ) is better suited to perform media playback coordination tasks, and thus becomes the primary device over a device in the set (e.g., device  3502 ). In some examples, the set of devices does not include a device capable of acting as a primary device (e.g., is limited by hardware or software), and thus another device such as device  3514  becomes the primary device (similar to the example in  FIG. 35F , but device  3502  would not be a designated heir). 
     In some embodiments, a device (e.g.,  3500 ) performs a voice assistant function while concurrently providing a media stream to a set of devices (e.g.,  3502 ,  3504 ,  3506 , and  3508 ). In some embodiments, a device (e.g.,  3500 ) performs a phone call function while concurrently providing a media stream to a set of devices (e.g.,  3502 ,  3504 ,  3506 , and  3508 ).  FIG. 35G  illustrates an exemplary device (e.g.,  3500 ) performing a phone call function while providing a media stream to a set of devices. As shown, device  3500  displays a phone call interface, indicating that the device is currently performing a phone call function. While performing the phone call function, device  3500  is also concurrently acting as primary device for the set of devices (e.g., which continue to play back media, as indicated by the sound waves outputted from each device) and providing a media stream (e.g., as depicted by the dotted lines). Thus, a device performing primary device responsibilities can, in some examples, continue to perform other functions while acting as a primary device (e.g., and providing a media stream to other devices). 
     In some embodiments, a device (e.g.,  3500 ) provides a plurality of different media streams concurrently.  FIG. 35H  illustrates an exemplary scenario in which a device (e.g.,  3500 ) concurrently provides a plurality of different media streams. As shown, device  3500  is acting as primary device for two different sets of devices. Device Set  1  includes device  3502  and device  3506 , and device  3500  provides the devices in Device Set  1  with a first media stream (“Media Stream  1 ”) of first media (e.g., a first song). Device Set  2  includes device  3504  and device  3508 , and device  3500  provides the devices in Device Set  2  with a second media stream (“Media Stream  2 ”) of second media (e.g., a second song, different than the first song). Thus, in some examples, a device (e.g.,  3500 ) performs primary device responsibilities for different, concurrent media sessions (e.g., and provides a media stream to devices in each session). 
     In some embodiments, another device (e.g.,  3516 ) adds a new device (e.g.,  3518 ) to the set of devices (e.g.,  3502 ,  3504 ,  3506 , and  3508 ).  FIGS. 35I-35J  illustrate an exemplary scenario in which a new device is added to the set of devices.  FIG. 35I  depicts device  3516  connected to device  3518 , which is (though not depicted graphically) connected to the set of devices ( 3502 ,  3504 ,  3506 , and  3508 ) and device  3500 . In some embodiments, devices  3516  and  3518  each include one or more features of device  100 ,  300 ,  500 , or  580 . In this example, device  3516  receives a request to add the device  3518  to the set of devices of the media session (e.g., a user input at a multi-device interface displayed on device  3516 ). In some embodiments, a first device (e.g.,  3500 ) receives an indication that the new device has been added to the set of devices. In some embodiments, in response to receiving an indication that the new device (e.g.,  3518 ) has been added to the set of devices, the device (e.g.,  3500 ) provides a media stream to the new device.  FIG. 35J  illustrates that device  3500 , which is a primary device for the media session and is providing a media stream to the set of devices, is now providing a media stream (e.g., indicated by the dotted line) to the new device  3518  in response to receiving an indication (e.g., from device  3516  or  3518 ) that the new device was added to the set of devices of the media session. 
       FIGS. 36A-36C  is a flow diagram illustrating a method for managing playback of media on a set of devices using an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. Method  3600  is performed at a device (e.g.,  100 ,  300 ,  500 ,  580 ). Some operations in method  3600  are, optionally, combined, the order of some operations are, optionally, changed, and some operations are, optionally, omitted. 
     As described below, method  3600  provides an intuitive way for managing playback of media on a set of devices. The method reduces the cognitive burden on a user for managing playback of media on a set of devices, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated computing devices, enabling a user to manage playback of media on a set of devices faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges. 
     The electronic device (e.g.,  3500 ) (also referred to as a “first device”) receives ( 3602 ) a request (e.g., user input  3512 ) to initiate media playback on a set of devices (e.g.,  3502 ,  3504 ,  3506 , and  3508 ) that does not include the first device. In some embodiments, the set of devices includes one or more devices. For example, device  3500  receives user input at a multi-device interface  3510  to initiate playback of media on the “Bedroom”, “Kitchen”, and “Living Room” devices (e.g.,  3502 ,  3504 ,  3506 , and  3508 ) that are connected to the first device. 
     In response to receiving the request, and while the first device is coordinating media playback, the first device (e.g.,  3500 ) determines ( 3604 ) whether the set of devices includes a device configured to coordinate media playback. For example, device  3500  determines whether any device in the set of devices  3502 ,  3504 ,  3506 , and  3508  include a device that is capable of becoming a primary device (e.g., as described above with respect to  FIGS. 29A-29I ) for the media session requested by the user (e.g., is a “smart” device). In some examples, if a device includes a device capable of becoming a primary device, it is referred to as a “smart group”. In some embodiments, a device (e.g.,  3514 ), other than the first device or the set of devices, determines whether the set of devices includes a device configured to coordinate media playback. 
     In accordance with a determination that the set of devices includes a device configured to coordinate media playback (e.g., is a smart group), the first device (e.g.,  3500 ) transfers ( 3606 ) a media playback coordination task from the first device to the device (e.g.,  3504  as shown  FIG. 35D ) configured to coordinate media playback. For example, device  3500  hands off primary device responsibility to a smart device (e.g., device  3504  as shown in  FIG. 35D ) that is a member of the set of devices. 
     Transferring a media playback coordination task, for media playback that does not include the first device, from a first device to another device configured to coordinate media playback, subsequent to the first device receiving user input, allows the first device to free up device resources and provide an improved response to further user input requests, without requiring further user input to do so. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In accordance with a determination that the set of devices does not include a device configured to coordinate media playback, the first device (e.g.,  3500 ) forgoes ( 3608 ) transferring the media playback coordination task (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 35E ). For example, device  3500  does not hand off primary device responsibility if the set of devices does not include a smart device (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 35E ). In some embodiments, the first device transfers the media playback coordination task to a device (e.g.,  3514  of  FIG. 35F ) not in the set of devices. For example, a home media hub device (e.g., such as device  3514 , an Apple TV) can serve as a primary device to the set of devices. 
     In some embodiments, the media playback coordination task is selected from the group consisting of: storing a media playback queue, providing a media stream to one or more devices in the set of devices during media playback, transmitting data indicating that the media stream is available (e.g., advertise to other devices that it is the primary device), synchronizing playback between devices of the set of devices, and a combination thereof. In some embodiments, the media playback coordination task includes other playback coordination tasks. Additional examples of playback coordination tasks are described above (e.g., with respect to  FIGS. 6A-6AR and 29A-29I ). 
     In some embodiments, further in accordance with a determination that the set of devices does not include a device configured to coordinate media playback ( 3610 ), the first device (e.g.,  3500 ) detects ( 3612 ) a second device (e.g.,  3514 ), connected to the first device and the set of devices, and not included in the set of devices, that is configured to coordinate media playback. In accordance with detecting the second device, the first device (e.g.,  3500 ) transfers ( 3614 ) the media playback coordination task from the first device to the second device. For example, device  3500  hands off primary device responsibility to a home media hub device (e.g., such as device  3514  of  FIG. 35F ) that is connected to the set of devices. 
     In some embodiments, further in accordance with a determination that the set of devices does not include a device configured to coordinate media playback, the first device (e.g.,  3500 ) performs ( 3616 ) the media playback coordination task. For example, device  3500  retains primary device responsibility (e.g., as shown in  35 E), and thus performs a media playback coordination task as part of its role as primary device for the media session on the set of devices. 
     In some embodiments, performing the media playback coordination task comprises providing a media stream to one or more devices in the set of devices during media playback, and while providing the media stream to one or more devices in the set of devices during media playback, the first device (e.g.,  3500 ) receives ( 3618 ) a request to perform a voice assistant function or a phone call function. In response to the request ( 3620 ) to perform a voice assistant function or a phone call function the first device (e.g.,  3500 ): performs ( 3622 ) the voice assistant function or the phone call function, and continues ( 3624 ) to provide the media stream to one or more devices in the set of devices during media playback while performing the voice assistant function or the phone call function. In some embodiments, a request to perform a voice assistant function is a user input. For example, device  3500  receives voice user input, such as “Hey Siri”, which invokes a personal digital assistant. In some embodiments, request to perform a phone call function is a user input. For example, device  3500  can receive user input representing a request to begin a phone call (e.g., a request to answer an incoming call, or a request to place an outgoing call). In some embodiments, a phone call this includes one or more of a telephone call, a voice over internet protocol (“VoIP”) call, a video call (e.g., video chat, FaceTime, Skype, or the like), an internet-based call (e.g., a “Wi-Fi Calling” call), or the like. Thus, in accordance with some embodiments, the first device can perform other functions such as making a telephone call or using a voice assistant, without interrupting the media stream. 
     In some embodiments, performing the media playback coordination task comprises providing a media stream to one or more devices in the set of devices during media playback, wherein the media stream is a first media stream, and wherein the set of devices is a first set of devices. While providing the first media stream, the first device (e.g.,  3500 ) concurrently provides ( 3626 ) a second media stream, different than the first media stream to a second set of devices different than the first set of devices (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 35H ). For example, the first device can provide a plurality of different media streams concurrently. For instance, the first media stream is a song, and the second media stream is a movie. Thus, one device (e.g., device  3500 ) can act as a primary device to a plurality of media sessions (e.g., on a plurality of devices). 
     In some embodiments, performing the media playback coordination task comprises providing a media stream to one or more devices in the set of devices during media playback, and while providing the media stream to one or more devices in the set of devices during media playback, the first device (e.g.,  3500 ) receives ( 3628 ) an indication that a third device (e.g.,  3516 ) added a new device (e.g.,  3518  as shown in  FIG. 35I ) to the set of devices. In response to receiving the indication that the third device added the new device to the set of devices, the first device (e.g.,  3500 ) provides ( 3630 ) the media stream to the new device (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 35J ). 
     In some embodiments, further in accordance with a determination that the set of devices does not include a device configured to coordinate media playback, the first device (e.g.,  3500 ) receives a playback control command. In response to receiving the playback control command, the first device (e.g.,  3500 ) transmits an instruction to the set devices in accordance with the playback control command. For instance, in some examples, the first device has media playback coordination responsibility (e.g., is a primary device) for the set of devices, and thus processes the playback control command and issues instructions to one or more devices in the set of devices to perform the appropriate corresponding action. 
     In some embodiments, receiving the playback control command comprises receiving user input, at the first device, representing the playback control command. For example, the first device receives the playback control command via user input. 
     In some embodiments, receiving the playback control command comprises receiving, from a device other than the first device, data representing the playback control command. For example, the first device receives the playback control command from another device that received input on a proximity card or other interface for controlling media playback. 
     In some embodiments, further in accordance with a determination that the set of devices includes a device configured to coordinate media playback, the first device (e.g.,  3500 ) receives a playback control command, and in response to receiving the playback control command, the first device (e.g.,  3500 ) forwards the playback control command to the device (e.g.,  3504  of  FIG. 35D ) configured to coordinate media playback. For example, if the first device is not a primary device for the set of devices (e.g., the first device handed of primary device responsibility, as shown in  FIG. 35D ), the first device forwards the playback control command on to the primary device for processing. 
     In some embodiments, further in accordance with a determination that the set of devices includes a device configured to coordinate media playback, the first device (e.g.,  3500 ) transmits a playback queue to the device configured to coordinate media playback. For example, if the request to initiate playback received at the first device is a request to play a playlist (e.g., a plurality of songs), the playlist is forwarded to the primary device of the set of devices. 
     In some embodiments, the request to initiate media playback is a request to initiate playback of first media (e.g., a song, playlist, movie, or the like). Further in accordance with a determination that the set of devices includes a device configured to coordinate media playback ( 3632 ), and in accordance with a determination that the device configured to coordinate media playback has access to the first media, the first device (e.g.,  3500 ) transfers ( 3634 ) the media playback coordination task from the first device to the device (e.g.,  3504  of  FIG. 35D ) configured to coordinate media playback. In accordance with a determination that the device configured to coordinate media playback does not have access to the first media, the first device (e.g.,  3500 ) forgoes transferring ( 3636 ) the media playback coordination task. For example, the first device transfers the media playback coordination task to a device in the set of devices if that device has access to the requested first media. For instance, if the first media requested is accessed through a media streaming service that the device of the set of devices is not configured to access, then the first device forgoes transferring the media playback coordination task to that device. In some examples, the first device (e.g., which has access to the first media) retains responsibility as the primary device to the media session, and provides a media stream to the set of devices. 
     In some embodiments, the set of devices includes a plurality of devices configured to coordinate media playback, and further in accordance with a determination that the set of devices includes a device configured to coordinate media playback, the first device (e.g.,  3500 ) selects a primary device from the plurality of devices configured to coordinate media playback, and transmits the media playback coordination task from the first device to the selected primary device. For example, when the set of devices includes multiple potential primary devices (e.g., that are configured to coordinate media playback), the first device selects one of the devices to act as the primary device for the media session. 
     In some embodiments, the first device (e.g.,  3500 ) selects a designated heir (e.g.,  3502  of  FIG. 35D ) to the primary device from the plurality of devices configured to coordinate media playback. For example, when the set of devices includes multiple potential primary devices (e.g., that are configured to coordinate media playback), the first device selects one of the devices to act as the primary device for the media session, and selects a designated heir to the primary device (e.g., to take over as primary device if the selected primary device becomes unavailable). 
     In some embodiments, the set of devices includes a plurality of devices configured to coordinate media playback, and further in accordance with a determination that the set of devices includes a device configured to coordinate media playback, the first device (e.g.,  3500 ) receives, from a fourth device (e.g.,  3514 ), selection of a primary device from the plurality of devices configured to coordinate media playback, and the first device (e.g.,  3500 ) transmits the media playback coordination task from the first device to the primary device (e.g.,  3504  of  FIG. 35D ). For example, a device other than the first device selects the primary device for the media session. 
     In some embodiments, the first device (e.g.,  3500 ) transmits an instruction to the set of devices to initiate media playback. For example, the first device transmits an instruction to initiate playback, of the requested media, to the set of devices. 
     In some embodiments, the first device (e.g.,  3500 ) transmits a copy of a media playback queue to at least two devices of the set of devices. For example, the first device transmits a playback queue to non-primary devices of the set of devices. In some examples, a copy of a media playback queue is stored on multiple devices of the set of devices during the media session that includes the set of devices. 
     Note that details of the processes described above with respect to method  3600  (e.g.,  FIGS. 36A-36C ) are also applicable in an analogous manner to the methods described below/above. For example, method  700 ,  900 ,  1100 ,  1300 ,  1500 ,  1700 ,  1800 ,  2000 ,  2200 ,  2400 ,  2600 ,  2800 ,  3000 ,  3200 ,  3400 ,  3800 , and  3900  optionally includes one or more of the characteristics of the various methods described above with reference to method  3600 . For brevity, these details are not repeated below. 
       FIGS. 37A-37D  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for managing playback of media on a plurality of devices, in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIGS. 38A-38B . 
       FIG. 37A  illustrates an exemplary multi-device interface. As shown, device  3700  displays, on display  3701 , a multi-device interface  3710 . In some embodiments, device  3700  includes one or more features of device  100 ,  300 ,  500 , or  580 . In some embodiments, multi-device interface  3710  includes one or more of the features of multi-device interface  610 , for example as described above with respect to  FIG. 6J . As shown, indicators for the devices in the following rooms are selected “Bedroom” (e.g., indicator  3710 B), “Kitchen” (indicator  3710 C) and “Living Room” (indicator  3710 D) (e.g., which corresponds to two devices, a stereo pair). The indicator ( 3710 A) for the iPhone (e.g., device  3700 ) is unselected. While indicators  3710 B- 3710 D are selected, device  3700  receives user input  3712 , representing selection of the done affordance  3710 E. Thus, the user wishes begin a media session that includes playback the media item titled “Same Thing” on the set of devices in the Bedroom, Kitchen, and Living Room. 
     In some embodiments, a device (e.g.,  3700 ) receives user input (e.g.,  3712 ) requesting playback on a set of devices that does not include the device. As shown, device  3700  received user input  3712 , which is request to initiate playback on devices  3702 ,  3704 ,  3706 , and  3708  (shown in  FIG. 37C ). In some embodiments, devices  3702 ,  3704 ,  3706 , and  3708  each includes one or more features of device  100 ,  300 ,  500 , or  580 . Thus, in this example, the device that received the request is not a device that will be playing back the requested media. In some embodiments, the device (e.g.,  3700 ) that received the request but that is not included in the set of devices (e.g., of the media session) determines whether it can hand off media coordination responsibility to another device. However, in some examples, a device (e.g.,  3700 ) is connected to a plurality of devices that are configured to coordinate media playback. Thus, the device can select the primary device from this plurality of devices that are configured to coordinate media playback. In some embodiments, the device selects the primary device from the plurality of devices based on one or more characteristics of each device of the plurality of devices.  FIGS. 37B-37D  illustrate exemplary techniques for doing so. 
       FIG. 37B  illustrates an exemplary depiction of device characteristics for each of a plurality of devices configured to coordinate media playback for a set of devices. As shown,  FIG. 37B  depicts four set of device characteristics  3714 A,  3714 B,  3714 C, and  3714 D. In this example, as described in more detail below, each set of device characteristics includes characteristics related to whether the respective device is operating on battery power, a network performance characteristic of the respective device, and a quality of connection of the respective device to the each device in the set of devices of the media session. In some examples, the device (e.g.,  3700 ) selects the primary device based on one or more device characteristics (e.g., such as those as shown in  FIG. 37B ). In some embodiments, the device selects a primary device based on other device characteristics (e.g., other than those shown in  FIG. 37B ). 
     In this example, each set of characteristics includes a “Power Source” characteristic, which identifies a power source of the device—for example, whether the respective device is operating on battery power or is plugged in (e.g., is operating on wall power or is otherwise charging). For example, the power source of the respective device can be a characteristic that is considered when selecting a primary device to perform playback coordination tasks, which can require an increase in power consumption by a device (e.g., due to increased data transmission activity that results from providing a media stream to the set of devices). 
     In this example, each set of characteristics also includes a “Network Performance” characteristic, which can include one or more indications of the quality of a respective device&#39;s connection to a network (e.g., a local area network that connects each device in the set of devices, a connection to a wide area network, or the like). For example, the network performance of the device can be a characteristic that is considered when selecting a primary device to perform playback coordination tasks, which can require an increased demand on network activity by a device (e.g., due to increased data transmission activity that results from providing a media stream to the set of devices). 
     In this example, each set of characteristics also includes an indication of the quality of connection between the respective device and each device in the set of devices included in the requested media session. These are identified variously as “Connection to Kitchen Device” (e.g., device  3702 ), “Connection to Living Room Device  1 ” (e.g., device  3704 ), “Connection to Living Room Device  2 ” (e.g., device  3706 ), and “Connection to Bedroom Device” (e.g., device  3708 ). For example, the quality of connection between a respective device and each device in the set of devices can be a characteristic that is considered when selecting a primary device to perform playback coordination tasks, which can require the selected primary device to transmit data to each device in the set of devices (e.g., to provide a media stream). 
       FIG. 37C  depicts an exemplary scenario subsequent to a device (e.g.,  3700 ) selecting a primary device (e.g.,  3704 ). In the example of  FIG. 37C , device  3700  selected device  3704  as the primary device for media playback on the set of devices  3702 ,  3704 ,  3706 , and  3708 . In this example, device  3700  determined that there were three devices configured to coordinate media playback: the Kitchen device  3702  (corresponding to the set of characteristics  3714 A), the Living Room  1  device  3704  (corresponding to the set of characteristics  3714 B), and the Living Room  2  device  3706  (corresponding to the set of characteristics  3714 C). In this example, Bedroom device  3708  is not a device configured to coordinate media playback. In this example, the set of devices are arranged (e.g., in a user&#39;s home) as shown and described with respect to  FIG. 35B . 
     In some embodiments, a device (e.g.,  3700 ) selects, based at least in part on the one or more characteristics of each device of the plurality of devices (e.g.,  3702 ,  3704 , and  3706 ) configured to coordinate media playback, a primary device from among the plurality of devices configured to coordinate media playback on a set of devices (e.g.,  3702 ,  3704 ,  3706 , and  3708 ). As shown in  FIG. 37C , device  3700  selects device  3704  (corresponding to the set of characteristics  3714 B) as the primary device, which is operating on non-battery power, has a high network performance characteristic, and has a high quality of connection to each other device in the set except the Bedroom device (device  3708 ), to which it has a moderate quality of connection. In some examples, the set of characteristics  3714 B are more favorable than the sets  3714 A and  3714 C, which are operating on battery power and have lower connection performance and quality-related characteristics. In some embodiments, selecting a primary device based in part on one or more characteristics comprises creating a comparative metric for each device of the plurality of devices configured to coordinate media playback. For example, a comparative metric can be a value, created by weighing (values associated with) each characteristic of a set of characteristics associated with a respective device, used to quantitatively compare each respective device of the plurality of devices to each other. For instance, the characteristics of being on non-battery power and having high network performance can result in a more favorable (e.g., higher) comparative metric relative to other devices being on battery power and having low network performance. 
     In some embodiments, the plurality of devices (e.g.,  3702 ,  3704 ,  3706 , and  3716 ) includes one or more devices (e.g.,  3716 ) not included in the set of devices (e.g.,  3702 ,  3704 ,  3706 , and  3708 ).  FIG. 37D  illustrates an alternative exemplary scenario to that shown in  FIG. 37C . In the example of  FIG. 37D , the plurality of devices configured to coordinate media playback on the set of devices (e.g.,  3702 ,  3704 ,  3706 , and  3708 ) includes a device not in the set of devices, device  3716  (e.g., a home media hub, such as an Apple TV). In this example, device  3700  selects device  3716  as the primary device. Device  3716  corresponds to the set of characteristics  3714 D shown in  FIG. 37B —as shown, device  3716  is operating on non-battery power, has a high network performance characteristic, and has a high connection quality to each device in the set of devices. In this example, device  3716  has a more favorable characteristics (e.g., resulting in a more favorable comparative metric) than those of device  3704  (e.g., characteristics  3714 B), and thus device  3700  selects device  3716  as the primary device. 
       FIGS. 38A-38B  is a flow diagram illustrating a method for managing playback of media on a set of devices using an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. Method  3800  is performed at a device (e.g.,  100 ,  300 ,  500 ,  580 ). Some operations in method  3800  are, optionally, combined, the order of some operations are, optionally, changed, and some operations are, optionally, omitted. 
     As described below, method  3800  provides an intuitive way for managing playback of media on a set of devices. The method reduces the cognitive burden on a user for managing playback of media on a set of devices, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated computing devices, enabling a user to manage playback of media on a set of devices faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges. 
     The electronic device (e.g.,  3700 ) receives ( 3802 ) a request (e.g., user input  3712 ) to initiate media playback on a set of devices (e.g.,  3702 ,  3704 ,  3706 , and  3708  of  FIG. 37C ) connected to the device. In some embodiments, the set of devices includes one or more devices. In some embodiments, the device and the set of devices are connected via a wired or wireless connection (e.g., Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, or the like). In some embodiments, the received request is received via user input (e.g.,  3712 ) at the device. 
     In response to receiving the request, and while the device is coordinating media playback, the electronic device (e.g.,  3700 ) determines ( 3804 ), for each device of a plurality of devices (e.g.,  3702 ,  3704 , and  3706 ) configured to coordinate media playback and connected to the set of devices (e.g.,  3702 ,  3704 ,  3706 , and  3708 ), one or more device characteristics For example, the set of devices includes multiple devices capable of becoming a primary device (e.g., multiple smart devices). In some embodiments, the plurality of devices includes the device (e.g.,  3700 ). In some embodiments, the plurality of devices includes one or more devices that are not the device and that are not included in the set of devices (e.g.,  3716  of  FIG. 37D ). For example, the plurality of devices represents devices that are capable of acting as primary device to the set of devices (that will play back media), and is not necessarily the same as the set of devices. 
     The electronic device (e.g.,  3700 ) selects ( 3806 ), based at least in part on the one or more characteristics (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 37B ) of each device of the plurality of devices configured to coordinate media playback, a primary device (e.g.,  3704  of  FIG. 37C ) from among the plurality of devices (e.g.,  3702 ,  3704 , and  3706 ) configured to coordinate media playback. 
     The electronic device (e.g.,  3700 ) transfers ( 3808 ) a media playback coordination task from the device to the primary device (e.g.,  3704  of  FIG. 37C ) configured to coordinate media playback. For example, the device hands off primary device responsibility to a device selected to be the primary device for the media session that includes the set of devices. 
     Transferring a media playback coordination task from a device to another device configured to coordinate media playback based on one or more device characteristics, subsequent to the device receiving user input, allows the device to free up device resources and provides an optimized delegation of a media playback coordination task, without requiring further user input to do so. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the selected primary device (e.g.,  3716 , as shown in  FIG. 37D ) is not ( 3810 ) a member of the set of devices (e.g.,  3702 ,  3704 ,  3706 , and  3708 ). 
     In some embodiments, the selected primary device (e.g.,  3704  of  FIG. 37C ) is ( 3812 ) a member of the set of devices (e.g.,  3702 ,  3704 ,  3706 , and  3708 ). 
     In some embodiments, the one or more characteristics is selected from the group consisting of ( 3814 ): whether the respective device is operating on battery power, a network performance characteristic (e.g., signal strength, bandwidth, throughput, error rate of a network connection) of the respective device, a quality of connection of the respective device to the each device in the set of devices, and a combination thereof. In some embodiments, a quality of connection of the respective e device is based on a measure of proximity to a device in the set of devices. In some examples, other characteristics are used to select a primary device. 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g.,  3700 ) selects ( 3816 ) a designated heir to the primary device from the plurality of devices configured to coordinate media playback. 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g.,  3700 ) transmits an instruction to initiate media playback to the set of devices. 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g.,  3700 ) transmits ( 3818 ) a copy of a media playback queue to the selected primary device. In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g.,  3700 ) transmits a copy of the media playback queue to two or more devices (e.g., including at least one non-primary device) in the set of devices. 
     In some embodiments, the request to initiate media playback is a request to initiate playback of first media (e.g., a song, playlist, movie, or the like), and wherein transferring the media playback coordination task from the device to the selected primary device is further in accordance with a determination that the selected primary device has access to the first media ( 3820 ). For example, the device forgoes handoff of primary device responsibility to a selected primary device if such device does not have access to the first media. 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g.,  3700 ) receives a playback control command, and in response to receiving the playback control command, forwards the playback control command to the selected primary device. For example, a device that is not the primary device forwards the playback control command to the primary device for processing. In some embodiments, the playback control command is received via user input at the device. In some embodiments, the playback control command is received from another device. 
     In some embodiments, the media playback coordination task is selected from the group consisting of ( 3822 ): storing a media playback queue, providing a media stream to one or more devices in the set of devices during media playback, transmitting data indicating that the media stream is available (e.g., advertise to other devices (e.g., in the set of devices) that it is the primary device), synchronizing playback between devices of the set of devices, and a combination thereof. In some embodiments, the device transfers all or fewer than all playback coordination tasks that would otherwise be performed by a primary device. 
     Note that details of the processes described above with respect to method  3800  (e.g.,  FIGS. 38A-38B ) are also applicable in an analogous manner to the methods described above. For example, method  700 ,  900 ,  1100 ,  1300 ,  1500 ,  1700 ,  1800 ,  2000 ,  2200 ,  2400 ,  2600 ,  2800 ,  3000 ,  3200 ,  3400 ,  3600 , and  3900  optionally includes one or more of the characteristics of the various methods described above with reference to method  3800 . For brevity, these details are not repeated below. 
       FIGS. 39A-39C  is a flow diagram illustrating a method for configuring a second device using an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. Method  3900  is performed at a device (e.g.,  100 ,  300 ,  500 ,  580 ,  1010 ,  1900 ) with a display. Some operations in method  3900  are, optionally, combined, the order of some operations are, optionally, changed, and some operations are, optionally, omitted. 
     As described below, method  3900  provides an intuitive way for configuring a second device. The method reduces the cognitive burden on a user for configuring a second device, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated computing devices, enabling a user to configure a second device faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges. 
     The electronic device (e.g.,  1900 ) (also referred to as a “first device”) establishes ( 3902 ) a communication link with a second device (e.g.,  1906 ). Subsequent to establishing the communication link with the second device, the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) initiates ( 3904 ) a configuration process (e.g., as shown in  FIGS. 19D-19AJ ) for configuring the second device. 
     In some embodiments, during the configuration process ( 3906 ): the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) displays ( 3908 ), on the display, a configuration user interface that includes a prompt to select a location (e.g., “Where is this speaker?” as shown in  FIG. 19E ). The first device (e.g.,  1900 ) receives ( 3910 ) user input selection of a location. In response to receiving the user input, the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) configures ( 3912 ) the second device to be associated with the location. 
     In some embodiments, during the configuration process ( 3906 ): the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) detects ( 3914 ) an audio tone signal (e.g.,  1014  of  FIG. 10H ) indicative of a pairing handshake with the second device, wherein the audio tone signal is out-of-band to the communication link. In accordance with detecting the audio tone signal, the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) proceeds ( 3915 ) to a next step in the configuration process for configuring the second device (e.g., proceeds from setup card  1918  of  FIG. 19H  to setup card  1920  of  FIG. 19I ). 
     In some embodiments, the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) detects an indication that a physical proximity between the first device and the second device the first device (e.g.,  1906 ) satisfies a proximity condition; and in response to detecting the indication that the physical proximity between the first device and the second device satisfies the proximity condition, establishes the communication link with the second device. 
     Using an audio tone to establish a communication link between two devices allows the user to efficiently move through a configuration process for a device with fewer required user inputs, while ensuring that the devices are in relatively close proximity and that the user has physical access to both devices. Providing an optimized configuration process to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. In some embodiments, the audio tone signal is a first audio tone signal, the method further comprising: further in response to detecting the indication that the physical proximity between the first device and the second device satisfies the proximity condition, outputting a second audio tone signal. 
     In some embodiments, proceeding to the next step of the configuration process includes completing the configuration process (e.g., proceeding to display setup card  1942  of  FIG. 19T ). 
     In some embodiments, the audio tone signal (e.g.,  1904 ) is generated by the second device (e.g.,  1906  as shown in  FIG. 19A ). 
     In some embodiments, the audio tone signal includes an audio passcode. In some embodiments, the audio passcode is dictated (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 10J ). In some embodiments, the audio passcode is encoded in the audio tone signal. 
     In some embodiments, the audio tone signal (e.g.,  1904 ) is received while the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) is physically positioned within a threshold physical proximity (e.g.,  1908  of  FIG. 19C ) to the second device (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 19C ). 
     In some embodiments, the audio tone signal is a first audio tone signal, and during the configuration process (e.g., while displaying setup card  1918  of  FIG. 19H ) ( 3916 ): the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) detects ( 3918 ) a third audio tone signal comprising encoded data. For example, the third audio tone signal includes one or more of user account login information, an identifier for the second device, or other data for confirming that the second device should be provided access to the user&#39;s account or personal data. In response to detecting the third audio tone signal ( 3920 ): the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) transmits ( 3922 ) an acknowledgement to the second device (e.g.,  1906 ); and the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) proceeds ( 3924 ) to a next step in the configuration process (e.g., displays the setup card  1920  of  FIG. 19I ). 
     In some embodiments, further in response to receiving the user input selection (e.g.,  1913 ) of the location (e.g., “John&#39;s Room” as shown in  FIG. 19J ) ( 3926 ): in accordance with a determination that a third device (e.g., device  1020  of  FIG. 10K , where the second device is device  1000  of  FIG. 10K ) is currently associated with the location (e.g., “John&#39;s Room”), the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) displays ( 3928 ), on the display (e.g.,  1902 ), a configuration user interface (e.g., setup card  1922  of  FIG. 19J ) that includes a prompt (e.g., affordance  1922 A in  FIG. 19J  that includes text “Use as a stereo pair”) to select whether to create a device group (e.g., stereo pair) that includes the second device and the third device. In some embodiments, a device group includes two or more devices. In accordance with a determination that a third device is not currently associated with the location, the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) forgoes displaying ( 3930 ), on the display, the configuration user interface that includes the prompt to select whether to create the device group (e.g., displays setup card  1914  of  FIG. 19F  instead of setup card  1922 ). 
     In some embodiments, the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) receives user input (e.g.,  1923 ) representing an affirmative request create the device group. In some embodiments, in response to the user input representing an affirmative request create the device group, the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) displays, on the display, a configuration user interface (e.g.,  1924  of  FIG. 19K ) that includes a prompt (e.g., “Is this speaker left or right?” as shown in  FIG. 19K ) to select an audio output channel (e.g., left or right, as shown in  FIG. 19K ) to associate with the second device. In some embodiments, the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) receives user input (e.g.,  1925 ) representing selection of an audio output channel (e.g., left, as shown in  FIG. 19K ). In response to receiving the user input representing selection of a selected audio output channel, the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) associates (e.g., transmits configuration data to) the second device with the selected audio channel. 
     In some embodiments, the prompt to select a location includes a plurality of predetermined location identifiers (e.g., Kitchen, Bedroom, Patio, Dining Room, as shown in  FIG. 19E ). 
     In some embodiments, the plurality of predetermined location identifiers includes a user-defined location identifier (e.g., John&#39;s Room, as shown in  FIG. 19E ). 
     In some embodiments, the prompt to select a location includes a field (e.g., “Create New Room” option as shown in  FIG. 19M ) for creating a new location identifier. In some embodiments, the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) receives user input (e.g.,  1931 ) associated with the field for creating a new location identifier (e.g., text entered into field  1930 A of  FIG. 19N ), wherein the user input includes a location identifier (e.g., “Tim&#39;s Room” a shown in  FIG. 19N ). The first device (e.g.,  1900 ) creates a new location identifier based on the received user input associated with the field for creating the new location identifier, and associates the second device with the new location identifier (e.g., transmits configuration data that includes the new location identifier to the second device). 
     In some embodiments, during the configuration process ( 3932 ): the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) displays ( 3934 ), on the display (e.g.,  1902 ), a configuration user interface (e.g., setup card  1914  of  FIG. 19F ) that includes a prompt (e.g., “Share your settings” affordance  1914 B as shown in  FIG. 19F ) requesting permission to transmit user account information (e.g., login credentials) to the second device (e.g.,  1906 ). The first device (e.g.,  1900 ) receives ( 3936 ) user input (e.g., selection of affordance  1914 B) providing permission to transmit the user account information to the second device. In response to receiving the user input providing permission, the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) transmits ( 3938 ) the user account information to the second device (e.g.,  1906 ). 
     In some embodiments, prior to transmitting the user account information to the second device, and in accordance with a determination that the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) is not currently logged into a user account associated with the user account information (e.g., is not currently logged into an iCloud account), the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) displays, on the display (e.g.,  1902 ), a prompt to log in to the user account (e.g., setup card  1932  that includes the text “Please login to your iCloud account to continue” as shown in  FIG. 19O ), and forgoes transmitting the user account information to the second device. In accordance with a determination that the first device is currently logged into the user account associated with the user account information, the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) transmitting the user account information to the second device (e.g.,  1906 ). 
     In some embodiments, in response to progressing from a first step (e.g., setup card  1912 ) in the configuration process to a second step (e.g., setup card  1914 ) in the configuration process, the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) outputs a fourth audio tone signal (e.g.,  1044  of  FIG. 10N ). In some embodiments, the fourth audio tone signal is outputted concurrently with the output of a fifth audio tone signal (e.g.,  1042  of  FIG. 10N ) outputted by the second device (e.g.,  1906 ). In some embodiments, the fourth audio tone signal and the fifth audio tone signal are harmonics. 
     In some embodiments, in response to progressing from the second step (e.g., setup card  1914 ) in the configuration process to a third step (e.g., setup card  1916 ) in the configuration process, the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) outputs a sixth audio tone signal (e.g.,  1048  of  FIG. 10O ). In some embodiments, the sixth audio tone signal is outputted concurrently with the output of a seventh audio tone signal (e.g.,  1046  of  FIG. 10O ) outputted by the second device (e.g.,  1906 ). In some embodiments, the sixth audio tone signal and the seventh audio tone signal are harmonics. In some embodiments, the sixth audio tone signal is a higher frequency tone than the fourth audio tone signal (e.g., as shown in plot  1040  of  FIG. 10O ). 
     In some embodiments, subsequent to initiating the configuration process, the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) receives data regarding an output of an operation being performed by the second device (e.g.,  1906 ). For example, the output can be audio output (e.g., dictation by a voice assistant) by device  1906  of media (e.g., music), weather information, news, calendar appointments, or the like. In response to receiving the data regarding the output of the operation being performed by the second device (e.g.,  1906 ), the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) displays a user interface (e.g., interface  1950  of  FIG. 19X-19Y ) that includes a representation of the output of the operation being performed by the second device (e.g.,  1906 ) (e.g. interface  1950  includes information identifying a song currently being played by device  1906 ). In some embodiments, the representation of the output can be displayed when device  1900  is locked, unlocked, or either. For example, when device  1906  starts playing music, device  1900  displays a Now Playing interface (e.g., interface  1950 ). In some embodiments, device  1900  displays a Now Playing interface whenever music is playing on device  1906  (e.g., music initiated by any device, including other devices). In some embodiments, the operation is output of weather information, and the representation of the output includes current temperature information, forecast information, or the like. In some embodiments, the operation is output of news information, and the representation of the output includes current news, or the like. 
     Displaying a user interface that includes a representation of the output of the operation being performed by the second device, provides the user with visual feedback about the state of a state of the second device. Providing improved visual feedback to the user enhances the operability of the second device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the operation being performed by the second device (e.g.,  1906 ) includes audibly outputting information (e.g., playing the song identified in interface  1950 ), wherein receiving the data regarding the output of the operation being performed includes receiving data representing the information (e.g., song title, elapsed play time, weather forecast data, news stories), and wherein displaying the user interface, that includes the representation of the output of the operation being performed by the second device, includes displaying (e.g., interface  1950 ) at least a portion of the data representing the information. 
     Displaying data representing information corresponding to information being audibly outputted by the second device provides the user with visual feedback about the state of the second device, in addition to the audio feedback being provided directly by the second device. Providing improved (e.g., supplemental or additional) visual feedback to the user enhances the operability of the second device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the information includes a media item (e.g., a song), and the operation being performed by the second device (e.g.,  1906 ) includes audibly outputting the media item. In some embodiments, displaying the data representing the information includes displaying one or more of: an artist, a media item name, an album name, album art, and a media playback progress indicator (e.g., as shown in interface  1950  of  FIG. 19Y ). 
     Displaying additional data (e.g., one or more of artist, a media item name, an album name, album art, and a media playback progress indicator) that corresponds to a media item being audibly outputted by the second device provides the user with visual feedback about the state of the second device. Providing improved (e.g., supplemental or additional) visual feedback to the user enhances the operability of the second device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, displaying the user interface that includes the representation of the output of the operation being performed by the second device includes displaying one or more of news information or weather information. 
     In some embodiments, during the configuration process: in accordance with a first configuration setting of the first device being compatible with the second device (e.g.,  1906 ), the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) configures the second device (e.g.,  1906 ) to include the first configuration setting. For example, a configuration setting can be a language setting for a voice assistant, and a first configuration setting can be “English (U.S.)” In this example, English (U.S.) is compatible with (e.g., supported by) a voice assistant on device  1906 . In some embodiments, the configuration is done automatically, without requiring user input or confirmation. In accordance with the first configuration setting of the first device not being compatible with the second device (e.g.,  1906 ), the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) displays an indication that the first configuration setting is not compatible with the second device (e.g., displays a message). In some embodiments, the indication that the first setting is not compatible with the second device is the display of a setup card for selecting a different/compatible setting (e.g., setup card  1960  of  FIG. 19AD  for selecting a compatible language). 
     Using a first configuration setting of the first device that is compatible with the second device allows the user to efficiently move through a configuration process for a device with fewer required user inputs, providing an optimized configuration process. Providing an optimized configuration process to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, further in accordance with the first configuration setting of the first device being compatible with the second device (e.g.,  1906 ), the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) displays a configuration user interface that includes a prompt requesting acceptance of the first configuration setting for the second device. In response to receiving user input accepting the first configuration setting for the second device (e.g.,  1906 ), the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) configures the second device to include the first configuration setting. 
     Displaying a configuration user interface that includes a prompt requesting acceptance of the first configuration setting for the second device, provides the user with visual feedback about the state of the second device (e.g., that it is compatible with the first configuration setting). Providing improved visual feedback to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the first configuration setting is a setting disabling a device feature (e.g., a voice assistant), and wherein a second configuration setting is a setting enabling the device feature (e.g., a voice assistant). In accordance with a determination that the configuration process requires enabling the device feature on the second device (e.g.,  1906 ): the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) displays an indication that the device feature will be enabled on the second device (e.g., setup card  1958  of  FIG. 19AC ); and the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) configures the second device (e.g.,  1906 ) to include the second configuration setting (e.g., enabling a voice assistant on the second device). 
     Displaying an indication that the device feature will be enabled on the second device (e.g., even when it is disabled on the first device) provides the user with visual feedback about the state of the second device (e.g., that the feature is required on the second device). Providing improved visual feedback to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, displaying the indication that the device feature will be enabled on the second device (e.g.,  1906 ) includes displaying an indication that the device feature will remain disabled on the first device. 
     Displaying an indication that the feature will remain disabled on the first device provides the user with visual feedback about the nature of the operation and the state of the first device (e.g., that enabling the feature on the second device will not alter the state of the first device, as to the feature). Providing improved visual feedback to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, further in accordance with the first configuration setting of the first device not being compatible with the second device (e.g.,  1906 ), the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) displays a configuration user interface (e.g.,  1960  of  FIG. 19AD ) that includes a prompt requesting selection of a third configuration setting compatible with the second device. For example, if device  1900  has a default language set to Latin (e.g., a first configuration setting), which is not a language compatible with the voice assistant feature of device  1906 , then device  1900  prompts to select a compatible language (e.g., those listed in setup card  1960 ). In response to receiving user input selection of the third configuration setting (e.g., “English (U.K.)”), the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) configures the second device (e.g.,  1906 ) to include the third configuration setting. In some embodiments, configuring the second device includes preparing a configuration setting for transfer to the second device later at a later time (e.g., during the configuration process). For example, all configuration settings may be transferred to the second device at once. 
     Displaying a configuration user interface that includes a prompt requesting selection of a third configuration setting compatible with the second device reduces the number of inputs needed to configure the second device by surfacing compatible options to the user and provides an optimized configuration process. Providing an optimized configuration process to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, prior to establishing the communication link connecting the first device and the second device (e.g.,  1906 ), the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) detects an indication that a physical proximity between the first device and the second device satisfies a proximity condition (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 19A ). In response to detecting the indication that the physical proximity between the first device and the second device satisfies the proximity condition, the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) outputs an audio tone signal (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 10I , where device  1010  is outputting an audio tone signal  1016 ). 
     Using an indication that the physical proximity between the first device and the second device satisfies the proximity condition in order to output an audio tone signal provides the user with auditory feedback regarding the state of the first device. For example, when there are other potential devices in proximity that are configurable, the audio tone signal can indicate which device will be configured. Providing improved feedback to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, subsequent to transmitting the user account information to the second device (e.g.,  1906 ), the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) displays a configuration user interface (e.g.,  1948  of  FIG. 19W ) associated with a voice assistant, wherein the configuration user interface associated with a voice assistant includes a prompt to provide user voice input invoking one or more functions of the voice assistant. In some embodiments, the one or more functions of the voice assistant include audibly outputting one or more of: media (e.g., music), weather information, news, calendar information, messages, or the like. 
     Displaying a configuration user interface associated with a voice assistant that includes a prompt to provide user voice input invoking one or more functions of the voice assistant provides the user with information regarding the capabilities and state of a device. Providing such information to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that user voice input invoking one or more of the features of the voice assistant has been received by either the first device or the second device (e.g.,  1906 ), the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) maintains display of the configuration user interface (e.g.,  1948 ) associated with the voice assistant. In response to receiving user input selection of an affordance (e.g., affordance labeled “Done” in setup card  1948 ) included in the configuration user interface associated with the voice assistant, the first device (e.g.,  1900 ) ceases display of the configuration user interface associated with the voice assistant (e.g., setup card  1948  slides off the display, as shown in  FIGS. 19X-19Y ). 
     Note that details of the processes described above with respect to method  3900  (e.g.,  FIGS. 39A-39C ) are also applicable in an analogous manner to the methods described below/above. For example, method  700 ,  900 ,  1100 ,  1300 ,  1500 ,  1700 ,  1800 ,  2000 ,  2200 ,  2400 ,  2600 ,  2800 ,  3000 ,  3200 ,  3400 ,  3600 , and  3800  optionally includes one or more of the characteristics of the various methods described above with reference to method  3900 . For brevity, these details are not repeated below. 
     The foregoing description, for purpose of explanation, has been described with reference to specific embodiments. However, the illustrative discussions above are not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the invention to the precise forms disclosed. Many modifications and variations are possible in view of the above teachings. The embodiments were chosen and described in order to best explain the principles of the techniques and their practical applications. Others skilled in the art are thereby enabled to best utilize the techniques and various embodiments with various modifications as are suited to the particular use contemplated. 
     Although the disclosure and examples have been fully described with reference to the accompanying drawings, it is to be noted that various changes and modifications will become apparent to those skilled in the art. Such changes and modifications are to be understood as being included within the scope of the disclosure and examples as defined by the claims. 
     As described above, one aspect of the present technology is the gathering and use of data available from various sources to improve the delivery to users of invitational content or any other content that may be of interest to them. The present disclosure contemplates that in some instances, this gathered data may include personal information data that uniquely identifies or can be used to contact or locate a specific person. Such personal information data can include demographic data, location-based data, telephone numbers, email addresses, home addresses, or any other identifying information. 
     The present disclosure recognizes that the use of such personal information data, in the present technology, can be used to the benefit of users. For example, the personal information data can be used to deliver targeted content that is of greater interest to the user. Accordingly, use of such personal information data enables calculated control of the delivered content. Further, other uses for personal information data that benefit the user are also contemplated by the present disclosure. 
     The present disclosure further contemplates that the entities responsible for the collection, analysis, disclosure, transfer, storage, or other use of such personal information data will comply with well-established privacy policies and/or privacy practices. In particular, such entities should implement and consistently use privacy policies and practices that are generally recognized as meeting or exceeding industry or governmental requirements for maintaining personal information data private and secure. For example, personal information from users should be collected for legitimate and reasonable uses of the entity and not shared or sold outside of those legitimate uses. Further, such collection should occur only after receiving the informed consent of the users. Additionally, such entities would take any needed steps for safeguarding and securing access to such personal information data and ensuring that others with access to the personal information data adhere to their privacy policies and procedures. Further, such entities can subject themselves to evaluation by third parties to certify their adherence to widely accepted privacy policies and practices. 
     Despite the foregoing, the present disclosure also contemplates embodiments in which users selectively block the use of, or access to, personal information data. That is, the present disclosure contemplates that hardware and/or software elements can be provided to prevent or block access to such personal information data. For example, in the case of advertisement delivery services, the present technology can be configured to allow users to select to “opt in” or “opt out” of participation in the collection of personal information data during registration for services. In another example, users can select not to provide location information for targeted content delivery services. In yet another example, users can select to not provide precise location information, but permit the transfer of location zone information. 
     Therefore, although the present disclosure broadly covers use of personal information data to implement one or more various disclosed embodiments, the present disclosure also contemplates that the various embodiments can also be implemented without the need for accessing such personal information data. That is, the various embodiments of the present technology are not rendered inoperable due to the lack of all or a portion of such personal information data. For example, content can be selected and delivered to users by inferring preferences based on non-personal information data or a bare minimum amount of personal information, such as the content being requested by the device associated with a user, other non-personal information available to the content delivery services, or publically available information.

Metadata:
Filing Date: 20200303
Publication Date: 20220322
Grant Date: 20220322
Priority Date: 20170516
Inventors: COFFMAN, PATRICK L.
GRAHAM, DAVID CHANCE
Assignee: APPLE INC
CPC Classifications: [{"code": "G06F3/04883", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/04847", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0482", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "C08F232/08", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "H04N21/4396", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "H04N21/43615", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/165", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0482", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "H04S7/303", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "C08G2261/418", "inventive": false, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "C08G61/08", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "H04N21/8106", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "H04S7/303", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0414", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "H04N21/4825", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "H04N21/4312", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "C08G2261/3324", "inventive": false, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "H04N21/4396", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "H04S7/302", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "H04M1/72442", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "H04L12/2803", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "H04N21/4394", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "H04N21/42203", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "H04N21/44218", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "H04S7/30", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/165", "inventive": true, "first": true, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "H04N21/43615", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "H04S7/30", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/165", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "H04N21/44218", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "H04M1/72442", "inventive": true, "first": true, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "H04N21/4825", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "H04S7/302", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "H04N21/4122", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F2203/04104", "inventive": false, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "H04M1/72412", "inventive": false, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "H04N21/485", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/04847", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "H04N21/41407", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "H04L12/2803", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "H04N21/4312", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0488", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "H04N21/485", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "H04N21/8106", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F2203/04104", "inventive": false, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "H04N21/41407", "inventive": true, "first": true, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "H04M1/72412", "inventive": false, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "H04N21/42203", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "H04N21/4122", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0488", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "H04N21/4394", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F2203/04104", "inventive": false, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0414", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/04847", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0488", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "H04M1/72442", "inventive": true, "first": true, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/165", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "H04M1/72412", "inventive": false, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0482", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/167", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}]
Family ID: 80159159